Megaplex-4100
Megaplex-4100
Megaplex-4100
INSTALLATION AND
Megaplex-4
Next Generation Multiservice Access Node
Version 4.7
Megaplex-4
Next Generation Multiservice Access Node
Version 4.7
Installation and Operation Manual
Notice
This manual contains information that is proprietary to RAD Data Communications Ltd. ("RAD").
No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form whatsoever without prior written
approval by RAD Data Communications.
Right, title and interest, all information, copyrights, patents, know-how, trade secrets and other
intellectual property or other proprietary rights relating to this manual and to the Megaplex-4
and any software components contained therein are proprietary products of RAD protected
under international copyright law and shall be and remain solely with RAD.
The Megaplex-4 product name is owned by RAD. The Megaplex-4 product name is owned by RAD.
No right, license, or interest to such trademark is granted hereunder, and you agree that no such
right, license, or interest shall be asserted by you with respect to such trademark. RAD
products/technologies are protected by registered patents. To review specifically which product
is covered by which patent, please see ipr.rad.com. The RAD name, logo, logotype, and the
product names MiNID, Optimux, Airmux, and IPmux, are registered trademarks of RAD Data
Communications Ltd. All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders.
You shall not copy, reverse compile or reverse assemble all or any portion of the Manual or the
Megaplex-4. You are prohibited from, and shall not, directly or indirectly, develop, market,
distribute, license, or sell any product that supports substantially similar functionality as the
Megaplex-4, based on or derived in any way from the Megaplex-4. Your undertaking in this
paragraph shall survive the termination of this Agreement.
This Agreement is effective upon your opening of the Megaplex-4 package and shall continue
until terminated. RAD may terminate this Agreement upon the breach by you of any term hereof.
Upon such termination by RAD, you agree to return to RAD the Megaplex-4 and all copies and
portions thereof.
For further information contact RAD at the address below or contact your local distributor.
Limited Warranty
RAD warrants to DISTRIBUTOR that the hardware in the Megaplex-4 to be delivered hereunder
shall be free of defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period
of twelve (12) months following the date of shipment to DISTRIBUTOR.
If, during the warranty period, any component part of the equipment becomes defective by
reason of material or workmanship, and DISTRIBUTOR immediately notifies RAD of such defect,
RAD shall have the option to choose the appropriate corrective action: a) supply a replacement
part, or b) request return of equipment to its plant for repair, or c) perform necessary repair at
the equipment's location. In the event that RAD requests the return of equipment, each party
shall pay one-way shipping costs.
RAD shall be released from all obligations under its warranty in the event that the equipment has
been subjected to misuse, neglect, accident or improper installation, or if repairs or
modifications were made by persons other than RAD's own authorized service personnel, unless
such repairs by others were made with the written consent of RAD.
The above warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, expressed or implied. There are no
warranties which extend beyond the face hereof, including, but not limited to, warranties of
merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, and in no event shall RAD be liable for
consequential damages.
RAD shall not be liable to any person for any special or indirect damages, including, but not
limited to, lost profits from any cause whatsoever arising from or in any way connected with the
manufacture, sale, handling, repair, maintenance or use of the Megaplex-4, and in no event shall
RAD's liability exceed the purchase price of the Megaplex-4.
DISTRIBUTOR shall be responsible to its customers for any and all warranties which it makes
relating to Megaplex-4 and for ensuring that replacements and other adjustments required in
connection with the said warranties are satisfactory.
Software components in the Megaplex-4 are provided "as is" and without warranty of any kind.
RAD disclaims all warranties including the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a
particular purpose. RAD shall not be liable for any loss of use, interruption of business or
indirect, special, incidental or consequential damages of any kind. In spite of the above RAD
shall do its best to provide error-free software products and shall offer free Software updates
during the warranty period under this Agreement.
RAD's cumulative liability to you or any other party for any loss or damages resulting from any
claims, demands, or actions arising out of or relating to this Agreement and the Megaplex-4 shall
not exceed the sum paid to RAD for the purchase of the Megaplex-4. In no event shall RAD be
liable for any indirect, incidental, consequential, special, or exemplary damages or lost profits,
even if RAD has been advised of the possibility of such damages.
This Agreement shall be construed and governed in accordance with the laws of the State of
Israel.
Product Disposal
To facilitate the reuse, recycling and other forms of recovery of waste
equipment in protecting the environment, the owner of this RAD product is
required to refrain from disposing of this product as unsorted municipal waste at
the end of its life cycle. Upon termination of the unit’s use, customers should
provide for its collection for reuse, recycling or other form of environmentally
conscientious disposal.
ii Megaplex-4
Installation and Operation Manual Front Matter
Safety Symbols
This symbol may appear on the equipment or in the text. It indicates
potential safety hazards regarding product operation or maintenance to
operator or service personnel.
Warning
Danger of electric shock! Avoid any contact with the marked surface while
the product is energized or connected to outdoor telecommunication lines.
Some products may be equipped with a laser diode. In such cases, a label
with the laser class and other warnings as applicable will be attached near
the optical transmitter. The laser warning symbol may be also attached.
Warning Please observe the following precautions:
• Before turning on the equipment, make sure that the fiber optic cable is
intact and is connected to the transmitter.
• Do not attempt to adjust the laser drive current.
• Do not use broken or unterminated fiber-optic cables/connectors or look
straight at the laser beam.
• The use of optical devices with the equipment will increase eye hazard.
• Use of controls, adjustments or performing procedures other than those
specified herein, may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
ATTENTION: The laser beam may be invisible!
In some cases, the users may insert their own SFP laser transceivers into the product. Users are
alerted that RAD cannot be held responsible for any damage that may result if non-compliant
transceivers are used. In particular, users are warned to use only agency approved products that
comply with the local laser safety regulations for Class 1 laser products.
Always observe standard safety precautions during installation, operation and maintenance of
this product. Only qualified and authorized service personnel should carry out adjustment,
maintenance or repairs to this product. No installation, adjustment, maintenance or repairs
should be performed by either the operator or the user.
Megaplex-4 iii
Front Matter Installation and Operation Manual
Connecting AC Mains
Make sure that the electrical installation complies with local codes.
Always connect the AC plug to a wall socket with a protective ground.
The maximum permissible current capability of the branch distribution circuit that supplies power
to the product is 16A (20A for USA and Canada). The circuit breaker in the building installation
should have high breaking capacity and must operate at short-circuit current exceeding 35A (40A
for USA and Canada).
Always connect the power cord first to the equipment and then to the wall socket. If a power
switch is provided in the equipment, set it to the OFF position. If the power cord cannot be
readily disconnected in case of emergency, make sure that a readily accessible circuit breaker or
emergency switch is installed in the building installation.
In cases when the power distribution system is IT type, the switch must disconnect both poles
simultaneously.
Connecting DC Power
Unless otherwise specified in the manual, the DC input to the equipment is floating in reference
to the ground. Any single pole can be externally grounded.
Due to the high current capability of DC power systems, care should be taken when connecting
the DC supply to avoid short-circuits and fire hazards.
Make sure that the DC power supply is electrically isolated from any AC source and that the
installation complies with the local codes.
iv Megaplex-4
Installation and Operation Manual Front Matter
The maximum permissible current capability of the branch distribution circuit that supplies power
to the product is 16A (20A for USA and Canada). The circuit breaker in the building installation
should have high breaking capacity and must operate at short-circuit current exceeding 35A (40A
for USA and Canada).
Before connecting the DC supply wires, ensure that power is removed from the DC circuit. Locate
the circuit breaker of the panel board that services the equipment and switch it to the OFF
position. When connecting the DC supply wires, first connect the ground wire to the
corresponding terminal, then the positive pole and last the negative pole. Switch the circuit
breaker back to the ON position.
A readily accessible disconnect device that is suitably rated and approved should be incorporated
in the building installation.
If the DC power supply is floating, the switch must disconnect both poles simultaneously.
Always connect a given port to a port of the same safety status. If in doubt, seek the assistance
of a qualified safety engineer.
Always make sure that the equipment is grounded before connecting telecommunication cables.
Do not disconnect the ground connection before disconnecting all telecommunications cables.
Some SELV and non-SELV circuits use the same connectors. Use caution when connecting cables.
Extra caution should be exercised during thunderstorms.
Megaplex-4 v
Front Matter Installation and Operation Manual
When using shielded or coaxial cables, verify that there is a good ground connection at both
ends. The grounding and bonding of the ground connections should comply with the local codes.
The telecommunication wiring in the building may be damaged or present a fire hazard in case of
contact between exposed external wires and the AC power lines. In order to reduce the risk,
there are restrictions on the diameter of wires in the telecom cables, between the equipment
and the mating connectors.
Caution To reduce the risk of fire, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication
line cords.
Attention Pour réduire les risques s’incendie, utiliser seulement des conducteurs de
télécommunications 26 AWG ou de section supérieure.
Some ports are suitable for connection to intra-building or non-exposed wiring or cabling only. In
such cases, a notice will be given in the installation instructions.
Do not attempt to tamper with any carrier-provided equipment or connection hardware.
vi Megaplex-4
Installation and Operation Manual Front Matter
Megaplex-4 vii
Front Matter Installation and Operation Manual
Symboles de sécurité
Ce symbole peut apparaitre sur l'équipement ou dans le texte. Il indique des
risques potentiels de sécurité pour l'opérateur ou le personnel de service,
quant à l'opération du produit ou à sa maintenance.
Avertissement
viii Megaplex-4
Installation and Operation Manual Front Matter
Certains produits peuvent être équipés d'une diode laser. Dans de tels cas,
Français
une étiquette indiquant la classe laser ainsi que d'autres avertissements, le
cas échéant, sera jointe près du transmetteur optique. Le symbole
d'avertissement laser peut aussi être joint.
Avertissement
Veuillez observer les précautions suivantes :
• Avant la mise en marche de l'équipement, assurez-vous que le câble de
fibre optique est intact et qu'il est connecté au transmetteur.
• Ne tentez pas d'ajuster le courant de la commande laser.
• N'utilisez pas des câbles ou connecteurs de fibre optique cassés ou sans
terminaison et n'observez pas directement un rayon laser.
• L'usage de périphériques optiques avec l'équipement augmentera le
risque pour les yeux.
• L'usage de contrôles, ajustages ou procédures autres que celles
spécifiées ici pourrait résulter en une dangereuse exposition aux
radiations.
ATTENTION : Le rayon laser peut être invisible !
Les utilisateurs pourront, dans certains cas, insérer leurs propres émetteurs-récepteurs Laser SFP
dans le produit. Les utilisateurs sont avertis que RAD ne pourra pas être tenue responsable de
tout dommage pouvant résulter de l'utilisation d'émetteurs-récepteurs non conformes. Plus
particulièrement, les utilisateurs sont avertis de n'utiliser que des produits approuvés par
l'agence et conformes à la réglementation locale de sécurité laser pour les produits laser de
classe 1.
Respectez toujours les précautions standards de sécurité durant l'installation, l'opération et la
maintenance de ce produit. Seul le personnel de service qualifié et autorisé devrait effectuer
l'ajustage, la maintenance ou les réparations de ce produit. Aucune opération d'installation,
d'ajustage, de maintenance ou de réparation ne devrait être effectuée par l'opérateur ou
l'utilisateur.
Megaplex-4 ix
Front Matter Installation and Operation Manual
Connexion d'alimentation CC
Sauf s'il en est autrement spécifié dans le manuel, l'entrée CC de l'équipement est flottante par
rapport à la mise à la terre. Tout pôle doit être mis à la terre en externe.
A cause de la capacité de courant des systèmes à alimentation CC, des précautions devraient
être prises lors de la connexion de l'alimentation CC pour éviter des courts-circuits et des risques
d'incendie.
Assurez-vous que l'alimentation CC est isolée de toute source de courant CA (secteur) et que
l'installation est conforme à la réglementation locale.
La capacité maximale permissible en courant du circuit de distribution de la connexion alimentant
le produit est de 16A (20A aux Etats-Unis et Canada). Le coupe-circuit dans l'installation du
bâtiment devrait avoir une capacité élevée de rupture et devrait fonctionner sur courant de
court-circuit dépassant 35A (40A aux Etats-Unis et Canada).
Avant la connexion des câbles d'alimentation en courant CC, assurez-vous que le circuit CC n'est
pas sous tension. Localisez le coupe-circuit dans le tableau desservant l'équipement et fixez-le
en position OFF. Lors de la connexion de câbles d'alimentation CC, connectez d'abord le
conducteur de mise à la terre à la borne correspondante, puis le pôle positif et en dernier, le
pôle négatif. Remettez le coupe-circuit en position ON.
Un disjoncteur facilement accessible, adapté et approuvé devrait être intégré à l'installation du
bâtiment.
Le disjoncteur devrait déconnecter simultanément les deux pôles si l'alimentation en courant CC
est flottante.
x Megaplex-4
Installation and Operation Manual Front Matter
Declarations of Conformity
Declaration of Conformity
Manufacturer's Name: RAD Data Communications Ltd.
Supplementary Information: The product herewith complies with the requirements of the EMC
Directive 2004/108/EC, the Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC, the
R&TTE Directive 99/5/EC for wired equipment and the ROHS
Directive 2011/65/EU.
The product was tested in a typical configuration.
Tel Aviv, 1 January 2013
Nathaniel Shomroni
Homologation Team Leader
Megaplex-4 xi
Front Matter Installation and Operation Manual
Declaration of Conformity
Manufacturer's Name: RAD Data Communications Ltd.
Supplementary Information: The product herewith complies with the requirements of the EMC
Directive 2004/108/EC, the Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC, the
R&TTE Directive 99/5/EC for wired equipment and the ROHS
Directive 2011/65/EU.
The product was tested in a typical configuration.
Tel Aviv, 6 March 2013
Nathaniel Shomroni
Homologation Team Leader
xii Megaplex-4
Installation and Operation Manual Front Matter
Declaration of Conformity
Manufacturer's Name: RAD Data Communications Ltd.
Supplementary Information: The product herewith complies with the requirements of the EMC
Directive 2004/108/EC, the Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC, the
R&TTE Directive 99/5/EC for wired equipment and the ROHS
Directive 2011/65/EU.
The product was tested in a typical configuration.
Valid only when operating in conjunction with RAD Megaplex®
systems.
Tel Aviv, 6 March 2013
Nathaniel Shomroni
Homologation Team Leader
Megaplex-4 xiii
Front Matter Installation and Operation Manual
xiv Megaplex-4
Quick Start Guide
This section describes the minimum configuration needed to prepare
Megaplex-4 for operation.
Connecting to a Terminal
To connect to an ASCII terminal:
1. Connect one side of the cable supplied by RAD (CBL-DB9F-DB9M-STR for
Megaplex-4100, CBL-MUSB-DB9F for Megaplex-4104) to the Megaplex
connector, designated CONTROL DCE.
2. Connect the other side of the cable to the ASCII terminal equipment.
Note The Megaplex-4 PS modules do not include a power switch. Use an external
power ON/OFF switch, for example, the circuit breaker used to protect the power
lines.
5. Wait for the completion of the power-up initialization process. During this
interval, monitor the power-up indications:
After a few seconds, Megaplex-4 starts decompressing its software.
After software decompression is completed, all the indicators turn off for
a few seconds (except for the POWER indicators) as Megaplex-4 performs
its power-up initialization.
You can monitor the decompression and initialization process on the terminal
connected to the Megaplex-4.
6. When the startup process is completed, you are prompted to press <Enter>
to receive the login prompt.
7. Press <Enter> until you receive the login prompt.
8. If the Megaplex-4 default user name and password have not yet been
changed, log in as administrator using su as the user name (su for full
configuration and monitoring access) and 1234 for password.
9. The device prompt appears:
mp4100#
You can now type the necessary CLI commands.
Saving Configuration
Type save in any level to save your configuration in startup-config.
4. Verifying Connectivity
At the ASCII terminal, ping the IP address assigned to Megaplex-4 and verify that
replies are received. If there is no reply to the ping, check your configuration and
make the necessary corrections.
Megaplex-4 i
Table of Contents Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2. Installation
2.1 Site Requirements and Prerequisites .................................................................................... 2-1
Safety Precautions ............................................................................................................. 2-1
Grounding .......................................................................................................................... 2-2
Laser Safety ....................................................................................................................... 2-3
Protection against ESD ...................................................................................................... 2-3
AC Power Requirements ..................................................................................................... 2-4
DC Power Requirements .................................................................................................... 2-4
Front and Rear Panel Clearance ......................................................................................... 2-5
Ambient Requirements ...................................................................................................... 2-5
Megaplex-4100 ............................................................................................................. 2-5
Megaplex-4104 ............................................................................................................. 2-5
Electromagnetic Compatibility Considerations .................................................................... 2-6
Optical Cable Requirements ............................................................................................... 2-7
2.2 Package Contents................................................................................................................. 2-7
Megaplex-4100 Package Contents ..................................................................................... 2-7
Megaplex-4104 Package Contents ..................................................................................... 2-8
2.3 Required Equipment ............................................................................................................. 2-8
2.4 Mounting the Products ......................................................................................................... 2-8
Installing the Megaplex-4100 Chassis................................................................................. 2-9
Installing in a 19” Rack .................................................................................................. 2-9
Installing in 23” Rack................................................................................................... 2-10
Installing the Megaplex-4104 Chassis............................................................................... 2-10
2.5 Installing Modules .............................................................................................................. 2-11
Installing PS Modules ....................................................................................................... 2-11
Megaplex-4100 Module Panels .................................................................................... 2-11
Megaplex-4104 Module Panels .................................................................................... 2-12
Megaplex-4100 Internal Jumpers ................................................................................. 2-13
Megaplex-4104 Internal Jumpers ................................................................................. 2-14
Installing a PS Module ................................................................................................. 2-16
Removing a PS Module ................................................................................................ 2-16
Installing CL Modules........................................................................................................ 2-16
ii Megaplex-4
Installation and Operation Manual Table of Contents
Chapter 3. Operation
3.1 Turning On the Unit ............................................................................................................. 3-1
3.2 Indicators ............................................................................................................................. 3-2
CL.2 Front Panel Indicators ................................................................................................ 3-2
Front Panel Indicators ........................................................................................................ 3-5
3.3 Startup ................................................................................................................................. 3-6
Configuration Files ............................................................................................................. 3-6
Loading Sequence .............................................................................................................. 3-7
3.4 Saving Configuration Changes .............................................................................................. 3-7
3.5 Using a Custom Configuration File ........................................................................................ 3-8
3.6 Turning Off the Unit ............................................................................................................. 3-8
Megaplex-4 iii
Table of Contents Installation and Operation Manual
iv Megaplex-4
Installation and Operation Manual Table of Contents
Megaplex-4 v
Table of Contents Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 5. Services
5.1 Service Elements .................................................................................................................. 5-1
Profiles .............................................................................................................................. 5-1
Scheduling and Shaping Entities......................................................................................... 5-2
Physical Ports .................................................................................................................... 5-2
Logical Ports ...................................................................................................................... 5-3
Forwarding Entities ............................................................................................................ 5-4
Flows ............................................................................................................................ 5-4
Bridge ........................................................................................................................... 5-5
Router........................................................................................................................... 5-5
5.2 Services Provided by Megaplex-4 .......................................................................................... 5-5
5.3 E1/T1 Traffic to SDH/SONET via Direct Transparent Mapping (1a) ...................................... 5-15
5.4 E1/T1 Traffic to SDH/SONET via DS0 Cross-Connect (1b) ................................................... 5-17
5.5 E1 Traffic to SDH over Fiber via Direct Transparent Mapping (2a) ...................................... 5-19
5.6 Fast Ethernet Traffic to PSN over Fiber (2b) ....................................................................... 5-21
5.7 Fast Ethernet Traffic to SDH/SONET (3) ............................................................................. 5-22
5.8 Shared E-LAN Service with Multiple Drops per Node over SDH/SONET ................................ 5-24
5.9 E1 to SDH Traffic over Copper via DS0 Mapping (3a) .......................................................... 5-27
5.10 Fast Ethernet Traffic to PSN over Copper (3b).................................................................... 5-29
5.11 High-Speed Traffic to SDH/SONET (4) ................................................................................ 5-30
5.12 High-Speed Traffic to PSN (4a, 4b) .................................................................................... 5-32
5.13 Low-Latency High-Speed Traffic to PSN (4c, 4d) ................................................................ 5-35
5.14 High-Speed Service Aggregation into PSN Backbone with G.8032 Protection ..................... 5-38
5.15 Fast Ethernet Traffic to E1/T1 (HDLC Protocol) (5a) ........................................................... 5-42
5.16 Fast Ethernet Traffic to Multiple E1 (MLPPP Protocol) (5b) ................................................. 5-44
5.17 Voice Traffic to SDH/SONET (6) .......................................................................................... 5-46
5.18 Voice Traffic to PSN (6a) .................................................................................................... 5-48
5.19 Teleprotection Traffic to SDH/SONET (7) ............................................................................ 5-51
5.20 T3 Traffic to SONET (8) ...................................................................................................... 5-53
5.21 Voice to T3 via DS0 Cross-Connect (9) ............................................................................... 5-55
5.22 Ethernet Traffic over PDH to SDH/SONET (10a) .................................................................. 5-56
5.23 Ethernet Traffic over PDH to E1/T1 (10b) ........................................................................... 5-58
vi Megaplex-4
Installation and Operation Manual Table of Contents
Megaplex-4 vii
Table of Contents Installation and Operation Manual
viii Megaplex-4
Installation and Operation Manual Table of Contents
Megaplex-4 ix
Table of Contents Installation and Operation Manual
x Megaplex-4
Installation and Operation Manual Table of Contents
Chapter 7. Resiliency
7.1 Fault Propagation ................................................................................................................. 7-2
Functional Description ....................................................................................................... 7-2
Factory Defaults ................................................................................................................ 7-5
Configuring Fault Propagation ............................................................................................ 7-5
Configuration Errors ........................................................................................................... 7-6
7.2 APS Protection ..................................................................................................................... 7-7
Standards .......................................................................................................................... 7-7
Benefits ............................................................................................................................. 7-7
Megaplex-4 xi
Table of Contents Installation and Operation Manual
xii Megaplex-4
Installation and Operation Manual Table of Contents
Megaplex-4 xiii
Table of Contents Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 8. Networking
8.1 Bridge .................................................................................................................................. 8-1
Standards .......................................................................................................................... 8-1
Benefits ............................................................................................................................. 8-1
Factory Defaults ................................................................................................................ 8-1
Functional Description ....................................................................................................... 8-1
Bridge Model ................................................................................................................. 8-2
Deleting Bridge Elements .............................................................................................. 8-2
Using the Bridge for Management ................................................................................. 8-2
Admission to Bridge ...................................................................................................... 8-3
Packet Editing on Reverse Flows ................................................................................... 8-3
Spanning Tree Protocol ................................................................................................. 8-5
Configuring the Bridge ....................................................................................................... 8-6
Configuring for Traffic ................................................................................................... 8-6
Configuring for Management ......................................................................................... 8-6
Configuring the Bridge .................................................................................................. 8-6
Example 1. Layer-2 Management Access ..................................................................... 8-10
Example 2. Layer-2 VLAN-aware Bridging between CL and M-ETH Ports ...................... 8-12
Example 3. Cascading Bridges on Different M-ETH Modules via CL Bridge .................... 8-14
Example 4. RSTP Basic Application ............................................................................... 8-18
Displaying MAC Address Table ..................................................................................... 8-23
Configuration Errors ......................................................................................................... 8-25
8.2 Cross-Connections ............................................................................................................. 8-26
Factory Defaults .............................................................................................................. 8-27
Benefits ........................................................................................................................... 8-28
Functional Description ..................................................................................................... 8-28
Timeslot Types ............................................................................................................ 8-28
Full Timeslot versus Split Timeslot Assignment (Split Timeslot Cross-Connect) ............ 8-28
Bidirectional Transfer Mode ........................................................................................ 8-29
Unidirectional Broadcast Function ............................................................................... 8-29
Bidirectional Broadcast Applications ............................................................................ 8-30
DS0 Cross-Connect .......................................................................................................... 8-34
Configuring a DS0 Cross-Connection ........................................................................... 8-34
Example 1. Bidirectional DS0 Cross-Connect: CL <-> I/O Modules, Single Timeslot ....... 8-37
Example 2. Consecutive Timeslot Assignment: E1/T1/E1-i/T1-i Port <-> Serial Module Port
................................................................................................................................... 8-37
Example 3. Consecutive Timeslot Assignment: Two E1/T1/E1-i/T1-i I/0 Module Ports .. 8-37
Example 4. Unidirectional Broadcast: M8E1 Port is Sending Data to three M8E1
ports using UniRx ........................................................................................................ 8-37
Example 5. Unidirectional Broadcast: Voice Port is Sending Data to M8E1 Port using UniTx
................................................................................................................................... 8-38
Example 6. Unidirectional Broadcast: Serial Port is Sending Data to M8E1 Port using UniTx
................................................................................................................................... 8-38
Examples 7a and 7b. Bidirectional Voice-Grade Data Broadcast 1:n ............................ 8-38
Example 8. Bidirectional Broadcast: Serial Port is Sending Data to Remote RTUs over
Various E1 Ports .......................................................................................................... 8-40
Example 9. Bidirectional Broadcast with Monitoring over E1 ........................................ 8-40
TDM Cross-Connect.......................................................................................................... 8-41
Configuring a TDM Cross-Connection .......................................................................... 8-41
Example 1 ................................................................................................................... 8-42
Example 2 ................................................................................................................... 8-42
Split Timeslot Cross-Connect............................................................................................ 8-43
Configuring a Cross-Connection .................................................................................. 8-43
Example ...................................................................................................................... 8-44
xiv Megaplex-4
Installation and Operation Manual Table of Contents
Megaplex-4 xv
Table of Contents Installation and Operation Manual
xvi Megaplex-4
Installation and Operation Manual Table of Contents
Megaplex-4 xvii
Table of Contents Installation and Operation Manual
xviii Megaplex-4
Installation and Operation Manual Table of Contents
Megaplex-4 xix
Table of Contents Installation and Operation Manual
xx Megaplex-4
Chapter 1
Introduction
1.1 Overview
RAD’s Megaplex-4 multiservice next generation access nodes are high-capacity,
carrier-class multiservice concentrators, which transport traffic over fiber or
copper and provide multiple Legacy and next-generation services on
PDH/SDH/SONET or packet-switched networks (PSN). The Megaplex-4 family
includes two devices: a powerful 10-slot Megaplex-4100 and a compact 4-slot
Megaplex-4104.
Megaplex-4 is an ideal solution for carriers and private network operators in
migrating their networks and services to next-generation communications.
Featuring dual star connection architecture with hybrid TDM-Ethernet modules
allows native TDM and native Ethernet traffic handling with minimal encapsulation
delays and zero bandwidth overhead. In networks with SDH/SONET backbone,
Ethernet can be carried over VCG. In addition, it is equipped with a full standards-
based pseudowire emulation suite, ensuring TDM service quality is maintained
when migrating the services from TDM network to packet switched network.
Carrier class service reliability is ensured with system redundancy options, link
and path protection schemes and enhanced support for diverse ring topologies.
Handling a broad range of SDH/SONET, E1/T1, Ethernet, data and voice services,
various network topologies and versatile access media in a single compact
managed node, makes Megaplex-4 a versatile and cost-effective next-generation
multiservice access node solution for large enterprises, including utilities,
transportation and campuses, as well as for carriers and service providers.
Product Options
Chassis
Megaplex-4 systems are available in two chassis sizes:
• Megaplex-4100 – 4U-high chassis can accommodate up to 10 I/O modules.
• Megaplex-4104 – compact 2U-high chassis can accommodate up to 4 I/O
modules. It is a cost-effective alternative for power utility substations, service
providers, and small POP or branch office applications or for sites with limited
space. There is also a special Megaplex-4104 chassis ordering option
complying with IEEE-1613 environmental requirements (for
teleprotection/communications devices in the power utilities substations as
well as other markets, see Chapter 2 for details).
CL Modules
The CL.2 modules are provided in several flavors, to cater for specific needs of
each customer. Table 1-1 lists the functionalities supported by each CL.2 option.
A short description of CL.2/A and CL.2/DS0 options is given in this section below.
SDH/SONET + - + -
DS0 Cross-Connect + + + +
E-Tree + + - -
Traffic Management
+ + - -
(Scheduling/Shaping)
Ethernet Protection
ERPS + + - -
LAG + LACP + + - -
LAG + + + -
HSR + + - -
RSTP + + - -
Security
802.1x + + - -
Ethernet OAM + + - -
Ethernet PM + + - -
Timing
SyncE + + -
Diagnostics
Ethernet BERT + + + -
TDM BERT + + + +
SDH/SONET Interface
Two SDH/SONET ports located on the CL.2 modules can be ordered in two
versions:
• STM-1/OC-3 only, with software key license upgrade to STM-4/OC-12 if
required
• Software-configurable to STM-4/OC-12 or STM-1/OC-3, with software key
license built-in.
The panels and terminal identification for the STM-1/OC-3 and STM-4/OC-12
versions are identical.
GbE Interface
The GbE ports can be ordered with one of the following interfaces:
• 10/100/1000BASE-T (UTP) copper ports. This type of ports support auto-
negotiation, with user-specified advertised data rate (10, 100 or 1000 Mbps)
and operating mode (half- or full-duplex).
• SFP sockets, for installing SFP plug-in modules.
DS0 Cross-Connect
A basic low-cost version of CL.2 modules is supplied without SDH/SONET and GbE
ports.
The Megaplex-4100 chassis can be ordered with special CL.2 options complying
with IEEE-1613 to support “No Fans operation” requirement.
PS Modules
PS modules for Megaplex-4100 and Megaplex-4104 have different shape and
technical characteristics (see Table 1-10). AC or DC power supplies are available
for both chassis. The DC modules can be ordered with selectable ground
reference or floating ground.
Megaplex-4 can be ordered with one power supply module, or with two power
supply modules, for redundancy.
The Megaplex-4100 chassis also has a selection of PS options complying with
IEEE-1613 to support “No Fans operation” requirement.
Applications
Wireless
FE
Airmux
Video
Airmux
E3 Chanellized
FE
Router FCD-IP
STM-1
DXC-8R FCD-E1E
n x E1 ETH E1
FE/GbE
PSN RICi-8 DXC-4
POP FE E1
IPmux
SHDSL ETH
E1/V.35
SHDSL.bis
ASMi
ETH
Megaplex-4 FO
STM-4/ n x E1
OC-12 Optimux
SDH/SONET
STM-1/
SHDSL ETH
OC-3
SHDSL.bis E1/V.35
ASMi-53
T3 FE ETH
RV Station ETX
ETH
STM-1/OC-3
E1/T1
FCD-155E
Voice
E1/T1 Data
ETH
MP-2100/2104
T3
Radio
Megaplex-4104
Radio
Figure 1-1. Megaplex-4 as a Central Site Aggregator for different RAD CPEs,
Ethernet and TDM Aggregator for SDH/SONET and PSN
Control Center
GbE
PSN
Megaplex-4100 SDH/SONET/ETH
FO
Airmux-400
E1/T1
Airmux-400
TAC TAC
Megaplex-2100 PBX PBX
LAN LAN
ASMi Optimux
SCADA
LAN LAN
Figure 1-2. Megaplex-4 as Multiservice Platform for Transportation and Power Utilities
E1
Remote Sites
SHDSL.bis
PBX
E1 POP ASMi-54
FE
FO Megaplex-4100
PBX
LAN
Optimux-108 GbE
FE ERP
E1
Video
FO
PBX
E1 Optimux-108
FE
SHDSL.bis
PBX Central Office
VoIP
ASMi-54
FE
Megaplex-4100
E1
Video
PBX
E1
FO ASMi-54
SHDSL.bis FE
PBX
NMS LAN
Optimux-108
FE
POP
LAN E1
STM-1/
OC-3 FO
SDH/SONET PBX
FXS Optimux-108
Megaplex-4104 FE
E1
Video
X.21 FCD-E1L
FXS
E1/T1
Megaplex-2104 V.35
Figure 1-3. Migrating TDM and Ethernet Services from SDH/SONET to PSN
Features
PDH Access
Megaplex-4 delivers PDH Access at E1/T1 and fractional E1/T1 level with up to
160 E1/T1 ports per chassis over copper or fiber, including access over
2-wire/4-wire/8-wire SHDSL, with up to 80 SHDSL ports per chassis.
Data Services
Megaplex-4 provides up to 120 multichannel sub-DS0 low speed data, 64-kbps
codirectional G.703 channels, teleprotection channels, multichannel ISDN access
(up to 120 ISDN “U” and/or “S” type ports per chassis), and n×64 kbps high
speed data (up to 2.048 Mbps for E1 environments, or up to 1.544 Mbps for T1
environments).
Voice Services
Voice services are provided by analog and digital voice modules (up to 4800 voice
channels per chassis for E1 ports, up to 3840 voice channels for T1 ports), with
support for special services such as omnibus and party lines. Voice channel
processing can include user-defined signaling translations.
SDH/SONET Services
SDH/SONET services are provided by up to 4 separately configurable STM-1/STM-
4 or OC-3/OC-12 links per node, with support for APS (Automatic Protection
Switching) for line redundancy.
Forwarding Schemes
Traffic forwarding is performed using point-to-point (E-Line) or bridge (E-LAN,
E-TREE) mechanisms.
Service Types
Megaplex-4 provides port- and flow-based services.
Port-Based Service
In a typical port-based (all-to-one bundling) application Megaplex-4 receives
different services via different user ports (Figure 1-8). This method achieves
clearer service separation, it does not require any customer marking for CoS.
Customer Premises
Service Provider Node GbE
VoIP
Flow-Based Service
In a typical flow-based application different services are assigned to different
Ethernet flows received by the same user port (Figure 1-9). This provides a
cheaper, more scalable solution, with a possibility of mixing different service
types.
Flow Classification
The ingress user traffic is mapped to the Ethernet flows using the following list of
per-port classification criteria. In the classifications, VLAN refers to the service
provider (outer) VLAN, previously referred to as SP-VLAN, while inner VLAN refers
to the Customer Entity VLAN, previously referred to as CE-VLAN.
• Port-based (All to one bundling)
• VLAN
• VLAN + VLAN priority
• VLAN + IP precedence
• VLAN + DSCP
• VLAN + inner VLAN
• VLAN + VLAN priority + inner VLAN
• VLAN + Ethertype
• VLAN priority
• IP precedence
• DSCP
• Ether Type
• Untagged
Megaplex-4 supports up to 512 Ethernet flows. Flows between external Ethernet
ports and the CL.2/A bridge are bidirectional. All other flows are unidirectional.
L2CP Handling
Megaplex-4 can be configured to pass through (“tunnel”) Layer-2 control frames
(including other vendors’ L2CP frames) across the network, to peer supported
protocols, or to discard L2CP frames.
Fault Propagation
The user can configure fault propagation between any two ports in Megaplex-4,
as shown in the figure below.The fault propagation behavior is according to the
port type (refer to Chapter 7 for details).
Megaplex-4
Packet Switched
Network
(Ethernet, IP or MPLS)
CPE
Network Termination
Unit
Traffic Policing
A policer is per flow. The policers meter, mark and rate-limit the traffic according
to the dual token bucket mechanism (CIR+CBS, EIR+EBS). A special mechanism
compensates for Layer 1 headers. Traffic can be limited to the line rate or the
data rate.
In addition, Megaplex-4 features unique p-bit re-marking capabilities that assign
color-specific p-bit values to Ethernet frames at network ingress to ensure
metering continuity across the Metro Ethernet network. User traffic that was
marked “yellow” according to the CIR/EIR parameters by the device QoS engine is
assigned a new p-bit value to signal its status and priority, so that it is dropped
first by 802.1Q and 802.1ad (a.k.a IEEE 802.1QinQ ) network elements in the
event of congestion. This is especially useful in color-blind as well as color-aware
networks with no “discard eligible” (“yellow”) marking.
Queue Group
Level 0 Level 1
1
Flow1 2
Queue 3
Block 0
4
UNI Flow2 1
2
2 3
Queue
Block 1 3
4
Flow3
1
Level 0 contains up to 8 queue blocks per CL.2/A GbE port. Each block has up to
eight queues and its own scheduling (Strict and WFQ). For each queue block in
level 0, there is a queue in level 1 that represents the scheduling between the
queue blocks in level 0. Flows can be bound to each queue block in level 0.
Queue Group
Level 0
Flow1
UNI Flow2 2
Flow3
Queue Mapping
For the network ports (CL.2/A GbE), Megaplex-4 supports up to 8 queue blocks
per queue group. Towards the user ports, a single queue block with up to eight
queues is supported. Flows that are in the direction user port to network port
can be bound to one of up to 8 queue blocks, and flows that are in the direction
network port to user port can be bound to one of eight queues.
The queue mapping functionality associates the user priorities with queue
numbers (CoS).
The queue mapping functionality is bound to each flow.
• EFM OAM (Link OAM) according to IEEE 802.3-2005 (formerly IEEE 802.3ah)
for remote management and fault indication, including discovery, link
monitoring, remote fault detection (dying gasp) and remote loopback.
Megaplex-4 offers advanced Ethernet service assurance tools, including user-
defined KPI (key performance indicators) threshold configuration for delay
(latency), delay variation (jitter), packet loss and availability. Other tools include
real-time SLA violation alerts and per-flow statistics reporting.
Fiber Multiplexing
Megaplex-4 also features multiport fiber multiplexing modules, for transporting 4
or 16 E1 streams, together with Ethernet traffic of up to 100 Mbps, over
proprietary fiber optic links to compatible standalone units offered by RAD for
use at customers’ premises.
DS0 Cross-Connect
Megaplex-4 features an internal DS0 cross connect matrix of up to 8384/6080
channels. Traffic from any channel can be cross-connected directly to any other
channel.
These capabilities enable Megaplex-4 to function as a service differentiation point
at the headquarters, handing off traditional voice and data services to the
transport network.
Protection
The modular, distributed architecture of Megaplex-4 enables redundancy at
different levels of the network and provides a resilient system with no single
point of failure. Hardware redundancy is provided through an optional redundant
power supply and CL modules, with switchover to the backup CL links within
50 msec.
Each combined common logic, cross-connect matrix and broadband link module
(CL) provide automatic switchover between each two STM-1/STM-4/OC-3/OC-12
links within 50 msec, for 1+1 protection against hardware, network or cable
failure. The SDH/SONET employs APS 1+1 protection against link or hardware
failure as well as subnetwork connection protection according to ITU-T Rec G.841
(SNCP for SDH and UPSR for SONET) for path protection and ring topology. This
provides end-to-end service protection.
The CL Ethernet GbE ports employ LAG protection against link or hardware failure.
With the CL.2/A capabilities, Megaplex-4 supports Ethernet Ring Protection
Switching (ERPS) per ITU-T G.8032v1.
Selected I/O modules can also be configured for redundancy and can be
hot-swapped, allowing for continuous service.
For more detailed information about different redundancy types, refer to the
following:
• CL redundancy –Common Logic (CL.2) Modules in this chapter
• PS redundancy – Power Supply (PS) Modules in this chapter
• APS – Automatic Protection Switching section in Chapter 7
• Path protection – Path Protection for SDH/SONET Payload section in
Chapter 7
• I/O module redundancy – TDM Ring Protection, and TDM Group Protection
and I/O Group Protection sections in Chapter 7
• Ethernet protection – Configuring the LAG section in Chapter 7
• Ethernet group (Logical MAC-based) protection – Ethernet Group Protection
section in Chapter 7
• Hitless Switching Redundancy in Ring topology –HSR Protection section in
Chapter 7
• Ethernet Ring Protection - Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) section in
Chapter 7.
Diversity of Rings
In addition to supporting standard SDH/SONET and Ethernet rings, Megaplex-4
can be used to create E1, T1, TDM over SHDSL, TDM over fiber, or a mix of ring
topologies. For more detailed information, refer to TDM Ring Protection section
in Chapter 7.
Megaplex-4 provides a perfect solution in combining low-rate service provisioning
and ring protection.
Next-Generation ADM/Terminal
STM-1/STM-4/OC-3/OC-12 network owners can extend the use of existing ADM
equipment or terminal multiplexers, saving replacement or expansion costs, by
implementing VCAT protocols to carry the Ethernet traffic in a more efficient way
and minimize wasted bandwidth.
Megaplex-4 performs STM-1/STM-4/OC-3/OC-12 add/drop multiplexing for
grooming LAN and TDM traffic over SDH/SONET networks. Ethernet traffic can be
mapped into n x VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 or n x VT1.5/STS-1/STS-3C virtual containers.
Megaplex-4 brings Ethernet economics and packet-switching efficiency to existing
SDH/ SONET/TDM infrastructures. It thereby enables utilities and other private
fiber network owners to reduce both Opex and Capex as they use their optical
bandwidth for reselling revenue generating Ethernet services. New business
opportunities can be created by leveraging existing equipment to support clear
channel data streams and the latest high bandwidth services.
Megaplex-4 eliminates the need for two separate units (ADM and multiplexer) for
private networks where voice, Ethernet and data services are required.
Timing
Flexible timing options enable reliable distribution of timing together with flexible
selection of timing sources, including external station clock for daisy-chaining the
clock signals to other equipment. Megaplex-4 also provides traceable timing
quality and supports automatic selection of best-quality timing reference.
Megaplex-4 timing is fully redundant, i.e., each CL module has its own timing
subsystem, and can supply all the clock signals required by the system via the
chassis timing bus. However, at each time, only one CL module (the active
module) actually drives the timing bus, while the other (standby) module is
disconnected from the bus, but continuously monitors the state of the main
Management
Megaplex-4 offers carrier-class service provisioning features, including end-to-end
path management, to ensure continuous service availability. Advanced SNMP
management capabilities provide control and monitoring of all network elements:
SDH/SONET access and ring units as well as remote POP and Last Mile broadband
access feeders and CPEs.
Complete control over the Megaplex-4 functions can be attained via the following
applications:
• CLI-driven terminal utility for management via a local ASCII-based terminal
connection (see Working with Terminal and Terminal Control Port in Chapter
4). Telnet access is supported via IP-based connection.
• RADview – RAD’s SNMP-based element management system, providing a
dedicated PC/Unix-based GUI for controlling and monitoring the unit from a
network management station. It also includes northbound CORBA interface
for integration into any third-party NMS (network management system). For
more information, refer to the RADview User's Manual.
• Shelf View – RAD’s SNMP-based standalone application with fully FCAPS-
compliant element management. It displays a dynamic graphic representation
of the device panel(s), providing an intuitive, user-friendly GUI.
Syslog
The syslog protocol is a client/server-type protocol, featuring a standard for
forwarding log messages in an IP network and supports up to four syslog servers
at present. A syslog sender sends a small text message of less than 1024 bytes
to the syslog receiver. Syslog messages are sent via UDP in cleartext. The Syslog
server acts as a centralized repository for all elements in the network, providing
for a unified logging infrastructure, easier troubleshooting and forensics, lower
operational risks and costs and higher availability and SLA through faster
response time.
Diagnostics
When a problem occurs, Megaplex-4 offers a set of diagnostic functions that
efficiently locate the problem (in the Megaplex-4 chassis, one of I/O modules, a
connecting cable, or external equipment) and rapidly restore full service.
The diagnostic functions are based on the activation of loopbacks at various
ports. These loopbacks enable identifying whether a malfunction is caused by
Megaplex-4 or by an external system component (for example, equipment, cable,
or transmission path connected to the Megaplex-4). A detailed description of the
test and loopback functions is given in Chapter 6, under the corresponding
section (for example, E1 Ports, SHDSL Ports).
Comprehensive diagnostic capabilities include:
• Local and remote loopbacks
• Real-time alarms to alert the user on fault conditions
• SDH/SONET link monitoring
• Ethernet traffic counters
• Ethernet, E1/T1, SHDSL and Optical interface status monitoring.
In addition to the alarm collection and reporting facility, the Megaplex-4 has two
alarm relays with floating change-over contacts: one relay for indicating the
presence of major alarms and the other for minor alarms. Each relay changes
state whenever the first alarm is detected, and returns to its normal state when
all the alarms of the corresponding severity disappear. The relay contacts can be
used to report internal system alarms to outside indicators, e.g., lights, buzzers,
bells, etc., located on an alarm bay or remote monitoring panel.
Performance Monitoring
Megaplex-4 collects statistics per physical port and per connection for 15-minute
intervals, which enables the network operator to monitor the transmission
performance and thus the quality of service provided to users, as well as identify
transmission problems. Performance parameters for all the active entities are
continuously collected during equipment operation.
Statistics for the last 24 hours are stored in the device and can be retrieved by
the network management station. For additional information, refer to the
Statistics section for the relevant port (for example Viewing Ethernet Port
Statistics under Ethernet Ports in Chapter 6).
Megaplex-4 maintains a cyclic event log file that stores up to 256 time-stamped
events. In addition, an internal system log agent can send all reported events to a
centralized repository or remote server. For additional information, refer to
Handling Events in Chapter 6.
Security
User access to Megaplex-4 is restricted via user name and password. For more
information, refer to Management Access Methods in Chapter 4.
Telnet-like management can be secured using a Secure Shell (SSH) client/server
program. Instead of sending plain-text ASCII-based commands and login requests
over the network, SSH provides a secure communication channel.
SFTP (Secure File Transfer Protocol, also known as SSH File Transfer Protocol) is
supported, to provide secure (encrypted) file transfer using SSHv2.
In addition, Megaplex-4 supports SNMP version 3, providing secure access to the
device by authenticating and encrypting packets transmitted over the network.
For more information, refer to The SNMPv3 Mechanism in Chapter 4.
The RADIUS protocol allows centralized authentication and access control,
avoiding the need of maintaining a local user database on each device on the
network. For more information, refer to Authentication via RADIUS Server
Mechanism in Chapter 4.
System Structure
Megaplex-4 units use modular chassis. The chassis has physical slots in which
modules are installed by the user to obtain the desired equipment configuration.
Megaplex-4 configuration includes the following main subsystems:
• I/O subsystem, provides interfaces to the user’s equipment. The number of
user interfacing modules that can be installed in a chassis is up to 10 for
Megaplex-4100 and 4 for Megaplex-4104
• Multiplexing, timing and control subsystem, located on the common logic and
cross-connect (CL.2) modules.
• Power supply subsystem, located on the power supply (PS) modules
• Chassis. The main function of the chassis is to provide interconnections
between the various modules, and in particular to connect between the user
interfacing (I/O) modules, and the CL modules that provide the multiplexing
function and the optional connections to SDH/SONET and/or Ethernet
networks.
CL and PS modules are always installed in their dedicated chassis slots, whereas
the user interfacing modules can be installed in any of the other chassis slots
(called I/O slots).
Any operational Megaplex-4 system must include at least one CL module and one
PS module. These modules are thus referred to as system modules. User
interfacing modules, called I/O modules, are added to this basic configuration.
Megaplex-4 system modules are critical components, because a failure in any one
of these modules could disable the whole system, whereas a failure in an I/O
module affects only a small part of the system, and can be generally overcome by
using alternate routes, putting unused capacity into service, etc. Therefore, in
most applications Megaplex-4 units should be equipped with an additional
redundant system module of each type. Redundancy is also available for the
network interfacing subsystems.
The Megaplex-4 system is designed to automatically put a redundant module or
subsystem in service in case the corresponding system component fails, thereby
ensuring continuous system operation in the event of any single module failure.
Moreover, redundant modules may be inserted or removed even while the system
operates.
Rear View
Figure 1-14 show a typical rear panel of the Megaplex-4100 chassis and identifies
the slots and their use. The chassis has 14 slots:
• Two slots are reserved for power supply (PS) modules
• Two slots are reserved for CL modules
• The other 10 slots, arranged in two groups of 5 each, are intended for I/O
modules. Each I/O slot can accept any type of I/O module.
Note the labels which designate the type of module that can be installed in each
slot:
• Slots labeled PS-A and PS-B (identified as ps-a and ps-b on supervision
terminal screens): power supply modules
• Slots labeled I/O-1 to I/O-10 (identified as slot 1 to slot 10 on supervision
terminal screens): I/O modules
• Slots labeled CLX-A and CLX-B (identified as cl-a and cl-b on supervision
terminal screens): CL modules.
In addition, each slot is keyed, therefore it is not possible to install a wrong
module type.
Caution To prevent physical damage to the electronic components assembled on the two
sides of the module printed circuit boards (PCB) while it is inserted into its
chassis slot, support the module while sliding it into position and make sure that
its components do not touch the chassis structure, nor other modules.
Slot PS-A PS-B IO-1 IO-2 IO-3 IO-4 IO-5 CL-A CL-B IO-6 IO-7 IO-8 IO-9 IO-10
PS-A PS-B I/O 1 I/O 2 I/O 3 I/O 4 I/O 5 CL-A CL-B I/O 6 I/O 7 I/O 8 I/O 9 I/O 10
PS/DC PS/AC
PS/DC M8E1 HS-12/N VC-8/RJ VC-4/Omni HS-R/N CL-2 CL-2 MPW-1 M8E1 OP-34C ASMi-54C OP-106C
PS/DC FXS E&M
RS-232 CH. TST LOS
STATUS STATUS
1 LASER LASER
1 2 CLASS CLASS 1 2
L LOC E
1 1 L
I 3 4 2 I 3 4 S
N N H
5 6 CH-1 CH-1 LINK ACT 5 6
K ETH1 K D
7 8 REM M 3 ON LINE ALM ON LINE ALM 7 8 S
ETH2 L LINK/
LOC E LOS LOS ACT
.
4 b
CH-2 CH-2 S S
D D I O
REM M H 1 H 1 s P
/ / E A
LOC E S S
O O T
CH CH CH-3 CH-3 N N LINK/ HO
4-6 1-3 E 2 E 2 ACT P
REM M T T E
ON ON T B
LINK LOC E LINE LINE LINK
1-8 1-8
H
CH-4 CH-4 CH. ACT ACT 100 100
1-2 ACT
REM M
VDC-IN 1 1
VDC-IN
G G 1
b b O
LOC E E LASER LASER P
CLASS CLASS
2 2 1 1 A
CH-5 LASER
CLASS
C C 1 2
LASER REM O LINK O LINK LOSS
- + 72V CLASS E L
1 LOC N D N D
LASER
I
RTN +72V -48V T CLASS
ON 100-120VAC ACT 1
1 3 K
T O T O T T I AIS
REM
200-240VAC H L LINK H L LINK H H N
LINK LOC E O
Tx
1 E 1 LOSS
CH CH T LINK K T P
ON CH-7
10-12 7-9 H B H B
ACT 4
E C C 2
E
Rx
2 CH-8
T 2
L K L K H LINK
REM A A 3
ACT
E R ON/LOS R ON/LOS E
Rx
ACT
T M M T
H H
LINK
Tx
3 3
LINK
Front Panel
The front panel of the Megaplex-4100 chassis is shown in Figure 1-15. For
description of LED indicators, see Chapter 3.
POWER SUPPLY
B A
SYSTEM
ALARM TEST
MEGAPLEX-4100
I/O Modules
Table 1-2 lists the I/O modules currently offered for the Megaplex-4 in the
alphabetical order of their names. Contact RAD Marketing for information on
Megaplex-
Module Description 2100/2104
Compatible
ACM Alarm and diagnostics module with four outbound relays for reporting Yes
internal alarms to outside indicators such as bells, buzzers, etc. Eight
inbound sensors enable external alarms or conditions to be reported to
the Megaplex system.
ASMi-54C Eight-port SHDSL.bis module with two Ethernet ports, for transporting No
digital data to customer premises over the existing copper infrastructure
of the distribution network while eliminating the need for repeaters. It
multiplexes Ethernet over 1, 2, and 4 pairs of SHDSL.bis copper lines.
Each SHDSL port can operate in a link with an ASMi-54/ASMi-54L
standalone unit offered by RAD.
Has eight independently configurable SHDSL.bis external ports for SHDSL
services, and two 10/100 Mbps Ethernet ports, for packet-based
services.
Can operate as a Central SHDSL.bis (STU-C) or Remote (STU-R) SHDSL.bis
Terminal Unit for up to 8 ASMi-54 standalone devices or another ASMi-
54C module.
ASMi-54C/N Eight-port SHDSL.bis modules with eight E1 and two optional Ethernet No
ports, for transporting digital data to customer premises over the
existing copper infrastructure of the distribution network, while
eliminating the need for repeaters. Transparently forward E1 data and
optionally Ethernet, over 1 or 2 pairs of SHDSL.bis/SHDSL copper lines to
ASMi-54/ASMi-54L (SHDSL.bis) or ASMi-52/ASMi-52L (SHDSL) standalone
modems on the remote site.
Have eight independently configurable SHDSL.bis external ports for
SHDSL services, eight E1 ports for E1 services and two optional 10/100
Mbps Ethernet ports, for packet-based services.
HS-6N, High-speed data module, providing 6, respectively 12, high-speed V.35 Yes
HS-12N or RS-530/V.11 data channels. Channel data rates are user-selectable in
the range of n×56 kbps or n×64 kbps, where n is up to 24 for T1
operation, and up to 31 for E1 operation (maximum 1984 kbps).
Supports enhanced clock modes. Any channel can be directed to any E1
or T1 link or internal PDH port.
HS-703 High-speed data sub-channel module, providing four 64-kbps Yes
codirectional ITU-T Rec. G.703 data channels.
Megaplex-
Module Description 2100/2104
Compatible
HS-S ISDN basic rate access module with four type “S” interfaces. Performs Yes
submultiplexing and data rate adaptation on B channels in accordance with
ITU-T Rec. I.460.
This module is intended for extension of ISDN lines over Megaplex-4 links,
and can provide phantom feed to user equipment
HS-U-6, ISDN basic rate access module with 6, respectively 12, type “U” interfaces. Yes
HS-U-12 Performs submultiplexing and data rate adaptation on B channels per ITU-T
Rec. I.460. The module supports two operation modes:
• /I: intended for extension of ISDN lines, can provide phantom feed to
user equipment. Supports 2B + D channels, and the channel data rates
are user-selectable (16, 32, and 64 kbps for each B channel, and
16 kbps for the D channel).
• /1: intended for use over leased lines, and can be used as dedicated
line termination units for the ASM-31 and ASMi-31 short-range
modems offered by RAD. Supports user channel data rates of 4.8,
9.6, 19.2, 48, 56, and 64 kbps over each B channel, and 128 kbps by
combining the two B channels. The D channel is ignored.
HSF-2 Interface module for teleprotection equipment, complying with IEEE C37.94 Yes
requirements. Provides two ports with 850 nm multimode fiber interfaces,
with a capacity of up to 10 × 64 kbps per port.
LS-6N, Data sub-multiplexer modules, providing 6, respectively 12, synchronous Yes
LS-12 or asynchronous data channels with ITU-T Rec. V.24/EIA RS-232
interfaces, each operating at independently selectable data rate in the
range of 2.4 to 64 kbps. Support end-to-end transmission of control line
per channel. LS-12 channels can be bundled into two groups, each
independently routed to a different destination.
M-ETH Module with 8 GbE interfaces supporting optical or electrical media and No
providing 9 Gbps switching capacity (up to 1 Gbps capacity to the CL.2
module and 8 Gbps shared among its 8 external ports). The capacity can
be allocated among the 8 interfaces with a granularity of 100 Kbps.
Megaplex-
Module Description 2100/2104
Compatible
M8E1 Module with eight E1 interfaces and user-selectable DSU or LTU mode, No
and three 10/100 Mbps Ethernet ports with optical SFPs or copper
interfaces (in accordance with order) for Ethernet services. The three
Ethernet ports are connected to an internal Ethernet switch, and share a
100 Mbps Fast Ethernet connection to the CL module.
M8T1 Module with eight T1 interfaces and user-selectable DSU or CSU mode, No
and three 10/100 Mbps Ethernet ports with optical SFPs or copper
interfaces (in accordance with order) for Ethernet services. The three
Ethernet ports are connected to an internal Ethernet switch, and share a
100 Mbps Fast Ethernet connection to the CL module.
M8SL Module with eight SHDSL interfaces, for transporting E1 and fractional No
E1 payloads, and three 10/100 Mbps Ethernet ports with optical SFPs or
copper interfaces (in accordance with order) for Ethernet services. The
three Ethernet ports are connected to an internal Ethernet switch, and
share a 100 Mbps Fast Ethernet connection to the CL module.
Each port features an independent multi-rate SHDSL modem,
transmitting at user-selectable data rates in the range of 192 kbps to
2048 kbps. Has internal non-blocking full cross-connect matrix similar to
M8E1 and M8T1 modules.
SHDSL interface type (STU-C or STU-R) is user-selectable.
Compatible with other RAD equipment having STU-R SHDSL interfaces,
such as the ASMi-52 SHDSL Modems. M8SL modules will also operate in
a link with 991.2-compatible STU-R units from other vendors.
MPW-1 Pseudowire server I/O module that provides TDM pseudowire access No
gateway services over packet-switched networks (Ethernet, IP, and
MPLS) for TDM traffic (E1, T1, SHDSL, ISDN, high-speed and low-speed
data, voice) received via the Megaplex-4 TDM buses from other modules.
Has eight independently-configurable internal DS1 ports, each capable of
handling 32 timeslots, for a total processing capacity of 256 timeslots
(the equivalent of 8 E1, or 2.048 Mbps streams).
Megaplex-
Module Description 2100/2104
Compatible
Ringer-2100R DC power supply module for DC feed and up to 32 voice channel ring Yes
voltages
Megaplex-
Module Description 2100/2104
Compatible
VC-16, Analog voice modules VC-16, VC-8 and VC-4 provide 16, 8 or 4 Yes
VC-8, PCM-encoded toll-quality voice channels.
VC-4, The modules are available in three models:
VC-8A,
• E&M: 4-wire or 2-wire interfaces with E&M signaling per RS-464
VC-4A
Types I, II, III and V, and BT SSDC5
• FXS: 2-wire interfaces for direct connection to telephone sets
• FXO: 2-wire interfaces for direct connection to PBX extension lines.
VC-8A and VC-4A are similar to VC-8 and VC-4 modules, except that they
also support ADPCM.
VC-6/LB 6-port PCM voice module for local battery telephones. It is a Yes
user-programmable voice interface module for Megaplex-4 used for
connection of local battery-powered (LB) telephones. The voice channels
use toll-quality 64 kbps PCM voice encoding in compliance with ITU-T
Rec. G.711 and AT&T Pub. 43801.
VC-4/ OMNI “Omnibus” E&M voice module providing four toll-quality voice channels. Yes
Intended for broadcast applications, in which a master site needs to
communicate with multiple remote stations simultaneously (such as to
broadcast an important message). Also provides party-line service.
Note
Some of the modules behave differently in the Megaplex-4100 /4104 and
Megaplex-2100/2104 chassis.
PS Modules
Two PS modules can be installed in the chassis. Only one PS module is required to
provide power to a fully equipped Megaplex-4; installing a second module
provides redundancy. While both modules operate normally, they share the load;
in case one fails or does not receive power, the other module continues to
provide power alone. Switch-over is automatic and does not disturb normal
operation. For instructions on extracting and inserting a power supply, refer to
Removing/Installing the PS Module in Chapter 2.
PS modules for Megaplex-4100 and Megaplex-4104 have different shape and
technical characteristics. -48 VDC nominal DC power supplies are available for
both chassis. In addition, Megaplex-4100 can be ordered with AC (115 or 230
VAC nominal) or 24 VDC nominal power supply modules. For the full list of module
options for the Megaplex-4100 and Megaplex-4104 chassis, see Table 1-8.
The recommended source for external voltages in the case of voice and ISDN
modules is Ringer-2200N offered by RAD. Ringer-2200N is a standalone unit
intended for rack mounting, capable of providing power for up to 120 voice
channels. Refer to the Ringer-2200N Installation and Operation Manual for
connection instructions.
The recommended source for external phantom feed voltages in the case of
SHDSL modules is MPF (Megaplex Power Feed) offered by RAD. standalone unit
intended for rack mounting, MPF provides power for Megaplex SHDSL modules
that require DC voltage to remote DSL repeaters or modems (up to 40 active
SHDSL modems or repeaters operating in 4-wire mode). Refer to the MPF
Installation and Operation Manual for connection instructions.
For additional details, refer to the Ringer-2200N Installation and Operation Manual
and MPF Standalone Power Supply for ASMi-54C/N modules section in the
Megaplex-4 I/O Modules Installation and Operation Manual.
Megaplex-4 Architecture
Megaplex-4 unique dual star topology architecture (see Figure 1-19) connects the
common logic processing engines to any of the 10 I/O slots independently. In
addition each of the I/O slots is connected by a TDM path, as well as an Ethernet
path, allowing true native TDM and Ethernet traffic handling with minimal
encapsulation delays, no overhead and dual TDM-Ethernet mode modules.
STM-n/OC-n
STM-n/OC-n
GbE
GbE
Common Logic
Interface
Interface
Interface
Interface
Interface
Interface
Interface
Interface
Interface
Interface
Interface
Ethernet
Ethernet
Ethernet
Ethernet
Ethernet
Ethernet
TDM
TDM
TDM
TDM
TDM
TDM
Figure 1-19. Megaplex-4 Internal Architecture
The Megaplex-4 architecture includes the following main subsystems:
• I/O subsystem: provides interfaces to the user’s equipment. For description,
see I/O Modules section below.
• TDM engine:
DS0 cross-connect matrix: handles the TDM traffic. The matrix also
handles the signaling information associated with TDM traffic.
DS1 cross-connect matrix: provides direct timing-independent cross-
connect of E1/T1 streams directly to any selected VC-12/VT1.5.
PDH mapper and framer: handle the TDM traffic directed to the network,
and enable mapping any E1/T1 port to any VC-12/VT1.5, respectively.
• SDH/SONET engine: includes the circuits needed to interface to an
SDH/SONET network:
Low-order/high-order (LO/HO) cross-connect matrix: controls the routing
of VCs/VTs at all the levels among the PDH mapper, and the SDH/SONET
links. Also provides automatic protection switching (APS) for the network
links, and path protection.
SDH/SONET interfaces: provide the physical interfaces for the SDH/SONET
links.
• Ethernet (packet) engine: includes the circuits needed to interface to a
packet-switched network. The Ethernet traffic handling subsystem includes:
Packet processor: controls the forwarding of Ethernet traffic within the
Megaplex-4 (including forwarding from internal ports, Ethernet-over-TDM
and virtually concatenated groups) to external Ethernet ports as well as
SDH/SONET
SDH/SONET
Engine
HO/LO Framers and
and VCAT HO/LO VC/VT
Mapper Cross-Connect
Matrix
DS1
TDM Engine
Cross-Connect
Matrix
E1/T1
Framer
DS0
Cross-Connect
Matrix
TDM Engine
TDM traffic can be switched between any of the following entities on the specific
level:
• DS0 (analog and digital interfaces: voice, serial, framed E1/T1, E1 over DSL,
E1/T1 over PW or multiplexed fiber, E1/T1 coming from VC-12/VT1.5)
• DS1 (unframed E1/T1 coming from M16E1/M16T1, Optimux modules or
ASMi-54C/N): transparent and clock independent DS1 processing towards
SONET/SDH or other I/O ports
• SDH/SONET (high and low level cross connect between SDH/SONET ports).
The cross-connect level can be selected to DS1 or DS0 operation mode per port.
I/O (Tributary) side 8 M16E1/M16T1 modules 3840 (120* × 32) DS0 2880 (120* × 24) DS0
MP-4100
2 M8E1/M8T1 modules 512 (2 x 8 × 32) DS0 384 (2 x 8 × 24) DS0
I/O (Tributary) side 4 M16E1/M16T1 modules 2048 (64 × 32) DS0 1536 (64 × 24) DS0
MP-4104
Modules E1 T1
I/O (Tributary) side 10 M16E1/M16T1 modules 5120 (160 × 32) DS0 3840 (160 × 24) DS0
MP-4100
I/O (Tributary) side 4 M16E1/M16T1 modules 2048 (64 × 32) DS0 1536 (64 × 24) DS0
MP-4104
• For T1 ports, the mapper enables mapping the port data stream to any of the
84/336 VT1.5 in the OC-3/OC-12 signal.
SDH/SONET Engine
The SDH/SONET engine includes the following parts:
• Network port interfaces
• SDH/SONET framers and high-order (HO – STS-1/VC-4) cross-connect matrix.
The SDH/SONET subsystem is integrated with the Ethernet over SDH/SONET
engine.
Packet Engine
The Packet (Ethernet) Engine is a state-of-the-art, multi-port GbE switching and
aggregating block, which enables hardware-based Ethernet capabilities, such as
traffic management and performance monitoring, between any of the Ethernet
entities.
This Ethernet flow-based traffic can be terminated by any of the following
entities:
• Fast Ethernet and GbE ports located on I/O modules
• Internal Ethernet ports of I/O modules carrying traffic generated by CPE
devices and transferred over E1, T1, voice, multiplexed fiber or SHDSL circuits
Packet Processor
The GbE packet processor is a high-capacity Ethernet processor with classifier,
capable of handling a wide range of VLAN and port-based flows.
The processor includes GbE and Fast Ethernet ports, which are used as follows:
• Two external GbE ports, one connected to the GbE 1 interface and the other
to the GbE 2 interface. The two ports can be configured to operate as a
redundancy pair, using hardware-based path and link failure for rapid
switching to the backup link.
• Fast Ethernet ports are used for Ethernet traffic from I/O modules, one from
each I/O slot.
• Two GbE ports are internally connected to the Ethernet processor of the
other CL module installed in the Megaplex-4.
• 8 GbE ports on the dedicated M-ETH module, with 1 GbE uplink to the CL.2
modules, supporting VLAN-aware bridging inside the module between all its
ports
• Each Ethernet port is supported by an independent MAC controller that
performs all the functions required by the IEEE 802.3 protocol. The maximum
frame size supported by the basic Ethernet switch is 9600 bytes. For
maximum frame sizes supported by different I/O modules, see Configuring
User Ethernet Ports in Chapter 6.
• The frames passed by the MAC controllers are analyzed by the ingress rate
policy controller of the corresponding port before being transferred, through
the switch fabric, to an internal port controller, which controls the frame
egress priorities and inserts them in separate queues. The switch supports up
to four transmission classes (queues) for the Fast Ethernet ports, and up to 8
transmission classes for the GbE ports. The queues are connected to the
ports through port egress policy controllers. This approach provides full
control over traffic flow, and ensures that congestion at one port does not
affect other ports.
Note In the Megaplex equipped with CL.2/A assembly, the queue mapping functionality
associates the user priorities with queue numbers (CoS) and the marking
functionality maps the user priority to the SP priority, according to
p-bit/DSCP/IP precedence. In the Megaplex with regular CL.2 module, queue
mapping is fixed and based on p-bit.
The available number of queues depends on flow classification and flow editing
(for details, see Chapter 8).
Note The Ethernet termination and processing function can also serve Ethernet traffic
carried through E1-i/T1-i ports of CL.2 modules.
Figure 1-21. Data Flow in the Megaplex equipped with CL.2/A – CL.2 GbE ports
Figure 1-22. Data Flow in the Megaplex equipped with CL.2/A – other MAC Ports
L2CP processing L2CP Port, flow Defines actions for L2CP processing (discard, peer,
tunnel)
Policing Policer Flow Policing the traffic within the flow (CIR, CBS, EIR and
Mapping of flow CoS mapping Flow Dividing the services using a 3-bit field, specifying a
to queue priority value between 0 (signifying best-effort) and
7 (signifying highest priority)
Defines method and values for mapping packet
attributes (P-bit, DSCP, IP-Precedence) to internal
CoS Values
Queue Queue block Defines queue type with shaper and WRED profile
Queue block Queue block Defines queue block parameters (queues, scheduling
within scheme, weights)
queue group
Shaping Shaper Queue, Ensuring that traffic is shaped to the desired rate
queue block (CIR, CBS Parameter)
Queue Queue block Defines queue type with shaper and WRED profile
Queue block Queue block Defines queue block parameters (queues, scheduling
within scheme, weights)
queue group
Editing and Marking Flow Adding or removing VLAN IDs, as well as marking the
Marking priority on the outer VLAN header (defines method
of mapping CoS and packet color values into P-bit)
VCAT Engine
The VCAT Engine handles all the functions related to the use of virtual
concatenation, and the preparation of Ethernet traffic for efficient transport over
the SDH/SONET network.
The Ethernet mapper subsystem includes the following functions:
• LAPS encapsulation
• GFP encapsulation
• Virtually concatenated group mapper.
To increase the available number of virtually concatenated groups as Ethernet
transport links, you can configure redundancy for pairs of selected VCGs.
HO/LO Mapper
The HO/LO mapper maps the Ethernet traffic for transmission over the
SDH/SONET network, and creates the virtually concatenated groups (VCGs) that
enable the user to control the utilization of the bandwidth available on the link to
the SDH/SONET network.
The routing of the VCG payload is defined by means of cross-connections, which
means selection of specific VCs/VTs to be used to carry each VCG, in the number
needed to provide the required bandwidth. This operation creates the trails that
are needed to connect the local users to remote locations through the
SDH/SONET network.
Logical MAC
1..32
MLPPP
1
HDLC
1..32
PPP
1..8
1
Bind 1: 1:n
1:1
XC
Unframed Framed
E1 E1/T 1
Figure 1-23. Logical Entities Representing Ethernet Traffic over E1/T1 Media
The maximum number of HDLC ports that can be defined on an M8E1/M8T1/M8SL
module is 32, and together with the three Ethernet ports, an M8E1/M8T1/M8SL
module supports up to 35 ports. Each of these ports can be connected to any
other Ethernet port within the Megaplex-4, for example, to another HDLC or
external Ethernet port on any module (including GbE ports on CL modules), to a
Logical MAC port, etc.
Note It is possible to open only 8 E1-i/T1-i links per module and assign up to 4 HDLC
ports to each of them so that the total capacity is 32 HDLC ports per module.
Moreover, each used E1-i/T1-i link reduces the number of external E1/T1 links
that can be connected to E1/T1 equipment.
In the HDLC Mode, two or more timeslots are cross-connected to the HDLC
entity. The bound HDLC port can be defined on framed or unframed ports, and its
maximum bandwidth is that of a single E1/T1 port. As seen from the diagram, the
timeslot mapping between the framed E1/T1 and HDLC ports should be done via
cross-connect.
The MLPPP protocol is an extension of the PPP protocol that uses the PPP Link
Control Protocol (LCP) and Bridge Control Protocol (BCP) to bind two or more PPP
links to provide increased bandwidth. Each PPP port binds an E1 port. The MLPPP
bundle can be defined only on unframed ports, and its maximum bandwidth is a
multiple of 2048kbps.
The binding of HDLC/MLPPP to flow is done by the intermediate Logical MAC
entity.
Note The maximum total number of GFP and HDLC ports per CL.2 is 32.
Flow
Egress/Ingress Port
OR
Bind 1:1
OR
Bind 1:1
VCG
Bind 1:1
1..32
Bind 1:n
VCAT No
VC4-4C/
VC4/STS-3C VC3/STS-1 VC12/VT1.5
STS-12C
Figure 1-24. Logical Entities Representing Ethernet Traffic over SDH/SONET Media
Figure 1-25 shows the relationship between the entities involved in the Ethernet
over T3/T1 functionality.
Flow
Egress/Ingress Port
GFP 1 GFP 16
OR
Bind 1:1
VCG 1..16
Bind 1:1
Bind 1:n
T1 T3
Figure 1-25. Logical Entities Representing Ethernet Traffic over Full/Channelized T3 Media
I/O Modules
The figure below illustrates Architectural Entities involved in the Megaplex-4 I/O
modules. Each entity is described in detail in Chapter 6 under the section for
corresponding type of ports: E1, T1, Ethernet, Serial, Logical Mac, Teleprotection
etc.
For possible values and hierarchy of the entities, see also Table 1-6.
16 x E1/T1 16 x E1 FE 16 x E1 FE FE 16 x E1 FE GbE
VS-12 VS-6/BIN
13 x E1 GbE 29 x E1 GbE
Voice 1...8 Voice 9..12 serial Voice 1...8 Voice 1...4 ETH 1
(FXS) (E&M) 1..6 (FXS) (E&M)
FXS/E&M
VS-6/FXS, VS-6/FXO, VS-6/E&M
GbE GbE
24 x E1 26 x E1/T1 GbE
FE
Switch ETH 1..4
Switch
DS0/1 GbE FE
T1 1:1
1:1..16 12 x E1/T1 12 x E1/T1 Open
1/ 1..28 Bind 6 x E1/T1
GFP 1..16 2 x E1/T1 V-Switch
X.86
1:1 1:1 GbE
Serial C37.94
T3 VCG 1..16 PW 1..24 ETH 1 Control GbE USB
1..6 1..2
T3 VS-6/C37 D-NFV
GbE 16 x E1
GbE 16 x E1 GbE
FE
Secondary Primary
Trip In
Trip Out Trip Out
RTU
SH-16 SH-16/E1 SH-16/E1/PW
TP
Switch
DS0 DS0 Switch DS0 Switch
T3 t3 slot:port slot/1
pw slot:port slot/1.. 24
pw slot:port slot/1.. 24
pw slot:port slot/1.. 24
pw slot:port slot/1.. 24
pw slot:port slot/1.. 24
pw slot:port slot/1.. 24
pw slot:port slot/1.. 16
Maximum Frame Size 9600 bytes (for max. frame sizes supported by
different I/O modules, see Configuring User
Ethernet Ports in Chapter 6)
Interface (software-selectable):
• RS-422 squarewave
• ITU-T Rec. G.703, HDB3 coding for 2.048 MHz
and 2.048 Mbps
• ITU-T Rec. G.703, B8ZS coding for 1.544 Mbps
Connector RJ-45
CL.2 Module
SDH/SONET Ports
GbE Ports
Management Ethernet
Ports
Caution
The DC input is primarily designed for negative input voltage (grounded positive
pole). However, the DC input voltage can be floated with respect to Megaplex-4
ground by means of field-selectable jumpers. Internal jumpers can also be set to
match operational requirements that need either the + (positive) or – (negative)
terminal of the power source to be grounded. Contact your nearest RAD Partner
for detailed information.
MP-4100 MP-4104
Operating 115 VAC/230 VAC -48 VDC 90 VAC to 260 VAC -48 VDC
Range (85 to 264 (-36 to -56 VDC) (-36 to -56 VDC)
VAC) 24 VDC
(20 to 36 VDC)
MP-4100 MP-4104
Maximum AC 315W + power supplied for ring and feed 200W + power supplied for ring and feed
input power voltage purposes voltage purposes
Total output 250W + power supplied for ring and feed 160W + power supplied for ring and feed
voltage purposes (drawn directly from voltage purposes (drawn directly from external
external source) source)
Note
Chassis handles installed on the rack mount brackets add 4 cm (1.6 in) to the
total depth.
Note
Actual operating temperature range is determined by the specific modules
installed in the chassis.
Safety Precautions
Before connecting this product to a power source, make sure to read the
Warning Handling Energized Products section at the beginning of this manual.
Grounding
For your protection and to prevent possible damage to equipment when a fault
condition, e.g., a lightning stroke or contact with high-voltage power lines, occurs
on the lines connected to the equipment, the Megaplex-4 case must be properly
grounded (earthed) at any time. Any interruption of the protective (grounding)
Grounding connection inside or outside the equipment, or the disconnection of the
protective ground terminal can make this equipment dangerous. Intentional
interruption is prohibited.
Before connecting any other cable and before applying power to this equipment,
the protective ground (earth) terminal of the equipment must be connected to
protective ground. Megaplex-4 grounding terminals are located on the Megaplex-
4 PS module panels.
Whenever Megaplex-4 units are installed in a rack, make sure that the rack is
properly grounded and connected to a reliable, low-resistance grounding system,
because the rack can also provide a connection to ground.
In addition, the grounding connection is also made through each one of the AC
power cables. Therefore, the AC power cable plug must always be inserted in a
socket outlet provided with a protective ground.
Laser Safety
Megaplex-4 modules may be equipped with a laser diode. In such cases, a label
with the laser class and other warnings as applicable will be attached near the
optical transmitter. The laser warning symbol may also be attached.
Warning
For your safety:
• Before turning on the equipment, make sure that the fiber optic cable is intact
and is connected to the optical transmitter.
• Do not use broken or unterminated fiber-optic cables/connectors.
• Do not look straight at the laser beam and into the optical connectors while
the unit is operating.
• Do not attempt to adjust the laser drive current.
• The use of optical instruments with this product will increase eye hazard.
Laser power up to 1 mW at 1300 nm and 1550 nm could be collected by an
optical instrument.
• Use of controls or adjustment or performing procedures other than those
specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
ATTENTION: The laser beam may be invisible!
Megaplex-4 modules equipped with laser devices provided by RAD comply with
laser product performance standards set by governmental agencies for Class 1 laser
products. The modules do not emit hazardous light, and the beam is totally enclosed
during all operating modes of customer operation and maintenance.
In some cases, the users may insert their own SFP laser transceivers into
Megaplex-4 modules. Users are alerted that RAD cannot be held responsible for
any damage that may result if non-compliant transceivers are used. In particular,
users are warned to use only agency approved products that comply with the
local laser safety regulations for Class 1 laser products.
Wherever applicable, Megaplex-4 modules are shipped with protective covers
installed on all the optical connectors. Do not remove these covers until you are
ready to connect optical cables to the connectors. Keep the covers for reuse, to
reinstall the cover over the optical connector as soon as the optical cable is
disconnected.
Whenever feasible, during installation works use standard ESD protection wrist
straps to discharge electrostatic charges. It is also recommended to use garments
and packaging made of antistatic materials or materials that have high resistance,
yet are not insulators.
AC Power Requirements
AC-powered Megaplex-4 units should be installed within 1.5m (5 feet) of an
easily-accessible grounded AC outlet capable of furnishing 150/230 VAC (nominal),
50/60 Hz.
DC Power Requirements
DC-powered Megaplex-4 units require a -48 VDC (-36 to -57 VDC) or 24 VDC (18
to 40 VDC, Megaplex-4100 only) power source (in accordance with the nominal
mains voltage of the ordered PS module).
Cautions • Megaplex-4 PS modules have no power switch and start operating as soon as
power is applied. Therefore, an external power ON/OFF switch is required (for
example, the circuit breaker that protects the power line can also serve as an
ON/OFF switch).
• It is not allowed to install DC-powered PS modules operating on different
voltages (i.e., 24 VDC and -48 VDC) in the same Megaplex-4100 chassis.
• Internal jumpers on the DC PS modules can be set to match operational
requirements that need either the + (positive) or – (negative) terminal of the
power source to be grounded. The normal factory setting is for a power
source with the +(positive) terminal grounded (the power supply module
jumpers are installed in the BGND=FGND and GND=FGND positions). When it is
necessary to use a power source with the – (negative) terminal grounded, or a
floating power source, the jumpers must be disconnected (set to NO).
Check the position of jumpers in the Megaplex-4 power supply module (see
Figure 2-5 and Figure 2-6) before connecting the DC supply voltage.
Certain I/O modules may still cause BGND to be connected to FGND or GND,
even after setting the jumpers to NO. Refer to the Installation and Operation
Manuals of the modules installed in the chassis for proper setting of their
ground-control jumpers.
• If the Megaplex-4 chassis must be operated with floating ground, it may also
be necessary to disconnect the ground reference on the power supply
modules, and check the ground and shield wiring on the cables connected to
the chassis. This may require replacing the cables with cables suitable to your
specific application.
• Megaplex-4 chassis must always be connected to FGND (protective ground).
Special ordering options with preconfigured floating ground settings are available.
Contact your local RAD Partner for more information. When working with FXS
voice modules, see also the VC-4/4A/8/8A/16 section in Appendix B.
Ambient Requirements
Megaplex-4100
The Megaplex-4100 I/O modules are cooled by free air convection.
The ambient operating temperature range of Megaplex-4100 is -10 to +55°C (14
to 131°F), at a relative humidity of up to 95%, non-condensing. The storage
temperature is -20°C to +70°C (-4°F to +160°F). Actual operating temperature
range is determined by the specific modules installed in the chassis.
The Megaplex-4100 chassis has no fans and is cooled mainly by free air
convection. Cooling vents are located in the bottom and upper covers. Do not
obstruct these vents. When the chassis is installed in a 19" rack, allow at least 1U
of space below and above the unit.
The PS power supply modules have a miniature cooling fan installed on their front
panels: this fan operates only when the temperature is high.
CL.2 modules also have internal fans.
The Megaplex-4100 chassis ordered with special options of CL and PS system
modules complies with IEEE-1613 standard including “No Fans operation”.
The I/O modules supported in this chassis are as follows:
• M16E1/M16T1, HSF-2 (all flavors)
• M8E1/M8T1, MPW-1, M-ETH, HS-RN, TP, HS-6N/HS-12N (specific flavors).
These modules also require a special ordering option (if needed, please contact
your local RAD Business Partner).
Megaplex-4104
The Megaplex-4104 chassis has 2 cooling fans on its right side. Do not obstruct
these vents. When the chassis is installed in a 19" rack, allow at least 10 cm of
spacing at the sides of the device.
The Megaplex-4104 PS power supply and CL.2 modules do not include fans.
The ambient operating temperature range of Megaplex-4104 is -10 to +55°C (14
to 131°F), at a relative humidity of up to 95%, non-condensing. The storage
temperature is -20°C to +70°C (-4°F to +160°F). Actual operating temperature
range is determined by the specific modules installed in the chassis.
There is a Megaplex-4104 chassis that complies with IEEE-1613 standard
including “No Fans operation”. This chassis option supports a pre-defined
configuration, including card slot assignment (see Table 2-1). If a different
configuration is required, please contact your local RAD Business Partner.
Make sure to insert a right module to the right slot; double-check the slot labels
in accordance with the diagram below.
PS-B
CL-B I/O 2
CL-A I/O 3
I/O 1
I/O 1
I/O 4
I/O 4
PS-A
Note The serial control port is normally used only during preliminary configuration, and
for maintenance purposes. If you cannot obtain a shielded control cable, connect
the cable only for the minimum time required for performing the task.
• In certain cases, the use of shielded cables or twisted pairs, or use of ferrite
cores, is recommended. Refer to the individual module Installation and
Operation Manual for details.
Covering all empty slots is also required for reasons of personal safety.
Warning
Figure 2-1. Attachment of Brackets to Megaplex-4100 Case for Installing in 19” Rack
Figure 2-2. Attachment of Brackets for Installation of Megaplex-4100 Unit in 23” Rack
After attaching the brackets, fasten the enclosure to the rack by four screws
(two on each side).
After installing the enclosure, check and install the required modules, in
accordance with the installation plan.
Installing PS Modules
Caution
If the Megaplex-4100 chassis must be operated with floating ground, it may also
be necessary to disconnect the ground reference on all the installed modules and
check the ground and shield wiring on the cables connected to the chassis. This
may require changing the hardware settings on the installed modules and
appropriate cables.
Special ordering options with preconfigured settings are available. Contact your
local RAD Partner for more information.
The jumpers of a typical PS module (PS/DC or PS/AC) are identified in Figure 2-5.
Front Panel
BGND = FGND
48/24 VDC Positive
Line Connected to
YES Frame Ground
GND = FGND
Signal Ground
Connected to
YES Frame Ground
Signal Ground
not Connected to
NO
Frame Ground
NO YES NO YES
Figure 2-5. Typical Megaplex-4100 PS Module (Lateral View), Location of Internal Jumpers
• The jumper designated GND=FGND controls the connection between the
internal signal ground and the frame (enclosure) ground. The module is
normally delivered with the jumper set to YES. If necessary, you can set the
jumper to NO to float the signal ground with respect to the frame ground.
• The jumper designated BGND=FGND controls the connection between the
positive (+) line of the external 24/48 VDC voltage and the frame (enclosure)
ground. The module is normally delivered with the jumper set to YES. If
necessary, you can set the jumper to NO to float the external 24/48 VDC
positive line with respect to the frame ground. This is usually necessary when
the DC voltage is used to feed or ring voltages.
Note PS/DC and PS/AC modules can also use a positive supply voltage. In this case,
always disconnect BGND from FGND (set the jumper to NO).
If two power supply modules are installed, make sure that the internal
jumpers are set to the same position on both modules.
Caution Certain I/O modules may still cause BGND to be connected to FGND or GND, even
after setting the jumpers to NO. Refer to the appropriate sections of Appendix B
describing the modules installed in the chassis for proper setting of their ground-
control jumpers.
Caution If the Megaplex-4104 chassis must be operated with floating ground, it may also
be necessary to disconnect the ground reference on all the installed modules and
check the ground and shield wiring on the cables connected to the chassis. This
may require changing the hardware settings on the installed modules and
appropriate cables.
Special ordering options with preconfigured settings are available. Contact your
local RAD Partner for more information.
YES
NO
YES NO
Figure 2-6. Typical Megaplex-4104 PS Module (Top View), Location of Internal Jumpers
• The jumper designated GND=FGND controls the connection between the
internal signal ground and the frame (enclosure) ground. The module is
normally delivered with the jumper set to YES. If necessary, you can set the
jumper to NO to float the signal ground with respect to the frame ground.
• The jumper designated BGND=FGND controls the connection between the
positive (+) line of the external 48 VDC voltage and the frame (enclosure)
ground. The module is normally delivered with the jumper set to YES. If
necessary, you can set the jumper to NO to float the external 48 VDC positive
line with respect to the frame ground. This is usually necessary when the DC
voltage is used to feed or ring voltages.
Note PS/DC and PS/AC modules can also use a positive supply voltage. In this case,
always disconnect BGND from FGND (set the jumper to NO).
If two power supply modules are installed, make sure that the internal
jumpers are set to the same position on both modules.
Caution Certain I/O modules may still cause BGND to be connected to FGND or GND, even
after setting the jumpers to NO. Refer to the appropriate sections of Appendix B
describing the modules installed in the chassis for proper setting of their
ground-control jumpers.
Installing a PS Module
Do not connect the power and/or ring and feed voltage cable(s) to a PS module
before it is inserted in the Megaplex-4 chassis. Disconnect the cable(s) from the
module before it is removed from the chassis.
Warning
1. Insert the PS module in the PS-A slot, and fasten it with the two screws.
2. Connect the power cable according to the voltages indicated on the panel.
3. If an additional redundant module is used, install it in the PS-B slot.
Note
You can install a redundant module in an operating enclosure without turning the
Megaplex-4 power off. In this case:
• First insert the module in its slot
• Connect its power cable.
Removing a PS Module
1. Disconnect the power cable(s) connected to the module.
2. Release the two module screws
3. Pull the PS module out.
Installing CL Modules
Megaplex-4100 accommodates two dual-slot CL.2 modules. A special compact
single-slot CL.2 module version is available, allowing the use of two CL.2 modules
in the Megaplex-4104 chassis. Megaplex-4104 can also use the regular dual-slot
module (one per chassis).
The modules include the chassis management and timing subsystem, and a
cross-connect matrix for TDM traffic, two SDH/SONET ports (with STM-1/OC-3 or
STM-4/OC-12 interfaces, in accordance with order) and two GbE ports (with SFPs
or with copper interfaces, in accordance with order). The panels for the
STM-1/OC-3 or STM-4/OC-12 versions are identical. A special version without
SDH/SONET and GbE ports can be used for DS0 cross-connect services only.
LASER LASER
CLASS CLASS
1 1
1 1
G G
b b
E E
2 2
C LINK C C
O O LINK O
N D N D N D
T C ACT T C ACT T C ACT
R E E R E E R E E
O T O T O T
L LINK H L LINK H L LINK H
C C C
L L L
O O O
A C A C A C
L K L K L K
A A A
R ON/LOS R ON/LOS R ON/LOS
M M M
CL.2 with Copper CL.2 with Optical CL.2 for DS0 Cross-
GbE Interfaces GbE Interfaces connect only
LASER LASER
CLASS CLASS
1 1
1 1 1 1
G G G G
b b b b
E E E E
2 2 2 2
C LINK C C LINK C
O O LINK O O LINK
N D N D N D N D
T C ACT T C ACT T C ACT T C ACT
R E E R E E R E E R E E
O T O T O T O T
L LINK H L LINK H L LINK H L LINK H
C C C C
L L L L
O O O O
A C A C A C A C
L K L K L K L K
A A A A
R ON/LOS R ON/LOS R ON/LOS R ON/LOS
M M M M
CL.2/A with Copper CL.2/A with Optical CL.2/A (GbE only) with CL.2/A (GbE only) with
GbE Interfaces GbE Interfaces Copper GbE Interfaces Optical GbE Interfaces
Item Function
CLOCK Connector RJ-45 connector for the station clock input and output signals
CONTROL ETH Connector RJ-45 connector for the 10/100BaseT Ethernet management port
CONTROL DCE Connector 9-pin D-type female connector with RS-232 DCE interface, for connection to
system management. Connector pin allocation is given in Appendix A
ALARM Connector 9-pin D-type female connector, for connection to the Megaplex-4100 alarm
relay outputs, and an external alarm input. Connector pin allocation is given in
Appendix A
SDH/SONET 1, 2 Connectors Sockets for installing SFP transceivers for the corresponding SDH/SONET ports
GbE 1, 2 Connectors Sockets for installing SFP transceivers for the corresponding GbE ports,
or RJ-45 connectors
LASER LASER
CLASS CLASS
1 1
1 1
G G
b b
E E
2 2
LINK
LINK
ACT ACT ACT
C C C
O E O E O E
N T N T N T
T H T H T H
R R R
O LINK O LINK O LINK
L L L
D C D C D C
C L C L C L
E O E O E O
A C A C A C
L K L K L K
A A A
R ON/LOS R ON/LOS R ON/LOS
M M M
CL.2 with Copper CL.2 with Optical CL.2 for DS0 Cross-
GbE Interfaces GbE Interfaces connect only
1 1 1 1
G G G G
b b b b
E E E E
CL.2
A
2 2 2 2
LINK LINK
LINK LINK
ACT ACT ACT ACT
C C C C
O E O E O E O E
N T N T N T N T
T H T H T H T H
R R R R
O LINK O LINK O LINK O LINK
L L L L
D D D C D
C C C
C C C L C
L L L
E E E O E
O O O
A C A C A C A C
L K L K L K L K
A A A A
R ON/LOS R ON/LOS R ON/LOS R ON/LOS
M M M M
CL.2/A with Copper CL.2/A with Optical CL.2/A (GbE only) with CL.2/A (GbE only) with
GbE Interfaces GbE Interfaces Copper GbE Interfaces Optical GbE Interfaces
Item Function
CLOCK Connector RJ-45 connector for the station clock input and output signals
CONTROL ETH Connector RJ-45 connector for the 10/100BaseT Ethernet management port
CONTROL DCE Connector MINI-USB connector, for connection to system management. Connector pin
allocation is given in Appendix A
ALARM Connector 9-pin flat connector, for connection to the Megaplex-4104 alarm relay outputs,
and an external alarm input. Connector pin allocation is given in Appendix A
SDH/SONET 1, 2 Connectors Sockets for installing SFP transceivers for the corresponding SDH/SONET ports
GbE 1, 2 Connectors Sockets for installing SFP transceivers for the corresponding GbE ports,
or RJ-45 connectors
Installing an SFP
Caution
During the installation of an SFP with optical interfaces, make sure that all optical
connectors are closed by protective caps.
Do not remove the covers until you are ready to connect optical fibers to the
connectors. Be aware that when inserting an SFP into a working module, the SFP
transmitter may start transmitting as soon as it is inserted.
Note
All the following procedures are illustrated for typical SFPs with optical interfaces.
However, the same procedures apply for SFPs with electrical (copper) interfaces.
Warning
Note Some SFP models have a plastic door instead of a wire latch.
Caution Insert the SFP gently. Using force can damage the connecting pins.
Caution Do not remove the SFP while the fiber optic cables are still connected. This may
result in physical damage (such as a chipped SFP module clip or socket) or cause
malfunction (e.g., the network port redundancy switching may be interrupted).
Replacing an SFP
SFPs can be hot-swapped. It is always recommended to coordinate SFP
replacement with the system administrator. During the replacement of SFPs with
optical interfaces, only the traffic on the affected link is disrupted (the other link
can continue to carry traffic).
To replace an SFP:
1. If necessary, disconnect any cables connected to the SFP connectors.
2. Push down the SFP locking wire, and then pull the SFP out.
3. Reinstall protective covers on the SFP electrical and optical connectors.
4. Install the replacement SFP in accordance with the Installing an SFP section.
Installing a CL Module
CL modules are installed in the CLX-A and/or CLX-B slots. When two CL modules
are installed, redundancy is available. In this case, the module installed in slot
CLX-A will be automatically selected as the master module, provided that it
operates normally and stores all the required configuration parameters.
To install a CL module:
1. Check that the two fastening screws of the module are free to move.
2. Insert the CL module in its chassis slot and slide it backward as far as it goes.
3. Simultaneously press the extractor handles toward the center of the module
to fully insert its rear connector into the mating connector on the backplane.
4. Secure the CL module by tightening its two screws.
Removing a CL Module
To remove a CL module:
1. Fully release the two screws fastening the module to the chassis.
2. Simultaneously push the extractor handles outward, to disengage the rear
connector.
3. Pull the module out.
Caution To prevent physical damage to the electronic components assembled on the two
sides of the module printed circuit boards (PCB) while it is inserted into its
chassis slot, support the module while sliding it into position and make sure that
its components do not touch the chassis structure, nor other modules.
This precaution is particularly important when installing modules into the two
lower I/O slots (1 and 4) of the Megaplex-4104 chassis: take special care to
support the module from below, while pushing it in gently.
Grounding Megaplex-4
Before connecting any cables and before switching on this instrument, the
protective ground terminals of this instrument must be connected to the
protective ground conductor of the (mains) power cord. The mains plug shall only
Warning
be inserted in a socket outlet provided with a protective ground contact. Any
interruption of the protective (grounding) conductor (inside or outside the
instrument) or disconnecting the protective ground terminal can make this
instrument dangerous. Intentional interruption is prohibited.
Make sure that only fuses of the required rating are used for replacement. Use of
repaired fuses and the short-circuiting of fuse holders is forbidden.
Whenever it is likely that the protection offered by fuses has been impaired, the
instrument must be made inoperative and be secured against any unintended
operation.
Connect a short, thick copper braid between the grounding screw on each PS
module panel and a nearby grounding point.
Connecting to Power
Caution Megaplex-4 does not have a power on/off switch and will start operating as soon
as power is applied to at least one of its PS modules. It is recommended to use
an external power on/off switch to control the connection of power to Megaplex-
4. For example, the circuit breaker used to protect the supply line to Megaplex-4
may also serve as the on/off switch.
Power should be connected only after completing cable connections.
Connect the power cable(s) first to the connector on the PS module, and then to
the power outlet. For DC cables, pay attention to polarity.
Note When redundant power supply modules are used, it is recommended to connect
the power cables to outlets powered by different circuits.
Caution
Turn on the Ringer-2200N/MPF external voltage source, or connect the external
voltages, only after Megaplex-4 is turned on.
Turn off the Ringer-2200N/MPF external voltage source, or disconnect the
external voltages, only before Megaplex-4 is turned off.
Caution Terminal cables must have a frame ground connection. Use ungrounded cables
when connecting a supervisory terminal to a DC-powered unit with floating
ground. Using improper terminal cable may result in damage to supervisory
terminal port.
Caution
Terminal cables must have a frame ground connection. Use ungrounded cables
when connecting a supervisory terminal to a DC-powered unit with floating
ground. Using improper terminal cable may result in damage to supervisory
terminal port.
The station clock port is terminated in one RJ-45 connector, designated CLOCK,
which supports two interfaces:
• 100 Ω/120 Ω balanced interface for operation over two twisted pairs
• 75 Ω unbalanced interface for operation over coaxial cables. This interface
can be used only for 2.048 MHz or 2.048 Mbps clock signals.
At any time, only one interface is active. The selection of the active interface is
made by the user. In addition, provisions are made to sense the type cable
connected to the port:
• The cable used for connecting to equipment with balanced interface should
include only two twisted pairs, one for the clock output and the other for the
clock input.
Note
One of the contacts in the station clock connector is used to sense the
connection of the unbalanced adapter cable (see Appendix A). Do not connect
cables with more than two pairs when you want to use the balanced interface.
The relays are controlled by software, and therefore the default state (that
is, the state during normal operation) can be selected by the user in
accordance with the specific system requirements.
• +5V auxiliary voltage output (through a 330 Ω series resistor).
• External alarm sense input. The input accepts an RS-232 input signal; it can
also be connected by means of a dry-contact relay to the auxiliary voltage
output.
Note SFP transceivers can also be installed in the field by the customer, however RAD
strongly recommends to order modules with preinstalled SFPs, as this enables
performing full functional testing of equipment prior to shipping.
Caution When calculating optical link budget, always take into account adverse effects of
temperature changes, optical power degradation and so on. To compensate for
the signal loss, leave a 3 dB margin. For example, instead of the maximum
receiver sensitivity of -28 dBm, consider the sensitivity measured at the Rx side
to be -25 dBm. Information about Rx sensitivity of fiber optic interfaces is
available in SFP/XFP Transceivers data sheet .
Caution Make sure all the optical connectors are closed at all times by the appropriate
protective caps, or by the mating cable connector.
Do not remove the protective cap until an optical fiber is connected to the
corresponding connector, and immediately install a protective cap after a cable is
disconnected.
2. Connect the prescribed coaxial transmit cable (connected to the receive input
of the remote equipment) to the TX connector of the interface.
3. Connect the prescribed coaxial receive cable (connected to the transmit
output of the remote equipment) to the RX connector of the same interface.
Caution When calculating optical link budget, always take into account adverse effects of
temperature changes, optical power degradation and so on. To compensate for
the signal loss, leave a 3 dB margin. For example, instead of the maximum
receiver sensitivity of -28 dBm, consider the sensitivity measured at the Rx side
to be -25 dBm. Information about Rx sensitivity of fiber optic interfaces is
available in SFP/XFP Transceivers data sheet .
To monitor Megaplex-4:
1. Configure the terminal for 115.2 kbps, one start bit, eight data bits, no
parity, and one stop bit.
2. Select the full-duplex mode, echo off, and disable any type of flow control.
Make sure to use VT-100 terminal emulation: using a different terminal type
will cause display problems, for example, the cursor will not be located at the
proper location, text may appear jumbled, etc.
Note The Megaplex-4 PS modules do not include a power switch. Use an external
power ON/OFF switch, for example, the circuit breaker used to protect the power
lines.
2. Wait for the completion of the power-up initialization process. During this
interval, monitor the power-up indications:
After a few seconds, Megaplex-4 starts decompressing its software.
After software decompression is completed, all the indicators turn off for
a few seconds (except for the POWER indicators) as Megaplex-4 performs
its power-up initialization.
You can monitor the decompression and initialization process on the terminal
connected to the Megaplex-4.
3. After the power-up initialization ends, all the POWER indicators must light,
the ON LINE indicator of the active CL module lights in green and that of the
other CL module flashes slowly in green. At this stage, the indicators display
the actual Megaplex-4 status.
3.2 Indicators
The following tables summarize the function of all LED indicators in
Megaplex-4. The normal indications on power-up (provided the corresponding
port is connected) are marked in bold.
CL-2 CL-2
LASER LASER
CLASS CLASS
1 1
1 1
G G
b b
E E
2 2
C LINK C
O O LINK
N D N D
T C ACT T C ACT
R E E R E E
O T O T
L LINK H L LINK H
C C
L L
O O
A C A C
L K L K
A A
R ON/LOS R ON/LOS
M M
Note
Status indicators for SDH/SONET ports are active only when the corresponding
port is equipped with an SFP and configured as no shutdown.
LINK (per port) Green On: the port is connected to an active Ethernet
hub or switch
Off: Ethernet link is not detected
ACT (per port) Yellow On or Blinking (in accordance with the traffic):
ETH frames are received or transmitted
Off: ETH frames are not received and
transmitted
Note GbE Status indicators are active only when the corresponding port is configured
as no shutdown, and for optical ports – when the port is equipped with an SFP
LINK (per port) Green On: the port is connected to an active Ethernet hub or
switch
Off: Ethernet link is not detected
ACT (per port) Yellow On or Blinking (in accordance with the traffic): ETH
frames are received or transmitted
Off: ETH frames are not received and transmitted
POWER SUPPLY
B A
SYSTEM
ALARM TEST
MEGAPLEX-4100
SYSTEM TEST Yellow • On: a test (or loopback) is being performed in the
Megaplex-4100
• Off: No active tests
SYSTEM ALARM Red • Blinking: a major and/or critical alarm has been
detected in Megaplex-4100
• On: a minor alarm has been detected in Megaplex-
4100
• Off: No active alarms
3.3 Startup
Configuration Files
The following files contain configuration settings:
• factory-default contains the manufacturer default settings
• running-config contains the current configuration that is different from the
default configuration
• startup-config contains the saved non-default user configuration. This file is
not automatically created. You can use the save or copy command to create
it.
• user-default-config contains default user configuration. This file is not
automatically created. You can use the copy command to create it.
• candidate stores any configuration before it is copied to running-config via
commit command.
• main-sw contains the active software image.
Loading Sequence
At startup, the device boots from the startup-config file, the user-default file, or
the factory-default file, in the sequence shown in Figure 3-4 . If none of these
files exist, the device boots using hard-coded defaults.
Start
Fail
No
Fail No
Boot from
Factory-default-config
End
If the loading of startup-config or the user-default file fails, the loading failure
event is registered in the event log.
To display the parameter values after startup, use the info [detail] command.
Admin user-default
Sanity
check
Copy
Commit Copy
Configuration
User-Default -
Session Running-config Startup-Config Factory-Default
Config
(Candidate DB)
TFTP
TFTP
Save
Copy
Admin factory-default
CONTROL ETH, any Local, Out-of-band Telnet, SSH over Procomm, Putty (see Working with
user ETH port on CL remote (via CONTROL Ethernet Telnet and SSH below)
or I/O modules ETH only),
Inband
STM-1/STM-4/ Remote Inband Telnet, SSH over Procomm, Putty (see Working with
OC-3/OC-12 links DCC (IP/PPP or Telnet and SSH below)
IP/HDLC)
Any E1/T1 or SHDSL Remote Inband Telnet, SSH over Procomm, Putty (see Working with
link a dedicated Telnet and SSH below)
timeslot (IP/PPP
or IP/FR)
Note By default, the terminal, Telnet (SSH), and SNMP management access methods
are enabled.
mng-eth mng-eth
cl-a cl-b
RI#2
DTS
PPP
Router
DCC
RI#3
PPP
RI#1
Host
SVI#1
mng-eth mng-eth
cl-a cl-b
RI#2
DTS
PPP
Router
BP#3 BP#2
DCC
RI#3
1 PPP
RI#1
Bridge#1 Aware Host
BP#1
SVI#1
Using SSH
Login
To access the unit's management/configuration/monitoring options, you must
log in.
Megaplex-4 supports the following access levels:
• Superuser (su) can perform all the activities supported by the Megaplex-4
management facility, including defining new users of any level and changing
their passwords.
• Operator (oper) can perform all the activities except defining new users and
changing passwords.
• User (user) can only monitor the device or change his/her own password
• Technician (tech) can monitor the device, perform diagnostics and clear
alarms)
A special option (chngpass) is provided for the case when the user has forgotten
his/her password.
Note Most commands are available only in their specific context. Global commands are
available in any context. You can type ? at any level to display the available
commands.
CLI Prompt
The base level prompt contains the device name, which is mp4100 by default (the
device name can be configured in the system level; refer to the Device
Information section in this manual). The prompt ends with $, #, or >, depending
on the type of entity being configured and the user level.
Commands that are not global are available only at their specific tree location,
while global commands can be typed at any level. To find out what commands are
available at the current location, type ?.
If a new dynamic entity is being configured, the last character of the prompt is $.
Examples of dynamic entities include flows, QoS profiles, and OAM CFM entities.
If a new dynamic entity is not being configured, the last character of the prompt
is > (for tech or user access levels) or # (for other access levels).
In addition to being the default prompt, the # symbol also indicates a static or
already configured entity. The $ symbol indicates a new dynamic entity that takes
several commands to configure. The dynamic entity is created as inactive. After
the configuration is completed, it is activated by using the no shutdown
command, as shown in the following example.
mp4100# configure port logical-mac 5/1
mp4100>config>port>log-mac(5/1)$ bind mlppp 5/1
mp4100>config>port>log-mac(5/1)$ no shutdown
mp4100>config>port>log-mac(5/1)$ commit
Figure 3-7. Creating and Activating Dynamic Entity
Note The examples in this manual use # as the last character of the prompt, unless the
creation of a new dynamic entity is being illustrated.
After you type a command at the CLI prompt and press <Enter>, responds
according to the command entered.
Navigating
To navigate down the tree, type the name of the next level. The prompt then
reflects the new location, followed by #. To navigate up, use the global command
exit. To navigate all the way up to the root, type exit all.
At the prompt, one or more level names separated by a space can be typed,
followed (or not) by a command. If only level names are typed, navigation is
performed and the prompt changes to reflect the current location in the tree. If
the level names are followed by a command, the command is executed, but no
navigation is performed and the prompt remains unchanged.
Note To use show commands without navigating, type show followed by the level
name(s) followed by the rest of the show command.
In the example below the levels and command were typed together and therefore
no navigation was performed, so the prompt has not changed.
mp4100# configure port ppp 5/1 bind e1 5/1
mp4100# configure port ppp 5/2 bind e1 5/2
mp4100# configure port ppp 5/3 bind e1 5/3
mp4100# configure port ppp 5/4 bind e1 5/4
mp4100# configure port ppp 5/5 bind e1 5/5
mp4100# configure port ppp 5/6 bind e1 5/6
mp4100# configure port ppp 5/7 bind e1 5/7
mp4100# configure port ppp 5/8 bind e1 5/8
Figure 4-8. Commands without Level Navigation
In the following example, the levels were typed separately and the navigation is
reflected by the changing prompt.
mp4100#
mp4100# configure
mp4100>config# port
mp4100>config>port# ppp 5/1
mp4100>config>port# ppp(5/1)# bind e1 5/1
mp4100>config>port# ppp(5/1)#
Figure 3-9. Commands with Level Navigation
Command Tree
The tree command displays a hierarchical list of all the commands in the CLI tree,
starting from the current context.
mp4100# tree
|
+---admin
| |
| +---factory-default
| |
| +---reboot
| |
| +---software
| | |
| | +---install
| | |
| | +---show status
more..
2. Press <Enter> to see more or <CTRL-C> to return to the prompt.
When adding the detail parameter, the output also includes the parameters and
values for each command.
Command Structure
CLI commands have the following basic format:
command [parameter]{ value1 | value2 | … | valuen }
[ optional-parameter <value> ]
where:
You can type only as many letters of the level or command as required by the
system to identify the level or command, for example you can enter config manag
to navigate to the management level.
CLI commands have the following basic format:
command [parameter]{value1 | value2 | … | valuen} [optional parameter <value>]
where:
Special Keys
The following keys are available at any time:
The following commands are available at any time and at any level:
Getting Help
You can get help in the following ways:
• Type help to display general help (see General Help)
• Type help <command> to display information on a command and its
parameters
• Type ? to display the commands available in the level (see
• Level Help)
• Use <Tab> while typing commands and parameters, for string completion
• Use ? after typing a command or parameter, for interactive help (see
Interactive Help).
General Help
Global commands:
commit - Update the candidate database to the running
database
discard-changes - Resets to last-saved parameter profile
echo - Displays a line of text (command) on the screen
exec - Executes a file
exit - Returns to the next higher command level (context)
help - Displays information regarding commands in the
current level
history - Displays the history of commands issued since the
last restart
info - Displays the current device configuration
level-info - Displays the current device configuration -
commands from the current level only
logout - Logs the device off
ping - Ping request to verify reachability of remote host
sanity-check - Initiates a self test of the device
save - Saves current settings
startup-config-confi* - Confirm configuration
tree - Displays the command levels from the current
context downwards
virtual-terminal - Enter the virtual terminal
Hotkeys:
DEL -delete character
<- -move cursor right
-> -move cursor left
TAB -complete token
? -help
Arrow up -history forward
Arrow down -history backward
BACKSPACE -delete character
^Z -return to configuration root
^E -exit cli
Command Help
Enter help <command> to display command and parameter information.
mp4100>config>system# help name
- name <name-of-device>
- no name
<name-of-device> : Adds free text to specify the device name [0..255 chars]
Level Help
Enter ? at the command prompt to display the commands available in the current
level.
mp4100>file# ?
copy - Copies a file
delete - Deletes a file from the device
dir - Lists all files in the device
String Completion
Megaplex-4 automatically completes levels, commands, and parameters when you
press <Tab> immediately after a string.
If the string can be completed in more than one way, Megaplex-4 appends the
characters that are common to all the possibilities.
If the string can be completed in only one way, [RADDoc_ProductName]
completes it and appends a space.
If the string is already a complete level/command/parameter or cannot be
completed to a level/command/parameter, no completion is done.
Pressing <Tab> a second time displays any available command parameters.
Some user-defined strings such as flow names or profile names can be completed
as well. If the user enters an entity name (flow, profile or similar) that does not
exist in the database, Megaplex-4 creates this entity with the selected name.
The following table shows examples of string completion.
Interactive Help
To get interactive help, type ?.
In general, typing a ? directly after a string performs string completion, while
typing <space> and then a ? executes the command.
When a <CR> appears in a ? list, the string you entered is itself a valid command
needing no further additions. Pressing <Enter> executes the command or
navigates to the indicated level.
Typing ? immediately after a command or partial command with no space before
the ?, tells Megaplex-4 to display all possibilities for completing the string. Help
output is always followed by the string you typed with the cursor at the end of
the string waiting for input.
mp4100>config>flows# classifier-profile myclass m?
match-any
mp4100>config>flows# classifier-profile myclass m
mp4100>admin# fact?
factory-default-all - Resets all configuration and counter
factory-default - Loads factory default configuration
mp4100>admin# fact
mp4100>admin# factory-default?
factory-default-all - Resets all configuration and counters
<CR>
mp4100>admin# factory-default
When a string cannot be completed, Megaplex-4 displays “cli error: Invalid
Command”.
mp4100>admin# stac?
# cli error: Invalid Command
mp4100>admin# stac
mp4100>file# da ?
# cli error: Invalid Command
mp4100>file# da
Typing <?> after a space between a command or level name and the ? tells
Megaplex-4 to try to execute the command. The space tells the CLI that you are
finished typing and to try to match the string to an appropriate command. The
string does not have to be a complete command.
If there is only one possible command starting with that string, pressing <Enter>
will execute the command. If there is more than one command that starts with
the string, the CLI displays a message that it can’t clarify which command you
want.
172_17_155_24>admin# factory?
172_17_155_24>admin# factory ?
# cli error: Ambiguous Command
172_17_155_24>admin# factory
A string that is a complete command name followed by a space ? displays all
possible command parameters.
mp4100>config>flows# show ?
summary - Displays list of flows
mp4100>config>flows# show
mp4100>config>flows# classifier-profile ?
<classification-n*> : [1..32 chars]
mp4100>config>flows# classifier-profile
The next example shows a complete command to which a parameter could be
appended. It also shows how a string that is a complete command is executed by
pressing <CR>, or <Enter>.
mp4100>config>access-control# resequence access-list acl_1 ?
<CR>
<number> : [0..100000]
The next example shows a complete command that has no parameters.
mp4100>config>flows# classifier-profile myclass match-any ?
<CR>
mp4100>config>flows# classifier-profile myclass match-any
Using Scripts
CLI commands can be gathered into text files. They may be created using a text
editor, by recording the user commands or by saving the current configuration.
These files can be configuration files or scripts. Configuration files have specific
names and contain CLI commands that Megaplex-4 can use to replace the current
configuration, while scripts contain CLI commands that add to the current
configuration. Configuration files can be imported from and exported to RAD
devices via file transfer protocols.
Note Although scripts can be created using a text editor, it is recommended to save
the configuration file and then edit it rather than write a script from scratch. The
sequence of the commands is very important and if a script fails during startup at
a certain command, the entire configuration file is discarded.
#*********************Configuring_SNMP_View/Mask/Type************************
configure management snmp
view internet 1
mask 1
type included
no shutdown
exit all
#**********************************End***************************************
#*********************Enabling_SNMP_V3***************************************
configure management snmp
snmpv3
no shutdown
exit all
#**********************************End***************************************
#*********************Configuring_SNMP_Access_Group************************
configure management snmp
access-group initial usm no-auth-no-priv
context-match prefix
exit all
#**********************************End***************************************
#**************************Configring_SNMP_Traps*****************************
configure management snmp
target-params p
message-processing-model snmpv3
version usm
security name initial level no-auth-no-priv
no shutdown
exit
target a
target-params p
tag-list unmasked
address udp-domain 172.17.176.35
no shutdown
exit
notify unmasked
tag unmasked
no shutdown
exit all
#**********************************End************************************
Standards
The control port complies with the EIA RS-232/ITU-T V.24 standards.
Functional Description
The supervisory port enables the preliminary configuration of the Megaplex-4.
After the preliminary configuration is completed, Megaplex-4 can also be
managed by the other means, for example, Telnet hosts and SNMP network
management stations.
The supervisory port has a DCE interface, and supports data rates in the range of
9.6 to 115.2 kbps.
The terminal control parameters determine the control port's baud rate,
password used for each control session, and availability of the fixed security
timeout.
The following parameters can be configured for the control ports:
• Data rate
• Security timeout
• Length of the screen from which you are accessing the device.
Note Terminal parameters can only be configured when using a terminal connection.
Factory Defaults
Megaplex-4 is supplied with the control port enabled. Other parameter defaults
are listed in the table below.
timeout 10
Enabling and defining a security timeout limited <timeout in minutes> Possible values are 0 to 60.
timeout (in minutes)
To specify the number of rows to length <number-of-rows> The number of rows can be 0,
display to indicate no limit on the
number of lines displayed, or
20.
For example:
Benefits
Configuring a dedicated management port eliminates the possibility of
management traffic reducing bandwidth and/or causing interruptions in the
traffic flow caused by the management.
Assigning short description to port name <string> Using no before name removes the name
Configuring collection of pm-collection interval <seconds> Note: You can enable PM statistics
performance management statistics collection for all Ethernet ports rather than
for the port, that are presented via enabling it for individual ports. In addition
the RADview Performance to enabling PM statistics collection for the
Management portal ports, it must be enabled for the device.
Refer to the Performance Management
section in the Monitoring and Diagnostics
chapter for details.
Factory Defaults
By default, the following users exist, with default password 1234:
• su
• tech
• user.
Notes • User passwords are stored in a database so that the system can perform
password verification when a user attempts to log in. To preserve
confidentiality of system passwords, the password verification data is typically
stored after a one-way hash function is applied to the password, in
combination with other data. When a user attempts to log in by entering a
password, the same function is applied to the entered value and the result is
compared with the stored value.
• A cryptographic hash function is a deterministic procedure that takes an
arbitrary block of data and returns a fixed-size bit string, the (cryptographic)
hash value, such that any change to the data changes the hash value.
To add another user with the same password using the hash function:
1. At the user prompt config>mngmnt> prompt, enter info.
The first user’s password’s hash value appears as illustrated below.
mp4100>config>mngmnt# info
user "staff1" level user password
"3fda26f8cff4123ddcad0c1bc89ed1e79977acef" hash
2. Define another user with the hashed password obtained from the info
output.
The second user is added and can log on with the text password defined
in step 1.
Example
To add a super user with a text password and access to all possible ways of
management:
• Specify the user name staff for the user level su.
• Assign the password 1234.
mp4100>config>mngmnt# user staff level su password 1234
# Password is encrypted successfully
Megaplex-4>config>mngmnt#
To add two new users with identical passwords using the hash function:
• Assign the user name staff1.
mp4100>config>mngmnt# logout
CLI session is closed
user>staff2
password>4222
mp4100#
This section explains how to view users currently logged on to the unit.
Megaplex-4>config>mngmnt#
Benefits
The service providers use the ACLs to maintain the network security by
preventing the malicious traffic from entering the device.
Functional Description
Devices featuring ACLs can flexibly filter management traffic, by denying or
permitting IP packets to enter entities in the device, according to the packet’s
source address, protocol type or other criteria.
ACL entries are sequentially numbered rules, or ACEs (Access Control Elements)
containing statements (Deny, Permit) and conditions. You can create up to 3 ACL
and up to 128 ACEs per system.
Packets are permitted or denied access, based on the following conditions:
• IP source address
• TCP and UDP port.
The ACL structure is illustrated in the Example section.
If there is a need to add a rule between already existing rules with consecutive
numbers, the rules can be interspaced to accommodate additional rules between
them.
Filtering
Packets attempting to enter an entity to which the ACL is bound are checked
against the access list rules, one by one. Access of matching packets is denied
(packets are dropped) or permitted, as directed by the ACL statement.
Packets matching a Deny statement (rule) are dropped unless permitted by a
previous rule.
Packets matching a Permit statement (rule) are permitted to access an entity
unless denied by a previous statement.
After a match, the rest of the rules are ignored. Packets not matching any rule
are dropped. Empty ACLs deny access of all packets matched to them.
Statistics
The device collects ACL statistics per management entity. The statistic counters
include the number of rule matches that occurred since the counters were last
cleared. The statistic counters are cleared upon device reboot. The user may also
clear ACL statistics of any entity and direction pair.
Factory Defaults
By default there are no ACL lists configured.
Configuring ACL
The ACL configuration tasks are performed at the access control and
management levels.
To configure an ACL:
1. Create an access control list.
2. Add deny and permit rules to the ACL.
3. Bind the ACL to a management entity
Access-Control-Level Tasks
The following commands are available in the CLI access-control context:
config>access-control#. The exception to this are the deny and permit
commands, which are performed in the access-list(acl_name) context:
configure>access-control>access-list(acl_name)#.
Creating and access-list <acl_name> You can create up to 3 ACLs per system.
deleting an ACL no access-list <acl_name> Creating an ACL is performed by assigning
a name. The ACL names must be unique
and contain up to 252 alphanumeric
characters.
Adding deny deny {tcp | udp} <src-address>[<src-port- Management-bound ACLs have the
rules to an ACL range>] <dst-address>[<dst-port>] [log] following configuration limitations:
[sequence <sequence-number>] • <src-port-range> must be any port –
do not indicate specific ports
• The destination IP address (<dst-
address>) must be any
• The destination port must be tcp/23
(Telnet), tcp/22 (SSH) or udp/161
(SNMP)
Sequence number range is 1–
2147483648.
log – not in use in the current version
Adding permit permit {tcp | udp} <src-address>[<src-port- Management-bound ACLs have the
rules to an ACL range>] <dst-address> [<dst-port-range>] following configuration limitations:
[log] [sequence <sequence-number>] • <src-port-range> must be any port –
do not indicate specific ports
• The destination IP address (<dst-
address>) must be any
• The destination port must be tcp/23
(Telnet), tcp/22 (SSH) or udp/161
(SNMP)
Sequence number range is 1–
2147483648.
log – not in use in the current version
Setting the logging access-list <value> Enable logging at the maximum rate of the
logging interval no logging access-list value set at Access Control level.
of all ACLs no logging access-list disables event
logging for all rules in the ACL.
Management-Level Tasks
The following commands are available in the CLI management context:
configure>management>access#.
Binding the ACL to a access-group <acl-name> in The management entity supports the ACLs
management entity no access-group only in the in direction.
Displaying ACL statistics show access-list statistics See Displaying Statistics below.
Displaying the summary show access-list summary Displays ACL status at the current level
of ACLs bound to a See Displaying Status below
management entity
Example
To create an ACL:
The example below illustrates a typical ACL applied to the incoming management
traffic:
• Allows SNMP (UDP port 161) traffic from source 172.17.170.81/32
• Allows SSH (TCP port 22) traffic from source 172.17.170.81/32
• Allows Telnet (TCP port 23) traffic from source 172.17.170.81/32
configure
access-control
access-list mng1
permit udp 172.17.170.81/32 any 161 sequence 1
permit tcp 172.17.170.81/32 any 22 sequence 2
permit tcp 172.17.170.81/32 any 23 sequence 3
Note
You cannot edit a rule with the same sequence number. To edit a rule, delete the
existing one and create a new rule with a new sequence number.
The table below summarizes the rules configured for the ACL. Items in red are
either implied or unavailable for the current parameter or serve as system
settings that cannot be changed.
Displaying Status
The ACL status displays information on the ACL name, type (IPv4), the entity that
the ACL is bound to and its direction. The status information is available for the
ACLs at the management access levels.
Displaying Statistics
The ACL statistic counters gather information on the number of rule matches
registered on the ACL since the last reboot or counter clearing.
Note All ACLs have an implied last rule that denies all packets. The device does not
provide statistic counters for this rule. If you intend to collect statistics on the
number of the packets discarded by the default ACL mechanism, you must add
the deny ip any any rule at the end of the ACL.
Standards
This section states the standards that the supported SNMP versions are based
on.
• RFC 1901, Introduction to Community-Based SNMPv2. SNMPv2 Working
Group.
• RFC 1902, Structure of Management Information for Version 2 of the Simple
Network Management Protocol (SNMPv2). SNMPv2 Working Group.
• RFC 1903, Textual Conventions for Version 2 of the Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMPv2). SNMPv2 Working Group.
• RFC 1904, Conformance Statements for Version 2 of the Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMPv2). SNMPv2 Working Group.
• RFC 1905, Protocol Operations for Version 2 of the Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMPv2). SNMPv2 Working Group.
• RFC 1906, Transport Mappings for Version 2 of the Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMPv2).
• RFC 1907, Management Information Base for Version 2 of the Simple
Network Management Protocol (SNMPv2). SNMPv2 Working Group.
• RFC 1908, Coexistence between Version 1 and Version 2 of the Internet-
standard Network Management Framework. SNMPv2 Working Group.
• RFC 2104, Keyed Hashing for Message Authentication.
Benefits
The SNMP protocol allows you to remotely manage multiple units from a central
work station using RADview EMS. RADview EMS offers a graphical user interface
that resembles the front panel of your unit with its interfaces and LEDs.
Megaplex-4 supports SNMPv3, which allows data to be collected securely from
SNMP devices. Confidential information such as SNMP commands can thus be
encrypted to prevent unauthorized parties from being able to access them.
Functional Description
In an SNMP configuration, one or more administrative computers manage a group
of hosts or devices. Each managed system continuously executes a software
component called agent, which reports information via SNMP back to the
managing systems.
get_request
get_response
get_next_request
get_response
set_request
Megaplex Unit
(MIB, SNMP Agent)
Work Station with get_response
RADview
(SNMP Manager)
traps
Figure 4-10. SNMP Network Scheme
The SNMP agent contains MIB variables whose values the SNMP manager can
request or change. A manager receives/transmits a value from/to an agent. The
agent gathers data from the MIB (Management Information Base). A MIB module
is actually the ‘store’ for data on network and device parameters. In addition, the
agent may set or get data according to manager commands. Commands are used
to send and receive data as follows:
• get. Retrieving specific management information.
• get-next. Retrieving management information via traversal
• set. Manipulating management information.
• get-response. Sent by an agent to respond to any of the above.
• trap. Messages on events such as improper authentication, link status,
loss/restoration of connections etc, sent by the agent to notify the manager
of the current conditions.
Community Octet string Variable Community String. Identifies the SNMP community in which
the sender and recipient of this message are located. This
is used to implement the simple SNMP community-based
security mechanism.
PDU -- Variable Protocol Data Unit. The PDU is communicated at the body
of the message.
0 16 32
Version Number = 0
Community String
0 16 32
Message Identifier
Context Engine ID
Context Name
Scoped PDU
PDU Control Fields
0 4 8
Privacy Authen-
Reportable tication
Reserved Flag Flag
Flag
(Priv)
(Auth)
Msg Version Integer 4 Message Version Number. Describes the SNMP version
number of this message; used for ensuring compatibility
between versions. For SNMPv3, this value is 3.
Msg Max Size Integer 4 Maximum Message Size. The maximum size of message that
the sender of this message can receive. Minimum value of
this field is 484.
Msg Flags Octet String 1 Message Flags. A set of flags tcontrols processing the
message. the substructure of this field is illustrated in
Table 4-7.
Msg Security Integer 4 Message Security Model. An integer value indicating which
Model security model was used for this message. For the user-
based security model (default), this value is 3.
Msg Security -- Variable Message Security Parameters. A set of fields that contain
Parameter parameters required to implement the respective security
model for this message. The contents of this field are
specified in every document that describes an SNMPv3
security model. For example, the parameters for the user-
based model are defined in RFC 3414.
Scoped PDU -- Variable Scoped PDU. Contains the PDU to be transmitted along
with parameters that identify an SNMP context, which
describes a set of management information accessible by a
particular entity. The PDU is referred to as ‘scoped’
because it is applied within the scope of this context. This
field may or may not be encrypted, depending on the value
of the Private Flag. The structure of the PDU field is
illustrated in Table 4-8.
Reportable Flag 1/8 (1 bit) Reportable Flag. If set to 1, a device receiving this message has
to return a Report-PDU whenever conditions arise that require
such a PDU to be generated.
Priv Flag 1/8 (1 bit) Privacy Flag. If set to 1, it indicates that the message was
encrypted to ensure its privacy.
Auth Flag 1/8 (1 bit) Authentication Flag. If set to 1, it indicates that authentication
was used to protect the authenticity of this message.
Context Engine ID Octet String Variable Context Engine ID. Used to identify to which
application the PDU will be sent for processing.
Context Name Octet String Variable Context Name. An object identifier specifying the
particular context associated with this PDU.
access to certain parts of the MIB-2 tree, while allowing read-only access to
the remaining parts of the tree.
SNMPv3 Components
SNMPv3 consists of components that deal with receiving/issuing requests,
generating traps etc. These commands are listed and explained below.
• Command generator. Generates the Get, Get-Next, Get-Bulk requests, Set
requests, and processes the responses. This application is implemented by an
NMS to issue queries and set requests against entities on routers, switches,
Unix hosts etc.
• Command responder. Responds to Get, Get-Next, Get-Bulk requests. The
command responder is implemented by the SNMP agent.
• Notification originator. Generates SNMP traps and notifications. This
application is implemented by an entity on a router or host.
• Proxy forwarder. Facilitates the passing of messages between entities.
RFC 2571 allows additional applications to be defined over time, which is a
significant advantage over the older SNMP versions. The figure below illustrates
how the components fit together creating an entity.
SNMP Entity
Message Access
Dispatcher Security
Processing Control
Subsystem
Subsystem Subsystem
SNMPv3 Components
Factory Defaults
By default, SNMPv1 is enabled. SNMPv2c and SNMPv3 are disabled.
Note If you use the CL.2 protection, the SNMP engine ID must be identical for both the
working card and the protection card, which means that you have to assign the
same MAC address or IP address etc. to both cards.
Enabling SNMPv3
To enable/disable SNMPv3:
• To enable the SNMPv3 engine, at the config>mngmnt>snmp# prompt, enter
snmpv3.
The SNMPv3 engine is enabled.
• To disable the SNMPv3 engine, at the config>mngmnt>snmp# prompt, enter
no snmpv3.
The SNMPv3 engine is disabled.
Adding a user who user <security-name> • security name. The user specific security
authenticates using the [md5-auth [{des|none}]] name, consisting of up to 32 alphanumeric
MD5 protocol. characters.
• md5-auth. MD5 authentication protocol.
• des. Using the DES privacy protocol.
• none. No privacy protocol used.
To deactivate a user:
1. At the config>mngmnt>snmp# prompt, enter user <security name>.
The config>mngmnt>snmp>user(<security name>)# prompt appears.
2. Enter shutdown.
The user is deactivated but remains available.
Defining the trap source trap-source-address <IP Using no before trap-source-address disables
address address> the address.
If the trap source address is not defined, the
traps will be sent with the following source
addresses:
• if the loopback interface is defined (see
Configuring the Management Router in
Chapter 8), the traps will be sent with the
loopback interface IP address.
• if the loopback interface is not defined, the
traps will be sent with the Interface 1 IP
address.
Defining an access access-group <group-name> {snmpv1 • group name. Identifies the access
group |snmpv2c | usm} {no-auth-no-priv | group.
auth-no-priv | auth-priv} • snmpv1, snmpv2c, usm. Security
model for the SNMP messages.
• usm. User based security model
• no-auth-no-priv. Authorization and
privacy are disabled, lowest level of
security for generating SNMP
messages.
• auth-no-priv. Authorization enabled,
privacy disabled.
• auth- priv. Authorization and privacy
disabled, highest level of security for
generating SNMP messages.
Linking a user to a security security-to-group {any | snmpv1 | snmpv2c | • security name. The user
model usm} sec-name {security-name} specific security name.
• snmpv1, snmpv2c, usm.
Security model for the
SNMP messages as
explained previously.
• any. Any security model is
allowed for the relevant
access group.
Setting up a View
To define a view:
• At the config>mngmnt>snmp# prompt, enter parameters as illustrated and
explained below.
The mngmnt>snmp>view(<view name>/<subtree OID>)# prompt appears.
Specifying the SNMPv3 security name sec-name <sec-name> sec-name. Free text, consisting of
to be mapped to the SNMPv1/SNMPv2 up to 32 alphanumeric characters
community name
Specifying a set of the transport tag <transport-tag> As defined for each target
endpoints that are used in either of
the following methods:
• Specifying the transport endpoints
from which an SNMP entity accepts
management requests.
• Specifying the transport endpoints
to which a notification may be sent,
using the community string
matching the corresponding
instance of community name.
Configuring Targets
A target is a network management station to which Megaplex-4 should send trap
notifications over SNMPv3. A set of parameters must be configured and assigned
to each target. Then, each target must have a valid IP address and IP mask. In
addition, a previously configured parameter set and notification tags must be
assigned to the target.
To configure a target, you have to first configure a parameter set that you will
have to attach to the relevant target when it is being configured.
Specifying the SNMP version version { snmpv1 | snmpv2c | usm} • usm. User based
(security model) security model
Identifying the address udp-domain <0.0.0.0..255.255.255.255> You have to enter the domain
target NMS address oam-domain <oam-port> and the IP address or the OAM
port, depending on whether
the target NMS belongs to a
UDP domain or an OAM
domain.
To set up communities:
• Make sure that SNMPv3 is disabled and at the
Megaplex-4>config>mngmnt>snmp# prompt, define the desired community
as illustrated and explained below.
Note
The names you assign to the communities are case sensitive.
Associating traps with the bind {<trap name> or <list of traps names>} You can associate
notification entry one or more traps to
the notification
entry
To disable notification:
• At the config>mngmnt>snmp# prompt, enter no notify <notify_name>.
The notification is disabled.
Defining if the notification filter includes type {included|excluded} • included. The subtrees defined by
or excludes specific notifications. sub-tree-oid are included in the
notification profile.
• excluded. The listed subtrees by
sub-tree-oid excluded from the
notification profile.
Assigning a name to the notification profile-name <name> Refers to the name of the profile
profile itself
4.10 Managers
This section explains how to add and remove managers. You can add up to 10
managers.
To add a manager:
1. At the config# prompt, enter manager.
The config>mngmnt# prompt appears.
2. At the config>mngmnt# prompt, enter manager <0.0.0.0..255.255.255.255>.
The specified manager has been added and the
config>mngmnt>manager <0.0.0.0..255.255.255.255> prompt appears
displaying the IP address of the manager you just added.
Factory Defaults
By default, access is enabled via Telnet, SSH, and SNMP.
Configuring Access
Follow the instructions below to enable/disable access via Telnet, SSH or SNMP. In
addition, you have to configure the access policy.
Factory Defaults
By default, authentication is via the locally stored database (1st-level local).
Specifying authentication method auth-policy 1st-level radius [2nd-level Megaplex-4 first attempts authentication via
preferably via RADIUS/TACACS+, then tacacs+ [3rd-level {local | none}]] the server specified by 1st-level. If the
optionally TACACS+/RADIUS, then auth-policy 1st-level tacacs+ [2nd-level server does not answer the authentication
optionally local radius [3rd-level {local | none}]] request, then Megaplex-4 attempts to
authenticate via the server specified by
2nd-level. If the server does not answer the
authentication request, then Megaplex-4
attempts to authenticate according to
3rd-level:
• local – Megaplex-4 authenticates via the
local database
• none –No further authentication is
done, and the authentication request is
rejected.
Note: If at any time in this process, an
authentication server rejects an
authentication request, Megaplex-4 ends
the authentication process and does not
attempt authentication at the next level.
Specifying authentication method auth-policy 1st-level tacacs+ [2nd-level { If 2nd-level is set to local, authentication is
preferably via TACACS+, then local | none } ] performed via the TACACS server. If the
optionally local TACACS server does not answer the
authentication request, then Megaplex-4
authenticates via the local database. .If the
TACACS server rejects the authentication
request, Megaplex-4 ends the
authentication process.
If 2nd-level is set to none, authentication is
performed via the TACACS server only.
Standards
RFC 2865, Remote Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS).
RFC 2618, RADIUS Authentication Client MIB.
Benefits
The RADIUS protocol allows centralized authentication and access control,
avoiding the need of maintaining a local user database on each device on the
network.
Because of its generic nature, the RADIUS protocol can easily be used by service
providers and enterprises to manage access to the Internet, internal networks,
wireless networks, and integrated e-mail services. These networks may
incorporate DSL, access points, VPNs, network ports etc.
Functional Description
A work station attempts to log on to a Megaplex unit, which in turn submits an
authentication request to the RADIUS server.
The password is not transmitted over the network. A hash code is generated over
it instead and a previously defined shared secret (string of free text) between the
RADIUS server and the Megaplex unit is transmitted.
Verifying credentials and privileges via RADIUS data base
Network
Logging on to Megaplex-4 or
returning authentication error Megaplex-4
RADIUS Server
Management Work Station Access accepted or denied
Shared Secret
The RADIUS server verifies the user information against a database stored at the
RADIUS server. The RADIUS server replies in one of the following ways:
• Access Rejected. Access to all resources denied.
• Access Accepted. Access to the requested network resources granted.
Factory Defaults
This section explains how to define and configure a RADIUS server, activate and
de-activate it.
Task Command
mp4100>config>mngmnt>radius#
Standards
RFC 1492, An Access Control Protocol, sometimes called TACACS.
Benefits
The TACACS+ protocol allows centralized authentication and access control,
avoiding the need to maintain a local user data base on each device on the
network. The TACACS+ server encrypts the entire body of the packet but leaves a
standard TACACS+ header.
Factory Defaults
By default, no TACACS+ servers are defined. When the TACACS+ server is first
defined, it is configured as shown below.
retry 1
timeout 5 seconds
authentication-port 49
accounting-port 49
Functional Description
TACACS+ is a protocol that provides access control for routers, network access
servers and other networked computing devices via one or more centralized
servers. TACACS+ is based on AAA model:
• Authentication – The action of determining who a user is.
• Authorization – The action of determining what a user is allowed to do. It can
be used to customize the service for the particular user.
• Accounting – The action of recording what a user is doing, and/or has done.
The TACACS+ client can be configured to use authentication/authorization with or
without accounting functionality.
Components
The TACACS+ remote access environment has three major components: access
client, TACACS+ client, and TACACS+ server.
• The access client is an entity which seeks the services offered by the
network.
• TACACS+ client running on Megaplex-4, processes the requests from the
access client and pass this data to TACACS+ server for authentication.
• The TACACS+ server authenticates the request, and authorizes services over
the connection. The TACACS+ server does this by matching data from the
TACACS+ client`s request with entries in a trusted database.
TACACS+ server decides whether to accept or reject the user's authentication or
authorization. Based on this response from the TACACS+ server, the TACACS+
client decides whether to establish the user's connection or terminate the user's
connection attempt. The TACACS+ client also sends accounting data to the
TACACS+ server to record in a trusted database.
TACACS+ uses TCP for its transport and encrypts the body of each packet.
TACACS+ client and server can agree to use any port for authentication and
accounting. TACACS+ supports authentication by using a user name and a fixed
password.
Accounting
Megaplex-4 supports up to five accounting groups, with up to five TACACS+
servers per group. However, each TACACS+ server can be bound to a single
accounting group only.
A group can be defined with its own accounting level:
• Shell accounting, which logs the following events:
Successful logon
Logon failure
Successful logoff
Megaplex-4-terminated management session.
• System accounting, which records system events/alarms registered in local
log file
• Command accounting, which logs the following events:
Any shell command that was successfully executed by Megaplex-4
Any level that was successfully changed in a shell.
Defining a non-disclosed string (shared key <string> [hash] The shared secret is a secret
secret) used to encrypt the user key consisting of free text
password known to the client and the
server for encryption. It is
hashed if specified.
Note You can enter any combination of shell, system, and commands, but you must
enter at least one of them.
mp4100>config>mngmnt>tacacsplus>group(TAC1)$ exit
mp4100>config>mngmnt>tacacsplus# server 175.18.172.150
mp4100>config>mngmnt>tacacsplus>server(175.18.172.150)# group TAC1
mp4100>config>mngmnt>tacacsplus>server(175.18.172.150)# info detail
key "244055BF667B8F89829AB8AB0FE50885" hash
retry 1
timeout 5
authentication-port 49
accounting-port 49
group "TAC1"
no shutdown
Displaying Statistics
To display TACACS+ statistics:
• At the config>mngmnt>tacacsplus>server <ip-address># prompt, type:
show statistics.
The TACACS+ statistic counters are displayed.
mp4100>config>mngmnt>tacacsplus>server(175.18.172.150)$ show statistics
Requests 0
Request Timeouts 0
Unexpected Responses 0
Server Error Responses 0
Incorrect Responses 0
Transaction Successes 0
Transaction Failures 0
Pending Requests 0
Counter Description
Request Timeouts Number of transaction timeouts that occurred between the client and
server
Counter Description
Unexpected Responses Number of times the TACACS+ client receives a TACACS+ packet that is
not expected at that time. Usually, this occurs due to a delayed response
to a request that has already timed out
Server Error Responses Number of errors received from the TACACS+ server
Transaction Failures Number of times the TACACS+ client’s request is aborted by the TACACS+
server or the server fails to respond after maximum retry is exceeded
Pending Requests Number of TACACS+ client’s requests minus number of TACACS+ server
responses or timeouts
Enabling TACACS+ accounting for the accounting [shell] [system] Accounting can be of any
group [commands] combination
no accounting disables
TACACS+ accounting for the
group
Standards
IEEE 802.1X
Benefits
Secured access to the customer network.
Factory Defaults
The parameter defaults are listed in the table below.
authenticator
supplicant
Functional Description
Components
802.1X authentication involves three parties: a supplicant, an authenticator, and
an authentication server.
• The supplicant is a client device that wishes to attach to the LAN.
• The authenticator is a network device, such as an Ethernet switch or wireless
access point.
• The authentication server is typically a host running software supporting
the RADIUS and EAP protocols.
The authenticator acts like a security guard to a protected network. The
supplicant (i.e. the client device) is not allowed access through the authenticator
to the protected side of the network until the supplicant’s identity has been
validated and authorized.
With 802.1X port-based authentication, the supplicant provides credentials, such
as user name/password, to the authenticator, and the authenticator forwards the
credentials to the authentication server for verification. If the authentication
server determines the credentials are valid, the supplicant (client device) is
allowed to access resources located on the protected side of the network.
EAPOL operates at the network layer on top of the data link layer, and
in Ethernet II framing protocol has an EtherType value of 0x888E.
Radius Frames
Authentication
EAPOL Frames Radius Server
Initiation: PSN
EAPOL Request/Response
Megaplex-4 Megaplex-4
RV EMS
Server
The following commands are available in the autenticator level, at the config>
port ethernet (<slot><port>)dot1x>authenticator# prompt.
The following commands are available in the supplicant level, at the config> port
ethernet(<slot><port>) dot1x > supplicant# prompt.
Note
In order for 802.1x access control to function properly, the relevant Ethernet
ports must be associated with an L2CP profile that specifies peer action for MAC
01-80-C2-00-00-03.
Example
The example below illustrates the 802.1X protocol operation.
• Authenticators: ports of M-ETH module installed in MP 1 slot 2
• Supplicant: CL-A/1 port of MP 2
• All the authenticator/supplicant parameters are at their defaults.
############# MP-Authenticator M-ETH Vs. MP - Supplicant ########
####### using Radius EAP Authentication method = EAP-MDS #####
#############################################################################
server 1
address 172.18.92.219
auth-port 1812
key ALPHA
no shutdown
exit all
conf bridge 1
vlan 100
tagged-egress 1,3,21,22,23,24,25,26,27,28
exit all
configure qos
queue-group-profile qg1
queue-block 1/1
exit
queue-block 0/1
bind queue 0 queue-block 1/1
exit all
commit
#############################################################################
############2nd script MP-Supplicant cl-a/1 #port ########################
#############################################################################
configure qos
queue-group-profile qg1
queue-block 1/1
exit
queue-block 0/1
bind queue 0 queue-block 1/1
exit all
conf bridge 1
vlan 100
tagged-egress 1,2
exit all
Displaying Statistics
To display 802.1X statistics:
1. Navigate to configure port ethernet <slot>/<port> dot1x context.
2. Type: show statistics.
The 802.1X statistic counters are displayed.
Counter Description
Rx Length Error Frames Number of EAPOL frames with wrong length received
Rx Unavailable Frames Number of EAPOL frames discarded due to unavailable virtual port
Last Rx Frame Source Source MAC address of last received EAPOL frame
4.16 Syslog
Megaplex-4 uses the Syslog protocol to generate and transport event notification
messages over IP networks to Syslog servers.
Benefits
The Syslog protocol collects heterogeneous data into a single data repository. It
provides system administrators with a single point of management for collecting,
distributing and processing audit data. Syslog standardizes log file formats,
making it easier to examine log data with various standard tools. Data logging can
be used for:
• Long-term auditing
• Intrusion detection
• Tracking user and administrator activity
Factory Defaults
By default, Syslog operation is disabled. When enabled, the default parameters
are as follows:
facility local1
port 514
severity-level informational
Functional Description
The Syslog protocol provides an instrument for generating and transporting event
notification messages from Megaplex-4 to the server across IP networks.
Mess
ages
Megaplex-4100
PSN
Syslog
Server
ages
Mess
Megaplex-4100
Elements
A typical Syslog topology includes message senders (devices) and message
receivers (servers). Megaplex-4 supports up to 5 Syslog servers. The receiver
displays, stores or forwards logged information. The standard designates two
types of receivers:
• Relay, which forwards messages
• Collector which displays and stores messages.
Transport Protocol
Syslog uses User Datagram Protocol (UDP) for its transport. The UDP port that
has been assigned to Syslog is 514, but devices and servers can agree to use any
port for communication.
Message Format
The length of a Syslog message is 1024 bytes or less. It contains the following
information:
• Facility and severity (see below)
• Host name or IP address of the device
• Timestamp
• Message content.
A typical Syslog message looks like this: <145>Jan 15 13:24:07 172.17.160.69
Eth 1: Loss of signal (LOS)
4 Warning Event
Syslog Configuration
When configuring Syslog parameters, it is necessary to define Syslog device and
servers.
Defining severity level severity-level { emergency | alert | The log messages that contain
critical | error | warning | notice | severity level above or equal the
informational | debug} specified level are transmitted
Parameter Description
Defining Syslog server UDP port for port <udp-port-number> Range 1–65535
communication Port configuration is allowed
only if a Syslog server is
administratively disabled
For example:
• Server IP address: 178.16.173.152
• UDP port: 155
mp-4100# configure system syslog server 1
mp-4100>config>system>syslog(server/1)#
mp-4100>config>system>syslog(server/1)# address 178.16.173.152
mp-4100>config>system>syslog(server/1)# port 155
mp-4100>config>system>syslog(server/1)# no shutdown
Profiles
Most traffic processing features are defined by creating and applying various
profiles. Profiles comprise sets of attributes related to a specific service entity.
Profiles must be defined prior to other managed objects.
Shaper Queue, queue block Defines CIR, CBS, EIR and EBS 30
parameter
Queue block Queue block within Defines queue block parameters 128
queue group (queues, scheduling scheme,
weights)
Physical Ports
Services provided by Megaplex-4100/4104 are based on its physical ports. These
ports are located on the following modules (which can sometimes be
interchangeable in providing specific services):
• SDH/SONET –CL.2
• GbE – CL.2, M-ETH
Logical Ports
Logical ports maintained by Megaplex-4 do not have physical port attributes and
serve different purposes, depending on the module and on the service provided
by the module/system physical ports. The following logical ports exist:
• Switched Virtual Interface (SVI) located on CL.2 modules and used for binding
flows to bridge ports, router interfaces or Layer-2 TDM pseudowires. SVIs
serve as intermediaries for bridges and routers, which must comply with
standards of their own (VLAN domains for bridge ports or IP address for
router interfaces) and. They also serve as aggregation points for TDM PWs
• VCG, GFP and HDLC ports located on CL.2 modules and used for efficient
transport of Ethernet traffic over the SDH/SONET network. GFP and HDLC
ports are mapped either directly to the physical layer or to VCG. In the latter
case, the binding is done in two stages and the VCG is further bound to the
physical layer.
• VCG and GFP ports located on T3 modules and used for efficient transport of
Ethernet traffic over the T1/T3 networks. GFP ports are mapped either
directly to the physical layer or to VCG. In the latter case, the binding is done
in two stages and the VCG is further bound to the physical layer.
• VCG and GFP ports located on VS-16E1T1-EoP modules and used for efficient
transport of Ethernet traffic over the E1/T1 networks. VCG ports are bound
directly to GFP.
• HDLC, MLPPP and PPP ports used for efficient transport of Ethernet traffic
over E1/T1. HDLC ports defined on located on M8E1, M8T1 and M8SL
modules and are bound to the physical layer. MLPPP and PPP ports exist only
on M8E1 and M8SL modules; PPP ports are bound to the physical layer,
serving an intermediary to MLPPP ports. MLPPP and HDLC ports are connected
to Ethernet media via Logical MAC ports.
• Logical MAC ports located on CL.2, T3, VS-16E1T1-EoP and M8E1/M8T1/M8SL
modules used to describe and map the Ethernet traffic passing over different
media (E1/T1, T3, SDH/SONET, etc) and representing the MAC layer of the
entity. Logical MAC ports are bound to a GFP, HDLC or MLPPP ports, which, in
its turn, are bound to the physical layer.
Forwarding Entities
Several internal entities carry traffic and make forwarding and switching
decisions. These are:
• Flows – the main traffic-carrying elements
• Bridge – traffic-forwarding element for Layer-2 E-LAN services
• Router – traffic-forwarding element for Layer-3 services.
Flows
Flows interconnect two physical or logical ports and are the main traffic-carrying
elements in Megaplex-4 architecture. You can use classifier profiles to specify the
criteria for flows. The classification is per port and is applied to the ingress port
of the flow.
Flows defined in Megaplex-4100/4104 can be unidirectional (between
physical/logical ports) or bidirectional (between physical/logic ports and brigde
ports of CL modules).
Note Bridge ports in M-ETH modules are bound directly (without using flows).
Bridge
The bridge is a forwarding entity used by Megaplex-4 for delivering E-LAN services
in multipoint-to-multipoint topology and G.8032 ring protection. With up to 11
bridge instances, Megaplex-4 provides up to 170 bridge ports, subdivided as
follows:
• 80 ports on the CL.2 bridge
• 9 ports per M-ETH module bridge (8 external + 1 internal) – maximum 90
ports per chassis.
The bridge uses bridge ports for connecting to logical and physical ports.
The bridge is defined by a bridge number, bridge ports and a VLAN membership
table that specifies which bridge ports are members in a certain broadcast
domain (VLAN). The bridge supports one level of VLAN editing on ingress and one
level on egress. The editing is performed at the flow level.
Router
The Megaplex-4 router is an internal Layer-3 interworking device that forwards
traffic between its interfaces. Each router interface is assigned an IP address and
can be bound to one of the following:
• Physical/logical E1/T1/DS1-opt (via DTS) or SDH/SONET (via DCC) port
• SVI port connected via flow to a bridge port (which provides access to any
Ethernet-type physical/logical port)
The router uses switched virtual interfaces (SVIs) for connecting to logical and
physical ports. The connection is always made by directing flows from a port to
an SVI, and then binding the SVI to a router interface.
TDM (E1/T1) and Ethernet service aggregation over copper/fiber lines into
SDH/SONET and PSN backbone (TDM to TDM, Ethernet to PSN)
TDM (E1/T1) and Ethernet service aggregation over copper/fiber lines into
PSN backbone
Ethernet service aggregation over copper/fiber lines into PSN.
Voice aggregation to T3 backbones.
• Cross-connect services:
Legacy (Voice, serial, ISDN) services cross-connect for interbranch
connectivity
Multiplexing any traffic (Legacy/TDM/Ethernet) for cross-connect services.
T3 traffic to SONET (via T1 x-connect).
Transportation and utility services provided by Megaplex-4 include:
• TDM- and Ethernet service aggregation to SDH/SONET backbones
• Legacy and new Ethernet-based service aggregation to SDH/SONET and PSN
backbones (keeping mission-critical services towards the TDM backbone)
• Legacy and new Ethernet-based service aggregation to PSN backbones
• Resilient ring topology for legacy and Ethernet services with minimal
downtime
• Teleprotection over SDH/SONET.
Selected services from the above list are summarized in Table 5-2 and schematic
diagrams in Figure 5-1 to Figure 5-7. Modules shown in diagrams as examples are
listed in Table 5-2 in bold. If you want to draw a diagram for a specific service
provided by another module, you can use the relevant elements of sample
services to draw a service of your own.
1a TDM (E1) service aggregation over copper OP-108C, OP-34C, Figure 5-1 Figure 5-13
lines into SDH/SONET backbone (via direct ASMi-54C/N, M16E1, Table 5-3
transparent mapping) M16T1, VS-16E1T1-EoP
1b TDM (E1/T1) service aggregation over OP-108C, OP-34C, Figure 5-1 Figure 5-14
copper lines into SDH/SONET backbone ASMi-54C/N, M8E1, M8T1, Table 5-4
(via DS0 mapping) M16E1, M16T1, VS-
16E1T1-EoP
2a TDM (E1/T1) service aggregation over OP-108C, OP-34C Figure 5-1 Figure 5-15
fiber lines into PSN backbone Table 5-5
2b Ethernet service aggregation over fiber OP-108C, OP-34C, Figure 5-1 Figure 5-16
lines into PSN backbone ASMi-54C/N, ASMi-54C, Table 5-6
MPW-1, M8E1, M8T1, M8SL
3 Fast Ethernet service aggregation to OP-108C, OP-34C, Figure 5-2 Figure 5-17
SDH/SONET backbones ASMi-54C/N, ASMi-54C, Table 5-7
MPW-1, M8E1, M8T1,
M16E1, M16T1
3a TDM (E1) service aggregation over copper ASMi-54C/N Figure 5-2 Figure 5-19
lines into PSN backbone Table 5-9
3b Ethernet service aggregation over copper ASMi-54C/N, ASMi-54C Figure 5-2 Figure 5-20
lines into PSN backbone Table 5-10
3c Shared E-LAN service with multiple drops M-ETH Figure 5-3 Figure 5-18
per node over SDH/SONET Table 5-8
4a High-Speed service aggregation to Fast HS-6N/12N + MPW-1 Figure 5-4 Figure 5-22
Ethernet Table 5-12
4b High-Speed service aggregation into PSN HS-6N/12N + MPW-1 Figure 5-4 Figure 5-22
backbone Table 5-12
4c High-Speed service aggregation into PSN HS-6N/12N, MPW-1 Figure 5-5 Figure 5-24
backbone with G.8032 protection Table 5-14
5a Fast Ethernet service aggregation to M8E1, M8T1, M8SL Figure 5-7 Figure 5-25
E1/T1 links Table 5-15
5b Fast Ethernet service aggregation to M8E1, M8SL Figure 5-7 Figure 5-26
multiple E1 links Table 5-16
6a Voice service aggregation into PSN VS Voice Figure 5-8 Figure 5-28
backbone Table 5-18
10a Ethernet traffic over PDH to SDH/SONET VS-16E1T1-EoP Figure 5-12 Figure 5-32
Table 5-22
10b Ethernet traffic over PDH to TDM (E1/T1) VS-16E1T1-EoP Figure 5-12 Figure 5-33
Table 5-23
M8E1/T1
M16E1/T1, VS-16E1T1-EoP
OR E1
1a
CL.2 TP
1b
HS-12N
ETH
VCAT GFP L.MAC
Engine
OP-108C
2a
E1i E1
Mux-ETH-
TDM
Int- ETH
PSN GbE 2b
ETH
ETH
TDM (E1/T1) service aggregation over copper lines into SDH/SONET backbone (via ASMi-54C/N
direct transparent mapping)
TDM (E1/T1) service aggregation over copper lines into SDH/SONET backbone (via DS0
mapping)
Ethernet service aggregation over fiber lines into PSN backbone MPW-1
TDM (E1/T1) service aggregation over fiber lines into PSN backbone
M8E1/T1
M16E1/T1
Voice
CL.2
TP
ETH
VCAT GFP L.MAC
Engine
ASMi-54C/N
3
E1i E1
SHDSL
PCS ETH
PSN GbE
3b
ETH
OP-108C
Fast Ethernet service aggregation to SDH/SONET backbones
TDM (E1) service aggregation over copper lines into PSN backbone
Ethernet service aggregation over copper lines into PSN backbone MPW-1
M8E1/T1
M16E1/T1
CL.2 VC-4/4A/8/8A/16
VC-4/OMNI
L.MAC
M-ETH
ETH ETH
VCAT GFP L.MAC Engine Engine
3c
GbE
PSN
ASMi-54C/N
OP-108C
Shared E-LAN service with multiple drops per node over SDH/SONET
MPW-1
M8E1/T1
M16E1/T1
Voice
CL.2
TP
SDH/ SDH/SONET SDH/SONET DS0
E1-i/T1-i
SONET Link X-Connect X-Connect 4
Serial
ETH HS-12N
VCAT GFP L.MAC
Engine
4b ASMi-54C/N
PSN GbE 4a
OP-108C
PW
Router SVI
MPW-1
DS1
PW
X-Connect
High-Speed service aggregation to SDH/SONET backbones PW
High-Speed service aggregation to Fast Ethernet
High-Speed service aggregation into PSN backbone ETH
M8E1/T1
M16E1/T1
Voice
CL.2
TP
SDH/ SDH/SONET SDH/SONET DS0
E1-i/T1-i
SONET Link X-Connect X-Connect
Serial
ETH HS-12N
VCAT GFP L.MAC
Engine
East 4c ASMi-54C/N
GbE
PSN
West
GbE
OP-108C
PW
Router SVI
MPW-1
DS1
PW
X-Connect
PW
E1/T1
Voice
CL.2
TP
SDH/ SDH/SONET SDH/SONET DS0
E1-i/T1-i
SONET Link X-Connect X-Connect
Serial
4f ASMi-54C/N
ETH
VCAT GFP L.MAC
Engine
OP-108C
PSN GbE
VS
PW Serial
Router SVI
4d
DS1
PW
X-Connect
High-Speed service aggregation to SDH/SONET backbones 4e
PW
High-Speed service aggregation to Fast Ethernet
High-Speed service aggregation into PSN backbone ETH
M8E1/T1
5a
HDLC E1/T1
ETH L.MAC
CL.2
VC-4/4A/8/8A/16, VC-4/OMNI
VS voice
SDH/SONET SDH/SONET DS0
SDH/ E1-i/T1-i Voice
Link X-Connect X-Connect
SONET 6
M8E1
5b
PPP E1
ETH MLPPP
VCAT GFP L.MAC
Engine
ETH L.MAC
GbE
PSN
TP
M16E1/T1
ASMi-54C/N
MPW-1
CL.2
ETH
VCAT GFP L.MAC
Engine
6a
GbE VS Voice
PSN
Voice
PW
Router SVI
DS1
1/1
PW
X-Connect
PW
1/1
DS1/PW 1:1
M8E1/T1
Voice
CL.2
ETH M16E1/T1
VCAT GFP L.MAC
Engine
HS-12N
GbE
PSN
ASMi-54C/N
MPW-1
M8E1/T1
T3
8
T1 T3
CL.2
SDH/SONET TP
SONET SONET Link
X-Connect
M16E1/T1
ETH
VCAT GFP L.MAC
Engine HS-12N
GbE ASMi-54C/N
PSN
MPW-1
T3 Module CL.2
VC-4/4A/8/8A/16, VC-4/OMNI,
VS voice
T3 DS0
T1 Voice
T3 Link X-Connect
9
T3 to SONET
M8E1/T1
M16E1/T1, VS-16E1T1-EoP
OR E1
1a
CL.2 TP
1b
HS-12N
ETH
VCAT GFP L.MAC
Engine
OP-108C
2a
E1i E1
Mux-ETH-
TDM
Int- ETH
PSN GbE 2b
ETH
ETH
TDM (E1/T1) service aggregation over copper lines into SDH/SONET backbone (via ASMi-54C/N
direct transparent mapping)
TDM (E1/T1) service aggregation over copper lines into SDH/SONET backbone (via DS0
mapping)
Ethernet service aggregation over fiber lines into PSN backbone MPW-1
TDM (E1/T1) service aggregation over fiber lines into PSN backbone
VS-16E1T1-EoP
CL.2
10b
10a
SDH/ SDH/SONET SDH/SONET E1i E1
SONET Link X-Connect
GFP VCG
L.MAC
M-ETH
Sections 5.3 to 5.21 summarize the steps required to configure selected services
shown in the above diagrams. For further details on a configuration step, refer to
the corresponding section indicated in the service provisioning table.
Megaplex-4 E1/T1 Traffic to SDH/SONET via Direct Transparent Mapping (1a) 5-15
Chapter 5 Services Installation and Operation Manual
Configure I/O
Configure link
card e1/t1 port
Assign vc profile
2. Configure ports
for each aug/oc-3
3. Configure
cross-connect
Configure
sdh-sonet
cross-connect
Legend:
Mandatory
Optional
5-16 E1/T1 Traffic to SDH/SONET via Direct Transparent Mapping (1a) Megaplex-4
Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Services
E1 Ports port {e1 | t1} Configuring physical E1/T1 ports of I/O module
2. Configure
T1 Ports
physical
ports
connections
for SDH/SONET
Payload
signaling
1. Define profiles vc profile
profile
Configure
e1-i/t1-i Configure I/O
Configure link
parameters card serial port
3. Configure
cross-connect
Legend:
Mandatory
Optional
E1 Ports port {e1 | t1} Configuring physical E1/T1 ports of I/O module
T1 Ports
2. Configure physical
and logical ports
3. Configure cross- DS0 Cross- cross-connect ds0 Cross-connecting between E1/T1 port of
connections Connect M16E1/M16T1 module and e1-i/t1-i port of
CL.2 module
Protection
Megaplex-4 E1 Traffic to SDH over Fiber via Direct Transparent Mapping (2a) 5-19
Chapter 5 Services Installation and Operation Manual
OP-108C
VC-12 E1 OP-108C
Module,
SDH Link Module, Optimux-108
MUX-ETH-TDM
E1-i Port
Port
3. Configure
cross-connect
Configure
sdh-sonet
cross-connect
Legend:
Mandatory
Optional
Figure 5-15. E1 to SDH over Fiber Service via Direct Transparent Mapping
5-20 E1 Traffic to SDH over Fiber via Direct Transparent Mapping (2a) Megaplex-4
Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Services
for SDH/SONET
Payload
Assign Assign
ingress and ingress and
3. Configure flows egress ports egress ports
Assign Assign
classifier classifier
profile profile
Define vlan Define vlan
editing editing
actions actions
Legend:
Mandatory
Optional
Modules)
User Ethernet port ethernet Defining internal Ethernet ports of I/O module
Ports <slot>/<port>/<tributary>
User Ethernet port ethernet Configuring physical GbE ports on the CL.2
Ports <slot>/<port> module
Assigning policer profile
match-all
• push vlan <x>
• p-bit fixed
Flow 1a
VC-12/VT1.5 I/O Module,
Logical Flow 1b
SDH/SONET Link VCG Port GFP Port Fast Ethernet
MAC
Port
Configure
Configure aps Configure vc-
4. Configure protection ethernet-group
protection path protection
protection
Legend:
Mandatory
Optional
Fast Ethernet Ports port ethernet Configuring physical Ethernet ports of I/O
module
Assigning policer profile
Logical MAC Ports port logical-mac Defining logical MAC port to establish
2. Configure physical
and logical ports
• match-all
• push vlan <x>
• p-bit fixed
Define flow 2:
• ingress port –logical-mac,
• egress port – I/O card port ethernet
Bind classifier profile
Define required VLAN editing actions:
• match vlan <x>
• pop
Ethernet Group protection ethernet- Protecting Ethernet and packet traffic against
4. Configure
5-24 Shared E-LAN Service with Multiple Drops per Node over SDH/SONET Megaplex-4
Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Services
WRED Shaper
Queue
VC profile
Queue block
1. Define profiles
Classifier Queue group
Marking
CL Bridge (1)
Flows
1a, 1b Bind
Flow 3 M-ETH
Logical BP Bridge BP
SDH/SONET Link VCG Port GFP Port Logical
SDH/SONET Link VC-12/VT1.5 VCG Port GFP Port MAC M-ETH Module,
MAC BP BP GbE Ports
Bind
Flow 2 ERP
BP BP
Configure VCG Configure GFP Define logical
Configure link port port mac port and
2. Configure ports bind gfp port
Set sdh-sonet Set vcg port Set gfp port
link parameters parameters parameters Bind queue Configure
Assign vc Assign vc group profile Ethernet port
Bind vcg port
profile for each profile
aug/oc-3 Set Ethernet
Bind vc/vt Assign vc port parameters
profile
Configure VLAN
Configure ERP
membership
Configure bridge
Configure East ports as VLAN
and West ports members
Configure RPL Configure MAC
owner table size
Figure 5-18. Shared E-LAN Service with Multiple Drops per Node over
SDH/SONET
Megaplex-4 Shared E-LAN Service with Multiple Drops per Node over SDH/SONET 5-25
Chapter 5 Services Installation and Operation Manual
Queue Group queue-group-profile Define queue group profile for GbE CL ports
Logical MAC Ports port logical-mac Define logical MAC ports to establish
connectivity between gfp ports of CL module
and bp ports of CL Bridge (1).
Bind the queue group profile intended for
Flows 2, 3 to Logical Mac port
Assign vc profile
and logical ports
5-26 Shared E-LAN Service with Multiple Drops per Node over SDH/SONET Megaplex-4
Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Services
VLAN
BP (CL)
• Flows 2,3: ingress – Logical Mac, egress –
BP
Define VLAN editing actions
Bind classifier profiles to all flows
Bind queue mapping profile to flows 2,3
Bind queue block instance to flows 2,3
Bind marking profile to flows 2, 3
Megaplex-4 E1 to SDH Traffic over Copper via DS0 Mapping (3a) 5-27
Chapter 5 Services Installation and Operation Manual
Configure
Configure E1-i Configure SHDSL Configure E1 and
Configure link e1-i parameters
port port SHDSL ports
3. Configure
cross-connect
cross-
re
3.
5-28 E1 to SDH Traffic over Copper via DS0 Mapping (3a) Megaplex-4
Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Services
Flow 1a
CL.2 Module, I/O Module, I/O Module,
Flow 1b ASMi Modem
GbE Port PCS Port SHDSL Port
Configure Configure
Configure GbE Define PCS port
SHDSL port Ethernet and
port and bind it to
SHDSL ports
SHDSL port
Set Ethernet
port parameters
2. Configure ports
Assign Assign
ingress and ingress and
3. Configure flows egress ports egress ports
Assign Assign
classifier classifier
profile profile
Define vlan Define vlan
editing editing
actions actions
Legend:
Mandatory
Optional
PCS Ports port pcs Configuring PCS ports of I/O module and
binding an SHDSL port to it
User Ethernet port ethernet Configuring physical GbE ports on the CL.2
Ports module
match-all
• push vlan <x>
• p-bit fixed
3. Configure cross
connect
Legend:
Mandatory
Optional
Serial Ports port serial Configuring physical serial ports of I/O module
2. Configure physical
and logical ports
Set Ethernet
port parameters
Assign policer
2. Configure ports
profile
3. Define SVI
Define RIFs
Assign Assign
8. Configure flows ingress and ingress and
egress ports egress ports
Assign Assign
classifier classifier
profile profile
Define vlan Define vlan
editing editing
actions actions
9. Configure
protection Configure tdm-
group protection
Legend:
Mandatory
Optional
Profiles profile
of I/O module
and logical ports
Protection
Set Ethernet
port parameters
Assign policer
2. Configure ports
profile
3. Define SVI
Define RIFs
Assign Assign
8. Configure flows ingress and ingress and
egress ports egress ports
Assign Assign
classifier classifier
profile profile
Define vlan Define vlan
editing editing
actions actions
9. Configure
protection Configure pw-
tdm protection
Legend:
Mandatory
Optional
Profiles profile
of I/O module
physical
5-38 High-Speed Service Aggregation into PSN Backbone with G.8032 Protection Megaplex-4
Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Services
WRED Shaper
Queue
1. Define profiles
Policer Marking
Flow 3 Flows
CL.2/GbE port 1a, 1b
BP Bridge PW TS x 64 kbps
SVI RIF PW MPW-1 Module, I/O Module,
BP Router DS1 Ports Serial Port
CL.2/GbE port Flow 2
ERP
BP
Configure
ethernet port Configure ds1 Configure I/O
port card serial port
Configure
physical layer
Define
2. Configure ports classifier
(“match-all”)
Bind L2CP
profile
Bind queue
group profile
Define RIFs
4. Define and bind router interfaces
Define router
interfaces
Bind router
interfaces to
SVIs
Add static
routing table
Define remote
5. Define PW peer PW peer
Configure VLAN
Configure ERP
membership
Bind policer
profile
Legend: Bind queue
Mandatory mapping profile
Optional
Bind queue
block instance
Figure 5-24. High-Speed Service Aggregation into PSN Backbone with G.8032
Protection
Megaplex-4 High-Speed Service Aggregation into PSN Backbone with G.8032 Protection 5-39
Chapter 5 Services Installation and Operation Manual
Table 5-14. High-Speed Service Aggregation into PSN Backbone with G.8032 Protection
Layer 2 Control l2cp-profile Define policy for L2CP traffic handling by port
Protocol (L2CP) and/or flow (peer, tunnel or drop)
Queue Group queue-group-profile Define queue group profile for Gbe CL ports
5-40 High-Speed Service Aggregation into PSN Backbone with G.8032 Protection Megaplex-4
Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Services
4. Add RIFs and Pseudowire Router router (2) Add interfaces to the router
bind them to Define static routing table
SVIs
Bind the RIFs to the SVIs
of MPW-1 module
7. Configure
entity
membership
VLAN
Megaplex-4 High-Speed Service Aggregation into PSN Backbone with G.8032 Protection 5-41
Chapter 5 Services Installation and Operation Manual
Flow 1a
I/O Module,
Logical Flow 1b
E1/T1 Port HDLC Port Fast Ethernet
MAC
Port
2. Configure ports
Configure tdm-
5. Configure protection
group protection
Legend:
Mandatory
Optional
Ethernet ports)
profiles
Fast Ethernet Ports port ethernet Configuring physical Ethernet ports of I/O
module
2. Configure physical
and logical ports
Logical MAC Ports port logical-mac Defining logical MAC port to establish
connectivity between hdlc and fast ethernet
ports.
Binding HDLC port to Logical MAC
• match-all
• push vlan <x>
• p-bit fixed
Define flow 2:
• ingress port –logical-mac,
• egress port – I/O card port ethernet
Assign classifier profile
Define required VLAN editing actions:
• match vlan <x>
• pop
Protection
4.
Flow 1a
I/O Module,
Up to 8 PPP Logical Flow 1b
MLPPP Port Fast Ethernet
Ports MAC
E1 Port PPP Port Port
Configure tdm-
4. Configure protection
group protection
Legend:
Mandatory
Optional
Ethernet ports)
profiles
Fast Ethernet Ports port ethernet Configuring physical Ethernet ports of I/O
module
Assigning policer profile
Logical MAC Ports port logical-mac Defining logical MAC port to establish
connectivity between mlppp and fast ethernet
2. Configure physical
ports.
and logical ports
PPP Ports port ppp Defining and binding the PPP port to the E1
physical port of a M8E1 module
• match-all
• push vlan <x>
• p-bit fixed
Define flow 2:
• ingress port –logical-mac,
• egress port – I/O card port ethernet
Bind classifier profile
Define required VLAN editing actions:
• match vlan <x>
• pop
Protection
3. Configure cross
connect
Legend:
Mandatory
Optional
Voice Ports port voice Configuring physical voice ports of I/O module
2. Configure physical
and logical ports
3. Configure timeslot DS0 cross-connect cross-connect ds0 Cross-connecting between serial ports of high-
cross-connections speed module and timeslots of e1-i/t1-i ports
of CL.2 module
Set Ethernet
port parameters
Assign policer
2. Configure ports
profile
3. Define SVI
Define RIFs
Configure pw-tdm
7. Configure cross-connect Configure ds0
cross-connections DS1/PW 1:1 cross-connect
Assign Assign
8. Configure flows ingress and ingress and
egress ports egress ports
Assign Assign
classifier classifier
profile profile
Define vlan Define vlan
editing editing
actions actions
Legend:
Mandatory
Optional
Profiles profile
of I/O module
and logical ports
vc profile
Set cmd-out
port parameters
Bind cmd-out-i
port
3. Configure cross
connect
Configure Configure TP
Configure ds0
sdh-sonet cross cross connect
cross connect
connect
Legend:
Mandatory
Optional
connections
module
Configure
Configure I/O
Configure link t1 parameters
card T3 port
3. Configure
cross-connect
Configure
sdh-sonet
cross-connect
Legend:
Mandatory
Optional
ports)
connections
cross- Cross-Connect module) and VT1.5 containers (CL.2 module)
Protection
Configure
Configure I/O
Configure t3 port t1 parameters
card voice port
1. Configure ports
2. Configure
cross-connect
Configure DS0
cross-connect
Configure Configure
3. Configure tdm-group tdm-group
protection protection protection
Legend:
Mandatory
Optional
Voice Ports configure port voice Configuring physical voice ports of I/O module
1. Configure physical
And logical ports
Protection
Flow 1a
VC-12/VT1.5 E1/T1 Logical Flow 1b CL.2/GbE
SDH/SONET Link E1-i/T1-i Port VCG Port GFP Port MAC port
3. Configure
cross-connect
Configure
sdh-sonet
cross-connect
Configure aps
5. Configure protection
protection
Configure vc-
path protection
Legend:
Mandatory
Optional
Ethernet Ports port ethernet Configuring physical Ethernet ports CL.2 module
2. Configure physical
and logical ports
Logical MAC Ports port logical-mac Defining logical MAC port to establish
connectivity between gfp and ethernet ports.
connections
containers
SDH/SONET Payload
5.
Flows
1a, 1b Bind
M-ETH
Bridge BP M-ETH Module,
Logical GbE Ports
E1/T1 Port VCG Port GFP Port
MAC BP Bind
BP
Configure VCG Configure GFP Define logical
Configure port port mac port and
e1/t1 port
bind gfp port
2. Configure ports Set vcg port Set gfp port
parameters parameters Configure
Ethernet port
Assign vc
Bind vcg port
profile Set Ethernet
Bind e1/t1 Assign vc port parameters
port profile
Define a bridge
Define bridge
ports
Bind to M-ETH
3. Configure bridge
Ethernet port
Configure VLAN
membership
Define VLANs
Configure bridge
ports as VLAN
members
Configure MAC
table size
Configure flows
1a, 1b
4. Configure flows
Assign ingress
and egress ports
Assign classifier
profile
Define vlan
editing actions
Legend:
Mandatory
Optional
(M-ETH module)
physical
Logical MAC Ports port logical-mac Define logical MAC ports to establish
connectivity between gfp ports of VS-16E1T1-
EoP module and bp ports of M-ETH Bridge.
6.1 Cards
I/O Modules
Cards (I/O modules) currently offered for Megaplex-4 are listed in Chapter 1,
Table 1-2.
Note
The Megaplex-4100 chassis is supplied with a power supply in slot PS-A and a
CL.2 module in slot CL-A configured as factory defaults:
(slot ps-a card-type power-supply ps
slot cl-a card-type cl cl2-622gbe).
Example
To configure a chassis with:
• Two power supply modules
• Two CL.2 modules
• One ASMi-54C/N module in slot 6
• Five M8E1 modules in slots 1–5.
mp4100# config slot ps-a card-type ps-a power-supply ps
mp4100# config slot ps-b card-type ps-b power-supply ps
mp4100# config slot cl-a card-type cl cl2-622gbe
mp4100# config slot cl-b card-type cl cl2-622gbe
mp4100# config slot 1 card-type e1-t1 m8e1
mp4100# config slot 2 card-type e1-t1 m8e1
mp4100# config slot 3 card-type e1-t1 m8e1
mp4100# config slot 4 card-type e1-t1 m8e1
mp4100# config slot 5 card-type e1-t1 m8e1
mp4100# config slot 6 card-type dsl asmi54c-e1eth
To d is p la y t h e m o d u le s in s t a lle d in t h e ch a s s is :
• At the config# prompt, enter the show cards-summary command.
server 4
exit
exit
exit
echo "Slot Configuration"
# Slot Configuration
slot ps-a
card-type power-supply ps
exit
# Slot Configuration
more..
slot ps-b
exit
# Slot Configuration
slot cl-a
card-type cl cl2-622gbe
exit
# Slot Configuration
slot cl-b
exit
# Slot Configuration
slot 1
card-type voice vc4e-m
exit
# Slot Configuration
slot 2
card-type voice vc4e-m
exit
# Slot Configuration
slot 3
card-type voice vc4e-m
more..
exit
# Slot Configuration
slot 4
card-type voice vc4e-m
exit
# Slot Configuration
slot 5
card-type voice vc4e-m
exit
# Slot Configuration
slot 6
card-type voice vc4e-m
exit
# Slot Configuration
slot 7
card-type voice vc4e-m
exit
# Slot Configuration
slot 8
card-type voice vc4e-m
exit
more..
# Slot Configuration
slot 9
card-type voice vc4e-m
exit
# Slot Configuration
slot 10
card-typevoice vc4e-m
exit
echo "System Configuration"
# System Configuration
system
echo "Clock Configuration"
# Clock Configuration
clock
echo "Station Clock Configuration"
# Station Clock Configuration
station 1
exit
exit
exit
more..
echo "QoS - Configuration"
# QoS - Configuration
qos
echo "Policer Profile configuration"
# Policer Profile configuration
policer-profile "Policer1"
exit
exit
echo "Port Configuration"
# Port Configuration
port
echo "Signaling Profile Configuration"
# Signaling Profile Configuration
signaling-profile ""
exit
# Signaling Profile Configuration
signaling-profile ""
exit
# Signaling Profile Configuration
signaling-profile ""
exit
# Signaling Profile Configuration
signaling-profile ""
exit
# Signaling Profile Configuration
signaling-profile ""
exit
echo "Ethernet - Port Configuration"
# Ethernet - Port Configuration
ethernet cl-a/1
no policer
exit
# Ethernet - Port Configuration
ethernet cl-a/2
no policer
exit
echo "Managment Ethernet - Port Configuration"
# Managment Ethernet - Port Configuration
mng-ethernet cl-a/1
exit
echo "E1 Internal - Port Configuration"
# E1 Internal - Port Configuration
e1-i cl-a/1
exit
# E1 Internal - Port Configuration
e1-i cl-a/2
exit
# E1 Internal - Port Configuration
e1-i cl-a/3
exit
# E1 Internal - Port Configuration
e1-i cl-a/4
exit
# E1 Internal - Port Configuration
e1-i cl-a/5
exit
# E1 Internal - Port Configuration
e1-i cl-a/6
no shutdown
more..
exit
# E1 Internal - Port Configuration
e1-i cl-a/7
no shutdown
exit
# E1 Internal - Port Configuration
e1-i cl-a/8
exit
# E1 Internal - Port Configuration
e1-i cl-a/9
exit
# E1 Internal - Port Configuration
e1-i cl-a/10
exit
# E1 Internal - Port Configuration
e1-i cl-a/11
exit
# E1 Internal - Port Configuration
e1-i cl-a/12
exit
more..
# E1 Internal - Port Configuration
e1-i cl-a/13
exit
# E1 Internal - Port Configuration
e1-i cl-a/14
exit
# E1 Internal - Port Configuration
e1-i cl-a/15
exit
# E1 Internal - Port Configuration
e1-i cl-a/16
exit
# E1 Internal - Port Configuration
e1-i cl-a/17
exit
# E1 Internal - Port Configuration
e1-i cl-a/18
exit
# E1 Internal - Port Configuration
e1-i cl-a/19
exit
more..
# E1 Internal - Port Configuration
e1-i cl-a/20
exit
# E1 Internal - Port Configuration
e1-i cl-a/21
exit
# E1 Internal - Port Configuration
e1-i cl-a/22
exit
# E1 Internal - Port Configuration
e1-i cl-a/23
exit
# E1 Internal - Port Configuration
e1-i cl-a/24
exit
# E1 Internal - Port Configuration
e1-i cl-a/25
exit
# E1 Internal - Port Configuration
more..
e1-i cl-a/26
exit
# E1 Internal - Port Configuration
e1-i cl-a/27
exit
# E1 Internal - Port Configuration
e1-i cl-a/28
exit
# E1 Internal - Port Configuration
e1-i cl-a/29
exit
# E1 Internal - Port Configuration
e1-i cl-a/30
exit
# E1 Internal - Port Configuration
e1-i cl-a/31
exit
# E1 Internal - Port Configuration
e1-i cl-a/32
exit
more..
# E1 Internal - Port Configuration
e1-i cl-a/33
exit
# E1 Internal - Port Configuration
e1-i cl-a/34
exit
# E1 Internal - Port Configuration
e1-i cl-a/35
exit
# E1 Internal - Port Configuration
e1-i cl-a/36
exit
# E1 Internal - Port Configuration
e1-i cl-a/37
exit
# E1 Internal - Port Configuration
e1-i cl-a/38
exit
# E1 Internal - Port Configuration
e1-i cl-a/39
exit
more..
# E1 Internal - Port Configuration
e1-i cl-a/40
exit
# E1 Internal - Port Configuration
e1-i cl-a/41
exit
# E1 Internal - Port Configuration
e1-i cl-a/42
exit
# E1 Internal - Port Configuration
e1-i cl-a/43
exit
# E1 Internal - Port Configuration
e1-i cl-a/44
exit
# E1 Internal - Port Configuration
e1-i cl-a/45
exit
# E1 Internal - Port Configuration
e1-i cl-a/46
more..
no shutdown
exit
# E1 Internal - Port Configuration
e1-i cl-a/47
no shutdown
exit
# E1 Internal - Port Configuration
e1-i cl-a/48
exit
# E1 Internal - Port Configuration
e1-i cl-a/49
exit
# E1 Internal - Port Configuration
e1-i cl-a/50
exit
# E1 Internal - Port Configuration
e1-i cl-a/51
exit
# E1 Internal - Port Configuration
more..
e1-i cl-a/52
exit
# E1 Internal - Port Configuration
e1-i cl-a/53
exit
# E1 Internal - Port Configuration
e1-i cl-a/54
exit
# E1 Internal - Port Configuration
e1-i cl-a/55
exit
# E1 Internal - Port Configuration
e1-i cl-a/56
exit
# E1 Internal - Port Configuration
e1-i cl-a/57
exit
# E1 Internal - Port Configuration
e1-i cl-a/58
exit
# E1 Internal - Port Configuration
e1-i cl-a/59
exit
# E1 Internal - Port Configuration
e1-i cl-a/60
exit
# E1 Internal - Port Configuration
e1-i cl-a/61
exit
# E1 Internal - Port Configuration
e1-i cl-a/62
exit
# E1 Internal - Port Configuration
e1-i cl-a/63
exit
echo "Voice - Port Configuration"
# Voice - Port Configuration
voice 1/1
no shutdown
signaling cas
exit
# Voice - Port Configuration
voice 1/2
no shutdown
signaling cas
exit
# Voice - Port Configuration
voice 1/3
no shutdown
signaling cas
no shutdown
signaling cas
exit
# Voice - Port Configuration
voice 1/4
no shutdown
signaling cas
exit
# Voice - Port Configuration
voice 2/1
no shutdown
signaling cas
more..
exit
# Voice - Port Configuration
voice 2/2
no shutdown
signaling cas
exit
# Voice - Port Configuration
voice 2/3
no shutdown
signaling cas
exit
# Voice - Port Configuration
voice 2/4
no shutdown
signaling cas
exit
# Voice - Port Configuration
voice 3/1
no shutdown
signaling cas
more..
exit
# Voice - Port Configuration
voice 3/2
no shutdown
signaling cas
exit
# Voice - Port Configuration
voice 3/3
no shutdown
signaling cas
exit
# Voice - Port Configuration
voice 3/4
no shutdown
signaling cas
exit
# Voice - Port Configuration
voice 4/1
no shutdown
signaling cas
more..
exit
# Voice - Port Configuration
voice 4/2
no shutdown
signaling cas
exit
# Voice - Port Configuration
voice 4/3
no shutdown
signaling cas
exit
# Voice - Port Configuration
voice 4/4
no shutdown
signaling cas
exit
# Voice - Port Configuration
voice 5/1
no shutdown
signaling cas
more..
exit
# Voice - Port Configuration
voice 5/2
no shutdown
signaling cas
exit
# Voice - Port Configuration
voice 5/3
no shutdown
signaling cas
exit
# Voice - Port Configuration
voice 5/4
no shutdown
signaling cas
exit
# Voice - Port Configuration
voice 6/1
no shutdown
signaling cas
more..
exit
# Voice - Port Configuration
voice 6/2
no shutdown
signaling cas
exit
# Voice - Port Configuration
voice 6/3
no shutdown
signaling cas
exit
# Voice - Port Configuration
voice 6/4
no shutdown
signaling cas
exit
# Voice - Port Configuration
voice 7/1
no shutdown
signaling cas
more..
exit
# Voice - Port Configuration
voice 7/2
no shutdown
signaling cas
exit
# Voice - Port Configuration
voice 7/3
no shutdown
signaling cas
exit
# Voice - Port Configuration
voice 7/4
no shutdown
signaling cas
exit
# Voice - Port Configuration
voice 8/1
no shutdown
signaling cas
more..
exit
exit
# SDH/Sonet - Port Configuration
sdh-sonet cl-a/2
exit
exit
echo "Cross Connect"
# Cross Connect
cross-connect
ds0 e1-i cl-a/6 ts 3 voice 9/2
ds0 e1-i cl-a/6 ts 4 voice 9/4
ds0 e1-i cl-a/6 ts 7 voice 10/2
ds0 e1-i cl-a/6 ts 8 voice 10/4
ds0 e1-i cl-a/7 ts 1 voice 1/2
ds0 e1-i cl-a/7 ts 2 voice 1/4
ds0 e1-i cl-a/7 ts 5 voice 2/2
ds0 e1-i cl-a/7 ts 6 voice 2/4
ds0 e1-i cl-a/7 ts 9 voice 3/2
ds0 e1-i cl-a/7 ts 10 voice 3/4
ds0 e1-i cl-a/7 ts 13 voice 4/2
ds0 e1-i cl-a/7 ts 14 voice 4/4
ds0 e1-i cl-a/7 ts 18 voice 5/2
more..
ds0 e1-i cl-a/7 ts 19 voice 5/4
ds0 e1-i cl-a/7 ts 22 voice 6/2
ds0 e1-i cl-a/7 ts 23 voice 6/4
ds0 e1-i cl-a/7 ts 26 voice 7/2
ds0 e1-i cl-a/7 ts 27 voice 7/4
ds0 e1-i cl-a/7 ts 30 voice 8/2
ds0 e1-i cl-a/7 ts 31 voice 8/4
ds0 e1-i cl-a/46 ts 3 voice 9/1
ds0 e1-i cl-a/46 ts 4 voice 9/3
ds0 e1-i cl-a/46 ts 7 voice 10/1
ds0 e1-i cl-a/46 ts 8 voice 10/3
ds0 e1-i cl-a/47 ts 1 voice 1/1
ds0 e1-i cl-a/47 ts 2 voice 1/3
ds0 e1-i cl-a/47 ts 5 voice 2/1
ds0 e1-i cl-a/47 ts 6 voice 2/3
ds0 e1-i cl-a/47 ts 9 voice 3/1
ds0 e1-i cl-a/47 ts 10 voice 3/3
ds0 e1-i cl-a/47 ts 13 voice 4/1
ds0 e1-i cl-a/47 ts 14 voice 4/3
ds0 e1-i cl-a/47 ts 18 voice 5/1
more..
ds0 e1-i cl-a/47 ts 19 voice 5/3
ds0 e1-i cl-a/47 ts 22 voice 6/1
ds0 e1-i cl-a/47 ts 23 voice 6/3
ds0 e1-i cl-a/47 ts 26 voice 7/1
ds0 e1-i cl-a/47 ts 27 voice 7/3
ds0 e1-i cl-a/47 ts 30 voice 8/1
ds0 e1-i cl-a/47 ts 31 voice 8/3
sdh-sonet vc12-vt2 cl-a/1/1/2/1/1 e1-i cl-a/46
sdh-sonet vc12-vt2 cl-a/1/1/1/7/2 e1-i cl-a/47
sdh-sonet vc12-vt2 cl-a/2/1/2/1/1 e1-i cl-a/6
sdh-sonet vc12-vt2 cl-a/2/1/1/7/2 e1-i cl-a/7
exit
router 1
exit
router 2
exit
Note Resetting a module will temporarily disrupt services supported by that module.
Configuration Errors
Table 6-1 lists messages generated by Megaplex-4 when a configuration error is
detected.
100 Error AT LEAST ONE PS CARD MUST At least one power supply module must be defined in the
BE DEFINED system configuration
101 Error AT LEAST ONE CL CARD MUST At least one CL module must be defined in the system
BE DEFINED configuration
102 Warning MODULE TYPE MISMATCH The modules actually installed in the equipment and the
modules programmed in the database are not the same
103 Warning INTERFACE HW/SW MISMATCH The interface type configured by the management system
is different from the interface selected by means of
jumpers
104 Error MODULE DATABASE MISMATCH The CL module type configured in the database {cl2-
622gbe | cl2-622gbea |cl2-gbea | cl2-ds0 } does not match
the installed module type (can be displayed by
“show config cards-summary” command ("CL2 622GbE",
"CL2 622GbEa", "CL2 GbEa" or "CL2 DS0").
400 Error DIFFERENT CL CARDS FOR Different CL module types are installed in slots CL-A and
REDUNDANCY CL-B; CL redundancy is not available
404 Error PORT ASSIGNED IS IN One of the two ports connected via flow, cross-connect or
SHUTDOWN STATE bind command is in shutdown state. Set this port to “no
shutdown”.
766 Error ILLEGAL CARD TYPE Since out of two slots taken by each D-NFV module, it is
DEFINITION the right one that is identified in the terminal, the D-NFV
module cannot be configured in the following I/O slots.
• MP-4100: slots 1 & 6.
• MP-4104 slots 1 & 2.
Similarly, it cannot be configured in a slot, following a slot
occupied with any other module.
Signaling Profiles
This feature is available for the E1/T1 ports on the M8E1/M8T1 modules.
Functional Description
When CAS is used (always in an M8T1 module, and in an M8E1 module when the
E1 port uses G.732S framing, with or without CRC-4 support), the signaling
information of each voice channel is carried by means of up to four bits (signaling
bits), designated by the applicable standards as bits A, B, C, and D.
The number of bits actually available for carrying signaling information and the
data rate at which signaling information can be transferred, depend on the port
(E1 or T1) and the framing mode being used, which are determined by the
applicable international standards.
The information appearing in the signaling bits can be provided either by voice
interface modules installed in the Megaplex-4, or by digital PBXs or local exchange
trunks connected to one of the E1 or T1 Megaplex-4 ports.
Digital PBXs and local exchanges often use dedicated signaling protocols to
exchange the signaling information through the E1 or T1 trunk bits assigned to
CAS, and therefore may interpret the state of CAS bits in proprietary ways. The
CL module can perform signaling protocol conversions, for example – to enable
the termination of PBX timeslots by a voice module installed in an I/O slot, to
connect a PBX to PSTN lines, etc.
Factory Defaults
The default signaling profiles (profile1 to profile5) are provided with no signaling
translation.
idle-code 0x00
busy-code 0x0f
• Transmit direction: defines the translation of the internal signaling bits to the
signaling bits transmitted through the external port.
Specifying the signaling bit busy-code {00 to 0F (hexa)} Hexadecimal number in the range of 0 to
pattern indicating the busy 0F (two digits)
state The pattern is specified by a hexadecimal
digit (0 to 9, A to F), which, when
converted to binary format, yields the
desired ABCD sequence.
Example: if the busy state is indicated by
the incoming sequence 1000, select 8.
Specifying the signaling bit idle-code {00 to 0F (hexa)} Hexadecimal number in the range of 0 to
pattern indicating the idle 0F (two digits)
state The pattern is specified by a hexadecimal
digit (0 to 9, A to F), which when
converted to binary format yields the
desired ABCD sequence.
Example
Note
Pay attention to the syntax:
• When configuring the profile n (n=1,2,3,4,5), use “profile<n>” number
• When assigning the configured profile to an E1/T1 port, use simply “<n>”, not
“profile<n>”)
Functional Description
Analog voice signals are digitized using PCM (Pulse-code modulation), in
compliance with ITU-T G.711 and AT&T Pub. 43801 standards. The signaling
information of each voice channel is carried by means of up to four bits (signaling
bits), designated by the applicable standards as bits A, B, C and D. Analog
signaling profile is configured per channel and per direction.
Table 6-2 and Table 6-3 show the analog signaling profile actions for FXS and
FXO modules, respectively.
For E&M modules, the A/B bits are selected based on tx-a-bit/tx-b-bit sent by the
remote unit and the received signaling.
In the tables above, the corresponding bit states are shown as follows:
• not-used indicates that the corresponding bit is not relevant;
• signaling states:
For FXS module, 0 indicates on-hook and 1 indicates off-hook.
For FXO module, 0 indicates no ring and 1 indicates ring.
• inverse-sig has two states:
For FXS module, 0 indicates off-hook and 1 indicates on-hook.
For FXO module, 0 indicate ring and 1 indicates no ring.
• loop-disconnect has two states:
0 indicates the far-end party is not disconnected (CO is feeding the
line);
1 indicates the far-end party has disconnected (CO has disconnected
the line feeding);
• inverse-loop-disconnect has two states:
0 indicates loop current feed open state (CO has disconnected the line
feeding);
1 indicates no loop current feed open state (CO is feeding the line) ;
• forward-disconnect has two states:
0 indicates the far-end party is not disconnected (FXS port is feeding
the line) ;
1 indicates the far-end party has disconnected (FXS port has
disconnected the line feeding);
• inverse-forward-disconnect has two states:
0 indicates the far-end party has disconnected (FXS port has
disconnected the line feeding);
1 indicates the far-end party is not disconnected (FXS port is feeding
the line) ;
• wink indicates reverse battery polarity:
0 indicates reversion battery polarity,
1 indicates normal battery polarity.
Factory Defaults
The following default analog signaling profiles are provided:
mp-4100>config>port# inf detail
analog-signaling-profile "sig_over_a_bit"
a-bit-tx signaling
a-bit-rx signaling
b-bit-tx 1
b-bit-rx not-used
c-bit-tx 0
c-bit-rx not-used
d-bit-tx 1
d-bit-rx not-used
exit
analog-signaling-profile "sig_tx_a_rx_b"
a-bit-tx signaling
a-bit-rx not-used
b-bit-tx 1
b-bit-rx inverse-sig
c-bit-tx signaling
c-bit-rx not-used
d-bit-tx 1
d-bit-rx not-used
exit
analog-signaling-profile "sig_tx_b_rx_a"
a-bit-tx 0
a-bit-rx signaling
b-bit-tx inverse-sig
b-bit-rx not-used
c-bit-tx 0
c-bit-rx not-used
d-bit-tx inverse-sig
d-bit-rx not-used
exit
The default analog signaling profiles cannot be modified or deleted.
Example
mp4100>config>port>analog-signaling-pro(profile1)# a-bit-tx 1
mp4100>config>port>analog-signaling-pro(profile1)# a-bit-rx not-
used
mp4100>config>port>analog-signaling-pro(profile1)# b-bit-tx
signaling
mp4100>config>port>analog-signaling-pro(profile1)# b-bit-rx
signaling
VC Profiles
In the Megaplex-4 architecture, any SDH/SONET unit of order lower than
SDH/SONET port is configured by creating VC profiles and binding it to the
corresponding unit. You can create up to 64 profiles to define the handling of
SDH/SONET (VC/VT/STS) traffic. You can then assign the required profile to a gfp,
hdlc, e1, e1-i, aug, t1, t1-i or oc-3 port.
Four pre-defined default VC profiles are available in the system. They are bound
automatically to VC-12/VT-1.5/ VC-3/VC-4/STS-1/STS-3C or E1/T1 ports when
certain configurations take place in the system. Table 6-4 lists these profiles
together with their names and corresponding configurations.
Factory Defaults
The VC profile parameter defaults are listed in the table below.
pathtrace direction tx
plm-response disable
tim-response disable
rate-threshold sd e-6
interval-threshold cv 25
interval-threshold es 20
interval-threshold ses 3
interval-threshold uas 10
day-threshold cv 250
day-threshold es 200
day-threshold ses 7
day-threshold uas 10
Configuring VC Profiles
Usually the four predefined VC profiles assigned to the corresponding units by
default should satify the user needs. However, if it is necessary to add and
configure a new user-defined profile, you must first disconnect the respective
predefined profile and only then configure and assign the new one.
To configure a VC profile:
1. Navigate to configure port vc-profile <vc-profile-name> to select the VC
profile to configure.
The config>port>vc-profile(<vc-profile-name>)# prompt is displayed.
2. Enter all necessary commands according to the tasks listed below.
Enables the sending of RDI plm-response rdi Using no plm-response disables RDI
indications by the port, in case indications
the received signal label (SDH
overhead byte C2 or V5) is
different from the expected
signal label
Enables the sending of RDI tim-response rdi Using no tim-response disables RDI
indications by the port, in case indications
the received path trace label
(carried in SDH overhead byte J1
or J2) is different from the
expected path trace label
Selecting EED (error rate rate-threshold [eed {e-3 | e- If the selected BER value is exceeded,
degradation) and SD (signal 4 | e-5} ] [ sd {e-6 | e-7 | e-8 Megaplex-4 generates the relevant (EED
degrade) thresholds | e-9}] or SD) alarm
Applicable Modules
The Binary command module VS-6/BIN has 8 command inputs and 8 outputs,
enabling binary equipment to utilize the advanced transport capabilities offered
by Megaplex.
Functional Description
See Versatile Modules chapter in Megaplex-4 I/O Modules Installation and
Operation Manual.
Factory Defaults
Megaplex-4 is supplied with all binary command ports disabled. Other parameter
defaults are listed in the table below.
cmd-in
input-active Association between the cmd-in active state and the high
supplied voltage
cmd-out
Assigning short description name <string> Using no name removes the name
to port
Defining the association input-active {high | low} • low – command input is activated by low
between the cmd-in active voltage (0 to 18 VDC)
state and the supplied • high – command input is activated by high
voltage voltage (24 to 48 VDC)
Forcing the cmd-in port into force-active Using no force-active cancels the command
active state, disregarding
the actual input state
Assigning short description name <string> Using no name removes the name
to port
Assigning short description to port name <string> Using no name removes the name
Parameter Description
Frame Error Number of frame errors received on the cmd channel since last reset or power-up
CRC Error Number of CRC errors received on the cmd channel since last reset or power-up
A CRC error is declared when the CRC bits generated locally on the data in the received
frame (protecting critical teleprotection bits) do not match the CRC bits (crc1 – crc4)
received from the transmitter.
Clearing Statistics
Applicable Modules
Ds1-opt ports denote fiber optic links of VS-6/C37 modules.
Standards
IEEE C37.94
Functional Description
The IEEE C37.94 standard defines a programmable nx64 kbps (n = 1…12)
multimode optical fiber interface between teleprotection and digital multiplexer
equipment, for distances of up to 2 km.
The VS-6/C37 module features a dual-port fiber optic interface, operating at a
nominal wavelength of 830 nm and nominal line rate of 2.048 Mbps. Each port is
terminated in a pair of ST connectors for connection to standard multimode fiber.
The fiber optic interface has a wide dynamic range, which ensures that the
receiver will not saturate even when using short fiber optic cables (saturation is
caused when the optical power applied to the receiver exceeds its maximum
allowed input power, and results in very high bit error rates).
The interface can be used for both user and network ports – either for inter-
substation communication or for transmitting distance Teleprotection
information.
Factory Defaults
Megaplex-4 is supplied with all ds1-opt ports disabled. Other parameter defaults
are listed in the table below.
Enabling inband inband-management <timeslot> protocol ppp – synchronous PPP over HDLC
management and setting {ppp | fr} [routing-protocol {none | prop- encapsulation
its parameters rip | rip2} ] fr –Frame Relay encapsulation (under
DLCI 100) in accordance with RFC
2427
See also Configuring Inband
Management in Chapter 8 for
important considerations on
selecting routing protocol.
Using no inband management
<timeslot> disables inband
management through this timeslot
Configuration Errors
There are no special error messages for DS1-Opt ports.
Loopback Duration
The activation of a loopback disconnects the local and remote equipment served
by the VS-6/C37 module. Therefore, when you initiate a loopback, you have the
option to limit its duration to an interval in the range of 1 through 30 minutes.
After the selected interval expires, the loopback is automatically deactivated,
without operator intervention. However, you can always deactivate a loopback
activated on the local module before this timeout expires. When using inband
management, always use the timeout option; otherwise, the management
communication path may be permanently disconnected.
The default is infinite duration (without timeout).
Activating and configuring the loopback {local | remote} local – local loopback
direction of the loopback and [duration <duration in minutes remote – remote loopback
the duration of it (in minutes) 1..30> ]
Ethernet Ports
Applicable Modules
Megaplex-4 features the following user Ethernet ports:
• Two fiber optic or copper Gigabit Ethernet network ports on each CL.2
module
• Eight fiber optic or copper Gigabit Ethernet network ports on each M-ETH I/O
module
• Various fiber-optic/copper external Fast Ethernet user ports on the following
I/O modules: M8E1, M8T1, M8SL, OP-108C, OP-34C, ASMi-54C, ASMi-54C/N,
MPW-1, VS, D-NFV.
Optimux modules, in addition to external Ethernet ports, also have internal
Ethernet ports, serving to increase the total payload and management bandwidth
transferred to the optical link.
Standards
IEEE 802.3, RFC 4836, RFC 3635.
Functional Description
int-eth slot:port 1
For more information, see the respective module section in Megaplex-4 I/O
Modules Installation and Operation Manual, Voice Modules Chapter.
Flow Control
A flow control is a mechanism that allows an Ethernet receiving end that is
unable to process all the traffic sent to it, to hold the transmitted traffic until it is
able to process packets again.
The mechanism uses a PAUSE frame, which is a packet that instructs the far-end
device to stop transmission of packets until the receiver is able to handle traffic
again. The PAUSE frame has a timer value included (set by the originating
receiver), which tells the far-end device how long to suspend transmission. If that
timer expires or is cleared by getting a PAUSE frame with timer value set to 0, the
far-end device can then send packets again. Flow control is an optional port-level
parameter.
Flow control is supported on both directly- and indirectly-attached ports:
• Directly-attached ports support symmetrical flow control (both Rx and Tx)
• Indirectly-attached ports support Rx flow control only, without issuing Tx
PAUSE frames (asymmetric flow control).
When autonegotiation is enabled, flow control mode is negotiated and a port
advertises its user-selected flow control capabilities to the peer. The actual flow
control mode, as well as duplex mode and transmission speed are set after the
negotiation is completed.
L2CP Handling
Megaplex-4 handles Layer-2 control protocol traffic on a per-port basis. The L2CP
traffic is processed using a two-stage mechanism comprising per-port L2CP
profiles (set of rules for traffic handling). The L2CP profile affects untagged L2CP
frames. In total, Megaplex-4 supports up to 16 L2CP profiles:
• Up to 4 (including default) port-level profiles can be defined on directly-
attached ports
• Up to 32 different addresses/protocols can be selected per L2CP profile.
If no default action is configured for an unspecified address or protocol, this
traffic is tunneled.
Note If an L2CP profile has been attached to a port, the profile cannot be deleted or
modified.
Note • PAUSE frames (01-80-C2-00-00-01) are not part of L2CP profiles. They are
either peered or discarded according to flow control setting of a port.
Note Megaplex-4 supports peer action only for the following MAC addresses/protocols:
• 01-80-C2-00-00-00 (RSTP)
• 01-80-C2-00-00-02 (LACP, OAM (EFM))
• 01-80-C2-00-00-03 (802.1x).
Autonegotiation
The speed and duplex mode of an Ethernet interface is set either manually by the
operator or negotiated with the peer interface. The autonegotiation procedure
enables automatic selection of the operating mode on a LAN. It enables
equipment connecting to an operating LAN to automatically adopt the LAN
operating mode (if it is capable of supporting that mode).
PoE
See Power over Ethernet (PoE) section under M-ETH Module in Megaplex-4 I/O
Modules Installation and Operation Manual, Ethernet and Pseudowire Modules
Chapter.
Factory Defaults
By default, the Ethernet non-management ports have the following configuration.
Fast Ethernet ports:
mp4100>config>port>eth(4/1)# info detail
name "IO-4 ethernet 01"
shutdown
auto-negotiation
max-capability 100-full-duplex
no flow-control
no policer
egress-mtu 1790
queue-group profile "FeDefaultQueueGroup"
no l2cp
tag-ethernet-type 0x8100
GbE ports of CL modules:
mp4100>config>port>eth(cl-b/1)# info detail
name "CL-B ethernet 01"
shutdown
auto-negotiation*
max-capability 1000-full-duplex**
min-tagged-frame-length 68
no efm
no shaper
egress-mtu 1790
queue-group profile "GbeDefaultQueueGroup"
l2cp profile "L2cpDefaultProfile"
tag-ethernet-type 0x8100
GbE ports of M-ETH modules:
mp4100>config>port>eth(7/4)# info detail
name "IO-7 ethernet 04"
shutdown
auto-negotiation*
max-capability 1000-full-duplex**
no flow-control
no efm
no policer
egress-mtu 1790
queue-group profile "MeDefaultQueueGroup"
no l2cp
tag-ethernet-type 0x8100
mode never***
priority low***
*copper ports only
**for fiber ports: 1000-x-full-duplex
***PoE modules only
For description of default queue group profiles, see Queue Group Profiles section
in Chapter 8.
To configure the user Ethernet port parameters (any module with Ethernet ports):
1. Navigate to configure port ethernet <slot>/<port> to select the Ethernet port
to configure.
The config>port>eth>(<slot>/<port>)# prompt is displayed.
2. Enter all necessary commands according to the tasks listed in the table
below.
Assigning short description to the name <string> Using no name removes the name
port
Enabling OAM (EFM) on the efm See Ethernet OAM (EFM) in Chapter 8.
Ethernet port GbE ports of CL.2 and M-ETH modules only
no efm disables OAM (EFM) on the Ethernet
port
Setting maximum frame size (in egress-mtu <64–9600> The maximum frame size for GBE Ethernet
bytes) to transmit (frames above ports of CL and M-ETH modules is 9600.
the specified size are discarded) The maximum frame size for Fast Ethernet
ports of different I/O modules is as follows:
• ASMi-54C/N – 9600
• VS/SH/D-NFV – 9140
• M8E1, M8T1, M8SL, OP-34C, OP-108C,
ASMi-54C/N, MPW-1,
• ASMi-54C – 1522.
Setting maximum advertised max-capability {10-half-duplex | 10-full-duplex –10baseT full duplex (copper
capability (highest traffic handling 10-full-duplex | 100-half-duplex | ports only)
capability to be advertised during 100-full-duplex | 1000-full-duplex 10-half-duplex – 10baseT half duplex (copper
the autonegotiation process) | 1000-x-full-duplex} ports only)
100-full-duplex – 100baseT full duplex
100-half-duplex – 100baseT half duplex (in
the case of M-ETH – copper ports only)
1000-full-duplex – 1000base T full duplex
(copper GbE ports only)
1000-x-full-duplex – 1000base T full duplex
(fiber GbE ports only)
This parameter applies only if
autonegotiation is enabled.
Setting data rate and duplex speed-duplex 10-half-duplex | 10- 10-full-duplex –10baseT full duplex (copper
mode of the Ethernet port, when full-duplex | 100-half-duplex | ports only)
autonegotiation is disabled 100-full-duplex | 1000-full-duplex 10-half-duplex – 10baseT half duplex (copper
| 1000-x-full-duplex} ports only)
100-full-duplex – 100baseT full duplex
100-half-duplex – 100baseT half duplex (in
the case of M-ETH – copper ports only)
1000-full-duplex – 1000base T full duplex
(copper GbE ports only)
1000-x-full-duplex – 1000base T full duplex
(fiber GbE ports only)
Setting flow control for the flow-control Using no flow-control disables flow control
selected port (when operating in
the full duplex mode), or back
pressure (when operating in the
half-duplex mode)
Assigning queue group profile to queue-group profile <queue- Megaplex-4 with CL.2/A modules only
Ethernet port group-profile-name> The queue group profile is defined under
Quality of Service (QoS) in Chapter 8.
no queue-group removes queue group
association
The default queue group profile for Fast
Ethernet ports is defined with 10 Mbps
shaper. Define a new queue group profile if
you need more bandwidth.
The queue group profile cannot be edited.
Thus to use bridge connectivity you need to
remove the existing queue group profile from
this Ethernet port, configure a new queue
group profile and assign it to this port.
Associating a Layer-2 control l2cp <l2cp-profile-name> Megaplex-4 with CL.2/A modules only
processing profile with the port no l2cp GbE ports of CL.2 and M-ETH modules only
Defines discarding or tunneling policy for
Layer-2 protocols.
no l2cp removes association with L2CP profile
The associated L2CP profile specifies peer
action for the following MAC addresses
depending on the protocol in use:
• 01-80-C2-00-00-00 (RSTP)
• 01-80-C2-00-00-02 (LACP, OAM (EFM))
• 01-80-C2-00-00-03 (802.1x).
Configuring collection of pm-collection interval <seconds> You can enable PM statistics collection for all
performance management Ethernet ports rather than enabling it for
statistics for this port, which are individual ports. In addition to enabling PM
presented via the RADview statistics collection for the ports, it must be
Performance Management portal enabled for the device. Refer to the
Performance Management section in the
Monitoring and Diagnostics chapter for
details.
Activating/deactivating a policer policer-profile <name> The policer profile is defined under Quality of
profile Service (QoS) in Chapter 8.
Using no policer <name> deactivates this
policer profile
The total sum of bandwidths defined in
policer profiles for all 8 ports of the M-ETH
module must not exceed 1 GbE.
Setting the minimum VLAN-tagged min-tagged-frame-length {64 | 68 CL GbE and internal D-NFV ports only
frame length (in bytes) that will | 72}
be accepted
Specifying the Ethertype expected tag-ethernet-type Megaplex-4 with CL.2/A modules only
in Ethernet packet <0x0000-0xFFFF>
Assigning short description to the port name <string> Using no name removes the name
Administratively enabling the port no shutdown Using shutdown disables the port
Assigning queue group profile to Ethernet queue-group <queue- no queue-group removes queue group
port group-profile-name> association
The default queue group profile for Fast
Ethernet ports is defined with 10 Mbps shaper.
Define a new queue group profile if you need
more bandwidth.
Example
Name :
Administrative Status : Up
Operation Status : Up
Connector Type : SFP In
Auto Negotiation : Enabled
Speed And Duplex : 100 Half Duplex
SFP
---------------------------------------------------------
Connector Type : Copper
Note
For GbE ports, assigned MAC addresses are also displayed. For MAC address
allocation mechanism, see Chapter 10.
Alloc Power (in Watts) allocated by M-ETH, Per port - according to Class
per port/module, in order to fulfill PD supported
requirements Per module - according to power
assigned by CL to this module, based
on port priority algorithm (up to 80W)
Configuration Errors
The following tables list messages generated by Megaplex-4 when a configuration
error on Ethernet ports is detected.
134 Error ALLOCATED POWER EXCEEDED The total allocated power for all the ports of M-ETH/POE
module, which are configured at auto/fix mode, must not
exceed 80W per slot.
407 Error SUM POWER EXCEEDED The total allocated power per Megaplex-4 system must
not exceed 250W.
There is limitation of 250W, per Megaplex-4 chassis, due
to PS limitation. These 250W are shared between the
following modules:
• Voice FXS (VC) modules – consuming 1.5W per port.
• ASMi-54C with power feeding – consuming 3.5W per
port.
• M-ETH/POE – According to user configuration (only on
ports with critical priority)
This sanity appears if you open too many ports, with
overall consumption of more than 250W. To correct,
close some ports, or decrease the maximum power
allocated for M-ETH/POE ports.
587 Warning SUM OF POLICERS RATE The total sum of bandwidths defined in policer profiles for
EXCEED SUPPORTED BW all 8 ports of the M-ETH module must not exceed 1 GbE.
Ethernet port statistics are displayed. The counters are described in the
table below.
Screens and counters are different for Fast Ethernet ports of I/O modules
and GbE ports of CL.2 modules.
M8E1 Module:
mp4100>config>port>eth(8/1)# show statistics
Running
---------------------------------------------------------------
Counter Rx Tx
Total Frames 0 0
Total Octets 0 0
Unicast Frames 0 0
Multicast Frames 0 0
Broadcast Frames 0 0
Paused Frames 0 0
FCS Errors 0 --
Filtered Frames 0 --
Jabber Errors 0 --
Undersize Frames 0 --
Oversize Frames 0 --
64 Octets 0 --
65-127 Octets 0 --
128-255 Octets 0 --
256-511 Octets 0 --
512-1023 Octets 0 --
1024-1528 Octets 0 --
M-ETH Module:
mp4100>config>port>eth(7/3)# show statistics
Running
-----------------------------------------------------------------
Counter Rx Tx
Total Frames 0 9
Total Octets 0 2002
Unicast Frames 0 0
Multicast Frames 0 0
Broadcast Frames 0 9
Paused Frames 0 0
FCS Errors 0 --
Filtered Frames 0 --
Jabber Errors 0 --
Undersize Frames 0 --
Oversize Frames 0 --
Discard Frames -- 0
64 Octets 0 0
65-127 Octets 0 4
128-255 Octets 0 0
256-511 Octets 0 5
512-1023 Octets 0 0
1024-1518 Octets 0 0
1519-Max Octets 0 0
CL.2 Module:
mp4100>config>port>eth(cl-a/1)# show statistics
Running
---------------------------------------------------------------
Counter Rx Tx
Total Frames 0 0
Total Octets 0 0
Unicast Frames 0 0
Multicast Frames 0 0
Broadcast Frames 0 0
Single Collision -- 0
Paused Frames 0 0
FCS Errors 0 --
Single Collision The number of successfully transmitted frames on this CL.2 GbE ports only
interface for which transmission is inhibited by exactly one
collision.
Paused Frames Total number of pause frames (used for flow control)
received/transmitted through the corresponding Ethernet port
FCS Errors The number of frames received on this interface that are an
integral number of octets in length but do not pass the FCS
check
Filtered Frames Total number of filtered frames received/transmitted I/O Ethernet ports only
Jabber Errors Total number of frames received with jabber errors I/O Ethernet ports only
Oversize Frames Total number of oversized frames received/transmitted I/O Ethernet ports only
Undersize Frames Total number of undersized frames received/transmitted I/O Ethernet ports only
Discard Frames Total number of discarded frames received/transmitted M-ETH ports only
64 Octets Total number of received/transmitted 64-byte packets I/O Ethernet ports only
65–127 Octets Total number of received/transmitted 65–127-byte packets I/O Ethernet ports only
128–255 Octets Total number of received/transmitted 128–255-byte packets I/O Ethernet ports only
256–511 Octets Total number of received/transmitted 256–511-byte packets I/O Ethernet ports only
512–1023 Octets Total number of received/transmitted 512–1023-byte packets I/O Ethernet ports only
1024–1518 Octets Total number of received/transmitted 1024–1518-byte I/O Ethernet ports only
packets
1519 - Max Octets Total number of received/transmitted packets with 1519 M-ETH ports only
bytes and up to maximum
Clearing Statistics
E1 Ports
Applicable Modules
The following table shows the number of E1 and E1-i ports and their features
supported by each Megaplex-4 module. The hierarchical position of e1 and e1-i
ports is slot:port for all the modules, with the exception of Megaplex cards
OP-108C and OP-34C, where it is slot:port:tributary (in these modules
slot:port=mux_eth_tdm). The digits in brackets (1 to 4) denote restrictions or
other special remarks regarding implementation of this feature in specific
modules.
Feature/ M8E1 M16E1 OP-108C OP-108C/ OP-34C ASMi-54C/N VS-16E1T1- VS-16E1T1- VS-6/E1T1
Command E1 EoP PW
Number of ports 8 16 8 8 16 8 16 16 8
name √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
shutdown √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
interface-type √ √ – √ – √ √ √ √
line-type √ √ √ – √ √ √(9) √ √
Feature/ M8E1 M16E1 OP-108C OP-108C/ OP-34C ASMi-54C/N VS-16E1T1- VS-16E1T1- VS-6/E1T1
Command E1 EoP PW
out-of-service √ √ √ – √ √ √ √ √
(voice, data) (2)(1) (2)(1) (2)(1) (2)(1) (2)(1) (2)(1) (2)(1)
restoration-time √ – – – – – – – –
rx-sensitivity √ – – – – – √ √ √
√ – – – – – – – –
signaling- profile (1)(4)
timeslots-signaling- √ – – – – – – – –
profile (1)(4)
ts0-over-dsl – – –
remote-crc √ – – –
ASMi-54C/N: 8
Number of ports 63 8 SH-16/E1: 16 16
name √ √ √ √
shutdown √ √ √ √
interface-type – – – –
restoration-time – – – –
rx-sensitivity – – – –
timeslots-signaling- – √ (1)(4) – –
profile
ts0-over-dsl √ √ –
remote-crc √(5) – –
vc-profile √ √ (7) √
7 - Applicable if line type is Unframed and the link is directly mapped to SDH-SONET vc12-vt2
Note
OP-108C/E1 are LRS-102 modules with E1 physical ports, which can also be
installed and operate in Megaplex-4.
Standards
The E1 link interfaces meet the applicable requirements of ITU-T Rec. G.703,
G.704, G.706, G.732, and G.823.
Functional Description
External E1 Link Interfaces are available in M8E1, M16E1, OP-108C/E1, VS-6/E1T1,
VS-16E1T1-PW, VS-16E1T1-EoP and ASMi-54C/N I/O modules. Internal E1 ports
are available in CL.2, M8SL, VS-16E1T1-EoP and ASMi-54C/N I/O modules.
The Megaplex-4 Optimux modules (OP-108C and OP-34C) also have internal ports
but of other type than E1-i. These ports are designed and configured as “E1” but
hierarchically they hold tributary positions, such as <slot>/<port>/<tributary>.
The parameters configurable for each module can be chosen from Table 6-10 . E1
port parameters are described in the following sections.
Framing
The external and internal E1 ports can be independently configured in accordance
with the desired ITU-T framing mode and signaling formats:
• Basic G.704 framing (identified as G.732N) for applications that require CCS.
• G.704 framing with timeslot 16 multiframe (identified as G.732S and referred
to as G.704 multiframe mode) for applications that require CAS.
Interface Type
The external ports support two line interfaces:
• 120Ω balanced line interface. The nominal balanced interface transmit level is
±3V.
• 75Ω unbalanced interface. The nominal unbalanced interface transmit level is
±2.37V.
Only one of these interfaces can be active at any time. The active interface can
be selected by the user, separately for each port.
Note To assure effective monitoring for M8E1, connect two 510 Ω resistors between
the monitored line and the monitoring port. The resistors should be connected in
series between the monitored line and the monitoring port, one resistor for the
TIP wire and the second one for the RING wire.
E1 Payload Processing
Megaplex-4 E1 modules support three main types of payload per timeslot:
• Data timeslots: timeslots which are transparently transferred from port to
port. In general, it is assumed that no CAS is associated with data timeslots.
Timeslots assigned to HDLC ports are always processed as data timeslots.
• Voice timeslots: timeslots carrying PCM-encoded payload, with A-law
companding for M8E1 ports and µ-law companding for M8T1 ports. When
transferred between ports with different standards (for example, between E1
and T1 ports), these timeslots are converted by the CL module.
In general, CAS is always associated with voice timeslots, and therefore it
must also be converted when transferred between ports with different
standards. The user can specify translation rules for the signaling information
by defining signaling profiles – see details in the Signaling Profiles section.
• Management timeslots: with framed signals, one timeslot per port can be
assigned to carry management traffic. Such timeslots are always directed to
the CL management subsystem, for processing.
The flow of payload carried by voice timeslots is normally bidirectional (full duplex
connection). However, it is also possible to define unidirectional flows, called
unidirectional broadcasts, from one source (a timeslot of a source port) to
multiple destinations (each destination being a selected timeslot of another
port).
In case of data timeslots, the flow of payload is normally unidirectional. If the
application requires bidirectional flows, cross-coneect must be configured
symmetrically for both directions.
OOS Signaling
If the communication between modules located in different Megaplex units fails,
e.g., because loss of main link synchronization, etc., it is necessary to control the
state of the signaling information at the two ends of the link. This activity, called
out-of-service (OOS) signaling, is performed by the E1 interfaces and can be
selected in accordance with the specific application requirements, on a per-link
basis.
The OOS signaling options supported by the E1 module ports are as follows:
• Signaling forced to idle state for the duration of the out-of-service condition
(force-idle). This option is suitable for use with all the VC module types.
• Signaling forced to busy state for the duration of the out-of-service condition
(force-busy). This option is suitable for use with E&M and FXO modules, but
not with FXS modules.
• Signaling forced to idle state for 2.5 seconds, and then changed to busy
state for the remaining duration of the out-of-service condition (idle-busy).
This option is suitable for use with E&M and FXO modules, but not with FXS
modules.
• Signaling forced to busy state for 2.5 seconds, and then changed to idle
state for the remaining duration of the out-of-service condition (busy-idle).
This option is suitable for use with all the VC module types.
Inband Management
E1 and internal E1 ports of Megaplex-4 using a framed mode feature inband
management access to the end user’s equipment provided by configuring a
dedicated management timeslot.
The transfer of inband management traffic is controlled by using synchronous
PPP over HDLC encapsulation or Frame Relay encapsulation (under DLCI 100) in
accordance with RFC 2427.
RIP2 routing tables are transmitted as follows:
• Proprietary RIP – Management traffic is routed using RAD proprietary routing
protocol
• RIP2 – In addition to the RAD proprietary routing protocol, RIP2 routing is
also supported.
Factory Defaults
Megaplex-4 is supplied with all e1/e1-i ports disabled. Other parameter defaults
are listed in the table below.
line-type g732s
restoration-time immediate
rx-sensitivity short-haul
interface-type balanced
idle-code 0x7f
signaling-profile no signaling-profile
ts0-over-dsl enabled
vc profile tug-structure
Configuring an E1 Port
Note Tributary e1 ports of Megaplex Optimux modules are actually internal ports but of
type other than e1-i.
• For OP-108C, <port>/<tributary> is 1/1 to 1/4 and 3/1 to 3/4. Tributaries 2/x
and 4/x do not exist.
• For OP-34C, <port>/<tributary> is 1/1 to 1/16. Tributaries 2/x do not exist.
Specifying E1 framing line-type {unframed | g732n When the E1 port is bound to a VCG port,
mode | g732n-crc | g732s | g732s-crc} VS-16E1T1-EoP supports g732n-crc option
only.
Setting attenuation level rx-sensitivity {short-haul | long-haul | M8E1 and VS E1T1 modules only:
of the receive signal monitor } short-haul – low sensitivity (-12 dB)
long-haul – high sensitivity (-43 dB)
monitor – monitor sensitivity (-12 dB)
Specifying the code idle-code { 00 to FF (hexa) } The available selections are [0x01 to 0xFF]
transmitted to fill unused with the following values that are illegal:
timeslots in E1 frames 0x00, 0x08, 0x10, 0x12, 0x21, 0x24, 0x42,
0x49, 0x84, 0x92
Enabling inband inband-management <timeslot> protocol ppp – synchronous PPP over HDLC
management and setting {ppp | fr} [routing-protocol {none | prop- encapsulation
its parameters rip | rip2} ] fr –Frame Relay encapsulation (under DLCI
100) in accordance with RFC 2427
See also Configuring Inband Management in
Chapter 8 for important considerations on
selecting routing protocol.
Not available for VS-16E1T1-EoP modules
when this E1 port is bound to a VCG port
Using no inband management <timeslot>
disables inband management through this
timeslot
Transmitting an out-of-service [voice <00 to FF (hexa)>] [ The hexadecimal number is in the range of 0
out-of-service signal data <00 to FF (hexa)>] [signaling to FF (two digits)
(OOS) {force-idle | force-busy | idle-busy | The selected out-of-service data code is
busy-idle}] also sent during out-of-service periods
instead of the external data stream when
the unframed mode is used
out-of-service voice selection is relevant
only when the g732s or g732s-crc modes
are selected
Specifying the signaling signaling-profile {1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | per-ts} 1 to 5 –All the voice timeslots of the port
profile (M8E1 only) being configured use the same signaling
profile, and the number specifies the signaling
profile to be used, in the range of 1 to 5.
per-ts – The signaling profile can be
individually selected for each voice timeslot of
the port being configured.
This parameter is relevant only when using a
framing mode that supports CAS (line-type
= g732s)
Using no signaling-profile cancels signaling
profile setting (signaling information is
transparently transferred)
For creating and configuring signaling
profiles, see Signaling Profiles.
Specifying the signaling timeslots-signaling-profile [tsx] {1 | 2 | 3 | This command is available for voice
profile per a single 4 | 5} timeslots only, if you selected per-ts under
timeslot or per timeslot timeslots-signaling-profile [tsx..tsy] {1 | 2 | signaling-profile
range 3 | 4 | 5} This command is not available for TS #16.
This command is possible for multiple
timeslots only if they are consecutive
Setting the time required restoration-time {1-sec | immediate | Used to change the frame synchronization
for a port to resume 10-sec} algorithm, to reduce the time required for
normal operation after the port to return to normal operation after
loss of frame local loss of synchronization.
1-sec – After 1 second.
10-sec – Similar to the requirements of
AT&T TR-62411 (after 10 seconds).
Immediate – Immediate, complies with ITU-T
Rec. G.732.
This parameter cannot be changed when
using the Unframed mode.
Selecting the timing tx-clock-source loopback loopback – Clock received from the E1/T1
reference source used by tx-clock-source domain <number> port
the port for the domain – Clock provided by system clock
tx-clock-source through-timing
transmit-to-network domain
direction
through-timing – Clock received from
VC12/VT1.5 or PW (according to the
transport network)
This field is valid for VS-16E1T1-PW and
VS-6/E1T1 modules only.
Assigning VC profile to vc profile <profile name> For creating VC profiles, see VC Profiles.
the port Relevant for M16E1, Optimux modules (in
Megaplex chassis only), VS-6/E1T1,
VS-16E1T1-PW, VS-16E1T1-EoP and
ASMi-54C/N. M8E1 does not support this
feature.
Using no vc removes the profile
Specifying E1 framing line-type { unframed | g732n | g732n-crc | g732n-crc and g732s-crc options are not
mode g732s | g732s-crc } relevant for the M8SL module.
For even e1-i ports representing the serial
ASMi-52 interface (far-end-type=high-
speed-mux-serial-e1), the only possible
selection is g732n.
When the internal E1 port is bound to a VCG
port, VS-16E1T1-EoP supports g732n-crc
option only.
Specifying the code idle-code <00 to FF (hexa)> The available selections are [0x01 to 0xFF]
transmitted to fill unused with the following values that are illegal:
timeslots in E1 frames 0x00, 0x08, 0x10, 0x12, 0x21, 0x24, 0x42,
0x49, 0x84, 0x92
Enabling inband inband-management <timeslot> protocol ppp – synchronous PPP over HDLC
management and setting {ppp | fr} [routing-protocol {none | prop- encapsulation
its parameters rip | rip2} ] fr –Frame Relay encapsulation (under DLCI
100) in accordance with RFC 2427
See also Configuring Inband Management in
Chapter 8 for important considerations on
selecting the routing protocol.
Using no inband management <timeslot>
disables inband management through this
timeslot
Inband management is not available for
even e1-i ports representing the serial
ASMi-52 interface (far-end-type=high-
speed-mux-serial-e1).
Transmitting an out-of-service [voice <00 to FF (hexa)>] [ The hexadecimal number is in the range of 0
out-of-service signal data <00 to FF (hexa)>] [signaling to FF (two digits)
(OOS) {force-idle | force-busy | idle-busy | The selected out-of-service data code is
busy-idle}] also sent during out-of-service periods
instead of the external data stream when
the unframed mode is used
out-of-service voice selection is relevant
only when the g732s or g732s-crc modes
are selected
For even e1-i ports representing the serial
ASMi-52/53 interface (far-end-type=high-
speed-mux-serial-e1), the only possible
selection is data.
Assigning VC profile to vc profile <profile name> For creating VC profiles, see VC Profiles.
the port Using no vc removes the profile
Example 1
The following section illustrates how to configure the E1 port labeled 1 on the
M8E1 module installed in slot 9:
• Set the E1 framing mode to G.732N with CRC.
• Set the line interface to unbalanced.
• Set the attenuation level of the receive signal to long-haul.
• Set the idle code to 8E.
• Administratively enable the port.
• Leave all other parameters disabled or at their defaults.
mp4100>config>port>e1(9/1)# interface-type unbalanced
mp4100>config>port>e1(9/1)# line-type g732n-crc
mp4100>config>port>e1(9/1)# rx-sensitivity long-haul
mp4100>config>port>e1(9/1)# idle-code 0x8E
mp4100>config>port>e1(9/1)# no shutdown
Example 2
This section illustrates how to configure inband management via a dedicated
timeslot on M8E1 Module.
Example 3
This section illustrates how to set signaling profile on timeslots.
1. Activate E1 port 2 of M8E1 module in Slot 9.
2. Configure signaling profile per ts:
TS-10 to profile 2
TS-1 to 9 to profile 3
Routing protocol: RAD proprietary RIP.
mp4100>config>port>e1(9/2)# no shutdown
mp4100>config>port>e1(9/2)# signaling-profile per-ts
mp4100>config>port>e1(9/2)# timeslots-signaling-profile 10 2
mp4100>config>port>e1(9/2)# timeslots-signaling-profile [1..9] 3
mp4100>config>port>e1(9/2)# commit
Result : OK
3. Displaying signaling profile per ts:
mp4100>config>port>e1(9/2)# info detail
name "IO-9 e1 02"
no shutdown
line-type g732s
line-code hdb3
interface-type balanced
idle-code 0x7f
restoration-time immediate
out-of-service voice 0x00 data 0x00 signaling force-idle
signaling-profile per-ts
timeslots-signaling-profile 1 3
timeslots-signaling-profile 2 3
timeslots-signaling-profile 3 3
timeslots-signaling-profile 4 3
timeslots-signaling-profile 5 3
timeslots-signaling-profile 6 3
timeslots-signaling-profile 7 3
timeslots-signaling-profile 8 3
timeslots-signaling-profile 9 3
timeslots-signaling-profile 10 2
rx-sensitivity short-haul
Configuration Errors
The following table lists messages generated by Megaplex-4 when a configuration
error on E1 modules is detected.
131 Warning RESTORATION TIME DOES NOT For E1 links, the restoration time must be in accordance
MATCH THE STD with ITU-T recommendations
144 Error ILLEGAL IDLE CODE SELECTION Code transmitted in idle timeslots is illegal. The available
selections for E1/E1-i ports are [0x01 to 0xFF] with the
following values that are illegal: 0x00, 0x08, 0x10, 0x12,
0x21, 0x24, 0x42, 0x49, 0x84, 0x92
146 Error NUM OF E1/T1 PORTS The maximum number of framed E1 ports opened on the
EXCEEDS 120 M16E1, ASMi-54C/N or OP modules must not exceed 120.
M8E1:
mp4100>config>port>e1(5/1)# show status
Name :
Administrative Status : Down
Operation Status : Up
Connector Type : DB44
SH-16/E1:
mp4100>config>port>e1-i(10/2)# show status
Name : IO-10 e1-i 02
Administrative Status : Up
Operation Status : Up
Loopback Type : None
Testing E1 Ports
Megaplex-4 E1 ports feature test and loopback functions at the port and timeslot
levels. The available loopbacks depend on the port type (E1, E1-i) and specific
module. The following table shows the loopbacks supported by E1 and E1-i ports
on each Megaplex-4 module. The hierarchical position of e1 and e1-i ports is
slot:port for all the modules, with the exception of Megaplex cards OP-108C and
OP-34C, where the e1 port is found at slot:port:tributary (in these modules
slot:port=mux_eth_tdm). The digits in brackets (1 to 3) denote restrictions or
other special remarks regarding implementation of this loopback in specific
modules.
VS-16E1T1-PW EoP
VS-6/E1T1
Remote Loop √ √ √ √ √ √ √ – √
Loop per TS
Local √ √ √(2) – √(2) √ √ √ √
Loop per TS
Remote √ √ √(2) – √(2) √ √ √ √
Local on
remote – – √ √ √ – – – √
Remote on
remote – – √ √ √ – – – √
Ber Test √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
CL Modules
The following sections briefly describe each type of loopback on E1-i ports of CL
modules. Table 6-14 shows the paths of the signals when each loopback is
activated.
Megaplex-4100
SDH/SONET Interface
E1-i/T1-i
CL Framers
1
2
DS1 . SDH/
I/O Port Cross-Connect .. E1/T1 VC/VT
SONET
Mapper Matrix
Matrix .. Framer
..
.
E1-i/T1-i Framers
Local loopback on
2
E1-i port ..
..
..
E1-i/T1-i Framers
Remote loopback on
2
E1-i port ..
..
..
E1-i/T1-i Framers
1
Local loopback on
timeslots of 2
E1-i port ..
..
..
Megaplex-4100
SDH/SONET Interface
E1-i/T1-i
CL Framers
1
2
DS1 . SDH/
I/O Port Cross-Connect .. E1/T1 VC/VT
SONET
Mapper Matrix
Matrix .. Framer
..
.
E1-i/T1-i Framers
1
Remote loopback on
timeslots of 2
E1-i port ..
..
.
.
As shown in Table 6-14, the loopback is activated only on the timeslots specified
by the user during the activation of the loopback. As a result, there is no
disturbance to services provided by means of the other timeslots of the same
E1-i port, only the flow of payload carried by the specified timeslots is disrupted.
The user can activate the loopback on any individual timeslot, or on several
arbitrarily selected timeslots. It is not allowed to activate loopbacks on timeslots
cross-connected with HDLC ports.
I/O Modules
The following sections briefly describe each type of loopback on E1 and E1-i ports
of I/O modules. Table 6-15 shows the paths of the signals when each loopback is
activated.
I/O CL
I/O CL
I/O Interface
I/O Interface
The remote loopback should be activated only after checking that the remote unit
operates normally with the local port loopback. In this case, the remote unit must
receive its own signal, and thus it must be frame-synchronized. The effect on the
individual modules is mixed, as explained above for the local loopback.
If the local Megaplex-4 unit also operated normally when the local port loopback
was activated, then while the remote loopback is connected the local unit should
receive a valid signal, and thus it must be frame-synchronized.
The remote port loopback should be activated at only one of the units connected
in a link, otherwise an unstable situation occurs.
CL
LIU 1 E1
.
Port 1
. .
Uplink Uplink E1 Payload
. .
Other Port
Interface
Routing
Matrix
E1 Payload
Mux/Demux Interface Interface Mux/Demux
. .
.
E1
LIU 4 Port
4(16)
Figure 6-3. Typical Signal Flow for E1 Port Local Loopback on Remote Optimux Device
When a local loopback on an E1 port of the connected Optimux is activated by an
OP module command, the E1 port transmit signal is returned to the input of the
port receive path (the E1 port signal is disconnected from the transmit path and
is replaced by an AIS signal).
While the loopback is activated, the tested Optimux port will receive its own
signal, and therefore must operate normally. In addition, the user equipment
connected to the tested E1 port must also receive its own signal and thus it must
be synchronized.
This test checks the operation of the far end Optimux E1 port interface, and the
connections to the E1 equipment attached to the far end E1 port.
A typical signal flow for a remote loopback on an E1 port of a remote Optimux is
shown in Figure 6-4.
Figure 6-4. Typical Signal Flow for E1 Port Remote Loopback on Remote Optimux
When a remote loopback on an E1 port of the connected Optimux is activated by
an OP module command, the received E1 signal is returned to the input of the
port transmit path after being processed by the internal E1 port, and is
transmitted back to the OP module (the E1 port signal is disconnected from the
receive path and is replaced by an AIS signal).
Therefore, the corresponding internal E1 port of the OP module receives its own
signal, and it must operate normally. In addition, the OP module user equipment
connected via the tested E1 port must also receive its own signal and thus it
must be synchronized.
This test checks the connections between the user’s E1 equipment connected via
the tested internal E1 port of the local OP module, the operation of the OP
module link (section) and of the remote Optimux, and the network connections
between the local OP module and the remote Optimux.
Local and Remote Loopbacks on Remote ASMi Modems from E1-i Ports of
ASMi-54C/N and SH-16/E1 Modules
E1-i ports of ASMi-54C/N module feature additional local and remote loopbacks
on remote ASMi modems. Availability of loopbacks and their activation command
depend on the remote modem flavor (far-end-type). The following table lists the
loopbacks available on e1-i ports of ASMi-54C/N module for each far end type.
Table 6-16. Local and Remote Loopbacks on Remote ASMi Modems from E1-i Ports of ASMi-54C/N
and SH-16/E1 Modules
*ASMi-54C/N only
Note
Only one loopback at a time can be activated from Megaplex-4. At any moment
the last loopback command is valid and overrides the previous loopback
command.
Figure 6-5 shows the signal paths of a typical remote loopback on the remote
ASMi modem.
Depending on the modem type, the loopback is performed on the E1 or serial
port of the remote modem and tests the E1/serial traffic passing on the SHDSL
line, leaving aside Ethernet traffic related to this line.
When this loopback is activated, the selected port sends a remote loopback
request to the remote modem connected to that channel. The command is sent
through the inband eoc channel configured on the remote modem.
The loopback is activated within the user interface of the remote modem, which
returns the received data through the transmit path.
Megaplex-4100/4104 Remote
Loopback
CL ASMi-54C/N ASMi-52/54
E1 or DTE
Routing Port e1-i 1
Matrix .. E1 or Serial
.. .. Port*
Other Port Bus ..
Interface Interface .. *When far-end-type=high-speed-
. .. mux-serial-e1, loops on ASMi E1
ports are activated from odd e1-i
Port e1-i 8 ports and loops on ASMi serial
ports - from even e1-i ports
Megaplex-4100/4104 Local
Loopback
CL ASMi-54C/N ASMi-52/54
E1 or DTE
Routing Port e1-i 1
Matrix .
. . E1 or Serial
BER Test
The BER test, activated by the command bert, is used to evaluate data
transmission through selected timeslots of the link connected to a selected E1 or
E1-i port without using external test equipment. It is available on the following
ports:
• E1 ports of ASMi-54C/N and M16E1 modules
• E1-i ports of ASMi-54C/N and SH-16/E1 modules.
Data transmission is checked by applying a test sequence generated by an
internal test sequence generator towards the remote equipment. The timeslots in
which the sequence is transmitted, are defined by means of the bert command.
The test sequence is 2E-15.
To check that the line is alive or verify the BER detection calibration, the user can
also inject single errors into the transmitted pattern.
The BER Test on unframed ports is performed per port, while on framed ports it
is performed also per individual timeslot.
The timeslot on which BERT is performed must be cross-connected.
The transmitted data is returned by means of a loop, somewhere along the data
path, to the test sequence evaluator. The evaluator compares the received data,
bit by bit, to the original data and detects any difference (bit error). The output
of the evaluator is sampled during module polling, to check whether errors were
detected in the interval between consecutive pollings.
The number of errors is accumulated from the activation of the BER test.
The test results are displayed on a supervision terminal as a number in the range
of 0 (no errors detected during the current measurement interval) through
63535. The meaning of the displayed parameters is given in the table below.
The BER test duration is infinite (to stop the test manually, use no bert
command).
Parameter Description
Status Displays the BERT status: Not Active, In Sync or Out of Sync
Parameter Description
Run Time (Sec) Displays the total time the test is running in seconds
Sync Loss (Sec) Displays the number of times Sync Loss was detected since BERT
started to run
Bert Error Count Displays the total number of bit errors detected
ES (Sec) Displays the total number of seconds in which errors have been
detected
Loopback Duration
The activation of a loopback disconnects the local and remote equipment served
by the Megaplex-4. Therefore, when you initiate a loopback, you have the option
to limit its duration to an interval in the range of 1 through 30 minutes.
After the selected interval expires, the loopback is automatically deactivated
without operator intervention. However, you can always deactivate a loopback
activated on the local Megaplex-4 before this timeout expires. When using inband
management, always use the timeout option; otherwise, the management
communication path may be permanently disconnected.
The default is infinite duration (without timeout).
Activating and configuring loopback {local | remote} [time-slot local – local loopback (per port and per
the direction of the loopback <1..31>] [duration <duration in timeslot)
(all modules) minutes 1..30> ] remote – remote loopback (per port and
per timeslot)
For additional loopbacks on e1-i ports of
ASMi-54C/N modules, see two table rows
below.
Activating the BER test and bert [ts <ts number 1..31>] [inject- The [ts <ts number in the range from 1 to
configuring its parameters error single] 31>] command is used only for framed
ports and is mandatory for these ports.
The timeslot on which BERT is performed
must be cross-connected.
CL flip stops the BERT session.
Activating and configuring the loopback {local | remote} local – local loopback:
direction of the loopback and [duration <duration in minutes remote – remote loopback
the duration of it (in minutes) 1..30> ]
Displaying statistics show statistics {total | all | current} • total –total statistics of last 96
intervals
• current –current statistics
• all –all statistics: first current
statistics, then statistics for all
valid intervals, and finally total
statistics
Note BES, LOFC and Rx Frames Slip are displayed for framed formats only.
For example:
Current statistics:
mp4100>config>port>e1(1/2)# show statistics current
Current
---------------------------------------------------------------
Time Elapsed (Sec) : 191
Valid Intervals : 2
ES : 0
SES : 0
UAS : 0
BES : 0
Rx Frames Slip : 0
LOFC : 0
Statistics for interval 67:
mp4100>config>port>e1(3/1)# show statistics interval 67
Interval Number : 67
Interval
---------------------------------------------------------------
ES : 16
SES : 1
UAS : 589
BES : 0
Rx Frames Slip : 0
LOFC : 0
Total statistics:
Interval Number : 1
Interval
---------------------------------------------------------------
ES : 0
SES : 0
UAS : 0
BES : 0
Rx Frames Slip : 0
LOFC : 0
Interval Number : 2
Interval
---------------------------------------------------------------
ES : 2
SES : 0
UAS : 0
BES : 0
Rx Frames Slip : 0
LOFC : 0
Total
---------------------------------------------------------------
ES : 2
SES : 0
UAS : 0
BES : 0
Rx Frames Slip : 0
LOFC : 0
The counters are described in Table 6-18, Table 6-19 and Table 6-20.
Parameter Description
UAS Displays the number of unavailable seconds (UAS) in the current interval.
An unavailable second is one of the following:
• Any second following 10 consecutive SES seconds
• A second for which any of the previous 10 consecutive seconds was also a UAS
and any of the previous 10 consecutive seconds was a SES.
SES Displays the number of severely errored seconds (SES) in the current interval.
A SES is any second not declared a UAS which contains an OOF or more than 320 CRC
errors.
BES Displays the number of bursty errored seconds (BES) in the current interval.
A BES is any second which is not declared a UAS and contains 2 to 319 CRC errors
Rx Frames Slip Displays the number of Rx Frames Slips in the current 15-minute interval.
A CSS is a second with one or more controlled slip events.
Time elapsed The elapsed time (in seconds) since the beginning of the current interval, in seconds.
The range is 1 to 900 seconds.
Valid Intervals The number of elapsed finished 15-min intervals for which statistics data can be
displayed, in addition to the current (not finished) interval (up to 96).
Parameter Description
ES Displays the total number of errored seconds (ES) in the selected interval
UAS Displays the total number of unavailable seconds (UAS) in the selected interval
SES Displays the total number of severely errored seconds (SES) in the selected interval
BES Displays the total number of bursty errored seconds (BES) in the selected interval
LOFC Displays the total number of loss of frame alignment events in the selected interval
Rx Frames Slip Displays the total number of loss of of Rx Frames Slip events in the selected interval
• For the M16E1, ASMi-54C/N, SH-16/E1, OP-108C and OP-34C modules, Interval #1
is the earliest in time.
Parameter Description
ES Displays the total number of errored seconds (ES) since statistics are available
UAS Displays the total number of unavailable seconds (UAS) since statistics are available
SES Displays the total number of severely errored seconds since statistics are available
BES Displays the total number of bursty errored seconds (BES) since statistics are available
LOFC Displays the total number of loss of frame alignment events since statistics are available
Rx Frames Slip Displays the total number of loss of of Rx Frames Slip events since statistics are
available
Clearing Statistics
Applicable Modules
Mux-eth-tdm ports denote fiber optic links of Optimux modules.
Each Optimux module link has two optical ports, which can be operated as a
protection group, to enhance service availability to critical users. The service
provider can control each standalone unit through the link connecting the unit to
the Optimux module, and therefore can manage a large number of standalone
units from a central location.
OP-108C comprises two identical independently-operating sections, identified as
OP A and OP B, each of which is capable of multiplexing four independent internal
E1 data streams and up to 100 Mbps of Ethernet payload for transport over a
fiber-optic link. OP-34C has a single section capable of multiplexing 16
independent internal E1 data streams and up to 32 Mbps of Ethernet payload for
transport over a fiber-optic link.
In addition to its own OP modules, Megaplex-4 can also operate with similar
modules initially designed for operation in the LRS-102 chassis. The difference
between the Megaplex and LRS modules is in the type of E1 ports:
• Megaplex modules have internal E1 ports, and can be connected to other
ports within Megaplex-4 via the chassis TDM buses
• LRS modules have external E1 ports which can be connected only to external
users, but cannot be connected to other ports within Megaplex-4 via the
chassis TDM buses.
In the CLI, LRS-102 modules are identified by “-e1” at the end of the module
name: for example, the LRS-102 OP-108C (OP-108C/E1) module is identified as
op108c-e1.
The following table shows the number of mux-eth-tdm ports on Megaplex-4 and
LRS-102 I/O modules.
OP-108C, OP-108C/E1 4:
• 2 for Section OP A (mux-eth-tdm 1 main,
mux-eth-tdm 2 redundant)
• 2 for Section OP B (mux-eth-tdm 3 main,
mux-eth-tdm 4 redundant)
Standards
Fiber optic links of Optimux modules are RAD proprietary technology.
Functional Description
The link interface subsystem of each Optimux module section includes a link
redundancy switch, and two independent link interfaces (one for each link port)
with SFP sockets.
The link redundancy switch operates as follows:
• When only one SFP is installed, only one link port is active. The link
redundancy switch then connects the link mux/demux to this port.
• When both SFP are installed, but redundancy is disabled, the link redundancy
switch connects the link mux/demux to the first port (LINK 1 or LINK 3 in
OP-108C, OP-108C/E1, LINK 1 in OP-34C).
• When both SFP are installed, and redundancy is enabled, the link redundancy
switch connects the link mux/demux to the port selected as the primary port
of the corresponding link. When signal loss is detected by the primary port,
the switch transfers the traffic to the other (secondary) port.
Each link interface performs the following functions:
• The transmit path converts the link data and the associated clock signal
provided by the link mux/demux to the signals needed to drive the SFP that
provides the physical interface of each port, for transmission to the far end
equipment.
• The receive path recovers the link data stream received from the far end
equipment, and the associated clock, and provides the data and clock to the
link mux/demux.
The link interfaces accept a wide range of SFPs, and therefore the performance
depends on the installed SFP model. RAD offers a wide range of SFPs to meet a
wide range of system requirements. The fiber-optic interfaces can operate over
62.5/125 micron multi-mode, or 9/125 micron single-mode fibers (typical
attenuation of 3.5 dB/km at 850 nm, 0.4 dB/km at 1310 nm, and 0.25 dB/km at
1550 nm). The offered SFPs include models that need a single fiber instead of the
customary two fibers; for example, WDM models SF1 and SF2 operating at two
different wavelengths, or the SF3 model with SC/APC (angled polished connector)
that operates at a single wavelength.
Note It is strongly recommended to order OP modules with RAD SFPs installed: this will
ensure that prior to shipping RAD has performed comprehensive functional
testing on the assembled module, including SFPs. Although users can install their
own SFPs into OP modules, RAD cannot guarantee full compliance to product
specifications when using non-RAD SFPs, and cannot be held responsible for any
damage that may result if non-compliant transceivers are used. In particular,
users are warned to use only agency approved SFPs that comply with the local
laser safety regulations for Class 1 laser products.
Factory Defaults
Megaplex-4 is supplied with all mux-eth-tdm ports disabled. The default far-end-
type value is no far-end-type.
Assigning short description to name <string> Using no name removes the name
port
Setting data rate and duplex speed-duplex {10-full-duplex | 10-full-duplex –10baseT full duplex
mode of the Ethernet port, 100-full-duplex |10-half-duplex 100-full-duplex – 100baseT full duplex
when autonegotiation is |100-half-duplex }
10-half-duplex – 10baseT half duplex
disabled
100-half-duplex – 100baseT half
duplex.
When autonegotiation is enabled, this
parameter is replaced by max-capability.
Setting flow control for the flow-control Using no flow-control disables flow
selected port (when operating control
in the full duplex mode), or
back pressure (when operating
in the half-duplex mode)
Assigning short description name <string> Using no name removes the name
to port
Example
The following section illustrates how to configure the remote Optimux-108
connected to port 3 of local OP-108C module installed in slot 1:
• Administratively enable the optical links, Ethernet port and all E1 ports.
• Leave their parameters at their defaults.
configure port mux-eth-tdm 1/3 remote
configure port mux-eth-tdm 1 no shutdown
configure port mux-eth-tdm 2 no shutdown
configure port ethernet 1 no shutdown
configure port e1 1 no shutdown
configure port e1 2 no shutdown
configure port e1 3 no shutdown
configure port e1 4 no shutdown
exit-remote
exit all
Configuration Errors
The table below lists messages generated by Megaplex-4 when a configuration
error on modules with mux-eth-tdm ports (OP-108C/OP-34C) is detected.
500 Warning FAR-END CHANGED, DEVICE The type of far-end device connected to the OP-108C
WILL RESTART module is different from the one configured. The module
will perform a reset.
501 Error NOT IDENTICAL FAR-END When two far end devices are connected to the OP-108C
DEVICE TYPE module, they must be identical.
502 Error PORT ASSIGNED TO The optical link (mux-eth-tdm port) status is set to
DISCONNECTED LINK shutdown, while the corresponding E1 or Ethernet ports
are configured as “no shutdown”.
503 Error ETH RATE & E1/T1/TRIBUTARY The far-end user Ethernet port rate exceeds the available
RATE MISMATCH link bandwidth. Increase the bandwidth by reducing the
number of active E1 ports
SFP
---------------------------------------------------------------
Connector Type : LC
Manufacturer Name : WTD
Manufacturer Part Number : RTXM139-BG-RAD
Typical Maximum Range (Meter) : 15000
Wave Length (nm) : 1310
Fiber Type : SM
SFP
---------------------------------------------------------------
Current Minimum Maximum
RX Power (dBm) : 0.0 dBm
TX Power (dBm) : 0.0 dBm
Laser Bias (mA) : 0.0 mA
Laser Temperature (Celsius) : 0.0 C
Power Supply (V) : 3.3 V
The performance monitoring data for the OP module link physical layer includes
status data for each link port, and SFP data for the installed SFPs. Table 4-4
explains the parameters of the SFP installed for selected link port.
Parameter Description
Connector Type Displays the SFP connector type, for example, LC, SC, SC/APC, FC, etc.
Typical Max. Range Displays the maximum range expected to be achieved over typical optical fibers, in
(Meter) meters
Wave Length (nm) Displays the nominal operating wavelength of the SFP, in nm
Fiber Type Displays the type of optical fiber for which the SFP is optimized: SM (single mode) or
MM (multi mode)
TX Power (dBm) Displays the current optical power, in dBm, transmitted by the SFP
RX Power (dBm) Displays the current optical power, in dBm, received by the SFP
For displaying protection status, see Example 2 in TDM Group Protection section
in Chapter 7.
Megaplex-4100
OP-108C Section
CL or OP-34C
Figure 6-7. Signal Flow for Link Local Loopback on Local OP Module
When a link local loopback is activated on an OP module, the link transmit signal
is returned to the input of the link receive path at a point just before the uplink
interface. The local link receive path will receive its own signal, and therefore
must operate normally.
In addition, user equipment connected via each E1 internal port served by the
corresponding link must also receive its own signal and thus it must be
synchronized.
This test checks the operation of the local OP link (section), and the connections
to the E1 equipment attached via local internal E1 ports.
Megaplex-4100
OP-108C - OP-A Section
CL
This test checks the connections between the user E1 equipment attached to the
E1 ports of the far end device, the operation of the far end device, the uplink
interface of the local OP module (module section), and the network connections
between the local OP module and the far end device.
CL
LIU 1 E1
..
Port 1
Figure 6-9. Typical Signal Flow for Link Local Loopback on Remote Optimux
When a link local loopback is activated by an OP module command on the
connected Optimux, the Optimux link transmit signal is returned to the input of
its link receive path within the uplink interface. The Optimux link receive path will
receive its own signal, and therefore must operate normally.
In addition, user equipment connected to each OP module E1 port served by the
link must receive an AIS signal.
Ethernet traffic will not be disrupted while the loopback is activated.
This test checks the operation of the far end Optimux, and the connections to
the E1 equipment attached to the far end E1 ports.
This test is possible for OP-108C only with limited (not infinite) duration and not
available for OP-34C.
CL
LIU 1 E1
"1"
..
Port 1
Figure 6-10. Typical Signal Flow for Link Remote Loopback on Remote Optimux
When a link remote loopback is activated on an Optimux, the received link signal
is processed by the uplink interface, returned to the input of the link transmit
path, and transmitted back to the local OP module. Therefore, the local OP
module receives its own TDM signal, and its TDM paths must operate normally.
In addition, user equipment connected via each local OP module internal E1 port
served by the corresponding link must also receive its own signal and thus it must
be synchronized.
This test checks the connections between the user E1 equipment attached to the
internal E1 ports of the local OP module, the operation of the local OP module,
the uplink interface of the far end device, and the network connections between
the local OP module and the far end device.
Loopback Duration
The activation of a loopback disconnects the local and remote equipment served
by the OP module. Therefore, when you initiate a loopback, you have the option
to limit its duration to an interval in the range of 1 through 30 minutes.
After the selected interval expires, the loopback is automatically deactivated,
without operator intervention. However, you can always deactivate a loopback
activated on the local module before this timeout expires. When using inband
management, always use the timeout option; otherwise, the management
communication path may be permanently disconnected.
The default is infinite duration (without timeout).
Activating and configuring the loopback {local | remote} local – local loopback
direction of the loopback and [duration <duration in minutes remote – remote loopback
the duration of it (in minutes) 1..30> ]
Activating and configuring the loopback {local | remote} local – local loopback:
direction of the loopback and [duration <duration in minutes • not available for OP-34C
the duration of it (in minutes) 1..30> ]
• for OP-108C available only when
the duration is not infinite
remote – remote loopback
Stopping the loopback no loopback
Serial Ports
Applicable Modules
The following table shows the type and number of serial ports available on each
Megaplex-4 serial I/O module.
VS-12 versatile 12
Split TS cross-
connect (for serial
ports) √ – √ – – – – –
name √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
shutdown √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
clock-mode √ √ – – – √ √ –
cts-rts √ √ √ – – – √ –
rate √ √ √ – – √ – √
fifo-size – √ – – – – – –
mode √ – √ – – √ √ –
encapsulation-mode √ – √ – – – – –
end-to-end-control √ – √ – – √ √ –
data-bits √ – √ – – √ √ –
parity √ – √ – – √ – –
stop-bits √ – √ – – √ – –
rate-adaptive – – – – – √ – –
interface – – √ √ √ – – –
activation-type – – – – √ – – –
Standards
The Megaplex-4 serial ports comply with following standards:
• HS-703: ITU-T G.703, Codirectional interface
• LS-6N/LS-12 channel interface: ITU-T Rec. V.24/EIA RS-232, user-selectable
DCE or DTE
• LS-6N/LS-12 async-to-sync conversion method compatible with ITU-T Rec.
V.14
• HS-RN channel interface: ITU-T Rec. V.24/EIA RS-232, ITU-T Rec. V.110
• HSF-2: IEEE PC37.94 standard draft
• VS: Serial channels interface: V.35, V.11/RS-422, V.24/ EIA RS-232, ITU-T Rec.
V.110.
Functional Description
See corresponding section in Megaplex-4 I/O Modules Installation and Operation
Manual for each module.
Factory Defaults
Megaplex-4 is supplied with all serial ports disabled. Other parameter defaults are
listed in the table below.
clock-mode dce
HSF-2: 1x64
HSU-6/12: 1.2
rate HS-RN: 0.6
LS-6N/LS-12: 9.6
HS-6N/12N: T1: 1 x 56kbps, E1: 1 x 64kbps
fifo-size auto
mode sync
stop-bits 1
rate-adaptive proprietary
VS modules: v35
interface
HSU modules: nt
activation-type 1
Assigning short description name <string> Using no name removes the name
to port
Configuring the clock mode HS-RN, HSU-6/12 (lt1 mode • dce – The port provides transmit and
in synchronous mode only): clock-mode receive clocks to the DTE
{dce|external-dce} • external-dce – The port provides the
HS-6N/12N, LS-6N/LS-12: receive clock to the DTE, and accepts the
clock-mode {dce | external- transmit clock from the DTE
dce | dte } • dte – The channel interface requires
transmit and receive clock signals from
the user’s equipment
In modules with sync/async operation this
selection is relevant only for synchronous
mode
Setting the data rate of this HS-6N/12N: rate {1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | The allowed range is n×56 kbps or n×64 kbps,
port in kbps. The selection 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 | 11 | 12 | where n is 1 through 24 for a T1 link, and 1
depends on the module and 13 | 14 | 15 | 16 | 17 | 18 | 19 through 31 for an E1 link.
encapsulation type | 20 | 21 | 22 | 23 | 24 | 25 | In HS-6N/12N modules with V.24/RS-232
26 | 27 | 28 | 29 | 30 | 31} x interface, the data rate for all channels is
{56kbps | 64kbps} 64 kbps only.
HSU-6/12 (lt1 mode only): The available data rates depend on the port
rate {1.2 | 2.4 | 4.8 | 9.6 | 16 | transmission mode:
19.2 | 32 | 38.4 | 48 | 56 | • Synchronous mode: 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 16,
57.6 | 64 | 115.2 | 128} 19.2, 32, 38.4, 48, 56 (supported only
when connected to an ASMi-31 using
V.110 rate adaptation), 64 or 128 kbps.
• Asynchronous mode: 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6,
19.2, 38.4, 48, 57.6 or 115.2 kbps.
LS-6N/LS-12: rate {2.4 | 4.8 | Determines the channel data rate, in kbps.
7.2 | 8 | 9.6 | 14.4 | 16 | 19.2 | Group 1: 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, 38.4
24 | 28.8 | 32 | 38.4 | 48 | 56 |
Group 2: 7.2, 14.4, 28.8, 57.6
57.6 | 64}
Group 3: 8.0, 16.0, 24.0, 32.0, 48.0, 56.0,
64.0
Note: Both channels of a given pair must
operate at rates belonging to the same group.
Group 3 rates can be selected only on
channels using the synchronous protocol.
VS (encapsulation-
mode=none) : rate {1 | 2 | 3 |
4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 | 11 |
12 | 13 | 14 | 15 | 16 | 17 | 18
| 19 | 20 | 21 | 22 | 23 | 24 |
25 | 26 | 27 | 28 | 29 | 30 |
31} x {56kbps | 64kbps}
VS (encapsulation-
mode=v110) : rate {2.4 | 4.8 |
9.6 | 19.2 | 38.4 }
VS (encapsulation-
mode=3bit-transitional) : rate
{1 | 2 } x 64kbps
Selecting the size of the fifo-size {auto | 16bit | 30bit | In general, you should select auto. The
FIFO buffer used by the 52bit | 72bit} automatically selected value depends on the
channel (HS-6N/12N only) channel data rate:
• ±16 bits for 64 kbps
• ±30 bits for 128 and 192 kbps
• ±52 bits for 256 through 320 kbps
• ±72 bits for 384 through 1536 kbps
• ±52 bits for 1600 through 1792 kbps
• ±30 bits for 1856 and 1920 kbps
• ±16 bits for 1984 kbps.
For special applications that require longer
buffers, you may want to manually select one
of the supported FIFO sizes (±16 bits, ±30
bits, ±52 bits, or ±72 bits)
Selecting the port mode {sync | async} HS-RN: this command is irrelevant for
transmission mode (HS-RN, encapsulation-mode=3bit-transitional
HSU-6/12, LS-6N/LS-12, VS) VS: this command is relevant only for
encapsulation mode=v110.
Selecting the encapsulation encapsulation-mode {latency | Setting encapsulation mode per channel
mode for the HS-RN module bandwidth | 3bit-transitional } depends on the HS-RN hardware option:
• All the ports of the HS-RN/HDLC module
must use the same encapsulation mode.
This is done by forcing the last choice to
all the module ports.
• In the HS-RN/V.110 module, encapsulation
mode can be set independently per each
channel.
3bit-transitional mode is available only for
HS-RN/V.110 hardware option.
Selecting the encapsulation encapsulation-mode {v110 | This parameter defines the serial port
mode for the VS modules 3bit-transitional | none} behaviour of VS modules (see diagram in
Megaplex-4 I/O Modules Installation and
Operation Manual, Versatile Modules chapter,
Encapsulation Modes).
Setting CTS line to track the cts-rts HS-RN, HS-6N/12N, LS-6N/LS-12, VS modules
state of the local RTS line only
Using no cts-rts sets the CTS line continously
to on.
Configuring end-to-end end-to-end-control When configured, the state of the local RTS
control (VS, HS-RN, and DTR lines are reflected by the remote
HSU-6/12: lt1 mode) DCD and DSR line, respectively. For HS-RN, do
not use this selection for data rates
exceeding 38.4 kbps.
Using no end-to-end-control disables end-to-
end control. For HS-RN, always use this
selection for data rates exceeding 38.4 kbps.
When encapsulation-mode=3bit-transitional,
only the state of the local RTS line can be
transmitted end-to-end to the remote DCD
line, but not local DTR to the remote DSR
In VS modules, DTR and DSR lines are relevant
only for low-speed mode (encapsulation-
mode=v110).
In VS modules, in high-speed mode
(encapsulation-mode=none) this selection is
available only for n x 56 kbps data rates.
Configuring end-to-end end-to-end-control {rts | rts- rts – the state of the local RTS line is
control (LS-6N/LS-12) dtr} reflected by the remote DCD line
rts-dtr – the state of the local RTS and DTR
lines are reflected by the remote DCD and
DSR line, respectively
Using no end-to-end-control disables end-to-
end control (only local support is enabled)
Both channels of a given pair must be
assigned to support the matching control
signals.
Selecting the number of HS-RN, HSU-6/12, HS-S, VS: HSU-6/12: 5 or 6 data bits are supported only
data bits in the v110 encapsulation mode: when the remote equipment is an ASMi-31
asynchronous word format data-bits {5 | 6 | 7 | 8} using V.110 rate adaptation.
LS-6N/LS-12: data-bits {6 | 7 | LS-6N/12: The number is equal to the total
8 | 9} number of data and parity bits
HS-RN: this command is irrelevant for
encapsulation-mode=3bit-transitional
VS: this command is relevant only for
encapsulation mode=v110
Controlling the VS, HS-RN: parity Using no parity means that the parity bit is
end-to-end transfer of the HSU-6/12 (lt1 mode only), not transferred
parity bit in the HS-S: parity {odd | even} LS-6N/12: Parity is transparently transferred
asynchronous word format
HS-RN: this command is irrelevant for
encapsulation-mode=3bit-transitional
VS: this command is relevant only for
encapsulation mode=v110
Selecting the function and interface {lt | nt | te | lt1} Selections for HS-U-6/12 are:
mode of the HS-U-6/12/ • nt –port operates as a network
HS-S external port termination unit in the “I” mode.
• lt – port operates as a line termination
unit in the “I” mode.
• lt1– port operates as a line termination
unit in the “1” mode (used for connection
to NT equipment, such as ASMi-31).
Selections for HS-S are:
• te – terminal mode.
• nt – network termination mode.
Example
The following section illustrates how to configure serial port 1 on the HS-6N
module installed in slot 5:
• Data rate 128 kbps.
• Set CTS line to track the state of the local RTS line
• Administratively enable the port.
• Leave all other parameters disabled or at their defaults.
mp4100>config>port>serial(5/1)# rate 2 x 64kbps
mp4100>config>port>serial(5/1)# cts-rts
mp4100>config>port>serial(5/1)# no shutdown
RTS : High
CTS : High
DCD : High
DTR : Low
DSR : High
Parameter Description
DTE Rx Counter Number of data transitions on the input/output data wires since last reset or power-
up
DTE Tx Counter Number of data transitions on the input/output data wires since last reset or power-
up
WAN Rx Violation Number of 3-bit transitional protocol code violation since last reset or power-up
Clearing Statistics
Configuration Errors
The tables below list messages generated by Megaplex-4 when a configuration
error on modules with serial ports is detected.
150 Error FIFO SIZE TOO SMALL The manually-selected FIFO size must be equal or larger
than the minimum FIFO size required for the selected rate
and link type (E1 or T1)
151 Error ILLEGAL CHANNELS RATE All channels are configured for operation in multiples of
COMBINATION 64 kbps or 56 kbps. This error may be caused by:
• Selection of 64K in an odd-numbered channel (e.g.,
channel 1) and 56K in an adjacent channel (e.g.,
channel 2) is not allowed.
• The total rate of 2 adjacent channels must not
require more than 31 timeslots
152 Error CTS SHOULD BE SAME FOR ALL All the channels of the specified module must be
CHANNELS configured with the same CTS mode
130 Error CLOCK MODE/CLOCK SOURCE The EXT-DCE clock mode cannot be selected when the
MISMATCH port interface is configured as LT-1 (applicable only for
HS-U-6 and HS-U-12 modules)
Channel 1 ..
.. .. ..
... . ..
. .. .
User or ..
Test .
Equipment
User or
HS-703 HS-703 Test
Equipment
I/O Modules
I/O Modules
Local Remote
Unit Unit
System
Management
Channel 1 ..
.. ..
.. . ..
.. .. ..
User or . .. .
Test .
Equipment
User or
HS-703 HS-703 C Test
Equipment
I/O Modules
I/O Modules
Local Remote
Unit Unit
System
Management
Loopback Duration
The activation of a loopback disconnects the local and remote equipment served
by the Megaplex-4. Therefore, when you initiate a loopback, you have the option
to limit its duration to an interval in the range of 1 through 30 minutes.
After the selected interval expires, the loopback is automatically deactivated,
without operator intervention. However, you can always deactivate a loopback
activated on the local Megaplex-4 before this timeout expires. When using inband
management, always use the timeout option; otherwise, the management
communication path may be permanently disconnected.
The default is infinite duration (without timeout).
Activating and configuring the loopback {local | remote} • local. Returns the transmitted data
direction of the loopback at the physical layer to the receiving
path. The local physical loopback
includes a configurable timeout
mechanism that ends the loopback
operation after a user-defined
duration.
• remote. Returns the received data
at the physical layer to the
transmitting path.
Using no loopback stops the loopback.
SDH/SONET Ports
Applicable Modules
Megaplex-4 features four SDH/SONET ports (two ports located on each of the
two CL.2 modules). The ports can be ordered either with STM-1/OC-3 or
STM-4/OC-12 interfaces. The panels and terminal identification for the STM-1/OC-
3 and STM-4/OC-12 versions are identical.
Standards
The SDH/SONET ports comply with the following standards:
• SDH: ITU-T G.957, G.783, G.798
• SONET: GR-253-core.
In particular, framing complies with the following:
• SDH: ITU-T G.707, G.708, G.709
• SONET: GR-253-core.
Functional Description
N x M Bytes
Order of
Transmission
F F F F
F B B
B B B
N x M Bytes 1
N Rows
2
Order of
Transmission
B B B
M Columns
Legend
B Signal Byte
F Framing Byte
F F F F
Path Overhead (One Column)
Section
Virtual Container
N Rows Overhead
(VC)
M Columns
Section Overhead
In SDH networks, the term section refers to the link between two consecutive
SDH equipment units of the same type.
Some signal carrying capacity is allocated in each SDH frame for the section
overhead. This provides the facilities (alarm monitoring, bit error monitoring, data
communications channels, etc.) required to support and maintain the
transportation of a VC between nodes in an SDH network.
The section overhead pertains only to an individual SDH transport system. This
means that the section overhead is generated by the transmit side of a network
node, and is terminated at the receive side of the next network node.
Therefore, when several SDH transport systems are connected in tandem, the
section overhead is not transferred together with the payload (VC) between the
interconnected transport systems.
VC Assembly/Disassembly Process
The concept of a tributary signal being inserted into a virtual container, to be
transported end-to-end across a SDH network, is fundamental to the operation
of SDH networks. This process of inserting the tributary signal into the proper
locations of a VC is referred to as “mapping”.
In all the SDH signal structures, the carrying capacity provided for each individual
tributary signal is always slightly greater than that required by the tributary rate.
Thus, the mapping process must compensate for this difference. This is achieved
by adding stuffing bytes, e.g., path overhead bytes, to the signal stream as part
of the mapping process. This increases the bit rate of the composite signal to the
rate provided for tributary transport in the SDH structure.
At the point of exit from the SDH network, the tributary signal must be recovered
from the virtual container, by removing the path overhead and stuffing bits. This
process is referred to as “demapping”. After demapping, it is necessary to
restore the original data rate of the recovered tributary data stream.
1 Column
Note At a transmission rate of 8000 frames per second, each byte supports a data rate
of 64 kbps.
The STM-1 signal frame comprises 9 rows by 270 columns, resulting in a total
signal capacity of 2430 bytes (19440 bits per frame). Considering the STM-1
frame repetition rate, 8000 frames per second, this yields a bit rate of
155.520 Mbps.
The STM-1 frame comprises the following parts:
• Section Overhead. The STM-1 section overhead occupies the first nine
columns of the STM-1 frame, for total of 81 bytes.
• Virtual Container. The remaining 261 columns of the STM-1 frame, which
contain a total of 2349 bytes, are allocated to the virtual container. The
virtual container itself comprises a container for the payload signal (260
columns), preceded by one column of path overhead. The virtual container
carried in an STM-1 frame is referred to as a Virtual Container Level 4, or
VC-4. VC-4, which is transported unchanged across the SDH network,
provides a channel capacity of 150.34 Mbps.
The VC-4 structure includes one column (9 bytes) for the VC-4 path overhead,
leaving 260 columns of signal carrying capacity (149.76 Mbps). This carrying
capacity is sufficient for transporting a 139.264 Mbps tributary signal (the
fourth level in the PDH signal hierarchy). The VC-4 signal carrying capacity can
also be subdivided, to permit the transport of multiple lower-level PDH
signals.
Pointers
In Figure 6-15, the VC-4 appears to start immediately after the section overhead
part of the STM-1 frame.
Actually, to facilitate efficient multiplexing and cross-connection of signals in the
SDH network, VC-4 structures are allowed to float within the payload part of
STM-1 frames. This means that the VC-4 may begin anywhere within the STM-1
payload part. The result is that in most cases, a given VC-4 begins in one STM-1
frame and ends in the next.
Were the VC-4 not allowed to float, buffers would be required to store the VC-4
data up to the instant it can be inserted in the STM-1 frame. These buffers
(called slip buffers), which are often used in PDH multiplex equipment, introduce
long delays. Moreover, they also cause disruptions in case a slip occurs.
SDH Cross-Connect
VC Path VC
Assembly Disassembly
Path
Section Overhead Overhead
Regenerator
BIP-8 Orderwire User BIP-8
Section B1 E1 F1 B3
Overhead
(Rows 1 - 3)
DCC DCC DCC Signal Label
D1 D2 D3 C2
Multiplex
DCC DCC DCC
Section D7 D8 D9
Z3
Overhead
(Rows 5 - 9)
DCC DCC DCC
D10 D11 D12
Z4
Orderwire
Z1 Z1 Z1 Z2 Z2 Z2
E2
Z5
The six framing bytes carry the framing pattern, and are used to indicate the start
of an STM-1 frame.
The C1 byte is used to identify STM-1 frames within a higher-level SDH frame
(STM-N, where the standardized values of N are 4, 16, etc.). The byte carries the
binary representation of the STM-1 frame number in the STM-N frame.
A 8-bit wide bit-interleaved parity (BIP-8) checksum is calculated over all the bits
in the STM-1 frame, to permit error monitoring over the regenerator section. The
The 192 kbps Data Communication Channel (DCC) provides the capability to
transfer network management and maintenance information between
regenerator section terminating equipment.
The F1 byte is intended to provide the network operator with a channel that is
terminated at each regenerator location, and can carry proprietary
communications.
The information transmitted on this channel can be passed unmodified through a
regenerator, or can be overwritten by data generated by the regenerator.
A 24-bit wide bit-interleaved parity (BIP) checksum is calculated over all the bits
in the STM-1 frame (except those in the regenerator section overhead). The
computed checksum is placed in the MSOH of the following STM-1 frame.
Bytes D4 to D12 provide a 576 kbps data communication channel (DCC) between
multiplexer section termination equipment. This channel is used to carry network
administration and maintenance information.
Alarm Signals
Alarm information is included as part of the MSOH. These functions are explained
in the SDH Maintenance Signals and Response to Abnormal Conditions section
below.
An 8-bit wide bit-interleaved parity even checksum, used for error performance
monitoring on the path, is calculated over all the bits of the previous VC-4. The
computed value is placed in the B3 byte.
The signal label byte, C2, indicates the structure of the VC-4 container. The signal
label can assume 256 values, however two of these values are of particular
importance:
• The all “0”s code represents the VC-4 unequipped state (i.e., the VC-4 does
not carry any tributary signals)
• The code “00000001” represents the VC-4 equipped state.
The G1 byte is used to send status and performance monitoring information from
the receive side of the path terminating equipment to the path originating
equipment. This allows the status and performance of a path to be monitored
from either end, or at any point along the path.
The F2 byte supports a user channel that enables proprietary network operator
communications between path terminating equipment.
Alarm Signals
1 Column
Note For simplicity, reference is made only to VCs (the actual structure needed to
transport a VC can be found from the SDH or SONET multiplexing hierarchy).
×1 139.264 Mbps
×1 C-4
STM-1 AU-4 VC-4 (E4)
(155.520 Mbps)
AUG
×1
AU-3 VC-3
×3
44.736 Mbps
(DS3)
×3 C-3
TU-3 VC-3
×7
34.368 Mbps
×1 (E3)
TUG-
3
C-2 6.312 Mbps
TU-2 VC-2
×1 (DS2)
×7
×2 3.152 Mbps
VT3
TUG- (DS1C)
Legend 2
×4 1.544 Mbps
TU-11 VC-11 C-11
Pointer Processing (DS1)
×3
TU-12 C-12
2.048 Mbps
Mapping VC-12
(E1)
• Seven TUG-2 are combined to obtain one TUG-3 (21 E1 signals per TUG-3).
TUG-3 is carried in a VC-3.
• Three VC-3 are combined to generate one VC-4 (63 E1 signals per VC-4). The
STM-1 signal carries one VC-4.
Signal Description
Loss of Signal (LOS) LOS state entered when received signal level drops below the value at which an
error ratio of 10 is predicted.
-3
LOS state exited when 2 consecutive valid framing patterns are received,
provided that during this time no new LOS condition has been detected
Out of Frame (OOF) OOF state entered when 4 or 5 consecutive SDH frames are received with invalid
(errored) framing patterns. Maximum OOF detection time is therefore 625 µs.
OOF state exited when 2 consecutive SDH frames are received with valid framing
patterns
Loss of Frame (LOF) LOF state entered when OOF state exists for up to 3 ms. If OOFs are
intermittent, the timer is not reset to zero until an in-frame state persists
continuously for 0.25 ms.
LOF state exited when an in-frame state exists continuously for 1 to 3 ms
Loss of Pointer (LOP) LOP state entered when N consecutive invalid pointers are received where N = 8,
9 or 10.
LOP state exited when 3 equal valid pointers or 3 consecutive AIS indications are
received.
Note
The AIS indication is an “all 1’s” pattern in pointer bytes.
Multiplexer Section AIS Sent by regenerator section terminating equipment (RSTE) to alert downstream
MSTE of detected LOS or LOF state. Indicated by STM signal containing valid
RSOH and a scrambled “all 1’s” pattern in the rest of the frame.
Detected by MSTE when bits 6 to 8 of the received K2 byte are set to “111” for
3 consecutive frames. Removal is detected by MSTE when 3 consecutive frames
are received with a pattern other than “111” in bits 6 to 8 of K2.
Far End Receive Failure Sent upstream by multiplexer section terminating equipment (MSTE) within
(FERF or MS-FERF) 250 µs of detecting LOS, LOF or MS-AIS on incoming signal. Optionally
transmitted upon detection of excessive BER defect (equivalent BER, based on B2
bytes, exceeds 10 ). Indicated by setting bits 6 to 8 of transmitted K2 byte to
-3
“110”.
Detected by MSTE when bits 6 to 8 of received K2 byte are set to “110” for 3
consecutive frames. Removal is detected by MSTE when 3 consecutive frames are
received with a pattern other than “110” in bits 6 to 8 of K2.
Transmission of MS-AIS overrides MS-FERF
Signal Description
AU Path AIS Sent by MSTE to alert downstream high order path terminating equipment (HO
PTE) of detected LOP state or received AU Path AIS. Indicated by transmitting “all
1’s” pattern in the H1, H2, H3 pointer bytes plus all bytes of associated VC-3 and
VC-4).
Detected by HO PTE when “all 1’s” pattern is received in bytes H1 and H2 for 3
consecutive frames. Removal is detected when 3 consecutive valid AU pointers
are received
High Order Path Remote Generated by high order path terminating equipment (HO PTE) in response to
Alarm Indication received AU path AIS. Sent upstream to peer HO PTE. Indicated by setting bit 5 of
(HO Path RAI, also known POH G1 byte to “1”.
as HO Path FERF) Detected by peer HO PTE when bit 5 of received G1 byte is set to “1” for 10
consecutive frames. Removal detected when peer HO PTE receives 10
consecutive frames with bit 5 of G1 byte set to “0”
TU Path AIS Sent downstream to alert low order path terminating equipment (LO PTE) of
detected TU LOP state or received TU path AIS. Indicated by transmitting “all 1’s”
pattern in entire TU-1, TU-2 and TU-3 (i.e., pointer bytes V1-V3, V4 byte, plus all
bytes of associated VC-1, VC-2 and VC-3 loaded by “all 1’s” pattern).
Detected by LO PTE when “all 1’s” pattern received in bytes V1 and V2 for 3
consecutive multiframes. Removal is detected when 3 consecutive valid TU
pointers are received.
Note
TU Path AIS is only available when generating and/or receiving “floating
mode” tributary unit payload structures.
Low Order Path Remote Generated by low order path terminating equipment (LO FTE) in response to
Alarm Indication received TU Path AIS. Sent upstream to peer LO PTE.
(LO Path RAI, also known Indicated by setting bit 8 of LO POH V5 byte to “1”.
as LO Path FERF)
Detected by peer LO PTE when bit 8 of received V5 byte is set to “1” or 10
consecutive multiframes. Removal detected when peer LO PTE receives 10
consecutive multiframes with bit 8 of V5 byte set to “0”.
Note
LO Path RAI is only available when generating and/or receiving “floating
mode” tributary unit payload structures.
This section describes the response to the wide range of conditions that can be
detected by the maintenance means built into the SDH frames, and the flow of
alarm and indication signals.
Figure 6-20 provides a graphical representation of the flow of alarm and
indication signals through an SDH transmission path.
Multiplexer Section
Regenerator Regenerator
Section Section
LOS LOS
LOF LOF
Tributary
AIS (X2) AIS AIS AIS
(H1H2) (V1V2)
FERF
(X2)
RAI RAI (G1)
(G1)
RAI
(VS) RAI (VS)
B1(BIP-8) B1(BIP-8)
B2(BIP-24)
B3(BIP-8)
FEBE FEBE
(G1)
(G1)
BIP-2
(VS)
FEBE FEBE
(VS) (VS)
Legend
Collection LO Low Order PTE Path Terminating Equipment
Transmission HO High Low Order RS TE Regenerator Section Terminating Equipment
Generation MS TE Multiplexer Section Terminating Equipment
Figure 6-20. Flow of Alarm and Indication Signals through an SDH Transmission Path
• A Remote Alarm Indication (RAI) for a low order path is sent upstream after
low order path AIS or LOP condition has been detected by equipment
terminating a low order path.
Performance Monitoring
Performance monitoring at each level in the maintenance hierarchy is based on
the use of the byte interleaved parity (BIP) checksums calculated on a frame by
frame basis. These BIP checksums are sent downstream in the overhead
associated with the regenerator section, multiplexer section and path
maintenance spans.
In response to the detection of errors using the BIP checksums, the equipment
terminating the corresponding path sends upstream Far End Block Error (FEBE)
signals.
SONET Environment
SONET (Synchronous Optical Network) is an alternative standard to SDH, widely
used in North America and other parts of the world. SONET uses similar
implementation principles, and even the frame structures are quite similar to
those used by SDH. Therefore, the following description is based on the
information already presented for SDH.
Figure 6-21 shows the SONET multiplexing hierarchy.
STS-3 139.264 Mbps
(155.520 Mbps) ×1 ×1 STS-3c
STS-3c (E4)
STS-3 SPE
×3 ×3
44.736 Mbps
(DS3)
SDH/SONET Interfaces
Each CL.2 module has two STM-1/OC-3/STM-4/OC-12 ports. The ports can be
ordered with the following interfaces:
• STM-1/OC-3:155.52 Mbps ±20 ppm
• STM-4/OC-12: 622.08 Mbps ±20 ppm
The panels and terminal identification for the STM-1/OC-3 and STM-4/OC-12
versions are identical. The bit rate for the STM-4/OC-12 version is set by means
of the speed parameter.
The framer operating mode, SDH or SONET, is selected by software configuration.
The two modules must always use the same mode, and therefore selecting the
mode for one module automatically switches the other to the same mode.
Each port has an SFP socket that provides the physical interface. RAD offers a
wide range of SFPs covering requirements from short-range low-cost optical
interfaces to long-range, high-performance interfaces. Optical SFPs are
terminated in LC connectors. RAD also offers SFPs with electrical interfaces for
intra-office applications.
The port interfaces support the enhanced digital diagnostic monitoring interface
per SFF-8472, which enables collecting status and performance data from the
SFPs, as well as alerting if abnormal conditions might cause damage or
performance degradation.
SFPs are hot-swappable, and can be replaced in the field. This enables upgrading
the network port interface characteristics as network topology changes.
Note Inband management can also support more complex topologies, such as rings.
However, this is possible only if the carrier’s SDH/SONET network provides access
to the DCC and enables transparent transfer of user data through the DCC. In this
case, a Telnet host or an SNMP-based network management station connected to
one of the Megaplex-4 units in the network can manage all the other units,
inband.
SONET:
• Section DCC bytes (D1, D2, D3), which provide a 192 kbps channel
terminated at SDH regenerator section terminating equipment
• Line DCC bytes (D4 to D12), which provide a 576 kbps channel terminated at
SDH multiplex section terminating equipment.
You can also select the encapsulation and routing protocols used for inband
management parameters:
• Two encapsulation options are available: HDLC, or PPP over HDLC in
accordance with RFC1661 and RFC1662.
For compatibility with particular implementations of the HDLC encapsulation
protocol for management purposes, you can select the Type 1 flavor (for this
flavor, the LCP (Link Control Protocol) packets do not include address and
control fields in their overhead).
• Two options are also available for the management traffic routing protocol:
RAD proprietary protocol. This protocol is sufficient for managing any
RAD equipment and should always be used with HDLC encapsulation.
RIP2: the Megaplex-4 transmits RIP2 routing tables. This permits
standard RIP routers to reach the Megaplex-4 SNMP agent through the
inband (DCC) channel. The RIP2 network is limited to 14 nodes.
Assigning VC Profile - v - -
Activating Loopbacks v v v v
Displaying Status v v v v
Displaying Statistics v v v v
frame-type sdh
speed 155mbps
dcc disabled
threshold sd 1e-6
j0-pathtrace direction tx
rdi-on-failure enabled
tim-response enabled
automatic-laser-shutdown disabled
loopback disabled
Tx-ssm enabled
Assigning short description to name <string> Using no name removes the name
port
Enabling DCC inband dcc [encapsulation {hdlc | See Functional Description above for
management and configuring ppp-o-hdlc | type1}] [mode parameter explanation. Using no dcc
DCC parameters: encapsulation {d1-to-d3 | d4-to-d12}] disables inband management
protocol and the DCC bytes used [routing-protocol See also Configuring Inband Management
to carry inband management { none | prop-rip | rip2}] in Chapter 8 for important considerations
traffic [deviation {standard | type1} on selecting the routing protocol.
Selecting EED (error rate threshold [eed {1e-3 | 1e-4 | If the selected BER value is exceeded,
degradation) and SD (signal 1e-5}] [sd {1e-6 | 1e-7 | 1e- Megaplex-4 generates the relevant (EED
degrade) thresholds 8 | 1e-9}] or SD) alarm
Enabling the checking of the j0-pathtrace [direction { tx | Using no j0-pathtrace disables the
receive/transmit path trace label rx-tx }] [string <path-trace- checking
by the port and configuring the string> ] [padding {spaces |
optional path trace direction and nulls }]
padding (when the path label is
shorter than the required length
of 15 characters)
Enabling RDI (remote defect rdi-on-failure The SDH fault conditions are:
indication) sending in case of • LOS (loss of SDH signal)
failure
• LOF (loss of SDH frame)
• AIS (alarm indication signal)
Using no rdi-on-failure disables RDI
sending
Defines the administrative unit aug <aug number> This option is valid only when
group (AUG) frame-type=sdh.
Possible values:
• for speed=155mbps: 1
• for speed=622mbps: 1 to 4
See also Assigning VC Profiles to
AUG/OC-3 below
Defines an OC-3 connection oc3 <oc3 number> This option is valid only when
frame-type=sonet.
Possible values:
• for speed=155mbps: 1
• for speed=622mbps: 1 to 4
See also Assigning VC Profiles to
AUG/OC-3 below
Example
This example illustrates how to configure an SDH Port with management via DCC
(Dedicated Communication Channel).
1. Program SDH Port 1 in Slot CL-A and configure DCC management with the
following parameters:
Speed: 155 Mbps
DCC encapsulation protocol: HDLC
DCC bytes used to carry inband management traffic: D1 – D3
mp4100>config>slot# cl-a card-type cl cl2-622gbe
mp4100>config>port# sdh-sonet cl-a/1 no shutdown
mp4100>config>port# sdh-sonet cl-a/1 frame-type sdh
mp4100>config>port# sdh-sonet cl-a/1 speed 155mbps
mp4100>config>port# sdh-sonet cl-a/1 dcc encapsulation hdlc mode
d1-to-d3
2. Configure router interface 3, address 10.10.10.9, subnet mask 24
mp4100>config>router 1 interface 3 address 10.10.10.9/24
3. Bind SDH port 1 on CL-A to router interface 2
mp4100>config>router# 1 interface 3 bind sdh-sonet cl-a/1
The inband management connectivity via DCC is established.
Assigning user-defined VC profile vc profile <profile name> For creating VC profiles, see VC Profiles.
to the port Using no vc removes the profile
Before you assign the user-defined
profile, you must use the no vc command
to remove the automatical tug-structure/
hvc-laps/hvc-gfp profile assignement
Assigning user-defined VC profile vc profile <profile name> For creating VC profiles, see VC Profiles.
to the port Using no vc removes the profile
Before you assign the user-defined
profile, you must use the no vc command
to remove the automatical tug-structure/
hvc-laps/hvc-gfp profile assignement
Configuration Errors
Table 6-32 lists messages generated by Megaplex-4 when a configuration error is
detected.
300 Error TOO MUCH VCS/VTS The maximum number of virtual containers that can be
used by one virtually concatenated group cannot exceed
63 for VC-12, or 64 for VT1.5
301 Error MINIMUM NUMBER OF VCs/VTs The minimum number of virtual containers (VC-12 or
IS 2 VT-1.5) in a group is 2
302 Error VC GROUP IS NOT CONNECTED The virtually concatenated group is not bound to any
other entity. Check and correct
303 Error DIFFERENT CLS FRAME The two CL modules installed in the Megaplex-4 must use
STRUCTURE the same link standards (either SDH or SONET)
305 Error MISSING E1-I/T1-I SDH-SONET An E1-i/T1-i port is opened on CL.2 but not cross-
CROSS CONNECT connected to VC/VT on SDH/SONET.
307 Error ILLEGAL VCG MAPPING The virtually concatenated group mapping is not correct
310 Warning NO LICENSE FOR STM-4/OC-12 The port is configured to 622mbps but the CL does not
have an appropriate license.
312 Error ILLEGAL SDH/SONET CROSS An E1-i/T1-i port and a VC-VT container cross-connected
CONNECT with it must belong to the same CL module (A or B).
315 Error VCAT NUMBER OF VCs LIMITED The maximum number of virtual containers (VC-12 or VT-
TO 64 1.5) that can be bound to one VCG cannot exceed 64
316 Error GFP/HDLC PORT CAN BE A GFP or HDLC port of the CL module can be bound only
BOUND TO SINGLE VC-VT to a single vc-vt container.
ONLY
317 Error VC-PROFILE DOES NOT MATCH The VC profile content does not match the port type.
PORT TYPE
318 Error WRONG LCAS PARAMETER One of the LCAS parameters does not match one of the
VCG parameters.
776 Error INSUFFICIENT BUS BANDWIDTH When SDH/SONET services are activated, the maximum
number of activated TUG-2 ports is 60 for all the I/O
modules. Due to this restriction on PDH bus occupancy,
the maximum number of ports supported on all I/O
modules in the chassis is as follows:
When CL is assembled with SDH/SONET ports, the
communication between CL and I/O modules is over
proprietary PDH links, terminated by SDH/SONET framer
with maximum 60 activated TUG-2 ports. Due to this
restriction on PDH bus occupancy, the maximum number
of ports supported on all I/O modules in the chassis is as
follows:
• 180 E1 ports
• 240 T1 ports
• 180 or 240 DS1 ports depending on the respective
service (E1 or T1).
SFP
---------------------------------------------------------------
Connector Type : LC
Manufacturer Name : CORETEK
Manufacturer Part Number : CT-0155TSP-MB5L
Typical Maximum Range (Meter) : 15000
Wave Length (nm) : 1310
Fiber Type : SM
Note The last 5 rows are displayed only for SFPs with built-in DDM functionality.
The performance monitoring data for the SDH/SONET link physical layer includes
status data for each link port, and SFP data for the installed SFPs. The table
below explains the parameters of the SFP installed for selected port.
Parameter Description
Connector Type Displays the SFP connector type, for example, LC, SC, SC/APC, FC, etc.
Typical Max. Range Displays the maximum range expected to be achieved over typical optical fibers, in
(Meter) meters
Wave Length (nm) Displays the nominal operating wavelength of the SFP, in nm
Fiber Type Displays the type of optical fiber for which the SFP is optimized: SM (single mode) or
MM (multi mode)
TX Power (dBm) Displays the current optical power, in dBm, transmitted by the SFP
RX Power (dBm) Displays the current optical power, in dBm, received by the SFP
Parameter Description
SDH:
config>port>sdh-sonet> (<slot>/<port 1..2>)
aug (<aug number 1..4> )#
SONET:
config>port>sdh-sonet> (<slot>/<port 1..2>)
oc3 (<oc3 number 1..4>#
2. Type show status.
The status is displayed, for example as follows:
mp4100>config>port>sdh-sonet(cl-a/1)>aug(1)# show status
General
------------------------------------------------------------
Expected Trace Message (J1) : www.rad.com
Received Trace Message (J1) : www.rad.com
Expected Signal Label : 0x1B
Received Signal Label : 0x1B
Loopback Type : None
SDH:
config>port>sdh-sonet> (<slot>/<port 1..2>)
aug (<aug number 1..4> )
tug3 (<tug3 number 1..3>)#
SONET:
config>port>sdh-sonet> (<slot>/<port 1..2>)
oc3 (<oc3 number 1..4>
sts1 (<sts1 number 1..3>) #
2. Type show status.
The status is displayed, for example as follows:
SDH:
config>port>sdh-sonet> (<slot>/<port 1..2>)
aug (<aug number 1..4> )
tug3 (<tug3 number 1..3>)
vc12 (<tug2 number 1..7>)/<tributary number 1..3>)#
SONET:
config>port>sdh-sonet> (<slot>/<port 1..2>)
oc3 <oc3 number 1..4>)
sts1 <sts1 number 1..3>)
vt1-5 <tug2 number 1..7>)/ <tributary number 1..4>)#.
2. Type show status.
The status is displayed, for example as follows:
mp4100>config>port>sdh-sonet(cl-a/1)>oc3(1)>sts1(2)>vt1.5(1/1)#
show status
General
---------------------------------------------------------------
Expected Trace Message (J2) : www.rad.com
Received Trace Message (J2) : www.rad.com
Expected Signal Label : 0x05
Received Signal Label : 0x05
Loopback Type : None
Megaplex-4100
SDH/SONET Interface
E1-i/T1-i
CL Framers
1
Diagnostic 2
Function DS1 . SDH/
I/O Port Cross-Connect .. E1/T1 VC/VT
SONET
Mapper Matrix
Matrix .. Framer
..
.
Framer
Remote
loopback on
SDH/SONET link
Remote VC/VT
Matrix
loopbacks on
AUG/OC-3,
TUG-3/STS-1,
VC-12/VT-1.5
Note The local loopback on VC-12/VT-1.5 is supported for unframed E1/T1 or VC-
12/VT-1.5 ports mapped to VCG ports. It is not supported for VC-12/VT-1.5 ports
mapped to E1-i/T1-I ports of CL modules.
Loopback Duration
The activation of a loopback disconnects the local and remote equipment served
by the Megaplex-4. Therefore, when you initiate a loopback, you have the option
to limit its duration to a selectable interval in the range of 1 through 60 minutes.
After the selected interval expires, the loopback is automatically deactivated
without operator intervention. However, you can always deactivate a loopback
activated on the local Megaplex-4 before this timeout expires. When using inband
management, always use the timeout option; otherwise, the management
communication path may be permanently disconnected.
The default is infinite duration (without timeout).
Activating Loopbacks
Activating the remote loopback {remote} [duration Using no loopback remote disables the
loopback and setting its <duration in minutes 1..60> ] loopback
duration (in minutes) Default (without duration parameter) is
infinite loopback
Activating the local or loopback { remote | local} Using no loopback followed by the
remote loopback on this corresponding command disables the
aug/oc3 port loopback
SDH:
config>port>sdh-sonet> (<slot>/<port 1..2>)
aug (<aug number 1..4>)
tug3 (<tug3 number 1..3>)#
SONET:
config>port>sdh-sonet> (<slot>/<port 1..2>)
oc3 (<oc3 number 1..4>)
sts1 (<sts1 number 1..3>) #
2. Activate the loopback as follows:
Activating the local or loopback {remote | local} Using no loopback followed by the
remote loopback on this corresponding command disables the
tug3/sts1 loopback
SDH:
config>port>sdh-sonet> (<slot>/<port 1..2>)
aug <aug number 1..4>
tug3 <tug3 number 1..3>)
vc12 <tug2 number 1..7>)/<tributary number 1..3>)#
SONET:
config>port>sdh-sonet> (<slot>/<port 1..2>)
oc3 (<oc3 number 1..4>)
SDH:
config>port>sdh-sonet> (<slot>/<port 1..2>)
aug (<aug number 1..4> )#
SONET:
config>port>sdh-sonet> (<slot>/<port 1..2>)
oc3 (<oc3 number 1..4> )#
2. Enter show statistics followed by parameters listed in the table below.
SDH:
config>port>sdh-sonet> (<slot>/<port 1..2>)
aug (<aug number 1..4>)
tug3 (<tug3 number 1..3>)#
SONET:
config>port>sdh-sonet> (<slot>/<port 1..2>)
oc3 (<oc3 number 1..4>)
sts1 (<sts1 number 1..3>) #
2. Enter show statistics followed by parameters listed in the table below.
SDH:
config>port>sdh-sonet> (<slot>/<port 1..2>)
aug <aug number 1..4>
tug3 <tug3 number 1..3>)
vc12 <tug2 number 1..7>)/<tributary number 1..3>)#
SONET:
config>port>sdh-sonet> (<slot>/<port 1..2>)
oc3 (<oc3 number 1..4>)
sts1 (<sts1 number 1..3>)
vt1-5 (<tug2 number 1..7>)/ (<tributary number 1..4>)#.
2. Enter show statistics followed by parameters listed in the table below.
Displaying statistics show statistics {all | current} • current –Displays the current
statistics
• all –Displays all statistics: first
current interval statistics, then
statistics for all valid intervals
Current statistics:
mp4100>config>port>sdh-sonet(cl-a/1)# show statistics current
Current
---------------------------------------------------------------
Time Elapsed (Sec) : 222
Valid Intervals : 2
ES : 0
SES : 0
SEFS : 0
CV : 0
Statistics for interval 67:
mp4100>config>port>sdh-sonet(cl-a/1)# show statistics interval 67
Interval
---------------------------------------------------------------
Interval Number : 67
Section ES : 0
Section SES : 0
Section SEFS : 31
Section CV : 0
All statistics:
mp4100>config>port>sdh-sonet(cl-a/1)>oc3(1)>sts1(2)>vt1.5(1/1)#
show statistics all
Current
---------------------------------------------------------------
Time Elapsed (Sec) : 712
Valid Intervals : 1
ES : 0
SES : 0
UAS : 0
CV : 0
Interval
--------------------------------------------------------------
Interval Number : 1
ES : 3
SES : 2
UAS : 57
CV : 0
Parameter Description
SEFS (UAS) Displays the number of unavailable seconds (UAS (SEFS)) in the current interval.
An unavailable second is any second in which one or more SEF defects have been
detected.
SES Displays the number of severely errored seconds (SES) in the current interval.
A SES is any second in which multiple error events of the types taken into
consideration for an ES have occurred.
Time elapsed The elapsed time (in seconds) since the beginning of the current interval, in seconds.
The range is 1 to 900 seconds
Valid Intervals The number of elapsed finished 15-min intervals for which statistics data can be
displayed, in addition to the current (not finished) interval (up to 96)
Parameter Description
Section ES Displays the total number of errored seconds (ES) in the selected interval
Section SES Displays the total number of severely errored seconds (SES) in the selected interval
Section SEFS Displays the total number of unavailable seconds (SEFS/UAS) in the selected interval
Section CV Displays the total number of code violations (CV) in the selected interval
Parameter Description
Clearing Statistics
There are two options for clearing SDH/SONET statistics data:
• Clearing current interval statistics
• Clearing all statistics, except for the current interval.
To clear all statistics data except for from the current interval:
1. Navigate to the corresponding entity as described above.
2. Enter clear-statistics current-all.
The statistics for the specified entity are cleared.
SHDSL Ports
Applicable Modules
The SHDSL ports are available on the M8SL, ASMi-54C family and SH-16 I/O
modules.
The ASMi-54C includes three main modules:
• ASMi-54C/ETH –Ethernet over SHDSL.bis 8-port module with EFM support
• ASMi-54C/E1/N - E1 over SHDSL 8-Port module
• ASMi-54C/E1/ETH/N –E1 and Ethernet over SHDSL/SHDSL.bis 8-port module.
•
Note ASMi-54C/E1/N and ASMi-54C/E1/ETH/N modules have the same features for their
SHDSL ports; in this section they are denoted as ASMi-54C/N, to distinguish from
the older ASMi-54C/ETH version. The generic term ASMi-54C is used when the
information is applicable to all of the ASMi-54C models.
•
Note In this chapter, the generic term SH-16 is used when the information is applicable
to both SH-16 and SH-16/E1 models. The designation SH-16/E1 is used when
information is applicable only to this model.
•
The following table shows the number of SHDSL/SHDSL.bis ports and the features
supported by each Megaplex-4 module. The digits in brackets (1 to 5) denote
restrictions or other special remarks regarding implementation of this feature in
specific modules.
Note ASMi-54C/E1/N and ASMi-54C/E1/ETH/N modules have the same features for their
SHDSL ports; in this section they are denoted as ASMi-54C/N, to distinguish from
the older ASMi-54C/ETH version. The generic term ASMi-54C is used when the
information is applicable to all of the ASMi-54C models.
Number of 16 16
ports 8 8 8 8
name √ √ √ √ √ √
shutdown √ √ √ √ √ √
stu √ √ √ √ √ √
line-prob √ √ – √ – –
data-rate- √ √ – √ – √
maximum
tc √ –(1) √ √ √ –(1)
wires √ √ √ √ √ –(2)
power- √ – √ √ √ √
backoff
default
current- √ – √ √ √ –
margin
worst- √ – – √ – –
margin
loop- √ √ – √ – √
attenuation
-threshold
snr-margin- √ √ √ √ √ √
threshold
clock-mode – √ – – – –
remote- – √ – – – –
ch1-ts-num
power- √ √ – √ – –
feeding
ts- – – – – – √
compaction
-mode
ts0-over-dsl – √ √ – √ √
(3)
remote-crc – – – – – √
(3)
1 – HDLC only
2 – 2 wire only
4 – ASMi-54C/E1/N and ASMi-54C/E1/ETH/N modules cannot work with a mix of ASMi-54/53 and ASMi-52 modems at the
far end. At every moment, all the remote modems should be either ASMi-54/ ASMi-54L/ASMi-53 or ASMi-52/ ASMi-52L.
Standards
SHDSL and SHDSL.bis ports comply with ITU-T Rec. G.991.2 and ETSI TS 101 524.
Benefits
The SHDSL/SHDSL.bis technology is an efficient method for transmitting
full-duplex data at high rates over a single unloaded and unconditioned twisted
copper pair, of the type used in the local telephone distribution plant. Therefore,
SHDSL provides a cost-effective solution for short-range data transmission and
last-mile applications.
Functional Description
SHDSL has been standardized in ITU-T Rec. G.991.2, and has been extended
beyond the original specifications, which called only for support of rates up to
2.312 Mbps per pair. The current SHDSL.bis version, as standardized in ITU-T Rec.
G.991.2, supports variable payload data rates up to 5.696 Mbps (5.7 Mbps line
rate) on a single unloaded and unconditioned twisted copper pair, of the type
used in the local telephone distribution plant. SHDSL.bis includes an extension,
referred to as M-pair, that enables to bond multiple pairs (up to four) to achieve
variable payload rates up to 22.784 Mbps (22.8 Mbps equivalent line rate).
Note When the ASMi-54C/ETH module is operating in the STU-R mode, the maximum
number of remote units is two. These units are served by PCS 1 and PCS 5.
When the SH-16 module is operating in the STU-R mode, the maximum number
of remote units is four. These units are served by PCS 1, PCS 5, PCS 9 and PCS 13.
Handling of Timeslot 0
To meet various systems requirements, the user can select the handling method
of timeslot 0 of an E1 stream by each SHDSL port of M8SL and ASMi-54C/N
modules. Two options are available:
• Terminate (loop back) timeslot 0. This option is available in the basic G.704
mode only.
• Transfer timeslot 0 transparently through the SHDSL link, down to the E1
port of the unit connected to the remote ASMi-52/ASMi-52L unit. This option
is available in both G.704 framing modes.
The handling method of TS0 is configured by means of ts0-over-dsl parameter.
See also ASMi-54C Modules, SH-16 Modules and M8SL Modules in Megaplex-4 I/O
Modules Installation and Operation Manual, SHDSL Modules Chapter for additional
configuration considerations.
Single IP Management
The ASMi-54L modems (starting from version 2.6 and higher) can be fully
managed via SH-16, ASMi-54C/ETH or ASMi-54C/E1/ETH/N modules installed in
the Megaplex-4 chassis, using RADview with the Single IP solution.
The Single IP solution uses one legal IP address (the Megaplex-4 CL module IP
address) to manage up to 96 standalone units via the chassis. The remote
standalone ASMi-54L/ASMi-53 is assigned a private IP address derived from the
CL.2 IP by an internal algorithm. This solution saves IP addresses on the
Megaplex-4 working with a remote standalone ASMi-54L/ASMi-53 modem.
This IP address is assigned to all the system which includes the Megaplex-4 with
all its CL.2 and ASMi-54C/SH-16 modules and the remote standalone ASMi-54L
units.
If dedicated VLAN management is not configured on an ASMi-54C/SH-16 PCS
port, single IP management is automatically established.
When working in Single IP mode, RADview sends packets to the ASMi-54L using
the Megaplex-4 IP address. The Megaplex-4 CL.2 module works as NAPT router
and routes the management packets to the appropriate entity.
Factory Defaults
Megaplex-4 is supplied with all SHDSL ports disabled. Other parameter defaults
are listed in the table below.
wires 2
tc 64-65-octets
stu central
far-end-type none
power-backoff default 0
ts-compaction-mode no-mapping
loop-attenuation-threshold 0
current-margin 0
remote-ch1-ts-num 0
Assigning short description name < name> Using no name removes the name
to port
Specifying number of wires wires {2 | 4 | 8} In ASMi-54C/ETH and SH-16, the available selections
for an M-pair group depend on the tc parameter:
• tc=64-65-octets: 2/4/8 wires are supported, no
TDM payload
• tc=hdlc: 2/4 wires and TDM payload are
supported
ASMi-54C/N supports only 2- or 4-wire operation
M8SL supports only 2-wire operation
When SH-16 is working in HDLC mode, only one type
of service (4x2W, 2x4W or 8W) is allowed per each
group of 4 ports (1-4 ,5-8, 9-12, 13-16).
Specifying TC layer and tc {64-65-octets | hdlc} All the module ports use the same Transmission
functional mode Convergence layer (the last selection is automatically
(ASMi-54C/ETH and SH-16 applied to all the ports)
modules) The selection is done per four lines.
Setting the port operation stu {central | remote} This option is available for M8SL, SH-16 and
mode: CO or CPE ASMi-54C modules when the equipment connected
to the far end of the line is another M8SL, SH-16 or
ASMi-54C module installed in a Megaplex-4.
When a SH-16 modules is operating 2W or 4W as a
CO, it is not recommended to connect the entire
group of 4 ports (1-4, 5-8, 9-12, 13-16) on the CO
module to the entire group of 4 ports on the CPE
module, since short interruption of data may occur
when connecting/disconnecting one of the links.
Specifying the far end far-end-type {none | asmi52 | To specify far-end equipment for specific SHDSL
equipment connected to asmi52-e1-dte | modules, consult Table 6-37. Note that non-
this SHDSL port high-speed-mux-serial-e1 | managed and asmi54 options denote the same
asmi52-e1-eth | asmi52-eth- functionality and are interchangeable. The same
dte | non-managed | asmi54 holds for managed and asmi54-eoc options.
|managed | asmi54-eoc |fcd-ip |For working with far-end-type=high-speed-mux-
dxc | mp-card} serial-e1, see the relevant module (ASMi-54C/N or
SH-16/E1) in Megaplex-4 I/O Modules Installation
and Operation Manual, SHDSL Modules Chapter.
Enabling the transmit power-backoff default <value Possible values are 0 to 31 dbm.
power backoff and setting in dbm> Power backoff is used to reduce the transmit power
its value (for SH-16, below the nominal value specified in the standards:
ASMi-54C/ETH and M8SL this reduces interference caused by your signal to
modules) other equipment using pairs in the same cable,
without degrading the link transmission quality.
Values set for STU-C are copied automatically to
STU-R.
Using no power-backoff disables the power backoff
Controlling the use of line line-prob This parameter is relevant for ASMi-54C/ETH and
probing per ITU-T Rec. SH-16, only when tc = 64-65-octets.
G.991.2 for the Using no line-prob disables line probing
corresponding line (to
When line probing is enabled, either the current-
automatically select the
margin or worst-margin parameter must be enabled
maximum data rate
and set
supported by the line)
Controlling the mapping of ts-compaction-mode {no- This parameter is relevant only for M8SL when far
the connected E1 port mapping | low-ts-mapping} end device is MP card, FCD-IP, or DXC.
timeslots into the SHDSL no-mapping – The connected timeslots of the E1
frames frame are placed in the SHDSL frame in consecutive
timeslots, in ascending order.
when a new E1 timeslot, lower than the timeslots
already connected, is added, the timeslots with
higher numbers must be moved (reassigned): this
results in a brief interruption of data transfer for the
moved timeslots.
low-ts-mapping – The first two timeslots of the
SHDSL frame are reserved for the signaling timeslot
(timeslot 16) and the dedicated management
timeslot. The payload starts from the third timeslot,
and is inserted in consecutive timeslots according to
the E1 frame order.
This ensures that the signaling and dedicated
timeslots will continue to function even when new
timeslots are connected in the E1 frame. Service
interruption might still occur when timeslots are
moved, but in this case only data timeslots are
moved.
When the far end device is an ASMi-52/ASMi-52L,
no-mapping is automatically used.
Setting the SHDSL port data-rate maximum [rate in In ASMi-54C/ETH and SH-16, this parameter is
data rate (line payload kbps] relevant only when line probing is disabled (no line-
rate) prob).
For available selections, see the respective SHDSL
Data Rate tables in Chapter 7 of the Megaplex-4 I/O
Modules Installation and Operation Manual.
Selecting the loop loop-attenuation-threshold The range is 0 to 127 (the number specifies the
attenuation threshold in <value in dbm> maximum value, in dB).
db If the attenuation measured on the SHDSL link
exceeds the threshold value, an alarm is generated.
Selecting the SNR margin snr-margin-threshold <value in The range is 0 to 15 (the number specifies the
threshold in db db> maximum value, in dB).
If the attenuation measured on the SHDSL link
exceeds the specified value, an alarm is generated.
Specifying the target current-margin <value in db> This parameter is relevant for SH-16 and
margin for the measured ASMi-54C/ETH modules only, when line probing is
signal-to-noise ratio enabled.
relative to the current The range is -10 db to +21 dB).
noise level
Values set for STU-C are copied automatically to
STU-R.
Using no current-margin disables the use of the
signal-to-noise ratio measured relative to the
current noise level.
Alternatively, line activation may be performed in
accordance with the Worst Margin value.
Specifying the target worst-margin <value in db> This parameter is relevant for ASMi-54C/ETH and
margin for the measured SH-16 only, when line probing is enabled.
signal-to-noise ratio The range is -10 db to +21 dB.
relative to the reference
Values set for STU-C are copied automatically to
worst-case near-end
STU-R.
crosstalk noise specified in
ITU-T Rec. G.991.2 Using no worst-margin disables the use of the
signal-to-noise ratio measured measured relative to
crosstalk.
Alternatively, line activation may be performed in
accordance with the Current Margin value.
Setting the number of remote-ch1-ts-num <value> The available selections are 0 to 31.
timeslots connected to This parameter is relevant only for ASMi-54C/N
CH1 (E1) on the remote when the remote modem is ASMi-52/ASMi-52L MUX
modem type
Activating power feeding power-feeding {local |forward} local – provides power feeding only to the nearest
to this SHDSL line repeater
forward – provides power feeding to the nearest
repeater and forwards it also to the next one (this
feature is available only for RAD’s S-RPT/EFM
repeaters)
Using no power-feeding disables the power feeding
of this line.
This command is not available for a module working
in STU-R mode.
See also Megaplex-4 I/O Modules Installation and
Operation Manual, SHDSL Modules Chapter, Working
with Power Feeding, in ASMi-54C Modules and SH-16
Modules sections.
HW Type : shdsl
Number Of repeaters : 1
Wires
----------------------------------------------------------------------
State SNR Loop Power Power
Margin Attenuation Backoff Feeding
(db) (db)
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Data 23 0 6 ON
Repeater Number : 1
passes through the CL module, and continues up to the SHDSL modem serving
the port. Within the tested I/O module, the path includes most of the SHDSL
modem circuits serving the selected port, and the operation of the routing
circuits that handle the port signals within the module.
A typical local port loopback signal path is shown in Figure 6-23.
As shown in Figure 6-23, when a local loopback is activated on one of the module
ports, the transmit signal is returned to the input of the same port receive path,
at a point just before the line interface. The local port must receive its own
signal, and thus it must be frame-synchronized.
Note
During local port loopback, the remote equipment does not receive a valid SHDSL
signal, and therefore it loses synchronization. This is normal, and does not
indicate a problem.
After the local loopback is deactivated, the SHDSL subsystem must synchronize
again, and therefore you will see the sequence of port synchronization
indications at both the local and the remote ports.
In addition, each I/O module connected to the corresponding port must also
receive its own signal: in general, the result is that these modules are
synchronized and do not generate alarm indications. However modules that
cannot receive their own signal (for example modules with Ethernet interfaces)
enter an alarm state while a local loopback is activated.
Megaplex-4100
CL M8SL
Port 1
.. ..
Other Port Routing Bus .. ..
Interface Matrix Interface
. ..
.
Port 8
Megaplex-4100
CL M8SL
Port 1
. .
. .
Other Port Routing Bus . .
Interface Matrix Interface .. ..
.
.
Port 8
Setting loopback duration loopback {local | remote | remote-on- Local and remote loopbacks are available
and activating the remote } [ duration <duration in for M8SL modules only.
corresponding loopback on minutes 1..30> ] Using no loopback disables the loopback
this port
Activating the remote loopback remote Using no loopback remote disables the
loopback on the repeater loopback
Configuration Errors
The following tables list messages generated by Megaplex-4 when a configuration
error on SHDSL modules is detected.
510 Error INCORRECT SHDSL LINES IN When the configured TC Layer is 64/65-Octets, the wrong
PCS combination of SHDSL lines is used in a PCS
511 Error SHDSL ADMIN IS NOT One of the SHDSL lines is in “shutdown” state
CONNECTED
512 Error ILLEGAL SHDSL RATE The selected SHDSL rate is not compatible with the
selected operating mode
513 Error NOT IDENTICAL SHDSL When the Wire parameter of an SHDSL line is configured
DEFINITION to 4W or 8W, all the parameters of the corresponding
SHDSL wire pairs must be identical
514 Error ILLEGAL PCS DEFINITION FOR When the STU side is configured as the Remote, and the
STU-R TC Layer is 64/65 Octets, the only PCS and SHDSL line
combinations allowed are as follows:
• PCS 1 can bound to SHDSL lines 1, or 1,2, or 1,2,3,4
• PCS 5 can bound to SHDSL lines 5, or 5,6, or 5,6,7,8
515 Error NOT IDENTICAL LINE PROBE When the STU side is configured as the Remote, Line
DEFINITION Probe (line-prob) must be enabled
516 Error NOT IDENTICAL WIRE NUMBER When the TC Layer is 64/65-Octets, the wires parameter
DEFINITION must be set to 2W
517 Error AT LEAST ONE MARGIN MUST When line probing is enabled, either the current-margin or
BE SET worst-margin parameter must be enabled and set
518 Error ILLEGAL SHDSL DEFINITION When the STU side is configured as the Remote, and the
FOR STU-R TC Layer is HDLC, only SHDSL lines 1 and 5 can be set to
4W or 8W.
519 Error ILLEGAL NUMBER OF WIRE When the TC Layer is HDLC, the wires parameter of the
COMBINATION SHDSL lines must be configured according to Supported
Lines versus Wires Parameter table in ASMi-54C module
section of Megaplex-4 I/O Modules Installation and
Operation Manual, SHDSL Modules Chapter.
520 Error ILLEGAL E1-i DEFINITION When the TC Layer is HDLC, the E1-i port is configured to
“no shutdown” and the corresponding SHDSL line to
“shutdown” (make sure that only the allowed e1-i ports
are set to “no shutdown”).
When the TC Layer is 64/65 Octets, one of the e1-i ports
is set to “no shutdown”
521 Error STU-MODE MUST BE THE SAME The STU parameter of all the SHDSL lines in a module
IN ALL LINES must be set to same value
522 Error TC-LAYER MUST BE THE SAME The TC Layer parameter of all the SHDSL lines in a module
IN ALL LINES must be set to same value
524 Error TS0 MODE DOESN'T FIT TO Contradiction between TS0 mode and line type
LINE TYPE
525 Error FE TYPE MUST BE THE SAME IN Far-end-type parameter must be set to the same value for
ALL LINES all SHDSL ports (not for SH-16).
526 Error ILLEGAL PCS BINDING When working in 4W/8W mode, some PCS ports cannot be
bound to some SHDSL ports. For allowed binding, see
Supported Ports versus Wires Parameter table in
Megaplex-4 I/O Modules Installation and Operation
Manual, SHDSL Modules Chapter.
528 Error UNUSED E1-I PORT IS Even E1-i ports cannot be connected when working in 4W
CONNECTED mode.
530 Error DATA RATE EXCEEDS MAXIMAL The data rate configured for SHDSL port exceeds the
RATE maximum rate (see SH-16 SHDSL Data Rates and
ASMi-54C SHDSL Data Rates tables in Chapter 7 of the
Megaplex-4 Modules Installation and Operation Manual).
531 Error DATA RATE NOT SUPPORTED For 4W/HDLC operation, rates 17024 to 18432 kbps are
unavailable.
532 Error ILLEGAL REMOTE CH1 TS The number of timeslots connected to CH1 (E1) on the
NUM remote modem (remote-ch1-ts-num) exceeds the number
of open timeslots (not for SH-16).
534 Error POWER-FEEDING MUST BE THE When 2 lines are bonded together, power feeding must be
SAME IN SHDSL LINES either On or Off for both lines.
536 Error STU-C MODE CAN'T BE A port configured in STU-C mode cannot be selected as a
SELECTED AS CLOCK SOURCE clock source
537 Error ILLEGAL_FAR_END_TYPE_FOR For a port working in STU-R mode, far-end-type can be
STU-R MODE only “non-managed”.
220 Error RATE/TS ASSIGNMENT The line rate configured for the M8SL port must match the
MISMATCH number of timeslots assigned
221 Error CLOCK REFERENCE PORT The M8SL port configured as clock reference must be
SHOULD BE SET STU-R configured as STU-R
222 Error MAX BANDWIDTH MISMATCH Maximum bandwidth configured on the SHDSL line must
match the number of timeslots assigned
Displaying show statistics <wire-num> {all | all-intervals | all- All SHDSL modules:
statistics days-interval | current | current-day} • current - current statistics (up to
15 min)
• all-intervals - all intervals during
the last 24 hours
Additional statistics (ASM-54C/ETH
and SH-16 modules only):
• current-day - current today's
statistics
• all-days-interval - all intervals
during the last 7 days
• all - current, all-intervals,
current-day, all-days-interval
Current Day
---------------------------------------------------------------
Time Elapsed (Sec) : 3115
Valid Days : 0
ES : 0 LOSWS : 11
SES : 1163 CRC Anomalies : 0
UAS : 1163
Parameter Description
Time elapsed (for current The elapsed time (in seconds) since the beginning of the current interval, in
interval) seconds. The range is 1 to 900 seconds
Time elapsed (for current The elapsed time (in seconds) since the beginning of the current day, in
day, ASMi-54C/ETH only) seconds. The range is 1 to 8640 seconds
• For the M8SL and ASMi-54C/N modules, Interval #1 is the latest in time
Day number Number of day for which statistics are displayed (ASMi-54C/ETH only)
Valid Intervals The number of elapsed finished 15-min intervals for which statistics can be
displayed, in addition to the current (not finished) interval (up to 96)
Valid days The number of elapsed finished days (24 hours) for which statistics can be
displayed, in addition to the current (not finished) day (up to 7)
(ASMi-54C/ETH only)
Parameter Description
SES The number of severely errored SHDSL seconds (SES) in the current/selected
interval/day/week.
The SHDSL SES is any second which is not declared a UAS, during which at
least 50 CRC anomalies are declared, or one or more LOSW defects are
declared
For example:
mp4100>config>port>shdsl(2/5)# repeater 1
mp4100>config>port>shdsl(2/5)>repeater(1)# show statistics
running
Repeater Side : Customer Network
Wire Num : 1 2 1 2
ES : 4 4 0 0
SES : 0 0 0 0
UAS : 248 248 47 47
LOSWS : 248 248 47 47
CRC Anomalies : 19 19 0 0
The counters are described in the table below.
Parameter Description
ES The number of errored SHDSL seconds (ES) accumulated since the module is
on.
An SHDSL ES is a second during which one or more CRC anomalies are
declared, and/or one or more LOSW defects are declared
UAS The number of unavailable SHDSL seconds (UAS) accumulated since the
module is on.
The SHDSL UAS is a second during which the SHDSL line is unavailable. The
SHDSL line becomes unavailable at the onset of 10 contiguous SESs (the 10
SESs are included in the unavailable time).
Once unavailable, the SHDSL line becomes available at the onset of 10
contiguous seconds with no SESs (the 10 seconds with no SESs are excluded
from the unavailable time)
SES The number of severely errored SHDSL seconds (SES) accumulated since the
module is on.
The SHDSL SES is any second which is not declared a UAS, during which at
least 50 CRC anomalies are declared, or one or more LOSW defects are
declared
CRC Anomalies The number of CRC anomalies accumulated since the module is on.
A CRC anomaly is declared when the CRC bits generated locally on the data in
the received SHDSL frame do not match the CRC bits (crc1 - crc6) received
from the transmitter. A CRC anomaly only pertains to the frame over which it
was declared.
LOSWS Displays the number of SHDSL LOSW seconds (LOSWS) accumulated since
the module is on.
The SHDSL LOSWS is a second during which one or more SHDSL LOSW
defects are declared
Clearing Statistics
Note If the SHDSL cable is removed, the repeater statistics is cleared. However, do not
use this as a method to clear repeater statistics.
T1 Ports
Applicable Modules
The following table shows the number of t1 and t1-i ports and the features
supported by each Megaplex-4 module. The digits in brackets (1 to 3) denote
restrictions or other special remarks regarding implementation of this feature in
specific modules.
Number of ports 8 16 28 16 16 8 84 16
name √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
shutdown √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
line-interface √ – – √ √ √ – –
line-length (DSU √ √ √ –
only) √ √ – –
line-code √ √ – √ √ √ – –
line-buildout (CSU –
only) √ – – √ √ √ –
restoration-time √ – √ – – – – –
timeslots-signaling- – – – –
profile √ (1) – – –
2 – Unframed is not supported when working with CL.2 module without SDH/SONET
ports
3 – Applicable if line type is unframed and the link is directly mapped to SDH-SONET
vc12-vt2
Standards
The T1 interface complies with ANSI T1.403-1989, AT&T Pub. 54016, AT&T
TR-62411 and ANSI T1.107.4 standards.
Functional Description
External T1 Link Interfaces are available in M8T1, VS-16E1T1-PW, VS-6/E1T1,
VS-16E1T1-EoP and M16T1 I/O modules. Internal T1 ports are available in CL.2
and VS-16E1T1-EoP modules (denoted in CLI as t1-i) and T3 modules (denoted in
CLI as t1). The parameters configurable for each module can be chosen from
Table 6-10 . General description of T1 port parameters is given in the following
sections.
Framing
The external and internal T1 ports can be independently configured in accordance
with the desired ITU-T framing mode and signaling formats:
• D4 (SF) framing (12 frames per multiframe)
• ESF framing (24 frames per multiframe)
• Unframed mode: enables transparent transfer of 1.544 Mbps streams,
including streams with proprietary framing.
The framer automatically adds the appropriate overhead. Unused timeslots are
filled with a user-specified idle code. The user can also select specific timeslots to
be transferred (DS0 cross-connect).
The framing mode can be independently selected for each extermal or internal T1
port of the I/O module. It is configured by means of line-type parameter.
Line Length
When configured for DSU emulation, the line transmit signal is user-adjustable for
line lengths of 0 to 655 feet in accordance with AT&T CB-119. The transmit signal
mask is selected in accordance with the transmit line length, to meet DSX-1
requirements, as specified by AT&T CB-119. The following selections are
available:
• 0 – 133 Ft
• 133 – 266 Ft
• 266 – 399 Ft
• 399 – 533 Ft
• 533 – 655 Ft.
These values define the length of the cable (in feet) connected between the port
connector and the network access point.
Zero Suppression
Zero suppression is user-selectable, separately for each port: transparent (AMI)
coding, B7ZS, or B8ZS. It is configured by means of line-code parameter.
Interface Type
The external T1 links have 100 Ω balanced interfaces.
T1 Payload Processing
The Megaplex-4 T1 modules support three main types of payload per timeslot:
• Data timeslots: timeslots which are transparently transferred from port to
port. In general, it is assumed that no CAS is associated with data timeslots.
Timeslots assigned to HDLC ports are always processed as data timeslots.
• Voice timeslots: timeslots carrying PCM-encoded payload, with A-law
companding for M8E1 ports and µ-law companding for M8T1 ports. When
transferred between ports with different standards (for example, between E1
and T1 ports), these timeslots are converted by the CL module.
In general, CAS is always associated with voice timeslots, and therefore it
must also be converted when transferred between ports with different
standards. The user can specify translation rules for the signaling
information, called signaling profiles – see details in the Signaling Profiles
section.
• Management timeslots: with framed signals, one timeslot can be assigned in
any port to carry management traffic. Such timeslots are always directed to
the CL management subsystem, for processing.
The flow of payload carried by voice timeslots is normally bidirectional (full duplex
connection). It is also possible to define unidirectional flows, called unidirectional
broadcasts, from one source (a timeslot of a source port) to multiple destinations
(each destination being a selected timeslot of another port).
In case of data timeslots, the flow of payload is normally unidirectional. If the
application requires bidirectional flows, cross-connect must be configured
symmetrically for both directions.
OOS Signaling
If communication between modules located in different Megaplex units fails, e.g.,
because loss of main link synchronization, it is necessary to control the state of
the signaling information at each end of the link. This activity, called
out-of-service (OOS) signaling, is performed by the M8T1 modules and can be
selected in accordance with the specific application requirements, on a per-link
basis.
The OOS signaling options supported by the M8T1 modules are as follows:
• Signaling forced to the idle state for the duration of the out-of-service
condition (force-idle). This option is suitable for use with all the VC module
types.
• Signaling forced to the busy state for the duration of the out-of-service
condition (force-busy). This option is suitable for use with E&M and FXO
modules, but not with FXS modules.
• Signaling forced to the idle state for 2.5 seconds, and then changed to the
busy state for the remaining duration of the out-of-service condition
(idle-busy). This option is suitable for use with E&M and FXO modules, but
not with FXS modules.
• Signaling forced to the busy state for 2.5 seconds, and then changed to the
idle state for the remaining duration of the out-of-service condition
(busy-idle). This option is suitable for use with all the VC module types.
Inband Management
T1 and internal T1 ports of Megaplex-4 using a framed mode feature inband
management access to the end user’s equipment provided by configuring a
dedicated management timeslot.
The transfer of inband management traffic is controlled by using synchronous
PPP over HDLC encapsulation or Frame Relay encapsulation (under DLCI 100) in
accordance with RFC 2427.
Transmission of RIP2 routing tables is done via the following options:
• Proprietary RIP – Management traffic is routed using RAD proprietary routing
protocol
• RIP2 – In addition to the RAD proprietary routing protocol, RIP2 routing is
also supported.
Factory Defaults
Megaplex-4 is supplied with all t1/t1-i ports disabled. Other parameter defaults
are listed in the table below.
line-type esf
restoration-time 10sec
line-interface csu
idle-code 0x7f
out-of-service - voice 00
out-of-service - data 00
signaling-profile 1
line-code b8zs
line-length 0-133
line-buildout 0db
duration infinite
Configuring a T1 Port
2. Enter all necessary commands according to the tasks listed below (see
Table 6-42 for parameters supported in each module).
Specifying T1 framing line-type {unframed | esf | sf} When the T1 port is bound to a VCG port,
mode VS-16E1T1-EoP supports esf option only.
Setting the line code line-code {ami | b8zs} For guaranteed clear channel capability, use
used by the port, and the B8ZS; do not use B7ZS for ports carrying
zero suppression method inband management
Specifying the code idle-code <00 to FF (hexa)> The available selections are [0x40 to 0x7F]
transmitted to fill unused and [0xC0 to 0xFF]
timeslots in T1 frames
Enabling inband inband-management <timeslot> protocol ppp – synchronous PPP over HDLC
management and setting {ppp | fr} [routing-protocol {none | encapsulation
its parameters prop-rip | rip2} ] fr –Frame Relay encapsulation (under DLCI
100) in accordance with RFC 2427
See also Configuring Inband Management in
Chapter 8 for important considerations on
selecting the routing protocol.
Using no inband management <timeslot>
disables inband management through this
timeslot
Not available for VS-16E1T1-EoP when this
T1 port is bound to a VCG port
Specifying the signaling timeslots-signaling-profile [tsx] {1 | 2 | 3 | This command is available for voice
profile per a single 4 | 5} timeslots only, if you selected per-ts under
timeslot or per timeslot timeslots-signaling-profile [tsx..tsy] {1 | 2 | signaling-profile
range 3 | 4 | 5} This command is possible for multiple
timeslots only if they are consecutive
Setting the time required restoration-time {1sec | 10sec} Used to change the frame synchronization
for a port to resume algorithm, to reduce the time required for
normal operation after the port to return to normal operation after
loss of frame local loss of synchronization.
1sec – After 1 second.
10sec – Similar to the requirements of AT&T
TR-62411 (after 10 seconds).
This parameter cannot be changed when
using the Unframed mode.
Specifying the line build- line-buildout {0db | -7dot5db | -15db | M8T1, VS-16E1T1-EoP, VS-16E1T1-PW and
out (relative output -22dot5db} VS-6/E1T1 modules only
transmit level of the port) CSU mode only
Selecting the timing tx-clock-source loopback loopback – Clock received from the E1/T1
reference source used by tx-clock-source domain <number> port
the port for the domain – Clock provided by system clock
tx-clock-source through-timing
transmit-to-network domain
direction
through-timing – Clock received from
VC12/VT1.5 or PW (according to the
transport network)
This field is valid for VS-16E1T1-PW and
VS-6/E1T1 modules only.
Assigning VC profile to vc profile <profile name> Relevant for M16T1, VS-16E1T1-EoP and T3
the port modules, VS-16E1T1-PW, VS-6/E1T1. M8T1
does not support this feature.
For creating VC profiles, see VC Profiles.
Using no vc removes the profile.
Specifying T1 framing line-type {unframed | esf | sf} When the internal T1 port is bound to a VCG
mode port, VS-16E1T1-EoP supports esf option
only.
Specifying the code idle-code <00 to FF (hexa)> The available selections are [0x40 to 0x7F]
transmitted to fill unused and [0xC0 to 0xFF]
timeslots in T1 frames
Enabling inband inband-management <timeslot> protocol ppp – synchronous PPP over HDLC
management and setting {ppp | fr} [routing-protocol {none | encapsulation
its parameters prop-rip | rip2} ] fr –Frame Relay encapsulation (under DLCI
100) in accordance with RFC 2427
See also Configuring Inband Management in
Chapter 8 for important considerations on
selecting the routing protocol.
Not available for VS-16E1T1-EoP when this
T1 port is bound to a VCG port
Using no inband management <timeslot>
disables inband management through this
timeslot
Setting the time required restoration-time {1sec | 10sec} Used to change the frame synchronization
for a port to resume algorithm, to reduce the time required for
normal operation after the port to return to normal operation after
loss of frame local loss of synchronization.
1sec – After 1 second.
10sec – Similar to the requirements of AT&T
TR-62411 (after 10 seconds).
This parameter cannot be changed when
using the Unframed mode.
Example 1
14B
The following example illustrates how to configure the T1 port labeled 1 on the
M8T1 module installed in slot 9 as follows:
• Set the T1 framing mode to SF.
• Set the restoration time to 10 sec.
• Set the line code to AMI.
• Set the idle code to 8E.
• Administratively enable the port.
• Leave all other parameters disabled or at their defaults.
mp4100>config>port>t1(9/1)# line-type sf
mp4100>config>port>t1(9/1)# line-code ami
mp4100>config>port>t1(9/1)# restoration-time 10sec
mp4100>config>port>t1(9/1)# idle-code 0x8E
mp4100>config>port>t1(9/1)# no shutdown
Example 2
145B
Example 3
This section illustrates how to set signaling profile on timeslots.
1. Activate T1 port 2 of M8T1 module in Slot 9.
2. Configure signaling profile per ts:
TS-10 to profile 2
TS-1 to 9 to profile 3
Routing protocol: RAD proprietary RIP.
mp4100>config>port>e1(9/2)# no shutdown
mp4100>config>port>e1(9/2)# signaling-profile per-ts
mp4100>config>port>e1(9/2)# timeslots-signaling-profile 10 2
mp4100>config>port>e1(9/2)# timeslots-signaling-profile [1..9] 3
mp4100>config>port>e1(9/2)# commit
Result : OK
3. Displaying signaling profile per ts:
Configuration Errors
The following table lists messages generated by Megaplex-4 when a configuration
error on T1 modules is detected.
131 Warning RESTORATION TIME DOES NOT For T1 links, the restoration time must be 10 seconds,
MATCH THE STD according to the standard.
132 Error FRAME TYPE / PROFILE The selected framing mode does not support signaling
MISMATCH profiles.
141 Error ROUTING PROTOCOL/ The rip2 protocol on an I/O module port can be enabled
MNG TYPE MISMATCH only when the inband management method is configured
to ppp or fr
144 Error ILLEGAL IDLE CODE SELECTION Code transmitted in idle timeslots is illegal. The available
selections for T1/T1-i ports are [0x40 to 0x7F] and [0xC0
to 0xFF]
146 Error NUM OF E1/T1 PORTS The maximum number of framed T1 ports opened on the
EXCEEDS 120 M16T1 modules must not exceed 120.
Testing T1 Ports
The Megaplex-4 T1 ports feature test and loopback functions at the port and
timeslot levels. The following loops are supported on all t1/t1-i ports:
• Local loopback on t1/t1-i module port
• Remote loopback on t1/t1-i module port
• Local loopback on timeslots of t1/t1-i module port
• Remote loopback on timeslots of t1/t1-i module port.
In addition, M8T1 modules support network line loopback (LLB) and network
payload loopback (PLB). T1 ports of other I/O modules do not support
network-controlled loopbacks.
The hierarchical position of t1 ports is as follows:
• For t1 ports of T3 modules: slot:1:tributary
• For t1 and t1-i ports of other modules: slot:port.
CL Modules
The following sections briefly describe each type of loopback on T1-i ports of CL
modules. Table 6-44 shows the paths of the signals when each or loopback is
activated.
Megaplex-4100
SDH/SONET Interface
E1-i/T1-i
CL Framers
1
2
DS1 . SDH/
I/O Port Cross-Connect .. E1/T1 VC/VT
SONET
Mapper Matrix
Matrix .. Framer
..
.
E1-i/T1-i Framers
Local loopback on
2
T1-i port ..
..
..
E1-i/T1-i Framers
Remote loopback on
T1-i port 2
..
..
..
E1-i/T1-i Framers
Local loopback on
2
timeslots of ..
T1-i port ..
..
Megaplex-4100
SDH/SONET Interface
E1-i/T1-i
CL Framers
1
2
DS1 . SDH/
I/O Port Cross-Connect .. E1/T1 VC/VT
SONET
Mapper Matrix
Matrix .. Framer
..
.
E1-i/T1-i Framers
Remote loopback on
2
timeslots of ..
T1-i port ..
..
This test is recommended for testing the signal paths between the T1-i port and
an I/O port of another module that uses only a fraction of the available T1-i port
bandwidth.
The loopback is activated only on the timeslots specified by the user, as shown in
Table 6-44. As a result, there is no disturbance to services provided by means of
the other timeslots of the same T1-i port: only the flow of payload carried by the
specified timeslots is disrupted.
You can activate the loopback on any individual timeslot, or on several arbitrarily
selected timeslots. You cannot activate loopbacks on timeslots cross-connected
with HDLC ports.
I/O Modules
The following sections briefly describe each type of loopback on T1 ports of I/O
modules. Table 6-15 shows the paths of the signals when each or loopback is
activated.
I/O CL
I/O CL
I/O Interface
1
Local loopback on T1 timeslots (M8T1, DS1
2
M16T1, VS-16E1T1-PW, VS-6/E1T1, .. Cross-Connect
VS-16E1T1-EoP modules) .. Matrix
.
I/O Interface
1
Remote loopback on T1 timeslots DS1
2
(M8T1, M16T1, VS-16E1T1-EoP, .. Cross-Connect
VS-16E1T1-PW, VS-6/E1T1 modules) .. Matrix
.
The remote loopback should be activated only after checking that the remote unit
operates normally with the local port loopback. In this case, the remote unit must
receive its own signal, and thus it must be frame-synchronized. The effect on the
individual modules is mixed, as explained above for the local loopback.
If the local Megaplex-4 unit also operated normally when the local port loopback
was activated, then while the remote loopback is connected the local unit should
receive a valid signal, and thus it must be frame-synchronized.
The remote port loopback should be activated at only one of the units connected
in a link, otherwise an unstable situation occurs.
BER Test
The BER test, activated by the command bert, is used to evaluate data
transmission through selected timeslots of the link connected to a selected T1
without using external test equipment. It is available on the M16T1 module ports.
Loopback Duration
The activation of a loopback disconnects the local and remote equipment served
by the Megaplex-4. Therefore, when you initiate a loopback, you have the option
to limit its duration to an interval in the range of 1 through 30 minutes.
After the selected interval expires, the loopback is automatically deactivated
without operator intervention. However, you can always deactivate a loopback
activated on the local Megaplex-4 before this timeout expires. When using inband
management, always use the timeout option; otherwise, the management
communication path may be permanently disconnected.
The default is infinite duration (without timeout).
Activating and configuring loopback {local | remote} [time- local – local loopback
the direction of the slot <1..24>] [duration <duration remote – remote loopback
loopback and the duration in minutes 1..30> ]
of it (in minutes)
Activating the BER test and bert [ts <ts number 1..24>] The [ts <ts number in the range from 1
configuring its parameters [inject-error single] to 24>] command is used only for
framed ports and is mandatory for these
ports.
The timeslot on which BERT is performed
must be cross-connected.
CL flip stops the BERT session.
Displaying statistics show statistics {total | all | all-intervals | current} • total - Total statistics of last 96
intervals
• all-intervals – Statistics for all
valid intervals
• current - Current statistics
• all – All statistics: first current
statistics, then statistics for all
valid intervals, and finally total
statistics
Note BES, LOFC and Rx Frames Slip are displayed for framed formats only and are not
displayed for T1 ports of T3 modules.
For example:
Current statistics:
mp4100>config>port>t1(1/2)# show statistics current
Current
---------------------------------------------------------------
Time Elapsed (Sec) : 191
Valid Intervals : 2
ES : 0
SES : 0
UAS : 0
BES : 0
Rx Frames Slip : 0
LOFC : 0
Statistics for interval 67:
mp4100>config>port>t1(3/1)# show statistics interval 67
Interval Number : 67
Interval
---------------------------------------------------------------
ES : 16
SES : 1
UAS : 589
BES : 0
Rx Frames Slip : 0
LOFC : 0
Total statistics:
mp4100>config>port>t1(1/2)# show statistics total
Total
---------------------------------------------------------------
ES : 2
SES : 0
UAS : 0
BES : 0
Rx Frames Slip : 0
LOFC : 0
All statistics:
mp4100>config>port>t1(1/2)# show statistics all
Current
---------------------------------------------------------------
Time Elapsed (Sec) : 171
Valid Intervals : 2
mp4100>config>port>e1(1/2)#
ES : 0
SES : 0
UAS : 0
BES : 0
Rx Frames Slip : 0
LOFC : 0
Interval Number : 1
Interval
---------------------------------------------------------------
ES : 0
SES : 0
UAS : 0
BES : 0
Rx Frames Slip : 0
LOFC : 0
Interval Number : 2
Interval
---------------------------------------------------------------
ES : 2
SES : 0
UAS : 0
BES : 0
Rx Frames Slip : 0
LOFC : 0
Total
---------------------------------------------------------------
ES : 2
SES : 0
UAS : 0
BES : 0
Rx Frames Slip : 0
LOFC : 0
Parameter Description
UAS Displays the number of unavailable seconds (UAS) in the current interval.
An unavailable second is one of the following:
• Any second following 10 consecutive SES seconds
• A second for which any of the previous 10 consecutive seconds was also a UAS
and any of the previous 10 consecutive seconds was a SES.
SES Displays the number of severely errored seconds (SES) in the current interval.
A SES is any second not declared a UAS which contains an OOF or more than 320 CRC
errors.
BES Displays the number of bursty errored seconds (BES) in the current interval.
A BES is any second which is not declared a UAS and contains 2 to 319 CRC errors
Rx Frames Slip Displays the number of Rx Frames Slips in the current 15-minute interval.
A CSS is a second with one or more controlled slip events.
Time elapsed The elapsed time (in seconds) since the beginning of the current interval, in seconds.
The range is 1 to 900 seconds.
Valid Intervals The number of elapsed finished 15-min intervals for which statistics data can be
displayed, in addition to the current (not finished) interval (up to 96).
Parameter Description
ES Displays the total number of errored seconds (ES) in the selected interval
UAS Displays the total number of unavailable seconds (UAS) in the selected interval
SES Displays the total number of severely errored seconds (SES) in the selected interval
BES Displays the total number of bursty errored seconds (BES) in the selected interval
LOFC Displays the total number of loss of frame alignment events in the selected interval
Rx Frames Slip Displays the total number of loss of of Rx Frames Slip events in the selected interval
Interval number Displays the number of interval for which statistics is displayed
Note: The sequence of intervals is different for the T1 ports of different module
families:
Parameter Description
ES Displays the total number of errored seconds (ES) since statistics is available
UAS Displays the total number of unavailable seconds (UAS) since statistics is available
SES Displays the total number of severely errored seconds since statistics is available
BES Displays the total number of bursty errored seconds (BES) since statistics is available
LOFC Displays the total number of loss of frame alignment events since statistics is available
Rx Frames Slip Displays the total number of loss of of Rx Frames Slip events since statistics is available
T3 Ports
Applicable Modules
T3
Standards
The T3 interface complies with ANSI T1.107 and ANSI T1.102 standards.
Functional Description
T3 ports of Megaplex-4 provide access to standard T3 equipment over
unbalanced copper lines with full duplex data rates of 44.7 Mbps, enabling easy
connectivity to a T3/SONET network.
General description of T3 port parameters is given in the following sections.
Framing
The T3 ports can be independently configured in accordance with the desired
framing mode:
• Synchronous M13 (SYNTRAN) in accordance with ANSI T1.107a.
• Asynchronous C-bit parity multiplex applications in accordance with ANSI
T1.107-1995
• Unframed.
The framer automatically adds the appropriate overhead. Unused timeslots are
filled with a user-specified idle code. The user can also select specific timeslots to
be transferred (DS0 cross-connect).
The framing mode is configured by means of line-type parameter.
Line Length
The maximum allowed signal attenuation is in accordance with ITU-T Rec. G.703
requirements. For optimal performance, the receive side includes an equalizer
which must be preset in accordance with cable length: up to 225 ft, or more than
225 ft.
This is configured by means of line-length parameter.
Interface Type
The T3 links have 75 Ω unbalanced interfaces.
Factory Defaults
Megaplex-4 is supplied with all T3 ports disabled. Other parameter defaults are
listed in the table below.
line-type m13
line-length up-to-225ft
vc profile "tug-structure"
Configuring a T3 Port
Specifying T3 framing line-type {c-bit-parity | m13 | unframed} m13 – synchronous M13 multiplex framing
mode mode
c-bit-parity – asynchronous C-bit parity
framing mode
unframed – unframed mode. This mode is
used for transferring Ethernet over T3 and
is not relevant for Ethernet transport over
T1.
The following example illustrates how to configure the T3 port labeled 1 on the
T3 module installed in slot 9 as follows:
• Set the T3 framing mode to c-bit-parity.
• Administratively enable the port.
• Leave all other parameters disabled or at their defaults.
mp4100>config>port>t3(9/1)# line-type c-bit-parity
mp4100>config>port>t3(9/1)# no shutdown
Configuration Errors
The following table lists messages generated by Megaplex-4 when a configuration
error on T3 modules is detected.
774 Warning SHUTDOWN PORT CONTAINS When a T3 port contains associated open T1 ports, it
ASSOCIATED T1 CHANNELS must be open as well.
775 Error ILLEGAL X-CONNECT FOR T1 If one of the timeslots is defined as voice and the CL
PORTS 17-28 module has no SDH/SONET ports, this cross-connect is
impossible for internal T1 ports 17 to 28 of the T3
module.
Testing T3 Ports
The Megaplex-4 T3 ports feature local and remote loopbacks at the port level.
Table 6-15 shows the paths of the signals when each or loopback is activated.
I/O CL
DS1
Port Cross-Connect
Local loopback on T3 port Interface
Matrix
"1 "
DS1
Port
Remote loopback on T3 port Interface
Cross-Connect
Matrix
circuits serving the selected port, and the operation of the routing circuits that
handle the port signals within the module.
As shown in Table 6-15, when a local loopback is activated, the port transmit
signal is returned to the input of the same port receive path at a point just
before the line interface. The local port must receive its own signal, and thus it
must be frame-synchronized. In addition, each I/O module connected to the
corresponding port must also receive its own signal. In general, the result is that
these modules are synchronized and do not generate alarm indications.
Loopback Duration
The activation of a loopback disconnects the local and remote equipment served
by the Megaplex-4. Therefore, when you initiate a loopback, you have the option
to limit its duration to an interval in the range of 1 through 30 minutes.
After the selected interval expires, the loopback is automatically deactivated
without operator intervention. However, you can always deactivate a loopback
activated on the local Megaplex-4 before this timeout expires. When using inband
management, always use the timeout option; otherwise, the management
communication path may be permanently disconnected.
The default is infinite duration (without timeout).
Activating Loopbacks
Activating and configuring loopback {local | remote} [duration local – local loopback
the direction of the <duration in minutes 1..30> ] remote – remote loopback
loopback and the duration
of it (in minutes)
Displaying statistics show statistics {total | all | all-intervals | current} • total - Total statistics of last 96
intervals
• all-intervals – Statistics for all
valid intervals
• current - Current statistics
• all – All statistics: first current
statistics, then statistics for all
valid intervals, and finally total
statistics
T3 port statistics are displayed. The counters are described in Table 6-54.
For example:
Current statistics:
mp4100>config>port>e1(1/2)# show statistics current
Current
---------------------------------------------------------------
Time Elapsed (Sec) : 751
Valid Intervals : 3
PES : 0 LES : 0
PSES : 0 CES : 0
SEFS : 0 CSES : 0
UAS : 20
PCV : 0
PES : 0 LES : 0
PSES : 0 CES : 0
SEFS : 0 CSES : 0
UAS : 0
PCV : 0
All intervals:
Interval
---------------------------------------------------------------------
Interval Number : 1
PES : 0 LES : 0
PSES : 0 CES : 0
SEFS : 0 CSES : 0
UAS : 0
PCV : 0
Interval
Interval Number : 2
PES : 0 LES : 0
PSES : 0 CES : 0
SEFS : 0 CSES : 0
UAS : 0
PCV : 0
Interval
Interval Number : 3
PES : 0 LES : 0
PSES : 0 CES : 0
SEFS : 0 CSES : 0
UAS : 0
PCV : 0
Total statistics:
mp4100>config>port>t3(2/1)# show statistics total
Total
-----------------------------------------------------------------
PES : 5 LES : 0
PSES : 5 CES : 5
SEFS : 5 CSES : 5
UAS : 1159
PCV : 0
All statistics:
mp4100>config>port>t3(2/1)# show statistics all
Current
----------------------------------------------------------------
Time Elapsed (Sec) : 287
Valid Intervals : 3
PES : 0 LES : 0
PSES : 0 CES : 0
SEFS : 0 CSES : 0
UAS : 0
PCV : 0
Interval
-----------------------------------------------------------------
Interval Number : 1
PES : 0 LES : 0
PSES : 0 CES : 0
SEFS : 10 CSES : 0
UAS : 0
PCV : 0
Interval
-----------------------------------------------------------------
Interval Number : 2
PES : 0 LES : 0
PSES : 0 CES : 0
SEFS : 21 CSES : 0
UAS : 0
PCV : 0
Interval
-----------------------------------------------------------------
Interval Number : 3
PES : 0 LES : 0
PSES : 0 CES : 0
SEFS : 0 CSES : 0
UAS : 0
PCV : 0
Total
---------------------------------------------------------------
PES : 0 LES : 0
PSES : 0 CES : 0
SEFS : 31 CSES : 0
UAS : 0
PCV : 0
Parameter Description
Time elapsed The elapsed time (in seconds) since the beginning of the current interval, in seconds.
(Current statistics The range is 1 to 900 seconds
only)
Valid Intervals The number of elapsed finished 15-min intervals for which statistics data can be
(Current statistics displayed, in addition to the current (not finished) interval (up to 96)
only)
Interval number Number of interval for which statistics is displayed. Interval #1 is the earliest in time.
(Selected interval
and “all-intervals”
statistics only)
LES A Line Errored Second is a second in which one or more CV OR one or more LOS
defects occurred.
UAS Displays the number of unavailable seconds (UAS) in the current interval.
An unavailable second is one of the following:
• Any second following 10 consecutive SES seconds
• A second for which any of the previous 10 consecutive seconds was also a UAS
and any of the previous 10 consecutive seconds was a SES.
PES Displays the number of P-bit Error Seconds (PES) in the current interval. A Line error
Second is a second in which one or more PCV occurred OR one or more LOS defects.
Parameter Description
CSES Displays the number of C-bit severely errored seconds (CSES) in the current interval.
A CSES is a second with 44 or more CCVs OR one or more Out of Frame defects OR
detected incoming AIS. This count is only for the SYNTRAN and C-bit Parity DS3
applications. This gauge is not incremented when UASs are counted.
CSES Displays the number of C-bit severely errored seconds (CSES) in the current interval.
A CSES is a second with 44 or more CCVs OR one or more Out of Frame defects OR
detected incoming AIS. This count is only for the SYNTRAN and C-bit Parity DS3
applications. This gauge is not incremented when UASs are counted.
Applicable Modules
The TP module supports up to 4 command inputs and 8 outputs, enabling
teleprotection equipment to utilize the advanced transport capabilities offered by
Megaplex.
It also includes two independent groups of CMD channels:
• East – CMD channels 1 (working) and 2 (protection)
• West – CMD channels 3 (working) and 4 (protection).
The teleprotection commands can be locally output or be carried to a peer
card/Megaplex over a TDM/SDH network or over a packet-switched network. Up
to 4 commands can be carried over a single DS0.
Functional Description
See Alarm Relay Modules chapter in Megaplex-4 I/O Modules Installation and
Operation Manual.
Factory Defaults
The Megaplex-4 is supplied with all teleprotection ports disabled. Other
parameter defaults are listed in the table below.
cmd-in
input-active Association between the cmd-in active state and the high
supplied voltage
bounce-override Debounce filter window time (time during which the cmd- 1000
in signal is sampled, µsec)
cmd-out
led-latched LED behavior when the related command turns inactive no led-latched
cmd-channel
oos-recovery Mode of recovery from sending oos code and switching auto
back from the protection state
Assigning short description name <string> Using no name removes the name
to port
Setting the debounce filter bounce-override <µsec > 0 to 32000 µsec, in 250-µsec steps
window time (time during For more information on bounce-override
which the cmd-in signal is command, see Teleprotection section in
sampled) Megaplex-4 I/O Modules Installation and
Operation Manual, Alarm Relay Modules
Chapter.
Setting the extended cmd-in preset-duration <msec> 0 to 2000 msec, in 1-msec steps
duration period For more information on preset-duration
command, see Teleprotection section in
Megaplex-4 I/O Modules Installation and
Operation Manual, Alarm Relay Modules
Chapter.
Defining the association input-active {high | low} • low – low voltage means that command
between the cmd-in active input is in active state
state and the supplied • high – high voltage means that
voltage command input is in active state
Defining LED behavior when led-latched • led-latched – the LED lights once the
the related command turns related command becomes active, and
inactive stays on even when the command is not
active, until explicit clear-cmd-led
command is issued by the user
• no led-latched – the LED follows the
related command activity
Forcing the cmd-in port into force-active Using no force-active cancels the command
active state, disregarding
the actual input state
Assigning short description name <string> Using no name removes the name
to port
Setting minimum cmd-out prolongation <msec> If the received pulse period of cmd-out-i
signal duration (for very signal (received via cmd-channel) is shorter
short pulses) than this specific value, the cmd-out pulse
duration will be extended to this value.
Allowed values: 0 to 15000, with steps of
1 msec
If prolongation =0, the command is not
activated and the received pulse period is not
extended
When cmd-out is functioning as a binary
output port, this parameter does not appear.
Setting maximum cmd-out pulse-duration <msec> If the received pulse period of cmd-out-i
signal duration (for very signal (received via cmd-channel) is longer
long pulses) than this specific value, the cmd-out pulse
duration will be shortened to this value.
Allowed values: 0 to 15000, with steps of
1 msec
If pulse-duration=0, the command is not
activated and the received pulse period is not
shortened
When cmd-out is functioning as a binary
output port, this parameter does not appear.
Defining cmd-out alarm alarm-state-energized {yes | yes – alarm state is indicated by closed cicruit
state indication no} no – alarm state is indicated by open cicruit
Defines LED behavior when led-latched • led-latched – the LED lights once the
the related command turns related command becomes active, and
inactive stays on even when the command is not
active, until explicit clear-cmd-led
command is issued by the user.
• no led-latched – the LED follows the
related command activity.
Creating a set of ports that trigger-bind < number> cmd- See Command Cross-Connect in Megaplex-4
will be trigger sources for out-i <slot/port/tributary I/O Modules Installation and Operation
the current port [none | or | and] Manual, Alarm Relay Modules Chapter.
trigger-bind < number> cmd- Using no trigger-bind < number> removes the
in <slot/port> [none | or | set.
and] “none” is default operator and can be
omitted when only one trigger source is
defined.
When more than one trigger sources are
defined, the operator must be either “or” or
“and” for all trigger sources.
Clearing the led-latched clear-cmd-led See also Clear-Cmd-Led Command per System
state
Assigning short description to port name <string> Using no name removes the name
Controlling the mode of recovery oos-recovery {auto | • auto – when the OOS condition is over,
from sending oos code and manual} the cmd-in-i port automatically stops
switching back from the protection sending the oos code and switches back
state from the protection state
• manual – when the OOS condition is over,
the oos code continues to be sent and
the system remains in the protection
state until the user sends “reactivate”
command
Configuration Errors
The tables below list messages generated by Megaplex-4 when a configuration
error on the Teleprotection module is detected.
680 Error IDENTICAL TX/RX ADDRESSES The Tx&Rx addresses on a cmd channel cannot be
ARE ILLEGAL configured to the same value (with the exception of 254)
681 Error BOUND PORT IS IN One of the following ports is in shutdown state:
SHUTDOWN STATE • cmd-out-i or cmd-in port participating in trigger-bind
command
• cmd-out port participating in secondary-bind command
682 Error SECONDARY PORT IS BOUND A secondary cmd-out port can be bound to a primary cmd-
MORE THAN ONCE out port only once
684 Error ASSOCIATED CMD CHANNEL IS When a cmd-in-i and/or cmd-out-i port is in “no
IN SHUTDOWN STATE shutdown” state, its associated cmd-channel ports must
be also at “no shutdown”.
685 Error ILLEGAL LOGIC OPERATOR IN When more than one trigger sources are defined, the
TRIGGER-BIND operator must be either “or” or “and” for all trigger
sources.
686 Error ILLEGAL PORT TYPE USED IN For cmd-out and cmd-in-i ports, the associate trigger
TRIGGER BIND port can be either cmd-out-i or cmd-in.
687 Error ILLEGAL SECONDARY Primary and secondary cmd-out ports bound to each other
SLOT/PORT BOUND must reside in the same slot.
688 Error PULSE DURATION IS SHORTER Command prolongation must be shorter than pulse
THAN PROLONGATION duration.
4/1/1 0
4/1/2 0
4/1/3 0
4/1/4 0
4/1/1 0
4/1/2 0
4/1/3 0
4/1/4 0
Parameter Description
Frame Error Number of frame errors received on the cmd channel since last reset or power-up
CRC Error Number of CRC errors received on the cmd channel since last reset or power-up
A CRC error is declared when the CRC bits generated locally on the data in the received
frame (protecting critical teleprotection bits) do not match the CRC bits (crc1 – crc4)
received from the transmitter.
Clearing Statistics
Voice Ports
Applicable Modules
Voice ports are available on the following modules:
• VC-4, VC-8 and VC-16
• VC-4A, VC-8A
• VC-4/OMNI
• VC-6/LB
• VS voice modules
• VS voice modules (VS-6/FXS, VS-6/FXO, VS-6/E&M and FXS/E&M).
The following table shows the number of voice ports on each Megaplex-4 I/O
module.
VC-4/OMNI 4
VC-4A/8A 4/8
VC-4/8/16 4/8/16
VC-6/LB 6
VS-6/FXS 8
VS-6/FXO 8
VS-6/E&M 4
FXS/E&M 8(FXS)+4(E&M)
VC-4A and VC-8A modules are analog voice interface module similar to VC-4 and
VC-8, except that they also support ADPCM.
The VC-6/LB module is used for connection of local battery-powered (LB)
telephones. It provides 6 voice channels using toll-quality 64 kbps PCM voice
encoding in compliance with ITU-T Rec. G.711 and AT&T Pub. 43801.
A special ”omnibus“ VC-4/OMNI module provides four toll-quality voice channels
for applications where a master site needs to communicate with multiple remote
stations simultaneously (such as to broadcast an important message).
The VS voice modules (VS-6/FXS, VS-6/FXO, VS-6/E&M and FXS/E&M) provide
8 FXS, 8 FXO or 4 E&M toll-quality analog voice channels.
The following parameters can be configured for the voice ports:
• Port name
• Administrative status
• End-to-end signaling transfer method
• Pulse metering frequency for FXO/FXS channels (VC modules only)
• Number of wires for E&M channels
• Specifying the compression method used in the ADPCM encoding.
• Analog signaling method for FXO/FXS channels
• Analog signaling profile (VS voice modules only)
• E&M signaling standard
• Energy recognition engine status for E&M channels (VS voice modules only)
• Impedance for FXS and FXO modules (VS voice modules only)
• Cadence for FXS and FXO modules (VS voice modules only)
Standards
The Megaplex-4 voice ports comply with following standards:
Modulation Technique PCM: per ITU-T Rec. G.711 and AT&T Pub. 43801
ADPCM: per ITU-T G.726 and G.727
End-to-End Signaling for User-selectable as per ITU-T Rec. G.704, para. 3.3.32
E1 Uplinks
Functional Description
All the VC/VS voice modules provide high-quality voice channels. The functional
difference between the various modules is in the signaling interface and mode.
The analog interface depends on the module type:
• VC-4/4A/8/8A/16 E&M modules: user-selectable for 2-wire or 4-wire
• VC-4/4A/8/8A/16 FXS/FXO and VC-6/LB modules: always 2-wire
• VC-4/OMNI modules: always 4-wire
• VS-6/E&M, FXS/E&M E&M submodules: user-selectable for 2-wire or 4-wire
• VS-6/FXS, VS-6/FXO, FXS/E&M FXS/FXO submodules: always 2-wire
Voice encoding method for all VC-4A and VC-8A module versions is
user-selectable for either toll-quality 64 kbps PCM or 32/24 kbps ADPCM. The
VC-4, VC-8, VC-16, VS-6/E&M, FXS/E&M, VS-6/FXS, and VS-6/FXO modules
feature only PCM encoding.
The user can select the companding law, µ-law or A-law, in accordance with
system requirements. In accordance with ITU-T Rec. G.711, the A-law should be
used on E1 trunks and the µ-law should be used on T1 trunks. However, the user
can select the desired companding law, µ-law or A-law, in accordance with the
specific system requirements.
To increase application flexibility, the nominal audio transmit and receive levels of
all the module versions can be adjusted over a wide range (see Table 6-58).
VC modules
FXS -5 +5 -17 +1
LB -17 +8 -23 +2
VS voice modules
FXS/FXO -5 +5 -17 +1
The VC-4A and VC-8A modules use G.168 standard for echo cancellation (up to
4 ms per channel).
For VS voice modules, pulse metering frequency is not supported.
For more information, see also the following sections in the Megaplex-4 I/O
Modules Installation and Operation Manual:
• VC-4/VC-4A/VC-8/VC-8A/VC-16, VC-6/LB and VC-4/OMNI sections in Voice
Modules chapter
• VS Voice section in Versatile Modules chapter.
Factory Defaults
Megaplex-4 is supplied with all voice ports disabled. Other parameter defaults are
listed in the table below.
coding a-law
no signaling (disabled)
Note: this default value is not used in the
signaling VC-6/LB module and must be changed to one of
the other options, as explained in the
configuration section.
analog-signaling-profile sig_over_a_bit
meter-rate 12khz
wires 2
analog-signaling loop-start
e-m-type ssdc5
operation-mode ptp
tx-gain 0 dbm
rx-sensitivity 0 dbm
impedance 600
cadence local
loop-disconnect-time 250msec
forward-disconnect 250msec
duration infinite
omni-signaling legacy
ring-voltage normal
Assigning short name <string> Using no before name removes the name
description to port
Specifying the coding {a-law | u-law} a-law - A-law coding, intended for use on
companding law to be E1 links
used by the voice u-law -µ-law coding, intended for use on T1
channels links
Specifying the signaling {rbmf | cas | rbf} This command is relevant for
end-to-end signaling VC-4/4A/8/8A/16 and VC-6/LB modules. For
transfer method for voice VC-4/OMNI modules, see omni-signaling
modules command.
The signaling transfer options depend on
the type of link module installed in the
Megaplex chassis:
• with T1 link modules, RBMF and RBF is
used
• with E1 link modules, CAS and RBF is
used
rbf – proprietary “robbed bit” signaling
method that does not require multiframe
synchronization, used as follows:
• 7-bit PCM with channel signaling carried
by the 8th bit of each channel
• 3-bit ADPCM with channel signaling
carried by the 4th bit of each channel
when using G.727
This option is used for VC-4A/VC-8A and
VC-6/LB modules only.
rbmf – robbed bit signaling in accordance
with AT&T Pub 43801.
cas – Channel-associated signaling in
accordance with ITU-T Rec. G.704.
Using no signaling means that channel
signaling is not transferred (not used in the
VC-6/LB module)
Specifying the omni-signaling {legacy | abcd} legacy The channel uses legacy signaling
end-to-end signaling (used by the uplink port connected
transfer method for to this channel)
VC-4/OMNI modules abcd The channel uses RAD proprietary
signaling for VC-4/OMNI modules
Using no omni-signaling means that channel
signaling is not transferred
Specifying the pulse meter-rate { 16khz | 12khz } This feature is supported only on FXS and
metering frequency FXO modules in PCM mode
Specifying the compression {g726 | g727} Always use G.727 when working with RBF or
compression method RBMF signaling.
used in the ADPCM If PCM encoding is used, a sanity error is
encoding sent.
Using no compression disables compression
Specifying the analog analog-signaling {loop-start | wink-start} Can be selected only for FXO and FXS
signaling method used modules operated in PCM mode.
for all FXO/FXS channels For VC-4, VC-4A, VC-8 and VC-8A modules,
the selection is made for the entire group
of all the module channels. For VC-16
modules, the selection can be separately
made for each group of eight channels: 1 to
8 and 9 to 16.
Specifying the E&M e-m-type {1 | 2 | 3 | ssdc5} This selection is available only for E&M
signaling standard modules. The E&M signaling type can be
independently selected for each group of
four channels 1, 2, 3, 4; 5, 6, 7, 8; etc.).
Note: For the E&M/POS module, select 2
only.
Enabling the built-in echo-canceler This option is relevant only for VC-4A and
adaptive echo canceller, VC-8A modules.
supporting up to a 4 Using no before echo-canceler disables
msec delay echo canceling
Setting the operating operation-mode {ptp | omni-bus | This parameter is valid only for
mode of the channel for p2mp-dst | p2mp-src} VC-4/OMNI modules:
VC-4/OMNI modules • omni-bus – The channel is operated in
an “omnibus” (conference call)
application.
• ptp – The channel is operated as a
regular E&M voice channel.
• p2mp-dst –The channel is operated as a
destination (remote station) in a point-
to-multipoint application
• p2mp-src –The channel is operated as a
source (master) in a point-to-multipoint
application.
Selecting the nominal tx-gain <value in dbm> The input level can be set in 0.5 dB steps in
input level of the the range of +8 dBm to -17 dBm, depending
transmit path on the module type (see Table 6-58).
Selects the nominal rx-sensitivity <value in dbm> The output level can be set in 0.5 dB steps
output level of the in the range of +9 dBm to -23 dBm,
receive path depending on the module type (see
Table 6-58).
Assigning short name <string> Using no before name removes the name
description to port
Specifying the coding {a-law | u-law} a-law - A-law coding, intended for use on
companding law to be E1 links
used by the voice u-law -µ-law coding, intended for use on T1
channels links
Specifying the signaling {rbmf | cas | rbf} The signaling transfer options depend on
end-to-end signaling the type of link module installed in the
transfer method for voice Megaplex chassis:
modules • with T1 link modules, RBMF and RBF is
used
• with E1 link modules, CAS and RBF is
used
RBF is a proprietary “robbed bit” signaling
method that does not require multiframe
synchronization, it is supported by E&M
module only.
Using no signaling means that channel
signaling is not transferred
Specifying the analog analog-signaling {loop-start | wink-start} Can be selected only for FXO and FXS
signaling method used modules.
for all FXO/FXS channels
Specifying the E&M e-m-type {1 | 2 | 3 | ssdc5 | positive} This selection is available only for E&M
signaling standard modules.
The E&M signaling type can be
independently selected for each group of
four channels 1, 2, 3, 4; 5, 6, 7, 8; etc.)
Controlling the use of signaling-feedback This parameter is available only for FXO
signaling feedback for modules and is needed when FXO is working
FXO modules opposite E&M interface.
Using no before signaling-feedback disables
the signaling feedback.
Selecting the nominal tx-gain <value in dbm> The input level can be set in 0.5 dB steps in
input level of the the range of +5 dBm to -17 dBm, depending
transmit path on the module type (see Table 6-58).
Selects the nominal rx-sensitivity <value in dbm> The input level can be set in 0.5 dB steps in
output level of the the range of +9 dBm to -17 dBm, depending
receive path on the module type (see Table 6-58).
Specifying the analog analog-signaling-profile <profile-name> By default the analog signaling profile shall
signaling profile be sig_over_a_bit
Specifying the line impedance {600 | 900} Available only for FXS/FXO modules
impedance
Specifying if the cadence cadence {local | transparent} Available only for FXS/FXO modules
of the ring is generated
locally or translated
directly from the received
signaling bit
Specifying the amount of forward-disconnect {250msec | 500msec | Available only for FXS modules
time during which the 750msec | 1sec | 2sec}
battery voltage is
disconnected by the FXS
port after a far-end
notification has been
received
Specifying the amount of loop-disconnect-time {250msec | 500msec Avaliable only for FXO modules
time of momentary | 750msec | 1sec | 2sec}
battery voltage removal
that will be detected by
the FXO port
Specifying the ring ring-voltage {normal | high} Available only for FXS ports:
voltage value • normal – 54 Vrms
• high – 85 Vrms
For each pair of channels (1-2, 3-4, 5-6 or
7-8) only one channel can be set to 'high'.
Example
The following section illustrates how to configure the voice FXS port 1 on the
VC-8 module installed in slot 9:
• Set -µ-law coding
• Set CAS signaling
• Administratively enable the port
• Leave all other parameters disabled or at their defaults.
mp4100>config# #----------vc8fxs-----------------
mp4100>config# port voice 9/1 no shutdown
mp4100>config# port voice 9/1 coding a-law
mp4100>config# port voice 9/1 signaling cas
Assigning short description to port name <string> Using no before name removes the name
Specifying the end-to-end signaling omni-signaling {legacy | abcd} Using no before omni-signaling means that
transfer method for VC-4/OMNI channel signaling is not transferred
modules
Configuration Errors
Table 6-59 and Table 6-60 list messages generated by Megaplex-4 when a
configuration error on voice modules is detected.
170 Error ILLEGAL SIGNALING METHOD You can select the channel associated signaling method
only when an E1 module port with G.732S framing is used.
You can select the robbed bit multiframe signaling transfer
method only for E1 links with G.732S framing, or on T1
links.
171 Warning VOICE CODING LAW (E1/T1) The selected voice companding law differs from the
MISMATCH companding law specified by the standards: the A-law is
generally used for E1 links, and the µ-law is generally used
on T1 links
172 Error TX GAIN VALUE OUT OF RANGE The transmit gain selected for the specified channel is not
within the supported range
173 Error RX SENSITIVITY VALUE OUT OF The receive sensitivity (gain) selected for the specified
RANGE channel is not within the supported range
174 Error OOS/INTERFACE MISMATCH The selected OOS mode cannot be used on this type of
interface
175 Error SIGNALING PROFILE/INTERFACE The selected profile cannot be used on this type of
MISMATCH interface
176 Error ILLEGAL NUMBER OF WIRES Voice modules with /FXO and /FXS interfaces support only
the two-wire interface.
For voice modules with /E&M interface only, it is possible
to select two-wire or four-wire interfaces. In addition, for
VC-4/4A/8A/16 modules with /E&M interface, the same
interface type must be selected for consecutive pairs of
channels (for example, 1, 2 or 15, 16)
177 Error NO SIGNALING IS ILLEGAL FOR The selected interface cannot be used with no signaling –
THIS INTERFACE the signaling option must be specified
179 Error ILLEGAL ANALOG SIG For VC-4, VC-4A, VC-8 and VC-8A modules, the selection of
COMBINATION analog-signaling parameter must be made for the entire
group of all the module channels. For VC-16 modules, the
selection can be separately made for each group of eight
channels: 1 to 8 and 9 to 16.
180 Error ILLEGAL FXO SIG FEEDBACK For VC-4, VC-4A, VC-8 and VC-8A modules, the selection of
COMBINATION signaling-feedback parameter must be made for the entire
group of all the module channels. For VC-16 modules, the
selection can be separately made for each group of eight
channels: 1 to 8 and 9 to 16.
181 Error ILLEGAL TS SPLIT CONFIG FOR Split timeslot cross-connect must be peformed on a pair
ADPCM MODE of ports (1,2 or 3,4..)
182 Error TX/RX GAIN LEVEL MUST BE Step value is not legal for VS voice modules.
SET IN 0.5 dB STEPS
762 Error NO SIGNALING / ENERGY When energy recognition is active in VS voice modules,
RECOGNITION MISMATCH “no signaling” is illegal.
763 Error SERIAL PORT/PW BANDWIDTH In VS modules, the serial port rate must match the number
MISMATCH of timeslots on this serial port listed in the cross-connect
pw-tdm command.
764 Error ILLEGAL RING VOLTAGE/PORTS For each pair of channels (1-2, 3-4, 5-6 or 7-8) only one
ADMIN COMBINATION channel can be set to 'high' ring voltage.
241 Error ONLY FIRST TRIBUTARY CAN If operation-mode is ptp, only the first tributary channel
BE CONNECTED of this voice port can be connected. All the other tributary
channels must be set to shutdown.
242 Error FIRST TRIBITURY MUST BE If the operation-mode is p2mp-dst, and the first internal
CONNECTED channel is not connected, the other internals cannot be
connected and cannot carry traffic.
Channel 1 ..
.. .. ..
... . ..
. .. .
User or ..
Test .
Equipment
User or
VC-16 VC-16 Test
Equipment
I/O Modules
I/O Modules
Local Remote
Unit Unit
System
Management
Note When working in the ADPCM mode, the local digital loopback towards the local
user equipment is performed for each pair of consecutive channels (1-2, 3-4,
etc.)
Channel 1 ..
.. ..
.. . ..
.. .. ..
User or . .. .
Test .
Equipment
User or
VC-16 VC-16 Test
Equipment
I/O Modules
I/O Modules
Local Remote
Unit Unit
System
Management
While the forward tone injection is activated, the remote user should hear the
tone in the earpiece if the channel is connected to a telephone set.
Figure 6-28 shows the signal path.
Channel 1 ..
.. ..
.. . ..
.. .. ..
User or . .. .
Test .
Equipment
Test
~ Tone
User or
VC-16 VC-16 Test
Equipment
I/O Modules
I/O Modules
Local Remote
Unit Unit
System
Management
Channel 1 ..
.. ..
.. . ..
.. .. ..
User or . .. .
Test .
Equipment
Test
Tone
User or
VC-16 VC-16 Test
Equipment
I/O Modules
I/O Modules
Local Remote
Unit Unit
System
Management
Loopback Duration
The activation of a loopback disconnects the local and remote equipment served
by the Megaplex-4. Therefore, when you initiate a loopback, you have the option
to limit its duration to an interval in the range of 1 through 30 minutes.
After the selected interval expires, the loopback is automatically deactivated,
without operator intervention. However, you can always deactivate a loopback
activated on the local Megaplex-4 before this timeout expires. When using inband
management, always use the timeout option; otherwise, the management
communication path may be permanently disconnected.
The default is infinite duration (without timeout).
BRI Ports
Applicable Modules
The following table shows the number of BRI ports on the HSU-6, HSU-12 and
HS-S I/O modules.
Standards
The BRI ports comply with the ANSI T1.601 and ITU-T Rec. G.961 standards.
Functional Description
See the corresponding module section in Megaplex-4 I/O Modules Installation and
Operation Manual.
Factory Defaults
Megaplex-4 is supplied with all BRI ports disabled. Other parameter defaults are
listed in the table below.
rate-bits 2
Assigning short description name <string> Using no name removes the name
to port
Example
The following section illustrates how to configure the bri ports 3 and 4 (B1, B2
and D-channels) on the HS-U-6 module installed in slot 5:
• Data rate 8 kbps on each B-channel (total 32 kbps).
• Data rate 2 kbps on each D-channel (total 4 kbps).
• Administratively enable the ports.
• Leave all other parameters disabled or at their defaults.
------------hs-U6----------------
mp4100>config# #------------d-channel------
mp4100>config# port bri 5/3 no shutdown
mp4100>config# port bri 5/3 rate-bits 2
mp4100>config#
mp4100>config# port bri 5/4 no shutdown
mp4100>config# port bri 5/4 rate-bits 2
DS1 Ports
Applicable Modules
The following table shows the number of ds1 ports and the features supported
by each Megaplex-4 module.
Number of 8 12 12 8 4 16
ports
name √ √ √ √ √ √
shutdown √ √ √ √ √ √
signaling √ - √ √ - -
line-type √ - - - - √
Idle-code - - - - - √
vc-profile - - - - - √
Functional Description
The internal DS1 ports are logical ports that provide the linkage between the
packet processing subsystem and the TDM subsystem:
• On the TDM side, a DS1 port serves as an endpoint for traffic from the TDM
and signaling buses. Each I/O or E1-i/T1-i port in the Megaplex-4 that will use
pseudowires on a PW module must be assigned bandwidth (timeslots) on the
internal DS1 port, using the standard Megaplex-4 timeslot assignment
procedures.
• On the pseudowire side, a DS1 port serves as the collection point for
timeslots to be carried by each pseudowire. Thus, to carry traffic from a
specific TDM port by means of a pseudowire, it is necessary to assign the
same timeslots on the TDM side and on the pseudowire side. The pseudowire
timeslot assignment is made as part of the pseudowire configuration
procedure, and it determines the cross-connect operations performed by the
pseudowire cross-connect matrix (see Configuring a PW-TDM Cross
Connection in Chapter 8).
When using the PW-equipped modules, the user can independently configure
each internal DS1 port in accordance with the table above.
Factory Defaults
Megaplex-4 is supplied with all DS1 ports disabled. Other parameter defaults are
listed in the table below.
signaling disabled
tx-clock-source domain 1
idle-code 0x7f
vc profile tug-structure
Assigning short name <string> Using no before name removes the name
description to port
Specifying the code idle-code <00 to FF (hexa)> Specifying the code transmitted to fill
transmitted to fill unused unused timeslots
timeslots This field is valid for SH-16/E1/PW,
VS-6/E1T1 and VS-E1T1/PW modules only.
Example
The following section illustrates how to configure the internal DS1 port 1 on the
MPW-1 module installed in slot 9:
• Set the line type to unframed.
• Administratively enable the port.
• Leave all other parameters disabled or at their defaults.
mp4100>config>port>ds1(9/1)# line-type unframed
mp4100>config>port>ds1(9/1)# no shutdown
Megaplex-4100
MPW-1 Module
CL MPW-1
Int DS1 Port 1
TS n
.. .. Pseudowire
TDM Cross-
Other Routing Bus .. ..
Connect
Cross- Packet Ethernet To PSN
Ports Matrix Interface Connect Processor Switch
. ..
Matrix
Matrix
.
Int DS1 Port 8
Figure 6-30. Local Loopback on Selected Internal DS1 Port Timeslots, Signal Paths
Megaplex-4100
MPW-1 Module
CL MPW-1
Int DS1 Port 1
TS n
.. .. Pseudowire
TDM Cross-
Other Routing Bus .. ..
Connect
Cross- Packet Ethernet To PSN
Ports Matrix Interface Connect Processor Switch
. ..
Matrix
Matrix
.
Int DS1 Port 8
Figure 6-31. Remote Loopback on Selected Internal DS1 Port Timeslots, Signal Paths
The remote loopback on timeslots of an MPW-1/VS DS1 port is used to return the
receive payload carried by selected timeslots of the tested port through the same
timeslots of the transmit path. The corresponding timeslots received from the
local equipment are disconnected.
This test is recommended for testing signal paths from a remote equipment unit,
through a selected pseudowire served by the corresponding MPW-1 port.
The loopback is activated within the CL module routing matrix, and only on the
timeslots specified by the user during the activation of the loopback. As a result,
there is no disturbance to services provided by means of the other timeslots
(pseudowires) of the same port: only the flow of payload carried by the specified
timeslots is disrupted.
The other features related to loopback activation/deactivation described above
for the local loopback on timeslots are also applicable to the remote loopback.
Loopback Duration
The activation of a loopback disconnects the local and remote equipment served
by the MPW-1/VS modules. Therefore, when you initiate a loopback, you have the
option to limit its duration to a selectable interval in the range of 1 through 30
minutes.
After the selected interval expires, the loopback is automatically deactivated,
without operator intervention. However, you can always deactivate a loopback
activated on the local Megaplex-4 before this timeout expires. When using inband
management, always use the timeout option; otherwise, the management
communication path may be permanently disconnected.
The default is infinite duration (without timeout).
Activating Loopbacks
Activating and configuring loopback {local | remote} time-slot local – local loopback
the direction of the <1..31>] [duration <duration in remote – remote loopback
loopback and the duration minutes 1..30> ]
of it (in minutes)
GFP Ports
Applicable Modules
GFP ports represent VCGs (Virtual Concatenation Groups) with GFP encapsulation
and can be configured for the following ports:
• SDH/SONET (CL.2 modules)
• E1/T1 (VS-16E1T1-EoP modules)
• T3 (T3 modules).
They can be mapped either directly to the physical layer or to VCG. In the latter
case, the binding is done in two stages and the VCG is further bound to the
physical layer.
Standards
GFP Ports comply with ITU-T Rec. G.7041, using the framed mode.
Factory Defaults
Megaplex-4 is supplied with all GFP ports disabled.
Assigning short description to name <string> Using no name removes the name
port
Binding the corresponding bind vc4-sts3c For the allowed ranges, seeTable 6-66.
VC/VT/STS-1/VCG to the GFP port <slot>/<port>/<tributary> The connection to a VC or VT/STS
(CL modules) bind vc3-sts1 depends on the frame selection
<slot>/<port>/<au4>/ (frame=sdh or frame=sonet)
<tributary>
You cannot bind both a VCG and a
bind vc-vt <slot>/<port>/
VC/VT/STS-1 to a GFP port
<au4>/<tug_3>/<tug_2>
[/<tributary>] Using no before the corresponding
command removes the binding
bind vcg <slot>/<port>
Binding the corresponding bind t3 <slot>/<1> The allowed ranges of VCG ports is 1 to
T3/VCG to the GFP port (T3 bind vcg <slot>/<port> 16 paer slot.
modules) Using no before the corresponding
command removes the binding
Binding the corresponding VCG bind vcg <slot>/<port> The allowed ranges of VCG ports is 1 to
to the GFP port (VS-16E1T1-EoP 16 per slot.
modules) Using no before the corresponding
command removes the binding
Assigning user-defined VC profile vc profile <profile name> For creating VC profiles, see VC Profiles.
to the port Using no vc removes the profile
Before you assign the user-defined
profile, you must use the no vc command
to remove the automatical lvc-eos or
hvc-gfp profile assignement
Displaying statistics show statistics {all | current} • current –Displays the current
statistics
• all –Displays all statistics: first
current interval statistics, then
statistics for all valid intervals
GFP statistics are displayed. The counters are described in Table 6-62.
For example:
Current Statistics:
mp4100>config>port>gfp(cl-b/6)# show statistics current
Current
---------------------------------------------------------------
Time Elapsed (Sec) : 299
Valid Intervals : 96
Total RX Frames : 475682
Total RX Frames : 475681
Idle Frames Error : 237726
cHEC Errors : 0
tHEC Errros : 0
eHEC Errors : 0
FCS Errors : 0
PTI Mismatch : 0
EXI Mismatch : 0
Statistics for interval 67:
mp4100>config>port>gfp(cl-a/1)# show statistics interval 67
Interval
---------------------------------------------------------------
Interval Number : 67
Total RX Frames : 1192393
Total RX Frames : 1192403
Idle Frames Error : 0
cHEC Errors : 0
tHEC Errros : 0
eHEC Errors : 0
FCS Errors : 0
PTI Mismatch : 0
EXI Mismatch : 0
Parameter Description
Time elapsed (Current The elapsed time (in seconds) since the beginning of the current interval, in
statistics only) seconds. The range is 1 to 900 seconds
Valid Intervals (Current The number of elapsed finished 15-min intervals for which statistics data can
statistics only) be displayed, in addition to the current (not finished) interval (up to 96)
Parameter Description
FCS Errors The number of frames received on this interface that are an integral number
of octets in length but do not pass the FCS check
Clearing Statistics
There are two options for clearing GFP statistics data:
• Clearing current interval statistics
• Clearing all statistics.
Applicable Modules
HDLC ports defined on CL.2 modules represent VCGs (Virtual Concatenation
Groups) with LAPS encapsulation. They can be mapped either directly to the
physical layer or to a VCG. In the latter case, the binding is done in two stages
and the VCG is further bound to the physical layer. The maximum total number of
GFP and HDLC ports that can be configured per slot is 32.
For HDLC ports defined on M8E1, M8T1 and M8SL modules, see HDLC Ports (I/O
Modules).
Standards
HDLC ports in CL.2 modules comply with ITU-T Rec. X.86.
Factory Defaults
Megaplex-4 is supplied with all HDLC ports disabled.
Assigning short name <string> Using no before name removes the name
description to the port
Binding the bind vc4-sts3c <slot>/<port>/<tributary> For the allowed ranges, seeTable 6-66.
corresponding bind vc3-sts1 <slot>/<port>/<au4>/ The connection to a VC or VT/STS depends
VC/VT/STS-1/VCG to the <tributary> on the frame selection (frame=sdh or
HDLC port bind vc-vt <slot>/<port>/ frame=sonet)
<au4>/<tug_3>/<tug_2>/
You cannot bind both a VCG and a
[<tributary>]
VC/VT/STS-1 to a GFP port
bind vcg <slot>/<port>
Using no before the corresponding
command removes the binding
Assigning user-defined VC vc profile <profile name> For creating VC profiles, see VC Profiles.
profile to the port Using no vc removes the profile
Before you assign the user-defined profile,
you must use the no vc command to
remove the automatical hvc-laps or lvc-eos
profile assignement
Displaying statistics show statistics {all | current} • current –Displays the current
statistics
• all –Displays all statistics: first
current interval statistics, then
statistics for all valid intervals
HDLC statistics are displayed. The counters are described in Table 6-63.
For example:
Current Statistics:
mp4100>config>port>hdlc(cl-b/6)# show statistics current
Current
---------------------------------------------------------------
Time Elapsed (Sec) : 430
Valid Intervals : 96
Total RX Frames : 569704
Total TX Frames : 569703
Address Mismatch : 0
Control Mismatch : 0
LAPS Sapi Mismatch : 0
FCS Errors : 0
Abort Frames : 0
Minimum Length Violation : 0
Maximum Length Violation : 0
Statistics for interval 67:
Interval
---------------------------------------------------------------
Interval Number : 67
Total RX Frames : 1192393
Total RX Frames : 1192403
Address Mismatch : 0
Control Mismatch : 0
LAPS Sapi Mismatch : 0
FCS Errors : 0
Abort Frames : 0
Minimum Length Violation : 0
Maximum Length Violation : 0
Parameter Description
Time elapsed (Current The elapsed time (in seconds) since the beginning of the current interval, in
statistics only) seconds. The range is 1 to 900 seconds
Valid Intervals (Current The number of elapsed finished 15-min intervals for which statistics data can
statistics only) be displayed, in addition to the current (not finished) interval (up to 96)
Address Mismatch The number of frames with wrong address value (the correct value of
Address byte in LAPS Overhead is 0x4)
Control Mismatch The number of frames with wrong control value (the correct value of Control
byte in LAPS Overhead is 0x3)
LAPS Sapi Mismatch The number of frames with wrong SAPI value (the correct value of SAPI byte
in LAPS Overhead is 0xF0E1)
FCS Errors The number of frames received on this interface that are an integral number
of octets in length but do not pass the FCS check
Abort Frames The number of abort frames received (a packet can be aborted by inserting
the abort sequence, 0x7d7e. Reception of this code at the far end will cause
the receiver to discard this frame)
Clearing Statistics
There are two options for clearing HDLC statistics data:
• Clearing current interval statistics
• Clearing all statistics, except for the current interval.
To clear all statistics data except for from the current interval:
1. Navigate to the corresponding entity as described above.
2. Enter clear-statistics current-all.
The statistics for the specified entity are cleared.
Applicable Modules
This section describes HDLC ports defined on M8E1, M8T1 and M8SL modules.
These ports can be bound to the physical layer representing E1/T1 ports or
specific timeslots. For HDLC ports defined on CL.2 modules, see HDLC Ports (CL.2
Modules).
Standards
HDLC ports in E1/T1 I/O modules comply with IETF RFC 1990.
Factory Defaults
Megaplex-4 is supplied with all HDLC ports disabled.
Note
It is possible to open only 8 E1/E1-i/T1 links per M8E1/M8SL/M8T1 module and
assign up to 4 HDLC ports to each of them so that the total capacity is 32 HDLC
ports per module. Moreover, every E1/E1-i/T1 used reduces the number of
external E1/T1 links that can be connected to E1/T1 equipment.
Configuration Errors
Table 6-64 lists messages generated by Megaplex-4 when a configuration error
on HDLC/PPP/MLPP ports is detected.
420 Error MLPPP PORT CAN'T BE BOUND E1 port bound to MLPPP port cannot be a member of
TO TDM GROUP protection group
422 Error MLPPP PORT SHOULD BE MLPPP port cannot be bound to a framed port
BOUND TO UNFRAMED E1
423 Error HDLC/PPP PORT OR Whenever the HDLC/PPP port is connected, the associated
ASSOCIATED E1/T1 PORT ports should be at ‘no shutdown’, and vice-versa.
DOWN
424 Error HDLC/PPP ILLEGAL SLOT The I/O slot specified for an HDLC port and the slot of its
ASSOCIATION associated E1/E1-i/T1/T1-i port cannot be another I/O
slot. It must be either the same I/O slot or CL-A/CL-B.
The I/O slot specified for a PPP port and the slot of its
associated E1 port must be the same I/O slot.
426 Error MORE THAN ONE MLPPP PORT Only one MLPPP port can be active on any given I/O
PER SLOT module
427 Error ONLY ONE E1/T1 PORT CAN BE Only one E1/T1 port can be bound to a single HDLC port
BOUND TO HDLC PORT
429 Error EVEN TS NUM MUST BE HDLC rate must be a multiple of 128 kbps (even number
DEFINED PER HDLC PORT of timeslots).
430 Error LINKS ASSIGNED FOR MLPPP The maximum number of E1 ports that can be bound to
PORT EXCEEDED MLPPP port is 8.
431 Error ILLEGAL NUMBER OF Illegal number of timeslots has been selected
TIMESLOTS
432 Error ILLEGAL HDLC SLOT All 4 HDLC ports bound to a specific E1-i/T1-i port must be
ASSIGNMENT assigned (for processing) to the same I/O module.
433 Error MAX 4 HDLC PORTS MAY BE The maximum number of HDLC ports defined per
DEFINED PER LINK E1/E1-i/T1/T1-i port is 4
434 Error PORT LINE TYPE MISMATCH TDM cross conect can be done only for unframed E1/T1
ports
437 Error SAME E1 BOUND TO E1 port can’t be bound to more than one PPP port
DIFFERENT PPP PORTS
Applicable Modules
These ports are available in D-NFV modules.
Standards
IEEE 802.3, RFC 4836, RFC 3635.
Factory Defaults
By default, the D-NFV Ethernet ports have the following configuration.
mp4100>config>port>int-eth(2/1)# info detail
name "IO-2 ethernet 01"
tag-ethernet-type 0x8100
min-tagged-frame-length 68
egress-mtu 1790
queue-group profile "MaxDefaultQueueGroup"
no policer
For description of default queue group profiles, see Queue Group Profiles section
in Chapter 8.
2. Enter all necessary commands according to the tasks listed in the table
below.
Note There is no need in opening the internal Ethernet port, since it always up.
Assigning short description to the name <string> Using no name removes the name
port
Assigning queue group profile to queue-group profile <queue- Megaplex-4 with CL.2/A modules only
Ethernet port group-profile-name> The queue group profile is defined under
Quality of Service (QoS) in Chapter 8.
no queue-group removes queue group
association
The default queue group profile for Fast
Ethernet ports is defined with 10 Mbps
shaper. Define a new queue group profile if
you need more bandwidth.
The queue group profile cannot be edited.
Thus to use bridge connectivity you need to
remove the existing queue group profile from
this Ethernet port, configure a new queue
group profile and assign it to this port.
Activating/deactivating a policer policer-profile <name> The policer profile is defined under Quality of
profile Service (QoS) in Chapter 8.
Using no policer <name> deactivates this
policer profile
Specifying the Ethertype expected tag-ethernet-type Megaplex-4 with CL.2/A modules only
in Ethernet packet <0x0000-0xFFFF>
Administrative Status : Up
Operational Status : Up
Auto Negotiation : Complete
Speed And Duplex : 1000 Full Duplex
FCS Errors --
Jabber Errors 0 --
Undersize Frames 0 --
Oversize Frames 0
Discard Frames -- 1519-Max Octets 0
Paused Frames
Filtered Frames 65111933 --
64 Octets 142072
Paused Frames Total number of pause frames (used for flow control)
received/transmitted through the corresponding Ethernet port
FCS Errors The number of frames received on this interface that are an
integral number of octets in length but do not pass the FCS
check
Undersize Frames Total number of undersized frames received/transmitted I/O Ethernet ports only
Discard Frames Total number of discarded frames received/transmitted Not relevant for D-NFV
Clearing Statistics
Applicable Modules
To describe and map the Ethernet traffic passing over different media (E1/T1, T3,
SDH/SONET, etc), the Megaplex-4 architecture uses a concept of Logical MAC
ports. Logical MAC represents the MAC layer of the entity. It should be bound to a
gfp, hdlc or mlppp port, which, in its turn, should be bound to the physical layer.
Table 6-66 lists the possible entities that can be bound to the Logical MAC, with
their corresponding media, protocols and possible values.
Factory Defaults
By default, the Logical MAC ports have the following configuration.
For CL module:
mp4100>config>port>log-mac(cl-a/5)$ info detail
name "CL-A Logical mac 05"
shutdown
egress-mtu 1790
queue-group profile "LMDefaultQueueGroup"
tag-ethernet-type 0x8100
For T3 module:
mp4100>config>port>log-mac(cl-a/5)$ info detail
name "IO-3 Logical mac 05"
shutdown
For VS-16E1T1-EoP module:
Assigning short description to name <string>* Using no name removes the name
Logical MAC
Administratively enabling Logical no shutdown* Using shutdown disables the Logical MAC
MAC
Binding HDLC port to Logical MAC bind hdlc <slot>/<port> Ethernet over E1/T1: port=HDLC bundle
Ethernet over SDH/SONET: port=VCG using
LAPS encapsulation protocol
Binding GFP port to Logical MAC bind gfp <slot>/<port>* GFP port=VCG using GFP encapsulation
protocol
Enabling OAM (EFM) on the efm See Ethernet OAM (EFM) in Chapter 8.
Logical MAC port no efm disables OAM (EFM)
Assigning queue group profile to queue-group <queue- no queue-group removes queue group
Ethernet port group-profile-name> association
Note
The only parameters used for configuration of logical-mac ports of T3 modules
are marked with an asterisk (*).
Parameter Description
2048-Max Octets Total number of received/transmitted packets with 2048 bytes and up to
maximum
Clearing Statistics
MLPPP Ports
Applicable Modules
MLPPP ports exist only on M8E1 and M8SL modules and are mapped to a PPP
port. The binding is done in two stages and the PPP port should be further bound
to the physical layer (see Figure 1-8 in Chapter 1).
M8E1 and M8SL modules have one MLPPP port per module.
The MLPPP bundle can use any number of the links supported by the module, that
is, from 1 to 8. All the links (ports) used by the MLPPP bundle must have identical
physical layer parameters and their line-type parameter must be configured as
unframed. Therefore, each bonded link adds 2048 kbps to the available
bandwidth.
Management traffic is carried inband, as part of the Ethernet traffic, using the
dedicated management VLAN configured for the Megaplex-4 host.
Note that ports bound to MLPPP ports cannot be part of a protection group.
However, some redundancy is inherent in the MLPPP protocol, because if one of
the bonded links is out-of-service, the result is only a reduction in the available
transmission bandwidth.
Standards
The MLPPP ports conform to the IETF RFC 1990 standard.
Factory Defaults
Megaplex-4 is supplied with all MLPPP ports disabled. The MTU default value is
250.
Assigning short description to the name <string> Using no name removes the name
port
Administratively enabling the port no shutdown Using shutdown disables the bundle
Example
The following section illustrates how to map E1 traffic to Ethernet on the M8E1
module installed in slot 5, via configuring PPP and MLPPP ports.
Configuration Errors
See Table 6-64.
PCS Ports
Applicable Modules
PCS (Physical Coding Sublayer) ports available on the ASMi-54C and SH-16
modules determine the Ethernet (packet) physical layer transmission capabilities
over SHDSL lines. The number of PCS ports on each module is 8 for ASMi-54C
modules and 16 for SH-16 modules.
The following can be configured for the PCS ports:
Standards
PCS ports comply with IEEE 802.3-2005.
Functional Description
In Megaplex-4, PCS ports are used to transport Ethernet traffic over SHDSL.
The internal SHDSL processing subsystem of ASMi-54C and SH-16 modules
enables configuring the desired Physical Coding Sublayer parameters for each
SHDSL line (actually – for each SHDSL port).
PCS ports are processed in groups of four:
• ASMi-54C modules include two groups of PCS ports: 1 to 4, and 5 to 8.
• SH-16 modules include four groups of PCS ports: 1 to 4, 5 to 8, 9 to 12 and
13 to 16.
PCS ports are independently configurable.
In ASMi-54C/ETH and SH-16 modules, the available bandwidth is the payload rate
of the associated line. In ASMi-54C/N, the available PCS bandwidth is the payload
rate of the associated line, less any bandwidth assigned to the associated E1
port of the same line.
Even when all SHDSL lines of the ASMi-54C/SH-16 modules operate in 2-wire
mode, the PCS transport bandwidth can be increased using PAF (PME Aggregation
Function), also defined in IEEE 802.3-2005. PAF creates PCS groups. The PCS
groups that can be configured on the ASMi-54C/N, ASMi-54C/ETH and SH-16
modules are listed in Table 6-68, Table 6-69 and Table 6-70, respectively.
The main functions performed for each PCS port include:
• Ethernet payload data rate matching: the average payload rate accepted by
each PCS port is matched to the physical rate supported by the
corresponding PME.
• As for M-pair bonding, one of the PCS ports (the PCS with the lowest index in
the group) is automatically selected as the master PCS port, from which all
the other PCS ports copy their parameters.
Each active PCS port can serve as a bridge port that can terminate Ethernet flows
configured within the Megaplex-4.
Table 6-68. Supported PCS Groups versus Lines Parameter, ASMi-54C/N module
Maximum Number of Number of SHDSL Ports SHDSL Ports in PCS Master PCS in the
PCS Groups in PCS Group Group Group
1, 2 1
4 2 (4 wires)
3, 4 3
Maximum Number of Number of SHDSL Ports SHDSL Ports in PCS Master PCS in the
PCS Groups in PCS Group Group Group
5, 6 5
2 (4 wires)
7, 8 7
8 1 (2 wires) 1 to 8 N/A
Table 6-69. Supported PCS Groups versus Lines Parameter for ASMi-54C/ETH
Maximum Number Number of SHDSL Ports SHDSL Lines in PCS Master PCS in the
of PCS Groups (Lines) in PCS Group Group Group
4 1, 2, 3, 4 1
2
4 5, 6, 7, 8 5
1, 2 1
2
3, 4 3
4
5, 6 5
2
7, 8 7
Table 6-70. Supported PCS Groups versus Lines Parameter for SH-16
Maximum Number Number of SHDSL Ports SHDSL Lines in PCS Master PCS in the
of PCS Groups (Lines) in PCS Group Group Group
1, 2, 3, 4 1
5, 6, 7, 8 5
4 4(8 wires)
9,10, 11,12 9
13,14, 15,16 13
1, 2 1
3, 4 3
5, 6 5
7, 8 7
8 2(4 wires)
9,10 9
11,12 11
13,14 13
15,16 15
Factory Defaults
By default, the PCS ports have the following configuration.
mp4100>config>port>pcs(3/3)# info detail
Assigning short description to a name <string> Using no name removes the name
PCS port
Enabling OAM (EFM) on the PCS efm See Ethernet OAM (EFM) in Chapter 8.
port (Carrier Ethernet class CL ASMi-54C/ETH modules (without E1 links)
only) and SH-16 modules
no efm disables OAM (EFM) on the PCS
port
Configuring collection of pm-collection interval <seconds> Note: You can enable PM statistics
performance management collection for all Ethernet ports rather
statistics for the port that are than enabling it for individual ports. Not
presented via the RADview here – ask Maxim/Alex In addition to
Performance Management enabling PM statistics collection for the
portal ports, it must be enabled for the device.
Refer to the Performance Management
section in the Monitoring and Diagnostics
chapter for details.
Assigning queue group profile queue-group profile <queue- no queue-group removes queue group
to the PCS port (Carrier group-profile-name> association
Ethernet class CL only)
The ASMi-54C/ETH module does not support loopbacks on its PCS ports.
Setting loopback duration loopback remote-on-remote duration Using no loopback disables the loopback
and activating the loopback <duration in minutes 1..30> ]
on the PCS port
512-1023 Octets : 0
1024-1528 Octets : 0
Parameter Description
FCS Errors Total number of frames received on this PCS that are an integral number of
octets in length but do not pass the FCS check
Paused Frames Total number of pause frames (used for flow control) received/transmitted
through the corresponding PCS
Clearing Statistics
PPP Ports
Applicable Modules
PPP is the intermediate layer between the MLPPP and the physical (E1) layer.
Dividing the Ethernet traffic between several PPP ports grouped by a single
MLPPP entity provides increased bandwidth over several physical connections.
PPP ports exist only on M8E1 and M8SL modules.
Standards
The PPP ports conform to the IETF RFC 1990 standard.
Factory Defaults
Megaplex-4 is supplied with all PPP ports disabled.
Assigning short description to port name <string> Using no name removes the name
Example
The following section illustrates how to map E1 traffic to Ethernet on the M8E1
module installed in slot 5, via configuring PPP and MLPPP ports.
Note The PPP ports are administratively enabled by default so there is no need for the
no shutdown command.
Configuration Errors
See Table 6-64.
Applicable Modules
The serial bundle ports are available only on LS-6N, LS-12 modules. The following
parameters can be configured for the serial bundle ports:
• Port name
• Administrative status
• Setting the port data rate.
Functional Description
See the LS-6N, LS-12 Modules section in Megaplex-4 I/O Modules Installation and
Operation Manual.
Factory Defaults
Megaplex-4 is supplied with all serial bundle ports disabled. Other parameter
defaults are listed in the table below.
rate 64kbps
Assigning short description name <string> Using no name removes the name
to port
Example
The following section illustrates how to configure the serial bundle (internal) port
1 on the LS-12 module installed in slot 6:
• Data rate 32 kbps.
• Administratively enable the port.
• Bind external serial ports 1 and 2 to be carried over this serial bundle port
• Leave all other parameters disabled or at their defaults.
Configuration Errors
The table below lists messages generated by Megaplex-4 when a configuration
error on modules with serial-bundle ports (LS-6N/LS-12) is detected.
210 Error BANDWIDTH OVERFLOW The bandwidth allocated to the internal port of the
LS-6N/LS-12 module must be greater than, or equal to the
sum of the following:
• The bandwidths allocated to the external ports
• Management channel, if the remote unit is a KM
working in slave mode
• Frame synchronization
• Channel end-to-end control signals (one per pair)
211 Error SERIAL PORTS NOT IN SAME The two adjacent serial ports (1/2, … 11/12) of an LS-12
RATE GROUP module must operate in the same rate group.
212 Error SERIAL PORTS NOT BOUND TO The two adjacent serial ports (1/2, … 11/12) of an LS-12
SAME SERIAL BUNDLE PORT module must be bound to same serial bundle port.
213 Error SERIAL PORT/SERIAL-BUNDLE The external port rate is not compatible with the data rate
PORT RATE MISMATCH allocated on the link to the corresponding internal port
214 Error NO EXTERNAL CHANNEL IS The internal port is connected to the link, but no external
CONNECTED port is connected to the internal port
The composite transmit signal is still connected to the transmit path and reaches
the LS-6N/12 module installed in the remote Megaplex unit, therefore the remote
equipment does not lose synchronization.
While the loop is connected, all the local users connected to the module must
receive their own signals, and the S.LOSS indicators of the local module must be
off. This loopback provides a quick operational check of the local module. The
loopback signal path is shown in Figure 6-32.
Channel 1
.
Channel 2 .
. .
. .
User or . . .
Channel 12 .
Test
Equipment
User or
LS-12 LS-12 Test
Equipment
I/O MODULES
I/O MODULES
System
Management
Channel 1
.
Channel 2 .
. .
. .
User or . . .
Channel 12 .
Test
Equipment
User or
LS-12 LS-12 Test
Equipment
I/O MODULES
I/O MODULES
Local Unit Remote Unit
System
Management
Loopback Duration
The activation of a loopback disconnects the local and remote equipment served
by the Megaplex-4. Therefore, when you initiate a loopback, you have the option
to limit its duration to a selectable interval in the range of 1 through 30 minutes.
After the selected interval expires, the loopback is automatically deactivated,
without operator intervention. However, you can always deactivate a loopback
activated on the local Megaplex-4 before this timeout expires. When using inband
management, always use the timeout option; otherwise, the management
communication path may be permanently disconnected.
The default is infinite duration (without timeout).
Activating and loopback {local | remote} • local. Returns the transmitted data
configuring the at the physical layer to the receiving
direction of the path. The local physical loopback
loopback includes a configurable timeout
mechanism that ends the loopback
operation after a user-defined
duration.
• remote. Returns the received data
at the physical layer to the
transmitting path.
Applicable Modules
To implement specific bidirectional broadcast applications over serial ports of VS
modules, Megaplex-4 architecture uses an entity named TDM bridge port. TDM
bridge ports exist only on VS modules and are mapped to serial ports. The
maximum number of TDM bridge ports is 6 per VS-6/BIN module and 4 per VS-12
module.
Standards
TDM bridge ports are RAD proprietary technology.
Factory Defaults
Megaplex-4 is supplied with all TDM bridge ports disabled.
Assigning short description to name <string> Using no name removes the name
port
Binding the serial port to the bind serial <slot>/<port> Serial slot number must be the same as
tdm-bridge port tdm-bridge slot number.
Using no before the corresponding
command removes the binding
Example
See DS0 Cross-Connect section in Chapter 8, Example 9.
Applicable Modules
Teleprotection ports are available on TP modules. Four cmd-in-i and four cmd-
out-i ports for each of cmd channels 1 and 3 house the logic to manipulate the
logical Rx/Tx information over the corresponding cmd channel. This logic is
capable to perform either basic transparent command cross-connect or logical
Functional Description
See the Teleprotection Modules section in Megaplex-4 I/O Modules Installation
and Operation Manual, Alarm Relay Modules Chapter.
Factory Defaults
The Megaplex-4 is supplied with all teleprotection ports disabled. Cmd in-i ports
have no factory defaults. Cmd-out-i parameter defaults are listed in the table
below.
oos-code The value that will be inserted to the related cmd-out last-valid-state
output when the cmd-channel is in the out-of-service
state
Assigning short description name <string> Using no name removes the name
to port
Creating a set of ports that trigger-bind < number> cmd-out-i See Command Cross-Connect in
will be trigger sources for <slot/port/tributary> [none | or | Megaplex-4 I/O Modules Installation and
the current port and] Operation Manual, Alarm Relay Modules
trigger-bind < number> cmd-in Chapter, Teleprotection section.
<slot/port> [none | or | and] Using no trigger-bind < number>
removes the set.
“none” is default operator and can be
omitted when only one trigger source is
defined.
When more than one trigger sources are
defined, the operator must be either
“or” or “and” for all trigger sources.
Assigning short description name <string> Using no name removes the name
to port
Selecting the value that will oos-code {on | off | off – Cmd-out is forced to off
be inserted to the related last-valid-state} on – Cmd-out is forced to on
cmd-out output when the
last-valid-state – Cmd-out takes the last valid
cmd-channel is in the out-
state value (on or off)
of-service state
Activating remote loopback loopback remote [duration See Testing Teleprotection Ports below
<minutes>]
CMD-OUT-I #4
CMD-OUT-I #3
CMD-OUT-I #2
CMD-OUT-I#1
CMD In #4
CMD In #3
CMD In #2
CMD In #1
CMD Out #1
CMD Out #2
CMD Out #3
or
or
or
or
CMD Out #4
Re
mo
CMD Out #5
te
loo
CMD Out #6
pb
ac
CMD Out #7
k
CMD-IN-I #2
CMD slot:port CMD-IN-I #3
CMD-IN-I #4
CMD slot:port:tributary
CMD-IN-I #1
CMD-CH 3/4
Loopback Duration
The activation of a loopback disconnects the remote equipment served by the
Megaplex-4. Therefore, when you initiate a loopback, you have the option to limit
its duration to an interval in the range of 1 through 30 minutes.
After the selected interval expires, the loopback is automatically deactivated,
without operator intervention. However, you can always deactivate a loopback
activated on the local Megaplex-4 before this timeout expires.
The default is infinite duration (without timeout).
Activating and configuring the loopback remote [duration Returns the received data at the
direction of the loopback <minutes>] physical layer to the transmitting path.
Using no loopback stops the loopback.
Duration –1 to 30 minutes or infinite
VCG Ports
Applicable Modules
Virtually concatenated groups (VCGs) can be configured on the following ports:
• SDH/SONET (CL.2 modules)
• E1/T1 (VS-16E1T1-EoP modules)
• T3 (T3 modules).
To prepare Ethernet traffic for efficient transport over the SDH/SONET network,
the traffic is encapsulated using LAPS or GFP encapsulation, before being
transmitted over a virtually concatenated group. Ethernet transport over T3 and
Ethernet transport over E1/T1 is done using GFP encapsulation. Megaplex-4 also
supports the Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme (LCAS), covered by ITU-T Rec.
G.7042.
In Megaplex-4, VCGs are protected by the Ethernet group redundancy. For
description and instructions, refer to Ethernet Group Protection in Chapter 7.
Standards
Two types of supported encapsulation comply with the following standards:
• LAPS (Link Access Protocol – SDH) encapsulation in accordance with ITU-T
Rec. X.86
Benefits
Virtual concatenation has the following main advantages:
• Scalability: allows bandwidth to be selected in relatively small increments, as
required to match the desired payload data rate.
• Efficiency: the resulting signals are easily routed through a SDH/SONET
network, without wasting bandwidth, and therefore allows for more efficient
utilization of the bandwidth available on existing networks.
• Compatibility: virtual concatenation requires only the end nodes to be aware
of the containers being virtually concatenated, and therefore is transparent
to the core network elements.
• Resiliency: individual members of a virtually concatenated group can be freely
routed across the network.
Functional Description
4. At the receiving end, the phase of the incoming VCs/SPEs is aligned and then
the original payload data stream is rebuilt. This requires using a memory of
appropriate size for buffering all the arriving members of the group at the
receiving end. The memory size depends on the maximum expected delay,
therefore to minimize latency the maximum delay to be compensated can be
defined by management.
Encapsulation Modes
Ethernet frames must be encapsulated before transport over the SDH/SONET
network. You can select the desired encapsulation mode, independently, for each
virtually concatenated group. This can be done by binding VCG ports to the
corresponding entity:
• For LAPS encapsulation, see Configuring HDLC Ports.
• For GFP encapsulation, see Configuring GFP Ports.
Flow
Egress/Ingress Port
GFP 1 GFP 16
OR
Bind 1:1
VCG 1..16
Bind 1:1
Bind 1:n
T1 T3
Figure 6-35. Logical Entities Representing Ethernet Traffic over Full/Channelized T3 Media
Flow
Egress/Ingress Port
GFP 1 GFP 16
VCG 1 VCG 16
OR
E1/T1 E1-i/T1-i
Figure 6-36. Logical Entities Representing Ethernet Traffic over E1/T1 Media
Factory Defaults
Megaplex-4 is supplied with all VCG ports disabled.
To configure a VCG:
• At the config>port>vcg (slot/port)# prompt, enter all necessary commands
according to the tasks listed below:
Assigning short description to a name <string> Using no name removes the name
VCG port
Administratively enabling a VCG no shutdown Using shutdown disables the VCG port
port
Binding the corresponding bind vc4-sts3c For the allowed ranges, seeTable 6-66.
VC/VT/STS-1 to the VCG port <slot>/<port>/<tributary> The connection to a VC or VT/STS
bind vc3-sts1 depends on the frame selection
<slot>/<port>/<au4>/ (frame=sdh or frame=sonet)
<tributary>
Using no before the corresponding
bind vc-vt <slot>/<port>/
command removes the binding
<au4>/<tug_3>/<tug_2>
[/<tributary>] The maximum number of VC-4/STS-3C
containers per system is limited to the
full STM-4/OC-3 capacity of a single CL.2
module.
The maximum number of vc-vt containers
for EoS per CL module is limited to 128.
Binding the T1 internal port of bind t1 The maximum number of T1 ports bound
the T3 module to the VCG port <slot>/1/<tributary t1> to one VCG port is 16.
Binding the E1/T1 external and bind t1 <slot>/<port> The maximum number of E1/T1 or
internal ports of the VS-16E1T1- bind t1-i <slot>/<port> E1-i/T1-i ports bound to one VCG port is
EoP module to the VCG port 16.
bind e1 <slot>/<port>
Ports bound to VCG must be defined on
bind e1-i <slot>/<port>
same slot as this VCG port.
The ports bound to a specific VCG must
belong to the same type (no mix is
allowed between e1 and e1-i ports or t1
and t1-I ports).
Enabling the use of the Link lcas LCAS is relevant only when the group
Capacity Adjustment Scheme includes 2 or more VCs/T1s. Therefore for
(LCAS) on the corresponding VC-4 (STS-3c) binding it is relevant only
group when STM-4/OC-12 ports are configured
Using no lcas disables the use of LCAS
Selecting the minimum allowed minimum-number-of-links This parameter is relevant only when
number of operational <value> LCAS is enabled.
VC/VT/STS/T1s that must remain
in operation. If the number
decreases below the selected
value, an alarm is generated.
Members
---------------------------------------------------------------
Link : cl-a/2/1/1/1/2
Source Status : Norm
Sink Status : Norm
Status : OK
Link : cl-a/2/1/1/1/3
Source Status : Norm
Sink Status : Norm
Status : OK
Link : cl-a/2/1/2/2/3
Source Status : Norm
Sink Status : Norm
Status : OK
Link : cl-a/2/1/3/5/1
Source Status : Norm
Sink Status : Norm
Status : OK
Link : cl-a/1/2/1/2/1
Source Status : Norm
Sink Status : Norm
Status : OK
Link : cl-a/1/2/2/3/1
Source Status : Norm
Sink Status : Norm
Status : OK
Link : cl-a/1/2/2/5/1
Source Status : EOS
Sink Status : EOS
Status : OK
Example for T3:
mp4100>config>port>vcg(3/1)# show status
Name : IO-3 vcg 01
Administrative Status : Up
Operation Status : Up
LCAS Status : All Normal
Members
-----------------------------------------------------------------
Link : 3/1/3
Source Status : Norm
Sink Status : Norm
Status : OK
Link : 3/1/4
Source Status : Norm
Sink Status : Norm
Status : OK
Link : 3/1/5
Source Status : Norm
Sink Status : Norm
Status : OK
Link : 3/1/6
Source Status : EOS
Sink Status : EOS
Status : OK
The parameters displayed in the screen are as follows:
Operation Status Displays the operation status of the corresponding VC/VT or T1 link: Up or
Down
LCAS Status Displays the LCAS status of the corresponding VC/VT or T1 link:
• All Normal –all T1/VC/VT ports bound to the selected VCG are active
• Within Range –number of active T1/VC/VT ports bound to the selected
VCG is not below the value set by the “minimum-number-of-links”
parameter
• Below Min No of VC –number of active T1/VC/VT ports bound to
the selected VCG and active is below the value set by the “minimum-
number-of-links” parameter
Source Status Displays the state of the corresponding VC/VT (SDH/SONET) or T1 (T3
module) on the local end of the path serving the selected VCG (that is, the
end located on the Megaplex-4 to which the supervisory terminal is
connected):
• Fixed – the end uses the fixed bandwidth (not LCAS)
• Add – the corresponding VC/VT or T1 is about to be added to the VCG
• Norm – normal transmission state
• EOS – end-of-sequence indication
• Idle – the corresponding VC/VT or T1 is not part of the VCG, or is about
to be removed from the group
• DNU – do not use the corresponding VC/VT or T1, for example,
because the sink side reported a failure.
The state is correct at the time the command to display this screen has
been received by the Megaplex-4.
Sink Status Same as above for the sink side (remote end of the path).
Displaying statistics show statistics {all | current} • current –Displays the current
statistics
• all –Displays all statistics: first
current interval statistics, then
statistics for all valid intervals
LCAS statistics are displayed. The counters are described in the table
below. For example:
Current Statistics (SDH/SONET):
mp4100>config>port>vcg(cl-a/2)# show statistics current
Current
-----------------------------------------------------------------
Time Elapsed (Sec) : 644
Valid Intervals : 3
Number of Active VCs/VTs : 4
Maximum Number of Active VCs/VTs : 4
Minimum Number of Active VCs/VTs : 0
Parameter Description
Time elapsed (Current The elapsed time (in seconds) since the beginning of the current interval, in
statistics only) seconds. The range is 1 to 900 seconds
Valid Intervals (Current The number of elapsed finished 15-min intervals for which statistics data can
statistics only) be displayed, in addition to the current (not finished) interval (up to 96)
Clearing Statistics
There are two options for clearing LCAS statistics data:
• Clearing current interval statistics
• Clearing all statistics, except for the current interval.
To clear all statistics data except for from the current interval:
1. Navigate to the corresponding entity as described above.
2. Enter clear-statistics current-all.
The statistics for the specified entity are cleared.
tdm-ring √ √ √ – √ √
dual-cable-tx √ √ √(1) √
tdm-ring – √(2) √ –
Functional Description
Fault propagation is supported for compatible types of ports, for example:
• Between interconnected external E1/T1, internal E1-i/T1-i or PW ports
• Between the Ethernet, PCS, GFP or MLPPP ports.
For each port type, Table 7-3 lists the following:
• Failure or alarm conditions at this (failed) port used to initiate a response at
another (affected) port
• Response (action) at this port when it is affected (“to” port in CLI).
Port Type Detected Failure or Alarm Condition Action at the Port when it is
Affected
Port Type Detected Failure or Alarm Condition Action at the Port when it is
Affected
Internal Ethernet • “mux-eth-tdm – los” alarm Disconnecting user Ethernet port of the
(MP Optimux • “card – card_mismatch” alarm (module remote standalone device
modules) removed)
GFP • With LCAS: “vcg –minimum members tca” CSF(Client Signal Failure) frame will be
alarm sent instead of idle GFP frames on the
• Without LCAS: “gfp – rx_trail_failure” associated VCGs
alarm
• “gfp – csf” alarm
• “card – card_mismatch” alarm (module
removed)
PCS • “shdsl – lof” alarm N/A (can only affect other ports)
• “shdsl – losw” alarm
• “card – card_mismatch” alarm (module
removed)
Port Type Detected Failure or Alarm Condition Action at the Port when it is
Affected
E1-i (M8SL, SH-16 • “e1t1 – ais” alarm N/A (can only affect other ports)
modules) • “e1t1 – lof” alarm
• “e1t1 – rai” alarm
• “e1t1 – lomf” alarm
• “e1t1 – lomf_fe” alarm
• “e1t1 – los” alarm
• “card – card_mismatch” alarm (module
removed)
Port Type Detected Failure or Alarm Condition Action at the Port when it is
Affected
Factory Defaults
By default, fault propagation is not configured.
Configuring fault fault-propagation port {e1 | t1 | e1-i | Optional <tributary> index refers only to
propagation for t1-i | ds1-opt | pw} e1 ports of Megaplex Optimux cards
external/internal e1/ <slot>/<port>/[<tributary>] (OP-34C, OP-108C) and t1 ports of T3
t1 ports and to port {e1 | t1 | e1-i | t1-i | ds1-opt | cards.
pseudowires pw} <slot>/<port>/[<tributary>] In the case of a PW participating in the
fault propagation, <slot>/<port>/
[<tributary>] on the corresponding side
must be replaced by <pw number>.
Using no before fault-propagation disables
the command.
Configuring fault fault-propagation port {ethernet | pcs | Optional <tributary> index refers only to
propagation for gfp | mlppp | pw } ethernet ports of Megaplex Optimux cards
ethernet type ports <slot>/<port>/[<tributary>] (OP-34C, OP-108C)
and pseudowires to port {ethernet | gfp | mlppp | pw } In the case of a PW participating in the
<slot>/<port>/[<tributary>] fault propagation, <slot>/<port>/
[<tributary>] on the corresponding side
must be replaced by <pw number>.
The PCS port can be on the “from” side
only.
Using no before the full command disables
the command.
When configuring fault propagation, the following must be taken into account:
• The maximum number of affected ports defined per one failed port is 10
• In bidirectional fault propagation, one failed port corresponds to one affected
port and vice versa
• The maximum number of fault propagation entries defined in the system is
200
• Neither failed nor affected E1/T1/E1-i/T1-i port can be configured
as unframed
• An E1/T1/E1-i/T1-i port defined as protection in a TDM protection group
cannot be selected by the user as failed or affected.
• If a working port in a TDM protection group is selected as failed or affected,
the protection port is internally added to the fault propagation configuration.
In particular:
If a working port of a TDM group is selected as failed, the port selected
as affected responds only if both working and protection ports fail
If a working port of a TDM group is selected as affected, both working
and protection ports will be affected by the failed port.
Configuration Errors
The table below lists messages generated by Megaplex-4 when a configuration
error is detected.
631 Error FP PORT IS IN SHUTDOWN The port configured for fault propagation is in shutdown
STATE state and the other one is set to no shutdown. Both ports
must be set either to shutdown or to no shutdown.
632 Error FP PORT CAN'T AFFECT ITSELF The same port cannot be failed and affected at the same
time.
633 Error UNFRAMED PORT CAN'T Neither failed nor affected E1/T1/E1-i/T1-i/DS-1 port can
PARTICIPATE IN FP be configured as unframed.
634 Error UP TO 200 FP ENTRIES CAN BE The maximum number of fault propagation entries has
CONFIGURED been exceeded
635 Error FP AFFECTED PORT IS USED A port cannot be defined as affected by more than one
MORE THAN ONCE failed port
636 Error FAILED PORT CAN AFFECT UP The maximum number of affected ports per one failed
TO 10 PORTS port has been exceeded
637 Error ASYMMETRIC BI DIR FP In bidirectional fault propagation, one failed port must
CONFIGURATION correspond to one affected port, and vice versa
638 Error PROTECTED PORT CAN'T BE A port defined as protection in a protection group cannot
CONFIGURED IN FP be selected by user as failed or affected. If a working port
is selected as failed or affected, the protection port is
internally added to the fault propagation configuration.
639 Error FP FAILED PORT IS NOT The failed port configured is not supported by Fault
SUPPORTED Propagation process
640 Error FP AFFECTED PORT IS NOT The affected port configured is not supported by Fault
SUPPORTED Propagation process
Standards
Automatic Protection Switching complies with the following standards:
• 1+1 unidirectional APS (G.842, Clause 7.1.4.4)
• 1+1 bidirectional compatible APS (G.841, Clause 7.1).
• 1+1 bidirectional optimized APS (G.841 Annex B. Linear Multiplex Section
(MSP); compatible with 1:1 bidirectional switching)
Benefits
APS switches over traffic with minimal loss of data, thus avoiding time-consuming
reroutes. With APS, there is no indication beyond the affected network element
that a failure has occurred; other nodes stay intact. SDH/SONET APS performs
switchovers at Layer 1 significantly faster than at Layer 2 or Layer 3. The effect
of a failure is greatly minimized, and a fast switchover guarantees minimal effect
on the network.
Functional Description
Automatic protection switching (APS) is a link-level protection mechanism for
ensuring service continuity in the case of interface failure/error.
In Megaplex-4, the APS can be configured with the following operating modes:
• 1+1 optimized bi-directional mode. You specify two working ports, 1 and 2,
and bind one of the four ports available on CL.2 module (sdh-sonet cl-a/1,
cl-a/2, cl-b/1, cl-b/2) to working port 1 and another one to working port 2
respectively. The protocol used to handle the switching is carried out using
K1 and K2 bytes from the line header of the SONET/SDH frame.
• 1+1 compatible bi-directional mode. You specify a working port and a
protection port. Bind one of the four ports available on CL.2 module (sdh-
sonet cl-a/1, cl-a/2, cl-b/1, cl-b/2) to the working port and another one to
the protection port respectively. The protocol used to handle the switching is
carried out using K1 and K2 bytes from the line header of the SONET/SDH
frame.
• 1+1 unidirectional mode. You specify a working port and a protection port.
Bind one of the four ports available on CL.2 module (sdh-sonet cl-a/1, cl-a/2,
cl-b/1, cl-b/2) to the working port and another one to the protection port
respectively. The protocol used to handle the switching is carried out using
SDH/SONET alarms.
The alarm criteria taken into consideration for protection switching are grouped
into two categories: major alarm and minor alarm.
The major alarms are caused by any of the following:
• An SFP is removed from the socket
• Loss of SDH/SONET line signal is detected
• Loss of SDH/SONET frame is reported
• AIS signal is received on the line
• OOS condition is reported.
The minor alarms are caused by the following:
• EED (excessive error degradation). The EED threshold can be selected by the
user.
• SD (signal degraded) condition, where the threshold can be selected by the
user. However, the user can configure APS parameters to ignore the SD
criterion.
• Forced-flip command.
The working port always carries the traffic, as long as its total alarm weight does
not exceed that of the protection. The user can force switching (flipping) to the
other port by a manual flip command.
The two ports in an APS group can be assigned priorities. Megaplex-4 will generate
alarm messages to notify managers (supervision terminal, Telnet hosts,
management stations, etc.) that protection switching from the high priority port to
the low priority port, or vice versa, occurred.
Factory Defaults
In Revertive mode, the wait-to-restore time is 300 sec.
To define the working ports for the APS group if ‘optimized-1-plus-1’ is selected:
1. At the config>protection>aps <group name># prompt, enter
bind working 1 sdh-sonet <slot><port>.
Working port 1 is bound to the APS group.
2. At the config>protection>aps <group name># prompt, enter
bind working 2 sdh-sonet <slot><port>.
Working port 2 is bound to the APS group.
To bind the working and protecting ports to the APS group if ‘compatible-1-plus-1’
or ‘uni-directional’ is selected:
1. At the config>protection>aps <group name># prompt, enter
bind working sdh-sonet <slot><port>.
The working port is bound to the APS group.
2. At the config>protection>aps <group name># prompt, enter
bind protection sdh-sonet <slot><port>.
The protection port is bound to the APS group.
Adding a working port to the APS bind { working | Available for the compatible 1+1 and
group (compatible 1+1 and protection } sdh-sonet unidirectional modes
unidirectional modes) <slot/port> Using no bind { working | protection }
removes a port from APS group
Adding a working port to the APS bind working {1 | 2} sdh Available for the 1+1 optimized bi-
group (1+1 optimized bidirectional -sonet <slot/port> directional mode.
mode) Using no bind { working | protection }
removes a port from APS group
Enabling the reverting of the revertive Using no revertive disables the reverting
working and protection ports (not
available in 1+1 optimized mode)
Enabling the flip of the two flip-upon-sd Using no flip-upon-sd disables the flip
SDH/SONET ports upon signal
degradation
Denying access of all traffic lockout-of-protection Available only in compatible 1+1 and
signals to the protection port by unidirectional modes
issuing a "Lockout of protection"
request, unless an equal
protection switch command is in
effect
Forced switching of traffic from force-switch-to-working Since a forced switch has a higher priority
the protection port to the working than SF or SD on a working port, this
port (unless an equal or higher command is carried out regardless of the
priority request has been issued) current condition of the working port
Manual switching of traffic from manual-switch-to- Since a manual switch has lower priority
the protection port back to the working than SF or SD on a working port, this
working port, unless an equal or command is carried out only if the working
higher priority request is in effect port is not in SF or SD condition.
Ports
---------------------------------------------------------------
Port Admin Status Active
cl-a/1 Up Up No
cl-b/1 Up Up Yes
Example
To add and configure an APS group:
• APS group name – test
• Working port – Port 2 of the module installed in slot cl-a
• Protection port – Port 1 of the module installed in slot cl-a
• Recovery mode – revertive
• Wait-to-restore period – 200 seconds.
mp4100#configure protection aps test bind working sdh-sonet cl-a/2
mp4100>config>protection>aps(test)#bind protection sdh-sonet cl-a/1
mp4100>config>protection>aps(test)#revertive
mp4100>config>protection>aps(test)#wait-to-restore 200
Applicable Modules
This feature is available for the following modules and technologies:
• SDH/SONET (CL.2 modules)
• E1/T1 (VS-16E1T1-EoP modules)
• E1/T1 and fractional E1/T1 (M8E1, M8T1 modules)
• T3 (T3 modules).
Standards
Ethernet group protection is RAD proprietary technology.
Functional Description
Any pair of logical MACs can be configured as an Ethernet protection group, even
if the entities bound to them have different capacity, different encapsulation
methods, and/or different parameters. Only the wait-to-restore delay must be
the same.
To use Ethernet group protection, both the primary (working) logical MAC and the
secondary (protection) logical MAC must be assigned bandwidth (mapped) on the
particular links. In other words, the lower-hierarchy entities on these desired links
must be bound to this logical MAC. Provisioning appropriate trails through the
network ensures that in case of a fault anywhere along the primary group path,
its traffic will be automatically switched to the standby group and will follow a
different path through the SDH/SONET/T3/E1/T1 network, thereby ensuring that
the payload can still be transported end-to-end.
Depending on the desired protection level, the protection partners can be
mapped to different links on the same modules, or to links on the different
modules.
The Ethernet group protection mode is always 1+1 and operates as follows:
• During normal operation, the payload is directed to the primary logical MAC,
and transmitted only over the bandwidth assigned to this group.
Note Only the primary (working) logical MAC can be included in a flow. The protection
logical MAC will not appear in the list of available bridge ports.
To prevent switching under marginal conditions, the user can specify a wait-to-
restore time, which is the minimum interval before flipping back to the original
port. However, if a more severe alarm appears, immediate flipping will take place,
even if the wait-to-restore time has not yet expired.
Figure 7-1, Figure 7-2, Figure 7-3 and Figure 7-4 illustrate how Ethernet groups
are bound to the physical layer for Ethernet over SDH/SONET, Ethernet over T3
and Ethernet over E1/T1, respectively.
Flow
Egress/Ingress Port
OR
Bind 1:1
OR
Bind 1:1
VCG
Bind 1:1
1..32
Bind 1:n
VCAT No
VC4-4C/
VC4/STS-3C VC3/STS-1 VC12/VT1.5
STS-12C
Flow
Egress/Ingress Port
GFP 1 GFP 16
OR
Bind 1:1
VCG 1..16
Bind 1:1
Bind 1:n
T1 T3
Flow
Egress/Ingress Port
Bind 1:1
HDLC
slot#/1..32
Bind 1:n
TS 1..31
Flow
Egress/Ingress Port
GFP 1 GFP 16
VCG 1 VCG 16
OR
E1/T1 E1-i/T1-i
Example
To add and configure an Ethernet protection group 2:
• M8E1 modules installed in slot 5
• Ethernet protection group number – 2
• Configure SDH ports cl-a/2 and cl-b/2
• Configure vcg cl-a/2 and bind vc-vt cl-a/2/1/1/1/1 to it
• Configure gfp cl-a/2 and bind vcg cl-a/2 to it (GFP encapsulation of this VCG)
mp4100>config>port>log-mac(cl-b/2)$
mp4100>config>port>log-mac(cl-b/2)$
mp4100>config>port>log-mac(cl-b/2)$ exit all
mp4100# configure flows classifier-profile vlan600 match-all match vlan 600
mp4100#
mp4100# config
mp4100>config# flows
mp4100>config>flows# flow 13
mp4100>config>flows>flow(13)$ ingress-port ethernet 5/2
mp4100>config>flows>flow(13)$ egress-port logical-mac cl-a/2
mp4100>config>flows>flow(13)$ classifier vlan600
mp4100>config>flows>flow(13)$ no shutdown
mp4100>config>flows>flow(13)$
mp4100>config>flows>flow(13)$ exit
mp4100>config>flows# flow 14
mp4100>config>flows>flow(14)$ ingress-port logical-mac cl-a/2
mp4100>config>flows>flow(14)$ egress-port ethernet 5/2
mp4100>config>flows>flow(14)$ classifier vlan600
mp4100>config>flows>flow(14)$ no shutdown
mp4100>config>flows>flow(14)$ exit all
mp4100#
mp4100# ################
mp4100# # eth-group 2 #
mp4100# ################
mp4100#
mp4100# config prot eth 2
mp4100>config>protection>eth-group(2)# bind working logical-mac cl-a/2
mp4100>config>protection>eth-group(2)# bind protection logical-mac cl-b/2
mp4100>config>protection>eth-group(2)# wait-to-restore 2
mp4100>config>protection>eth-group(2)# commit
mp4100>config>protection# ethernet-group 1
mp4100>config>protection>eth-group(1)# show status
Ports
---------------------------------------------------------------
Port Admin Oper Active
Working Logical MAC cl-a/1 Up Up --
Protection Logical MAC cl-a/2 Up Down Yes
Configuration Errors
Table 7-11 lists messages generated by Megaplex-4 when a configuration error is
detected.
608 Error ILLEGAL PROTECTION GROUP Ethernet group protection over SDH/SONET is not
DEFINITION supported in CL.2/A modules.
See also Error 608 in PW Protection and Path Protection
for SDH/SONET Payload for additional meanings.
613 Error WITH CL-DS0 PROTECTION When M8E1/M8T1 modules are installed in a system with
MUST BE ON SAME SLOT CL.2/DS0 modules, Ethernet protection members must be
defined on the same I/O slot.
614 Error ILLEGAL LOCAL FLOW If the Ethernet group members reside on different
BETWEEN ETH PORT AND M8E1T1 modules, a flow between such Logical Mac and an
L.MAC Ethernet port residing on one of these slots is illegal. For
Logical Macs defined on the same M8E1T1 module, this
configuration is allowed.
615 Error ETHERNET GROUP MEMBERS Working and protection logical MACs cannot be bound to
SHOULD BE THE SAME entities of different types: they must be both bound
either to gfp or hdlc ports.
616 Error NUM OF ETHERNET GROUPS The number of Ethernet groups defined per M8E1T1
PER SLOT EXCEEDS MAX module must not exceed 8.
617 Error NUM OF ETHERNET GROUPS The number of Ethernet groups defined on M8E1T1
PER SYSTEM EXCEEDS MAX module must not exceed 40 per system.
Applicable Modules
This feature is available for the following modules and ports:
Standards
ITU-T G.8032/Y.1344, Y.1731
Benefits
G.8032 revertive rings provide sub-50 ms protection for Ethernet traffic and
prevent loops at the Ethernet layer.
Factory Defaults
No Ethernet protection rings are configured in the system by default. Other
parameter defaults are listed in the table below.
bridge 0
east-port 0
west-port 0
force-sf no force-sf
r-aps vlan 0
vlan-priority 7
mel 255
holdoff 0
interconnection-node no interconnection-node
backward-compatibility no backward-compatibility
Functional Description
Ethernet Ring Protection technology provides a scalable solution for low-cost
traffic protection and rapid service restoration, with SDH/SONET-type resilience.
It is built on traditional Ethernet MAC (IEEE 802.3) and bridging (IEEE 802.1)
functions. It is independent of any physical-layer technologies and can be utilized
in any carrier’s network.
In ERP every ring node uses heartbeat messaging to determine availability of its
neighbor. When a link failure occurs, it is detected via LOS or heartbeat
messaging. Upon failure, node forwarding information is recalculated to ensure
that data traffic reaches its destination, using alternative path.
Ring ports can reside on the GbE Ethernet ports belonging to the same CL or I/O
card, providing port redundancy. In addition, they can reside on the ports
belonging to different CL cards, providing port redundancy. In total, Megaplex-4
supports up to 5 rings or sub-rings.
Ring Topology
Megaplex-4 supports different ring topologies, including single and
interconnected (ladder) ring topologies.
Major Ring
Sub-Ring
R-APS Messaging
Ethernet ring protection is achieved by means of a dedicated protocol,
Automated Protection Switching (APS). Every ring link is bound by two adjacent
nodes. At any time, traffic flows on all, but one of the ring links. This link is called
the ring protection link (RPL). Under normal conditions this link is blocked. RPL is
controlled by a single node called an RPL owner, which prevents traffic from using
the RPL. When a failure is detected, the RPL owner unblocks the RPL port,
allowing the RPL to be used for traffic.
R-APS messages require a designated transmission channel (R-APS channel),
which is separated from the service traffic channel. An R-APS channel is
configured using a separate dedicated VLAN to enable the R-APS messages to be
handled differently from the service traffic. The R-APS channel and service traffic
blocking is performed via VID filtering by the bridge.
Mechanism of Operation
Every failure along the ring triggers an R-APS (SF) (R-APS Signal Fail) message
along both directions from the nodes adjacent to the failed link. Before sending
the R-APS, these nodes block the ports facing the failed link. On receiving these
messages, the RPL owner unblocks the RPL port. An SF message is triggered even
if only one node adjacent to the failed link recognizes the failure. Moreover, to
overcome scenarios in which link failures are not recognized via LOS (Loss of
signal), ERPS can also use the standard Ethernet OAM 802.1ag Continuity Check
Messages (CCMs) to expose the failure to the two adjacent nodes.
During a recovery phase, when a failed link is restored and a node continually
detects a Clear SF, it sends an R-APS No Request (NR) message and keeps the
failed port blocked. When receiving the R-APS (NR), the RPL owner starts its
Wait-To-Restore (WTR) timer. When that timer expires, it blocks the RPL port and
sends RAPS (NR, RB) (R-APS no request, root blocked) messages in both
directions of the ring. Nodes receiving the R-APS (NR, RB) message flush their
learning table, unblock their blocked ports, and return to idle state.
Figure 7-7 illustrates a stable-state Ethernet ring with blocked RPL to prevent a
loop. Each node is monitored, using Ethernet CCM OAM messages, and the ring
protection is triggered by loss of continuity or server layer failure, as defined in
Y.1731.
Traffic is Blocked
CCM CCM
RPL Owner
CCM
CCM
CCM CCM
Administrative Commands
If there is a need to intervene into ERP operation for maintenance or any other
reason, the operator can issue a forced or manual switch command.
• Forced Switch (FS) – This command forces a block on the ring port where the
command is issued. It can be issued even if an SF condition exists on the ring.
Multiple force switch commands can be supported per ring instance but only
one per node.
• Manual Switch (MS) – In the absence of a failure or FS, this command forces
a block on the ring port where the command is issued. The manual switch
command can be applied to a single ring node only. When the command is
active, all ring nodes shift to the manual switch mode.
• Clear switch command clears all existing force and manual switch command
on the ERP.
Note The manual and forced switch commands are temporary commands and do not
permanently change the location of the RPL.
Multiple Rings
Multiple rings with a common link are usually referred to as ladder network (see
Figure 7-8). In such networks a common VLAN is shared on more than one
physical ring. For example, a user connected to node E is communicating with a
user connected to node A over the same VLAN.
Ring topology includes a physical link between nodes G and C. It belongs to the
major ring and is used by the sub-ring.
H G F
Virtual Channel
B C D
H G G F
B C C D
The following terms are commonly used for describing ladder ring topology:
• Interconnection nodes – Ring nodes that are common to both interconnected
rings (nodes C and G in Figure 7-8).
• Major ring – An Ethernet ring that controls a full physical ring and is
connected to the interconnection nodes on two ports (ring A-H-G-C-B in
Figure 7-8)
• Sub-ring –An Ethernet ring that is connected to a major ring at the
interconnection nodes. By itself, the sub-ring does not constitute a closed
physical ring. A sub-ring is connected to the interconnection nodes on only
one port (ring C-D-E-F-G in Figure 7-8). Link C–G is not a part of the sub-ring
and it is controlled by the major ring. Megaplex-4 supports up to four sub-
rings per major ring.
• R-APS virtual channel – The R-APS virtual channel is the R-APS channel
connection between two interconnection nodes of a major ring over a
network.
In a stable state the rings in Figure 7-8 have two RPL owners that prevent the
traffic from looping in the network (nodes E, A). When a non-shared link fails in
the network, the RPL owner that controls the ERPS instance containing that link
unblocks the RPL port while the distant RPL port, which is not a part of this
instance, remains blocked. For example, if link G-F fails, only node E unblocks its
RPL port, while node A does not change the state of its RPL port.
If a shared link fails (link G-C), the RPL owner of the main ring (node A) unblocks
its port; however, the RPL port of the sub-ring (node E) remains blocked since
that link is declared as virtual channel for this ring.
Timers
The following timers are used to facilitate ERP operation:
• Wait-to-Restore (WTR) – Period of time used by RPL owner to verify that the
ring has stabilized before blocking the RPL after signal recovery.
• Guard – Period of time during which all received A-RPS messages are ignored
by the ERP mechanism. This prevents the ring nodes from receiving outdated
A-RPS messages circulating the network.
• Hold-off – Period of time during which the underlying Ethernet layer attempts
to filter out intermittent link faults before reporting them to the ERP
mechanism.
ERP Configuration
Configuring ERP
To configure ERP:
1. In the configure>protection# prompt, enter erp followed by ring number
(1–5).
An ERP instance with is created and the config>protection>erp(1)#
prompt is displayed.
2. Configure the ERP as illustrated and explained below.
Assigning the node to a bridge <1–11> 1 is always used for CL-A bridge,
bridge instance 2..11 –for bridges on M-ETH modules
Forcing a signal failure to force-sf {east | west} no force-sf cancels the command
initiate the Ethernet Ring
protection mechanism
Defining node port type port-type owner {east | west} rpl – RPL owner
in relation to RPL owner port-type neighbor {east | west} neighbor – port directly connected to
port-type next-neighbor {east | west} RPL owner
Configuring dedicated r-aps [vlan <1–4094>] [mel <0–7>] R-APS settings must be the same for
VLAN for R-APS messages all ring members
MEL – Dedicated Maintenance Entity
Group Level for R-APS messages
Configuring the revertive revertive This mode is relevant only to the RPL
mode owner node.
In the revertive mode, after condition
causing the switch is cleared, traffic
is blocked at the RPL owner and
restored to the idle state (after WTR
timer has expired).
After the node has entered the state
in revertive mode, use the Clear
command to exit the state.
no revertive enables non-revertive
mode (system does not switch to idle
state)
Enabling propagation of sf-trigger {east | west} mep <md-id> Before enabling SF propagation,
Signal Failure (SF) <ma-id> <mep-id> verify that relevant CFM parameters
condition from the no sf-trigger {east | west} have been configured.
Ethernet OAM service MEPs used for SF propagation cannot
layer reside on R-APS VLAN; they must be
bound to data VLANs only.
Connecting previously sub-ring <ring_number> This option is available for major rings
defined sub-ring to a no sub-ring only. The sub-ring number must be
major ring lower than the number of the major
ring it is assigned to.
Blocking the East or West manual-switch {east-port | west-port } The manual switch command can be
port of a ring node applied to a single ring node only.
When the command is active, all ring
nodes shift to the manual switch
mode.
Blocking the East or West force-switch {east-port | west-port } Multiple force switch commands can
port of a ring node be supported per ring instance, but
only one is supported per node.
Defining guard and hold- timers [guard <10–2000>] [holdoff Guard timer is used by the ERP
off periods in msec <0–10000] mechanism to prevent ring nodes
from receive outdated R-APS
messages. While the guard timer is
active, all received R-APS messages
are ignored by the node. The guard
timer is configured in 10-ms steps.
Its recommended value for all ring
nodes is 2 sec.
Hold-off timer is used by Ethernet
layer to filter out intermittent faults.
Faults are reported to the ERP
mechanism only after the hold-off
timer expires. The guard timer is
configured in 100-ms steps.
East Port Status : Block R-APS and Data Local SF Source : Server Layer
West Port Status : Forward Local SF Source : OK
The ERP status provides information on:
Bridge number
Bridge ports assigned to be East and West ring ports
RPL link: East or West ring ports
Ring state:
Init – The node is not yet participating in the ring
Idle – The node is performing normally (there is no link failure on the
ring). In this state, traffic is unblocked on both ring ports, except for
the RPL owner node, which blocks the RPL port (the other RPL owner
port is unblocked).
West Port
----------------------------------------------
R-APS Message Rx Frames Tx Frames
SF 1 51
NR 0 0
NR,RB 0 0
Total Valid 0 0
Total Errors 0 0
Counter Description
R-APS SF Message Tx/Rx Total number of R-APS Signal Fail (SF) messages received or transmitted
by East/West port.
Received R-APS Signal Fail message indicates a failed port in the ring.
Transmitted R-APS Signal Fail message indicates a failed port in the
node.
Counter Description
R-APS NR Message Tx/Rx Total number of R-APS No Request (NR) messages received or
transmitted by East/West port.
Received R-APS No Request message indicates absence of failed ports in
the ring.
Transmitted R-APS No Request message indicates that the node fixed its
failed port.
R-APS NR, RB Tx/Rx Total number of R-APS No Request (NR), RPL Blocked (RB) messages
received or transmitted by East/West port.
Received R-APS No Request, RPL Blocked message indicates that RPL
port is blocked and all other not-failed blocked ports are unblocked in
the ring.
Transmitted from the RPL No Request, RPL Blocked message indicates
that RPL port is blocked.
Total Valid Rx/Tx Total number of valid R-APS messages received or transmitted by
East/West port
Total Errors Rx/Tx Total number of errored R-APS messages received or transmitted by
East/West port
Example
The figure and the script below illustrate configuration a G.8032v2 ring over the
CL.2 and M-ETH module ports.
GbE
Port 1 Flow 2
East
BP 1 Bridge
Ethernet Flow 3
CL-A BP 3
Ring
Flow 1 BP 2
VLAN Port 1
GbE West
Port 2 500
(RPL Owner)
M-ETH
Module
#***************************Configuring_Bridge Ports*************************
mp4100#
mp4100# config bridge 1
mp4100>config>bridge(1)$ port 1
mp4100>config>bridge(1)>port(1)$ no shutdown
mp4100>config>bridge(1)>port(1)$ exit
mp4100>config>bridge(1)# port 2
mp4100>config>bridge(1)>port(2)$ no shutdown
mp4100>config>bridge(1)>port(2)$ exit
mp4100>config>bridge(1)# port 3
mp4100>config>bridge(1)>port(3)$ no shutdown
mp4100>config>bridge(1)>port(3)$ exit
mp4100>config>bridge(1)#
mp4100>config>bridge(1)# vlan-aware
mp4100>config>bridge(1)# exit all
mp4100#
#*********************************End****************************************
#*********************Configuring_Classifier_Profiles*****************
mp4100# config flows
mp4100>config>flows# classifier vlan500 match-any
mp4100>config>flows>classifier-profile(vlan500)$ match vlan 500
mp4100>config>flows>classifier-profile(vlan500)$ exit all
#*********************************End****************************************
#******************Configuring_Management_and_Data_Flows 1,2*****************
mp4100# config flows
mp4100>config>flows# flow 1
mp4100>config>flows>flow(1)$ class vlan500
mp4100>config>flows>flow(1)$ ingress ethernet cl-a/1
mp4100>config>flows>flow(1)$ egress bridge-port 1 1
mp4100>config>flows>flow(1)$ reverse-direction queue 0 block 0/1
mp4100>config>flows>flow(1)$ no shutdown
mp4100>config>flows>flow(1)$ exit
mp4100>config>flows#
mp4100>config>flows# flow 2
mp4100>config>flows>flow(2)$ class vlan500
mp4100>config>flows>flow(2)$ ingress ethernet cl-a/2
mp4100>config>flows>flow(2)$ egress bridge-port 1 2
mp4100>config>flows>flow(2)$ reverse-direction queue 0 block 0/1
mp4100>config>flows>flow(2)$ no shutdown
mp4100>config>flows>flow(2)$ exit
mp4100>config>flows#
#*********************************End****************************************
#*********************Configuring_Data_Flow_3*****************
mp4100>config>flows# flow 3
mp4100>config>flows>flow(3)$ class vlan500
mp4100>config>flows>flow(3)$ ingress ethernet 3/1
mp4100>config>flows>flow(3)$ egress bridge-port 1 3
mp4100>config>flows>flow(3)$ reverse-direction queue 0 block 0/1
mp4100>config>flows>flow(3)$ no shutdown
mp4100>config>flows>flow(3)$ exit
mp4100>config>flows#
#*********************************End****************************************
#************************ Configuring_the_Ring*******************************
mp4100# configure protection erp 1
mp4100>config>protection>erp(1)# bridge 1
mp4100>config>protection>erp(1)# r-aps vlan 200
mp4100>config>protection>erp(1)# r-aps mel 5
mp4100>config>protection>erp(1)# east-port 1
mp4100>config>protection>erp(1)# west-port 2
mp4100>config>protection>erp(1)# port-type west rpl
mp4100>config>protection>erp(1)# no shutdown
mp4100>config>protection>erp(1)# exit all
mp4100# commit
Result : OK
#*********************************End****************************************
Note Zero loss switch-over is not supported when an active CL.2 module is removed
from the chassis.
Benefits
HSR protection provides the following benefits:
• Increased availability. If a link fails or is replaced, the traffic is not disrupted
and communication is maintained error-free (even though the available
capacity is reduced)
• Minimized service downtime in the case of failure.
Standards
IEC 62439-3 Industrial communication networks – High availability automation
networks –Part 3: Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP) and High-availability
Seamless Redundancy (HSR).
Functional Description
The HSR implements ring topology. Each frame is repeatedly transmitted on
different independent paths simultaneously. The receiver uses the first incoming
frame and eliminates the later arriving duplicates. This provides two apparently
disjoint paths available for each communication session.
Node Functionalities
Out of several node functionalities defined by the standard, two are implemented
in RAD’s HSR: DANH and RedBox:
• DANH is used for PW traffic inside the Megaplex device (PW services).
• RedBox is applicable when Megaplex-4 is used as a bridge between a local
LAN substation and a WAN.
DANH (Double Attached Node Implementing HSR) is a node directly inserted into
the ring as a leaf. It is a device with an integrated three-port HSR switch (two
external and one internal port). Of one frame to be transmitted, two copies are
made and transmitted simultaneously in the ring in both directions. Unicast
frames are removed from the ring by the receiver, multicast and broadcast
frames from the transmitter. The receiver uses the first received frame and
eliminates the duplicate arriving later.
For connecting devices without HSR capabity, a Redundancy Box (RedBox) is
used. This provides the HSR functions to all the connected nodes. HSR
Redundancy Boxes (RedBox) use two Ethernet ports operating in parallel to
connect to a ring.
The transmitting HSR node or HSR RedBox sends twin frames, one in each
direction, on the ring. For identification, the HSR node injects the twin frames
with an HSR tag. The HSR tag consists of a port identifier, the length of the
payload and a sequence number. In a normal operating ring, the destination HSR
node or RedBox receives both frames within a certain time skew. An HSR node
forwards the first frame to arrive to the upper layers and discards the second
frame when it arrives.
The figure below shows a diagram of HSR implementation.
RedBox
SAN#1 A
HSR
B
Bridge
SAN#4
The nodes support the IEEE 802.1D bridge functionality and forward frames from
one port to the other, except if they already sent the same frame in that same
direction (see Duplicate Discard below).
Duplicate Discard
The duplicate discard algorithm is used at the frame reception. Each node relays
the frames it receives from port A to port B, except for a frame (singlecast) that
it already forwarded or that is addressed to itself.
This feature can be disabled for testing purposes (network monitoring) or
redundant nodes setup. This is configured by a parameter per LRE entity
indicating if duplicate discard is activated at port A and port B. When this
parameter is activated, the duplicate frames are discarded. Otherwise, the
duplicate frames received from the A/B port are forwarded to the B/A port.
Proxy traffic is discarded in both modes.
When an LRE port is set to duplicate-discard, 2 clusters are allocated for ports A
and B. Clusters are also used for interlink ports. Therefore one duplicate-
discarded LRE port with one interlink use 3 clusters. The total number of available
clusters is 9. Thus only 3 LREs (with one interlink each) can be configured in
Megaplex-4 with duplicate-discard functionality.
Note 1. No flows can be established between the LRE partners and other Ethernet
ports in Megaplex-4.
2. The classification of the packets to be forwarded via LRE is based on VLAN
membership.
Bridge
VLAN 100
eth#1
BP 1 2 Flow 1 Q-Block cl-a/1
nd
LRE Bi
eth#3
eth 1/1
Q-Block Flow 3 BP 1 1
Bi
nd
eth#2
BP 1 3 Flow 2 Q-Block cl-a/1
To add a LRE:
1. Navigate to configure port.
The config>port# prompt is displayed.
2. Type lre and enter a LRE number (1..5).
The config>port>lre(number)# prompt is displayed.
Adding a bridge port to bind bridge-port <slot/port> Only CL bridge ports can be bound to the LRE
the LRE Ports A and B that are LRE partners must
belong to module of the same type (either
CL, or M-ETH, or VS)
A port configured as partner in HSR entity
cannot be used for non-HSR traffic.
Using no before bind removes a link from LRE
Assigning a name to the name <Alphanumeric string> Maximum name length is 64 characters
LRE
Using duplicate algorithm duplicate-discard The total number of ports with duplicate
at reception discard functionality is limited to 9 (this
means that out of 5 LREs available in
Megaplex-4, only 3 can be configured with
duplicate-discard functionality).
Using no before duplicate-discard cancels the
use of duplicate algorithm
Disabling the LRE port shutdown Using no shutdown enables the LRE port
Example
• LRE port 1
• LRE 1 partners:
Port A: Bridge port 1 2
Port B: Bridge port 1 3
Port C (interlink): Bridge port 1 1
Flow 1 2 3
mp4100>config>qos>shaper-profile(950m)$ exit
mp4100>config>qos# shaper-profile 100m
mp4100>config>qos>shaper-profile(100m)$ bandwidth cir 100000
mp4100>config>qos>shaper-profile(100m)$ exit all
mp4100#
mp4100# configure qos
mp4100>config>qos# queue-group-profile Giga
mp4100>config>qos>queue-group-profile(Giga)$ queue-block 0/1
mp4100>config>qos>queue-group-profile(Giga)>queue-block(0/1)$
bind queue 0 queue-block 1/1
mp4100>config>qos>queue-group-profile(Giga)>queue-block(0/1)$
shaper profile 950m
mp4100>config>qos>queue-group-profile(Giga)>queue-block(0/1)$
exit all
mp4100#
mp4100# configure qos
mp4100>config>qos# queue-group-profile Eth_Port
mp4100>config>qos>queue-group-profile(Eth_Port)$ queue-block
0/1
mp4100>config>qos>queue-group-profile(Eth_Port)>queue-
block(0/1)$ bind queue 0 queue-block 1/1
mp4100>config>qos>queue-group-profile(Eth_Port)>queue-
block(0/1)$ shaper profile 100m
mp4100>config>qos>queue-group-profile(Eth_Port)>queue-
block(0/1)$ exit all
mp4100#
mp4100# ######### Eth ports #################
mp4100# configure port eth cl-a/1 no shutdown
mp4100# configure port eth cl-a/1 queue-group profile Giga
mp4100# configure port eth cl-a/2 no shutdown
mp4100# configure port eth cl-a/2 queue-group profile Giga
mp4100# configure port eth 1/1 no shutdown
mp4100# configure port eth 1/1 queue-group profile Eth_Port
mp4100#
mp4100# ######### Brigde #################
mp4100# configure bridge 1 port 1 no shutdown
mp4100# configure bridge 1 port 2 no shutdown
mp4100# configure bridge 1 port 3 no shutdown
mp4100# configure bridge 1 vlan-aware
mp4100# configure bridge 1
mp4100>config>bridge(1)# vlan 100
mp4100>config>bridge(1)>vlan(100)$ tagged-egress 1..3
To delete an LRE:
mp4100#configure port no lre 1
Configuration Errors
Table 7-11 lists messages generated by Megaplex-4 when a configuration error is
detected.
790 Error LRE PORTS MUST BE IN SAME LRE ports must have the same VLAN membership
VLAN
791 Error SAME BP CAN'T BE USED IN A bridge port cannot be a partner in more than one LRE
DIFFERENT LRE's
792 Error TWO BP MUST BIND TO LRE An LRE must include exactly two LRE ports
PORT
793 Error ILLEGAL FLOW FOR ETH PORT Once an Ethernet port participates in a flow to an LRE
BOUND TO LRE bridge port, no other flows can be configured at this port
794 Error PORTS BOUND TO LRE MUST Ports A and B that are LRE partners must belong to
BE SAME MODULE TYPES module of the same type (either CL, or M-ETH, or VS)
795 Warning VLAN WITH 2 LRE BP MUST It is recommended that a VLAN including two LRE bridge
INCLUDE INTERLINK BP ports as members will also include the bridge ports with
tributary traffic (defined as interlinks)
Links
---------------------------------------------------------------
Port Admin Oper
---------------------------------------------------------------
Up Up
Up Up
Counter Description
TX frames Number of frames sent over port A/B/C that are HSR tagged. Only
frames that are HSR tagged are counted. A frame aborted during the
transmission is not counted.
RX frames Number of frames received over port A/B/C that are HSR tagged. Only
frames that are HSR tagged are counted. A frame aborted during the
reception is not counted.
Error Count Number of frames with errors (not matching HSR ETH type) received on
this LRE port
Duplicate Frames Number of entries in the duplicate detection mechanism on port A/B/C
for which one single duplicate was received.
Own RX frames Number of HSR tagged frames received on Port A/B that originated from
this device. Frames originate from this device if the source MAC matches
the MAC of the LRE, or if the source MAC appears in the node table
Note M16T1 modules require a special ordering option to support the I/O group
protection (see M16E1, M16T1 Data Sheet).
The I/O group protection must be defined between identical module types (M8E1
with M8E1, M16T1 with M16T1 etc). The maximum total number of I/O groups
that can be configured in the system is 5 for Megaplex-4100 and 2 for
Megaplex-4104.
Benefits
The I/O group protection provides two main advantages:
• Automatically restores service within a short time without user intervention
• In case of technical failure, allows service to continue while technical staff
finds the source of the failure and corrects it.
Moreover, when protection is used, tasks such as planned maintenance, updating
software versions, or installing modules with enhanced capabilities, can also be
performed without disrupting service, provided a few precautions are taken (see
below).
Standards
I/O Group Protection is RAD proprietary technology.
Factory Defaults
Megaplex-4 is supplied with I/O group protection disabled.
Functional Description
For I/O group protection, two modules with the same type of physical and
electrical interfaces are connected to the same communication link by a single
Y-cable. A typical configuration is shown in Figure 7-12.
During normal operation, the transmit output of the protection module is
electrically disconnected from the link. If the working module fails, it is
disconnected from the link and from the internal buses, and the protection
module takes over.
The criteria for switchover between the modules are as follows:
• Working module failure (provided it is no more identified in the database)
• Working module extraction.
Y-Cable
POP B
POP A
SDH/
OC-3/12
1-8
1-8
1-8
1-8
T1 SONET T1
9-16
9-16
9-16
9-16
ADM ADM
Path Protection
Protection Mode
The protection mode for TDM I/O group redundancy is always non-revertive. The
module will not automatically flip back after the failed port returns to normal
operation, but only when the currently used I/O module is removed. The
switchover back to the working module will occur only if one of the criteria listed
below is satisfied:
• Protection module failure
• Protection module extraction.
Adding working and bind {working | protection} Using no bind protection removes the
protection modules <slot> protection port from the group. There is
slots to the I/O protection no need to remove the working port from
group the group.
Example
To add and configure an I/O protection group:
• Protection group number – 2
• Working slot – M16T1 module installed in slot 6
• Protection slot – M16T1 module installed in slot 5
mp4100>config# protection
mp4100>config>protection# io-group 2
mp4100>config>protection>io-group(2)$ bind working 6
mp4100>config>protection>io-group(2)$ bind protection 5
mp4100>config>protection>io-group(2)$ no shutdown
mp4100>config>protection>io-group(2)$
mp4100>config>protection>io-group(2)$ commit
Configuration Errors
Table 7-11 lists messages generated by Megaplex-4 when a configuration error is
detected.
604 Error PROTECTION PORT IS IN Ports in two modules participating in I/O group protection
SHUTDOWN STATE must have identical configuration. For example, if in the
1st module ports 1,3,5 are set to “no shutdown” and the
other ports are in shutdown state, the same should be in
the 2nd module.
605 Error DIFFERENT CARDS TYPE I/O group protection must be defined between identical
module types (M8E1 with M8E1, M16T1 with M16T1 etc)
606 Error WORKING & PROTECTION ARE Working and protection modules in I/O group protection
ON THE SAME SLOT must be defined on different slots
Benefits
Static LAGs provide the following benefits:
• Increased availability
If a link within a LAG fails or is replaced, the traffic is not disrupted and
communication is maintained (even though the available capacity is reduced).
• Load sharing
Traffic is distributed across multiple links, minimizing the probability that a
single link could be overwhelmed.
• Use of existing hardware
Software replaces the need to upgrade the hardware to higher bandwidth
capacity.
Link aggregation always provides revertive recovery, because that as soon as the
down port returns to normal, the full bandwidth is again available.
To add a LAG:
1. Navigate to configure port.
The config>port# prompt is displayed.
2. Type lag and enter a LAG number (1 or 2).
The config>port>lag(number)# prompt is displayed.
Note LAGs must be added in consecutive order. This means LAG 2 must be added after
LAG 1.
Adding a GBE port to the bind ethernet <slot/port> Using no before bind removes a link from LAG
LAG
Assigning a name to the name <Alphanumeric string> Maximum name length is 64 characters
LAG
Selecting the type of admin-key giga-ethernet The only possible option for the current
ports protected by LAG version is giga-ethernet: GbE ports
Assigning a queue group queue-group profile <profile no queue-group removes queue group
profile name> association
Assigning method of distribution-method dest-mac The only possible option is dest-mac: packets
distributing traffic within <slot/port> are distributed according to their destination
LAG MAC addresses
For example:
To create a flow between this LAG and a fast Ethernet port of an ASMi-54C/N
module installed in I/O slot 1:
config flows classifier-profile 1000 match-all match vlan 1000
To delete a LAG:
mp4100#configure port no lag 1
Counter Description
Activity Actor or partner's port activity. Passive indicates the port's preference
for not transmitting LAC PDUs unless its partner's control value is Active.
Active indicates the port's preference to participate in the protocol
regardless of the partner's control value.
Synchronized If the value is Yes, the link is considered synchronized. It has been
allocated to the correct link aggregation group, the group has been
associated with a compatible aggregator, and the identity of the link
aggregation group is consistent with the system ID and operational key
information transmitted. If the value is No, the link is not synchronized.
It is currently not in the right aggregation.
Paused Frames 0 0
FCS Errors 0 --
Parameter Description
Paused Frames Total number of pause frames (used for flow control) received/transmitted through
the corresponding Ethernet port
FCS Errors The number of frames received on this interface that are an integral number of octets
in length but do not pass the FCS check
Counter Description
Counter Description
Configuration Errors
The table below lists messages generated by Megaplex-4 when a configuration
error is detected.
553 Error ILLEGAL NUMBER OF LAGs Only a single LAG can be configured between two CL cards
BETWEEN CL CARDS
554 Error ILLEGAL NUMBER OF LAG At least two members must be defined in a LAG
MEMBERS
555 Error LAG MEMBER IS SHUTDOWN A LAG member should be in no shutdown state
Factory Defaults
In Revertive mode, the wait-to-restore time is 300 sec.
Functional Description
Path (trail) protection is available for user-specified payload units (VC-12 for SDH
links, or VT1.5 for SONET links) mapped to VCG. Up to 252 VC path protection
groups can be defined by the user.
When path protection is enabled, the protected payload unit is assigned
bandwidth on both network links:
• The same payload is transmitted on both links.
• The receive interfaces of the two links continuously evaluate the received
signals. As long as the working path operates satisfactorily, its signal is
selected for processing. When the working path signal fails, or is degraded,
the receive side rapidly selects the other signal for processing.
Provisioning appropriate alternative paths through the network ensures that in
case of a fault anywhere along the active path, the traffic is automatically
switched to the standby path.
Adding a working/protection bind {working | protection} The number and type of working and
port to the VC path protection vc-vt <slot>/<port>/<au4>/ protection ports must be identical.
group <tug_3>/<tug_2>/<tributary> Using no before bind removes a port
from VC path protection group.
Cards
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Working VC Admin Oper Active
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Protection Sdh-Sonet cl-a/1/1/1/1/1 Up Up --
Working Sdh-Sonet cl-a/2/1/1/1/1 Up Up Yes
Example
To add and configure an VC path protection group:
• VC-path protection group name – test
• Working port: slot=cl-a, sdh port=2, aug=1, tug3=1, vc12=1, tributary=1
Configuration Errors
Table 7-11 lists messages generated by Megaplex-4 when a configuration error is
detected.
607 Error MISSING MEMBER IN VC-path group must contain two members. Bind another
PROTECTION GROUP port to the group
608 Error ILLEGAL PROTECTION GROUP Path Protection cannot be configured on bypassed VC/VTs.
DEFINITION See also Error 608 in Ethernet Group Protection and PW
Protection for additional meanings.
7.9 PW Protection
PW protection mechanism protects pseudowire traffic in case of network path
failure. The user defines different network paths for the working and protection
pseudowires. This type of protection is supported by all the PW-equipped
modules except for MPW-1, and is configured between two different PWs on the
same module.
Benefits
The PW protection provides the following main advantages:
• Automatically restores service within a short time without user intervention
• Provides zero packet loss protection
• In case of technical failure, allows service to continue while technical staff
finds the source of the failure and corrects it.
Moreover, when protection is used, tasks such as planned maintenance, updating
software versions, or installing modules with enhanced capabilities, can also be
performed without disrupting service, provided a few precautions are taken (see
below).
Standards
PW Protection is RAD proprietary technology.
Factory Defaults
Megaplex-4 is supplied with PW protection disabled.
Functional Description
For PW protection, two PW ports on the same module are connected to the same
DS1 port. A typical configuration is shown in the figure below.
The working and protection PWs must be configured with the same psn
parameter: either udp-over-ip or ethernet.
During normal operation, both PW ports process as usual the transmit and receive
signals, but the receive output of the protection port is disconnected.
During normal operation, the operational state of the protection PW is
continuously monitored to ensure that it is operating properly. In the case of
faulty condition on the working PW, the traffic is routed on the protection PW,
via another route not suffering from the same faulty conditions.
The protection mode is non-revertive.
PW #1 GbE
SVI #1
Working CL-A/1
I/O
DS1
Serial Port
PW #2 GbE
SVI #2
Protection CL-B/1
Configuring PW Protection
The PW protection is configured as follows.
Adding working and bind {working | protection} Using no bind protection removes the
protection modules <slot> protection port from the group. There is
slots to the PW protection no need to remove the working port from
group the group.
Example
To add and configure a PW protection group:
• VS-12 module
• Protection group number – 4
• Working PW number – 1
• Protection PW number – 2
mp4100>config# protection
mp4100>config>protection# pw 4
mp4100>config>protection>pw(4)$ bind working 1
mp4100>config>protection>pw(4)$ bind protection 2
mp4100>config>protection>pw(4)$ no shutdown
Configuration Errors
Table 7-11 lists messages generated by Megaplex-4 when a configuration error is
detected.
------------------------------------------------------------------
Working VC Admin Oper Active
-------------------------------------------------------------------
protection pw1 Up Up Yes
working pw1 Up Up Yes
-------------------------------------------------------------------
Benefits
The TDM group protection provides two main advantages:
• Automatically restores service within a short time without user intervention
• In case of technical failure, allows service to continue while technical staff
finds the source of the failure and corrects it.
Moreover, when protection is used, tasks such as planned maintenance, updating
software versions, or installing modules with enhanced capabilities, can also be
performed without disrupting service, provided a few precautions are taken (see
below).
Standards
TDM Group Protection is RAD proprietary technology.
Factory Defaults
Megaplex-4 is supplied with TDM protection disabled. Other parameter defaults
are listed in the table below.
oper-mode dual-cable-tx
Functional Description
The TDM group (dual-cable) configuration provides protection against both
transmission path failure and technical failure in the module hardware.
For this type of protection, two ports of the same type are connected to the
remote unit via two parallel links. Defining these two links as a TDM protection
group ensures that traffic carrying capacity is available even if one of the links
fails. These ports can be as follows:
• e1/e1-i/ds1/ds1-opt ports
• t1/t1-i/ds1/ds1-opt ports
• mux-eth-tdm ports of Optimux modules
• cmd channels of TP modules
• t3 ports of T3 modules.
Figure 7-14 shows a typical system configuration using dual-cable protection. The
user can select the module ports operating as a TDM group. Both ports process as
usual the transmit and receive signals, but the receive output of the protection
port is disconnected.
During normal operation, the operational state of the protection port is
continuously monitored to ensure that it is operating properly. If the working link
fails, the corresponding port is disconnected, and the protection port takes over.
The maximum switching time between main and backup ports is 50 msec.
Therefore protection switching will ensure essentially uninterrupted service for all
the types of applications; in particular, it will not cause the disconnection of voice
calls.
Figure 7-14. E1/T1 Link Protection Using Dual Cables (TDM Group)
• Admin Status
• line-type
• signaling
For cmd channels of TP modules:
• rate & trigger-mode
For T3 ports:
• Admin Status
• line-type.
Protection Mode
The recovery mode after a protection switching can be selected in accordance
with the application requirements:
• Non-revertive mode – the module will not automatically flip back from
protection to working port after the working port returns to normal
operation, but only when the currently used port fails.
• Revertive mode – the module will flip back from protection to working port
when it returns to normal operation.
To prevent switching under marginal conditions, the user can specify a
restoration time (wait-to-restore). This is the minimum interval before flipping
back to the original port. During the restoration time, alarms with the same
weight, or with lower weights, are ignored. As a result, the module starts
evaluating the criteria for protection switching (flipping) only after the
restoration time expires, thereby ensuring that another flip cannot occur before
the specified time expires.
However, if an alarm with a weight exceeding that of the alarm which caused
flipping appears, immediate flipping will occur, even if the restoration time has
not yet expired.
Traffic Duplication
Traffic Duplication is a new technology developed by RAD for enhanced reliability
and performance, used to minimize delay on critical utility applications (such as
teleprotection). This technology is implemented in MPW-1 I/O module.
Mission-critical traffic can be transported over a new Carrier Ethernet network
running in parallel with the existing SDH/SONET network, while preparing for
future full service migration.
This type of protection employs three members and is implemented by defining
two TDM groups with a common member (see Example 5). One tdm group is
configured between two e1-i/t1-i ports on the CL.2 module and the second
tdm-group is configured between one of the e1-i/t1-i partners in the previous
group and a ds1 port of MPW-1 module.
Megaplex-4 duplicates the TDM service to two parallel flows:
• Towards the TDM uplink (PDH or SDH/SONET) based on its internal TDM
cross-connect. When transported over SDH/SONET it is also protected using
path protection.
• Towards the Ethernet uplink (single or Ring) using PWE encapsulation. The
figure below shows a G.8032 ring used to protect the Ethernet service.
Adding working and bind {working | protection} e1 Using no bind protection (e1/e1-i/ds1)
protection <slot>/<port>/[<tributary>] removes the protection port from the
e1/e1-i/ds1 bind {working | protection} e1-i group. There is no need to remove the
ports to the TDM group <slot>/<port> working port from the group.
bind {working | protection} ds1 [<tributary>] relates to Megaplex Optimux
<slot>/<port> cards (OP-34C, OP-108C) as protection
ports (for internal E1 port numbering in
Optimux modules, see relevant section of
Appendix B).
An e1 port of VS-16E1T1-EoP module
bound to a VCG cannot be configured as a
partner in tdm-group.
An e1 port of VS-16E1T1-PW or VS-6/E1T1
module cross connected directly to PW
cannot be configured as a partner in tdm-
group.
Adding working and bind {working | protection} t1 Using no bind protection (t1/t1-i/ds1)
protection t1/t1-i/ds1 <slot>/<port>/[<tributary>] removes the protection port from the
ports to the TDM group bind {working | protection} t1-i group. There is no need to remove the
<slot>/<port> working port from the group.
bind {working | protection} ds1 [<tributary>] relates to internal T1 ports of
<slot>/<port> T3 modules.
If TDM group protection is configured for a
T3 port, the same type of protection is
also automatically configured on all the
open internal T1 ports belonging to this T3
module. The T1 members belonging to
such a group have the same numbers. The
group numbers start from 200.
You can also configure TDM group
protection on individual selected T1 ports
if their T3 ports are not configured to
protection.
A t1 port of VS-16E1T1-EoP module
bound to a VCG cannot be configured as a
partner in tdm-group.
A t1 port of VS-16E1T1-PW or VS-6/E1T1
module cross connected directly to PW
cannot be configured as a partner in tdm-
group.
Adding working and bind {working | protection} t3 Using no bind protection t3 removes the
protection t3 ports to <slot>/<port> protection port from the group. There is
the TDM group no need to remove the working port from
the group.
Once TDM group protection is configured
for the T3 port, the same type of
protection is also automatically configured
on all the open internal T1 ports belonging
to this T3 module.
Adding working and bind {working | protection} Using no bind protection mux-eth-tdm
protection mux-eth-tdm <slot>/<port> removes the protection port from the
mux-eth-tdm group. There is no need to remove the
ports to the TDM group working port from the group.
Defining the wait-to- wait-to-restore <0–720> The unit of time is seconds. For
restore period (after the mux-eth-tdm ports, the wait-to-restore
switching criteria are time is always 0.
cleared, the time to elapse The wait-to-restore value configured for a
before traffic T3 port TDM protection group is
switches back) automatically copied to the TDM
protection groups of all T1 ports belonging
to this T3.
Example 1
To add and configure an E1/T1 protection group:
• Protection group number – 2
• Working link – Port 1 of the module installed in slot 6
• Protection link – Port 2 of the module installed in slot 5
• Operation mode – dual cable protection
• Wait-to-restore period – 200 seconds.
mp4100#configure protection tdm-group 2 bind working e1 6/1
mp4100#configure protection tdm-group 2
mp4100>config>protection>tdm-group (2)#bind protection e1 5/2
mp4100>config>protection>tdm-group (2)#wait-to-restore 200
Example 2
To add and configure an optical link protection group:
• Protection group number – 1
• Working link – Port 1 of the module installed in slot 1
• Protection link – Port 2 of the module installed in slot 1
• Operation mode – dual cable protection (this is the only option so the 3rd
string is optional)
mp4100#configure port mux-eth-tdm 1/2
mp4100#configure protection tdm-group 1 bind working mux-eth-tdm 1/1
mp4100#configure protection tdm-group 1 bind protection mux-eth-tdm
1/2
mp4100#configure protection tdm-group 1 oper-mode dual-cable-tx
Cards
---------------------------------------------------------------
Port Admin Oper Active
Working Mux Eth TDM 1/1 Up Up Yes
Protection Mux Eth TDM 1/2 Up Down --
Example 3
To add and configure an internal E1 protection group on OP-108C
• Protection group number – 3
• Working link – Port 1 of Section OP A of the module installed in slot 1
• Protection link – Port 4 of Section OP B of the module installed in slot 2
• Operation mode – dual cable protection (this is the only option so the 3rd
string is optional)
mp4100#configure protection tdm-group 3 bind working e1 1/1/1
mp4100#configure protection tdm-group 3 bind protection e1 2/3/4
mp4100#configure protection tdm-group 3 oper-mode dual-cable-tx
Cards
---------------------------------------------------------------
Port Admin Oper Active
Working E1 1/1/1 Up Up Yes
Protection E1 2/3/4 Up Down --
Example 4
To add and configure an CMD Channel protection group on TP module:
• Protection group number – 1
• Working link – CMD channel 1 of the module installed in slot 4
• Protection link – CMD channel 2 of the module installed in slot 4
• Operation mode – dual cable protection (this is the only option so the 3rd
string is optional)
• Not revertive
config protection tdm-group 1 bind working cmd-channel 4/1
config protection tdm-group 1 bind protection cmd-channel 4/2
config protection tdm-group 1 oper-mode dual-cable-tx
config protection tdm-group 1 no-revertive
Cards
---------------------------------------------------------------
Port Admin Oper Active
Working Cmd Channel 4/1 Up Up Yes
Protection Cmd Channel 4/2 Up Up --
Example 5.
To configure traffic duplication:
• Protection group number – 1
Working link – Port E1-i 1 of CL-A module
Protection link – Port E1-i 1 of CL-B module
Operation mode – dual cable protection (this is the only option so the 3rd
string is optional)
• Protection group number – 2
Cards
---------------------------------------------------------------
Port Admin Oper Active
Working E1-I CL.A/1 Up Down --
Protection E1-I CL.B/1 Up Down --
Cards
---------------------------------------------------------------
Port Admin Oper Active
Working E1-I CL.A/1 Up Down --
Protection E1-I DS1 3/1 Up Up Yes
The tdm group employing two CL e1(t1)-i ports must be configured to
non-revertive mode. The second tdm group (employing CL e1(t1)-i and MPW-1
ds1 ports) can be either revertive or non-revertive.
Example 6
To add and configure a T3 protection group:
• Protection group number – 1
• Working link – T3 Port (1) of the module installed in slot 9
• Protection link – T3 Port (1) of the module installed in slot 8
• All other parameters are at their defaults.
mp4100#configure protection tdm-group 1 bind working t3 9/1
mp4100#configure protection tdm-group 1 bind protection t3 8/1
Cards
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Port Admin Oper Active
Working T1 9/1/3 Up Up Yes
Protection T1 8/1/3 Up Down --
Configuration Errors
Table 7-11 lists messages generated by Megaplex-4 when a configuration error is
detected.
140 Error ILLEGAL TDM PROTECTION The protection assignment of one port does not point to
ASSIGNMENT another port
142 Error PORT CAN PARTICIPATE ONLY An E1/T1 port cannot be member of several TDM
IN ONE TDM GROUP protection groups.
420 Error MLPPP PORT CAN'T BE BOUND E1 port bound to MLPPP port cannot be a member of
TO TDM GROUP protection group
476 Error PROTECTED PORTS HAVE When TDM protection is configured between two DS1
ASSYMETRIC PARAMETERS ports, all their physical layer parameters must be identical
601 Error WORKING & PROTECTION ARE The same port cannot be defined as both working and
ON THE SAME PORT protection port
602 Error UNFRAMED TYPE CAN'T BE A Unframed E1/T1 ports of OP-108C/34C, M16E1/M16T1,
MEMBER OF TDM GROUP ASMi-54C/N modules cannot be selected as members of
TDM group
603 Error PORT PARAMETERS OF For two ports configured to TDM group protection, the
MEMBERS ARE ASSYMETRIC following parameters must be the same for both ports.
For E1/T1/E1-i/T1-i ports:
• Admin Status
• line-type
• line-code
• inband-management > timeslot
• inband-management > protocol
• inband-management > routing-protocol
For cmd channels of TP modules:
• rate & trigger-mode
For T3 ports:
• Admin Status
• line-type.
604 Error PROTECTION PORT IS IN One of the ports in tdm protection group is in shutdown
SHUTDOWN STATE state
610 Error ILLEGAL TRAFFIC DUP Incorrect traffic duplication configuration. The protection
MEMBERS DEFINITION members must be configured by using the two following
tdm-group entries:
TDM GROUP 1
Working Port: CL e1(t1)-i X
Protection Port: CL e1(t1)-i Y
TDM GROUP 2
Working Port: e1(t1)-i X (CL.2 module), same as in group 1
Protection Port: ds1 (MPW-1 module)
611 Error TRAFFIC DUP ENTRY MUST BE In traffic duplication configuration, the tdm group
NON REVERTIVE employing two CL e1(t1)-i ports, must be configured to
non-revertive mode.
612 Error IN T3 PROTECTION, MEMBERS The following asymmetrical ports were manually defined
MUST BE SYMMETRIC by the user on the T3 module:
• either T1 ports as TDM group protection members
• or Logical MAC ports as Ethernet group protection
members.
These members must be symmetric for working and
protection T3 module slots.
683 Error ILLEGAL CMD CHANNEL Cmd-channel protection members must satisfy the
PROTECTION ASSIGNMENT following conditions:
• Working and protection ports must belong to the same
slot
• Working ports must be Cmd-Channels 1 or 3
• Protected ports must be either Cmd-Channel 2 (for
working port 1) or 4 (for working port 3); no other
option is allowed.
777 Error PORT DISABLED ON PRIMARY A T1 or Logical MAC port was defined as a member of T3
TDM-GROUP MEMBER TDM protection group in the protection module slot, while
is not opened in the working module slot.
Benefits
E1/T1 ring protection can use the same cabling infrastructure as regular
point-to-point links, and provides several significant advantages:
• There is no single point of failure
• Rapid switching time in case of failure
• Does not require additional hardware. Any daisy chain topology can be
converted to an E1/T1 ring topology by connecting two additional pairs
between the E1, T1 port at the end of the chain to the E1/T1 port beginning
the chain (on the first Megaplex-4)
• Flexible solution (any Megaplex-4 unit in the ring can connect to additional
rings)
• Simple to configure: requires the same timeslot assignment as a chain
topology, except that at each node it is necessary to bypass timeslots that
are not used for local payload between the working and protection E1/T1
ports.
Standards
TDM Ring Protection is RAD proprietary technology.
Factory Defaults
Megaplex-4 is supplied with TDM ring protection disabled. The default
wait-to-restore time is 300 sec.
Functional Description
Figure 7-16 illustrates TDM Ring Protection topology. The links comprising the
ring can include E1 and T1 physical links. The different types of links can be
intermixed along the same ring, without requiring any media converters or
modems.
TDM (E1/T1) ring protection is based on the use of two transmission paths, each
requiring a single twisted pair: one pair, called the working, is used instead of the
legacy transmit pair, and the other, called the protection, is used instead of the
legacy receive pair. Therefore, E1/T1 ring protection can use the same cabling
infrastructure as regular point-to-point links.
The E1/T1 ring protection topology can be efficiently implemented by any pair of
physical or internal (logical) E1 or T1 ports, as available on M8E1, M8T1, M8SL,
etc. Any pair of ports, even ports located on different modules, can be configured
as a protection group.
Any port participating in the TDM ring can automatically choose an appropriate
timing reference or data flow direction in accordance with internal messages
and/or alarms in the system.
Note When using inband management carried over a dedicated timeslot, you need to
add a Proprietary RIP or RIP2 routing protocol (inband-management <timeslot>
protocol {ppp | fr} routing-protocol {prop-rip | rip2}. It is highly recommended to
use RIP2 protocol rather than Proprietary RIP.
Figure 7-17 shows a typical application that uses the ring protection topology.
In each Megaplex-4 unit on the ring, two E1 or T1 ports (identified as port 1 and
port 2 in Figure 7-17) are defined as a protection group pair. One port of each
unit (in this example, port 2) is configured as working port: under normal
conditions, each Megaplex-4 transmits data to the next node through the working
port, and receives through the protection port. Timeslots not connected to local
channels are bypassed.
Working Ring
Protection Ring
Central A B C D
HS-6N
HS-6N HS-6N HS-6N
A B C D
User's Equipment User's Equipment User's Equipment User's Equipment User's Equipment
Figure 7-17. E1/T1 Ring Protection – Signal Flow during Normal Operation
If one of the segments in the ring fails (see Figure 7-18), the CL modules of the
two Megaplex-4 units adjacent to the failure point detect the loss of signal and
change the signal routing within the corresponding units. Therefore, each unit
now receives and transmits only through the synchronized port. Timeslots
previously bypassed between the ports are now transferred between the receive
and transmit sides of the active port by a connection similar to the remote
loopback, thereby preserving transmission path continuity.
Working Ring
Protection Ring
Central A B C D
HS-6N
HS-6N HS-6N HS-6N HS-6N
A B C D
User's Equipment User's Equipment User's Equipment User's Equipment User's Equipment
Figure 7-18. E1/T1 Ring Protection – Signal Flow after Segment Failure
Note that all the other Megaplex-4 units do not change their operating
configuration: only the units that are connected to the failed segment take action
in response to the failure.
Notes
• To prevent unnecessary switching to the protection path, do not activate
remote loopbacks, or loopbacks on timeslots, on ports connected to the ring.
• When it is necessary to perform local bypassing (on the same module) from
another port to one of the ports participating in ring protection, you can do
that only for the working port; for the protection port, you get an error
message.
Adding working and bind {working | protection} e1 Using no bind protection (e1/e1-i)
protection e1/e1-i <slot>/<port>/[<tributary>] removes the protection port from the
ports to the TDM group bind {working | protection} e1-i group. There is no need to remove the
<slot>/<port> working port from the group.
[<tributary>] relates to Megaplex
Optimux cards (OP-34C, OP-108C) as
protection ports (for internal E1 port
numbering in Optimux modules, see
relevant section of Appendix B).
Adding working and bind {working | protection} t1 Using no bind protection (t1/t1-i/ds-1)
protection t1/t1-i <slot>/<port>/ removes the protection port from the
ports to the TDM group bind {working | protection} t1-i group. There is no need to remove the
<slot>/<port> working port from the group.
Example
To add and configure a TDM Ring protection group:
• Protection group number – 2
• Working link – Port 1 of the module installed in slot 6
• Protection link – Port 2 of the module installed in slot 5
• Wait-to-restore period – 200 seconds.
mp4100#configure protection tdm-ring 2 bind working e1 6/1
mp4100>config>protection> tdm-ring(2)#bind protection e1 5/2
mp4100>config>protection> tdm-ring(2)#wait-to-restore 200
8.1 Bridge
The Megaplex-4 bridge is a VLAN-aware Layer-2 forwarding entity. Eleven bridge
instances can be created in the device: one bridge for the dual CL.2 modules and
one bridge for each M-ETH module.
Standards
IEEE 802.1D, 802.1Q
Benefits
The bridge is used to deliver EPLAN and EVPLAN (any-to-any) services.
Factory Defaults
By default, no bridge instances exist in the Megaplex-4 system.
Functional Description
A bridge is a forwarding entity used by Megaplex-4 for delivering E-LAN services
and G.8032 ring protection. 11 bridge instances can be defined in Megaplex-4:
one bridge for the CL subsystem (always bridge 1) and one bridge per M-ETH
module. In total, Megaplex-4 provides up to 170 bridge ports, subdivided as
follows:
• 80 ports on the CL.2 bridge
• 9 ports per M-ETH module bridge (8 external + 1 internal) – maximum 90
ports per chassis.
The bridge operates in VLAN-aware mode (IVL) with ingress filtering. It accepts
tagged frames only. To be admitted to the bridge, a frame’s VID must be
configured as a part of the bridge port VLAN member set. Untagged frames must
receive a relevant VID at port ingress (tag push) or they will be dropped.
The Megaplex-4 bridge supports up to 64 broadcast domains (bridge/VLAN) and a
MAC table with up to 16K entries. The MAC table flush is supported per bridge
instance. MAC address aging time is configured per chassis in the range of 60 to
3000 seconds (Default=300 seconds).
Megaplex-4 supports RSTP which can be used to prevent loops in Layer 2
networks and provides rapid convergence of the spanning tree.
Bridge Model
A bridge is defined by a bridge number, bridge ports and a VLAN membership
table that specifies which bridge ports are members in a certain broadcast
domain (VLAN).
Traffic in and out of a bridge port is configured using flows. This allows editing
action at ingress and egress bridge ports.
Bridge port to physical port mapping is always 1:1.
Note There are two routers in the Megaplex-4 architecture: Router 1 is used for inband
management, while Router 2 is used for pseudowire routing. Router 2 is
explained in the Router (Pseudowire) section.
mng-eth mng-eth
cl-a cl-b
RI#2
DTS
PPP
Router
BP#3 BP#2
DCC
RI#3
1 PPP
RI#1
Bridge#1 Aware Host
BP#1
SVI#1
The default management entities are created automatically by the system and are
in “no shutdown” state by default. These entities include Router 1 interface and
SVI port 1 connecting the router interface to the bridge. This SVI is not connected
to the bridge but represents Ethernet Control ports of both CL.2 modules.
The following table summarizes the default configuration file entities and their
automatically assigned ID numbers, which you can change later, if needed.
Entity Number
Router 1 interface 1
Admission to Bridge
In order for a frame to be admitted to the bridge, its classification must match
the flow classification configured for the bridge port.
In VLAN-aware mode, an Egress tagged port must be defined. Additionally, flows
with untagged classification must have a push editing action.
In VLAN-unaware mode (M-ETH bridges only), any packet may be admitted
according to the configured flow classifications.
specified editing actions. The following table shows the editing action on the
reverse flow, as well as the VLAN learned from the flow.
VLAN Y..Z Push VLAN X, swap VLAN Z Not allowed Not allowed
p-bit fixed/copy/profile
Link A Link A
Bridge 3 Bridge 3
Link Cost
Every link in the network receives a certain cost. Usually, higher-bandwidth links
that are adjacent to the root bridge are assigned a lower cost. Lower-bandwidth
links that are multiple hops away from the root bridge are assigned a higher cost.
Once link costs are estimated, STP determines the lowest cost connections from
each designated bridge to the root bridge to determine the lowest-cost path. It
also blocks all the other higher cost links to prevent loops in the network.
3. Configure the new bridge port and bind it to the bridge as illustrated and
explained in the table below.
Configuring spanning tree (see spanning-tree Only CL.2/A modules support this
below) feature
If the bridge port is set as a member
in RSTP, it cannot be a member of
LAG, Ethernet group or ERP at the
same time.
Displaying MAC address table for show mac-address-table all Up to the first 100 entries are
all ports/VLANs or selected [vlan <vlan-id range v1..v2> | displayed on the screen.
VLANs/VLAN range/port/port port <port-number range
ranges p1..p2> ]
Defining the time duration in forward-time <4-30> You cannot assign forward-time a
listening and learning states that value less than max-age/2+1.
precede the forwarding state, in
seconds
Defining the maximum age of max-age <6-40> You cannot assign max-age a
the configuration BPDU can be value that is less than 2*(hello-
maintained on a device time+1) or more than 2*(forward-
(seconds). time–1).
Defining the operation mode for mode {mstp | rstp} mstp is not supported.
spanning-tree
Assigning a name to the bridge name <port-name> To delete the bridge port name, enter
port no name
Binding the bridge port to an bind ethernet <slot/port> M-ETH external bridge ports only
M-ETH Ethernet port To remove the binding, enter no bind
Assigning a default VLAN ID to pvid <vlan-id> Not relevant for Bridge 1 ports
an access port (for untagged or
priority-tagged frames) to
designate the virtual LAN
segment to which this port is
connected
Assigning a name to the VLAN name <vlan-name> To delete the VLAN name, enter
no name
Configuring bridge port as root root <bridge-port> This command is available only if
port in E-Tree mode the VLAN mode is E-Tree
When all E-Tree bridge ports are
defined as root, the bridge
actually functions as E-LAN.
The following commands are available in spanning tree level of port, at the
config>bridge(1)>port(<port-number>) >spanning-tree# prompt.
Enabling the port as an edge admin-edge To cancel the edge port, enter no
port admin-edge.
Enabling the port as the edge auto-edge Using no before the command
port automatically cancels the setting.
Setting the path cost for the cost <number> If a loop occurs, the path cost is used
port to select an interface to place into
the forwarding state.
A lower path cost represents higher
speed links.
Assigning the priority value on priority <0, 16, 32, 48, 64, 80,
the port 96, 112, 128, 144, 160, 176,
192, 208, 224, 240>
10
BP 1 7 BP 1 6 BP 1 5
Bind
RI#2
DTS
BP 1 8
PPP
Flow Router
GbE cl-b 1
DCC
RI#3
RI#1 PPP
BP 1 1
directional flow in all Bridge#1 Aware
W
BP 1 4
BP 1 2 BP 1 5 BP 1 3
exit all
### Define the Flows. The Bridge is working on VLAN 100. The
MNG ‘host’ is untagged####
configure flows
flow svi-bp
ingress-port svi 1
egress-port bridge-port 1 1
classifier mng-untagged
vlan-tag push vlan 100 p-bit fixed 7
no shutdown
exit
flow bp-svi
ingress-port bridge-port 1 1
egress-port svi 1
classifier mng-100
vlan-tag pop vlan
no shutdown
exit
flow eth-mng-bp
ingress-port mng-ethernet cl-a/1
egress-port bridge-port 1 7
classifier mng-untagged
vlan-tag push vlan 100 p-bit fixed 7
no shutdown
exit
flow bp-eth-mng
ingress-port bridge-port 1 7
egress-port mng-ethernet cl-a/1
classifier mng-100
vlan-tag pop vlan
no shutdown
exit
BP 1 7 BP 1 6 BP 1 5
Bind
RI#2
DTS
BP 1 8
PPP
W
Flow Router
ERP#2
GbE cl-b 1
DCC
RI#3
RI#1 PPP
E
BP 1 1
directional flow in all Bridge#1 Aware
SVI#1
CL.2 assemblies
GbE cl-a 2
BP 1 4
20
BP 1 2 BP 1 5 BP 1 3
Eth 1 1
Bridge #4
BP 4 1
BP 4 3
ERP#3
BP 4 2
Eth 1 2
E
Eth 1 3
21
M-ETH in slot #1
Bridge #7
eth 2 1
BP 7 5
BP 7 1
Eth 2 2
BP 7 8
Eth 2 8
22
M-ETH in slot #2
####QoS Configuration######
exit all
configure qos
shaper-profile b-s
bandwidth cir 50000
exit
policer-profile 10m
bandwidth cir 10000 eir 0
exit
queue-group-profile b-s
queue-block 0/1
profile DefaultQueue1
shaper profile b-s
exit all
#### Configuration Physical Ports ######
configure port
ethernet cl-a/2
no shutdown
queue-group-profile b-s
exit all
configure port
ethernet 1/3
no shutdown
queue-group-profile b-s
exit all
configure port
ethernet 2/8
no shutdown
queue-group-profile b-s
exit all
flow 20
class vlan200
ingress Ethernet cl-a/2
egress bridge-port 1 4
reverse-direction queue 0 block 0/1
policer-profile 10m
no shutdown
exit
flow 21
class vlan200
ingress Ethernet 1/3
egress bridge-port 1 5
reverse-direction queue 0 block 0/1
policer profile 10m
no shutdown
exit
flow 22
class vlan200
ingress Ethernet 2/8
egress bridge-port 1 3
reverse-direction queue 0 block 0/1
policer-profile 10m
no shutdown
exit
mng-eth mng-eth
L. MAC
cl-a cl-b
GbE cl-a 1
BP 1 7 BP 1 6 BP 1 5
Bind
RI#2
DTS
BP 1 8
PPP
W
Flow Router
ERP#2
GbE cl-b 1
DCC
RI#3
RI#1 PPP
E
MNG flow pop/push, bi-
BP 1 9
BP 1 1
directional flow in all Bridge#1 Aware
SVI#1
CL.2 assemblies
GbE cl-a 2
BP 1 4
BP 1 2 BP 1 5 BP 1 3
Eth 1 1
Bridge #4
BP 4 1
BP 4 3
30
BP 4 2
Eth 1 2
Eth 1 3
M-ETH in slot #1
Bridge #7
eth 2 1
BP 7 5
BP 7 1
Eth 2 2
31
BP 7 8
Eth 2 8
M-ETH in slot #2
exit
queue-group-profile b-s
queue-block 0/1
profile DefaultQueue1
shaper profile b-s
exit all
configure port
ethernet 2/2
no shutdown
queue-group profile b-s
exit all
configure port
ethernet 2/1
no shutdown
queue-group profile b-s
exit all
configure port
ethernet 1/2
no shutdown
queue-group profile b-s
exit all
configure port
ethernet 1/1
no shutdown
queue-group profile b-s
exit all
####Bridge 1 Configuration######
config bridge 1
vlan-aware
port 1 2
no shutdown
exit
port 1 3
no shutdown
exit
####Bridge 7 Configuration######
config bridge 7
vlan-aware
port 1
no shutdown
exit
port 8
no shutdown
bind Ethernet 2/2
exit
port 5
no shutdown
bind Ethernet 2/1
exit
####Bridge 4 Configuration######
config bridge 4
vlan-aware
port 1
no shutdown
exit
bind Ethernet 1/1
port 2
no shutdown
exit
bind Ethernet 1/2
port 3
no shutdown
exit
######Flow Configuration######
exit all
config flows
classifier vlan200 match-any
match vlan 200
exit
flow 30
class vlan200
ingress bridge-port 1 2
egress bridge-port 4 3
reverse-direction queue 0 block 0/1
policer-profile 10m
no shutdown
exit
flow 31
class vlan200
ingress bridge-port 1 3
egress bridge-port 7 1
reverse-direction queue 0 block 0/1
policer-profile 10m
no shutdown
exit
Megaplex-4_A
M-ETH
CL.2 A ETH 2/1
ETH cl-a/2
NMS ETX-1_C
ETH1
CL.2 A
ETH5
ETH cl-a/1
ETH2
CL.2 A
ETH cl-a/1
VS-6/E&M
ETH 2/1
CL.2 A
ETH cl-a/2
Megaplex-4_B
Note To use RSTP, the MAC address of BPDU packet must be set as 01-80-C2-00-00-
00 peer.
ethernet cl-a/2
no shutdown
l2cp profile RSTP
exit
ethernet 2/1
no shutdown
queue-group profile rstp
exit
exit all
flow cl-a/1_b1
classifier "v100"
ingress-port ethernet cl-a/1
egress-port bridge-port 1 1
reverse-direction queue 0 block 0/1
no shutdown
exit
flow cl-a/2_b2
classifier "v100"
ingress-port ethernet cl-a/2
egress-port bridge-port 1 2
reverse-direction queue 0 block 0/1
no shutdown
exit
flow 2/1_b3
classifier "v100"
ingress-port ethernet 2/1
egress-port bridge-port 1 3
reverse-direction queue 0 block 0/1
no shutdown
exit
exit all
configure port
l2cp-profile RSTP mac 01-80-C2-00-00-00 peer
ethernet cl-a/2
no shutdown
l2cp profile RSTP
exit
ethernet 2/1
no shutdown
queue-group profile rstp
exit
exit all
flow cl-a/1_b1
classifier "v100"
ingress-port ethernet cl-a/1
egress-port bridge-port 1 1
reverse-direction queue 0 block 0/1
no shutdown
exit
flow cl-a/2_b2
classifier "v100"
ingress-port ethernet cl-a/2
egress-port bridge-port 1 2
reverse-direction queue 0 block 0/1
no shutdown
exit
flow 2/1_b3
classifier "v100"
ingress-port ethernet 2/1
egress-port bridge-port 1 3
reverse-direction queue 0 block 0/1
no shutdown
exit
exit all
To display MAC address table for all ports and VLANs (up to 100 entries):
• At the config>bridge(bridge_number)# prompt, enter show mac-address-table
all.
The MAC address table is displayed.
mp4100# configure bridge 1
mp4100>config>bridge(1)# show mac-address-table all
6 00-00-00-00-02-01 3 Dynamic
6 00-00-00-00-03-01 5 Dynamic
6 00-00-00-00-10-01 6 Dynamic
To display all the MAC address table entries (up to 16384 addresses):
1. Open a TFTP Server for file transfer to a folder selected on a PC.
2. At the file# prompt, enter copy mac-table tftp://<PC IP address>/<filename>
mp4100>file# copy mac-table tftp://172.17.151.59/MAC_TAB.txt
Are you sure? [yes/no] _ y
mp4100>file#
*****
File copy command was completed.*****
Configuration Errors
Table 8-3 lists messages generated by Megaplex-4 when a configuration error is
detected.
540 Error BRIDGE PORT IS SHUTDOWN Bridge port must be bound to SVI
541 Error MORE THAN ONE SVI BOUND Bridge port should be bound to a single SVI
TO BRIDGE PORT
542 Error SVI PORT IS NOT CONNECTED SVI is enabled (“no shutdown”) but not bound
543 Error SAME SVI BOUND TO SVI must be bound to bridge port 1:1
DIFFERENT BRIDGE PORTS
544 Error BRIDGE PORT NOT BOUND TO A bridge port is defined but not bound to any other port.
PORT
548 Error ILLEGAL BRIDGE PORT BINDING You cannot bind more than one physical port to a bridge
port.
600 Error 2 SVI FROM SAME CARD CAN’T Two SVI ports connected to two PWs defined on the same
USE SAME VLAN module cannot use the same VLAN.
700 Error NUM OF BRIDGE PORTS The maximum number of bridge ports is as follows:
EXCEEDED MAX • 80 for bridge number 1 (CL modules)
• 9 bridge pors for each M-ETH bridge
701 Error VLAN MEMBER AND FL CONF The VLAN table does not match the bridge/flow
MISMATCH configuration
702 Error PORT ALREADY IN USE Two flows with the same VLAN classification use the same
port.
703 Error REVERSE DIRECTION IS This flow must be configured in the reverse direction.
MISSING
705 Error DEFAULT QUEUE IS NOT This flow must have a valid non-default queue group
PERMITTTED profile.
706 Error NUM OF FLOWS OVER M-ETH M-ETH bridge cannot be connected to more than one
BRIDGE EXCEEDS ONE flow.
707 Error INVALID VLAN IDENTIFIER Flows connected to a bridge must have a VLAN
classification
708 Error WRONG FLOW ON PROTECTED A port protected by Ethernet group protection cannot
PORT serve as a flow ingress/egress port
709 Error BRIDGE PORT MUST BE EGRESS When configuring a flow between a physical port and a
bridge port, the ingress and egress ports must be set as
follows:
• physical port= ingress port
• bridge port = egress port.
8.2 Cross-Connections
The matrix in the figure below describes all possible cross-connections you can
perform in the Megaplex-4.
The matrix cells are color-coded to indicate which option (command) to choose
for the various modules/ports/timeslots/entities at both ends, as follows:
ds0, tdm, split-ts cross-connect on the DS0 or DS1 level and/or split timeslot cross-connect
ds0, tdm cross-connect on the DS0 level and/or split timeslot cross-connect
A number inside the cell refers to a special note regarding this type of
cross-connect.
Examples of using the table:
• To cross-connect an e1-i port of an M8SL module to an e1-i port on the CL.2
module you have to use ds0 cross-connect.
• To cross-connect a t1-i port to vt1.5 virtual tributary or e1-i to sdh, you have
to use sdh-sonet cross-connect
• To cross-connect the entire e1 port traffic of an M16E1 module transparently
to vc-12, you have to use sdh-sonet mapping
• To cross-connect the entire e1 port traffic of an M16E1 module transparently
to vc-12, you have to use sdh-sonet mapping
• To map the entire e1 port to an e1-i port, you can use either ds1 or ds0
cross-connect
• To cross-connect an hdlc port to e1, you have to use the bind command
• To cross-connect unframed stream, you have to use the ds1 command.
Split timeslot cross-connect is possible for the same ports where ds0
cross-connect is used, when working with the following modules: HSU-6/HSU-12,
HS-S, HS-RN, VC-4A, VC-8A, LS-6N/LS-12, VS serial ports operating in V.110
mode. HS-6N/12N, HS-703, HSF-2, VC-4/OMNI, voice ports of VS modules and
cmd channels of TP and VS-6/BIN modules do not support split timeslot
cross-connect.
Factory Defaults
No cross-connections exist in Megaplex-4 by default.
Benefits
Cross-connections allow flexible mapping of individual DS0 channels, full DS1
streams, pseudowire or VC/VT entities.
Functional Description
Timeslot Types
When configuring the cross-connect, it is necessary to instruct each port how to
handle the traffic flow and signaling information. This is performed by defining
the timeslot type.
The selections are as follows:
• data: the timeslot is handled as a data channel. This means that any signaling
information associated with the channel is ignored.
• voice: the timeslot is handled as a voice channel. This means two things:
It is necessary to select a link framing mode that supports channel
associated signaling, e.g., G.704 multiframe (G.732S) for E1, SF (D4) or
ESF for T1.
The signaling information of the channel is routed (automatically) in
parallel with the channel payload.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
• Voice and data I/O modules (see Table 8-6): not all the modules support
unidirectional capabilities, but only modules which require a single timeslot
per channel, and that do not require handshaking for setting up a link.
Therefore, unidirectional broadcast is supported by VC-4/4A/8/8A/16 voice
modules with E&M and FXS interfaces, HS-6N/12N, HS-RN, or VS data
modules, as well as LS-6N/LS-12 (internal ports). In addition, VS-6/E&M and
FXS/E&M modules support unidirectional receive capabilities. ISDN interface
modules cannot support this capability.
ASMi-54C/N Internal E1 √ √
M8SL
SH-16
T3 Internal T1 √ √
VC-4/4A/8/8A/16 FXO - -
HS-RN serial √ √
LS-6N/LS-12 serial - -
LS-6N/LS-12 serial-bundle √ √
HS-6N/HS-12N serial √ √
VC-4/OMNI Modules
The logic to select the active channel can be based on voice signaling
(bidirection-rx) or voice-grade data activity (bi-direction). The choice depends on
the connected equipment: if central/remote device supports signaling, use
bidirection-rx mode, otherwise use bi-direction mode. Bidirectional broadcast
requires signaling (legacy or abcd) configured for internal voice ports.
The bidirectional broadcast capacity of the VC-4/OMNI module is 30 timeslots. Only
one internal voice port per external port of VC-4/OMNI module can be connected
using “bidirection-rx” DS0 cross connect option. Other ports are usually configured
as bi-direction DS0 cross-connect. A typical application is shown in Figure 8-7.
Regional Centers
VC-4/OMNI
E1
Megaplex-4
E1 1/1 TS 1 Voice
E1
SCADA
Megaplex voice port: RTU
National Center bi-direction
Voice port 3/2/2: Voice port 3/2/1: Up to 30
bi-direction bidirection-rx Nodes
VS-4/OMNI
VC-4/OMNI
E1 6/1 TS 1
E1 5/1 TS 1 Voice
Network E1
E1
SCADA Megaplex-4
Megaplex-4 Megaplex RTU
voice port:
bi-direction
SCADA
VC-4/OMNI VC-4/OMNI
Megaplex voice port: RTU
bi-direction
Megaplex-4
SCADA
VS Modules
The logic to select the active channel can be based on end-to-end control with
RTS signaling (end-to-end-control is selected) or data activity (no end-to-end-
control). The choice depends on the connected equipment: if central/remote
device supports RTS signaling, use ene-to-end control signaling.
A basic bidirectional broadcast application is shown in Figure 8-8.
VS-12
E1 1/1 TS 1 64 kbps
E1
Up to 30
Control Center nodes
VS-12
VS-12
64 kbps E1 5/1 TS 1 64 kbps
E1
SCADA Megaplex-4 Megaplex
VS serial port: RTU
VS serial port 3/1:
bi-direction
bidirection-rx
VS-12
E1-i CL-A/1 TS 1
64 kbps
SDH
Megaplex VS serial port:
RTU
bi-direction
VS-12
E1 1/1 TS 1 64 kbps
E1
National Center (Monitoring) Regional Center Megaplex VS Serial Port: RTU
bi-direction
TDM Up to 30
tdm-bridge3/1 Bridge Nodes
VS-12 E1 6/1 TS 1 unidirection-rx
VS-12
64 kbps Serial Port
SCADA Megaplex-4 VS-12 Bind E1 5/1 TS 1
VS Serial Port: 64 kbps
Unidirection-rx 64 kbps
E1
tdm-bridge3/1
Megaplex-4 bidirection-rx
Megaplex VS Serial Port: RTU
bi-direction
VS Serial Port 3/2
SCADA
VS-12
Figure 8-9. Bidirectional Broadcast to/from Remote RTUs with Monitoring over E1
E1 1/1 TS 1 Voice
E1
SCADA
DS0 Cross-Connect
Cross-connecting timeslot x (or ds0 {e1 | t1 | e1-i | t1-i | ds1} no ds0 {e1 | t1 | e1-i | t1-i | ds1}
range of sequential timeslots <slot>/<port>/[<tributary>] ts <slot>/<port>/[<tributary>] ts {<x> |
x1..x2) of the e1/t1/e1-i/t1- {<x> | <[x1..x2]>} e1 <[x1..x2]>} e1 <slot>/<port>/
i/ds1/ds1-opt port to timeslot <slot>/<port>/[<tributary>] [<tributary>] {ts <y> | start-ts <y1>}
y (or range of sequential {ts <y> | start-ts <y1>} {data | removes cross-connection
timeslots starting from y1) on voice} [bi-direction | unidirection- If one of the timeslots is defined as
the e1 port and setting rx | unidirection-tx] voice and the CL module has no
its/their type and direction SDH/SONET ports, this cross-connect
is impossible for internal T1 ports 17
to 28 of the T3 module (due to
insufficient signaling bandwidth).
See Examples 3,4
Cross-connecting timeslot x (or ds0 {e1 | t1 | e1-i | t1-i | ds1} no ds0 {e1 | t1 | e1-i | t1-i | ds1}
range of sequential timeslots <slot>/<port>/[<tributary>] ts <slot>/<port>/[<tributary>] ts {<x> |
x1..x2) of the e1/t1/e1-i/t1- {<x> | <[x1..x2]>} t1 <]x1..x2]>} t1 <slot>/<port>/
i/ds1/ds1-opt port to timeslot <slot>/<port>/[<tributary>] [<tributary>] {ts <y> | start-ts <y1>}
y (or range of sequential {ts <y> | start-ts <y1>} {data | removes cross-connection
timeslots starting from y1) on voice} [bi-direction | unidirection- If one of the timeslots is defined as
the t1 port and setting its/their rx | unidirection-tx] voice and the CL module has no
type and direction SDH/SONET ports, this cross-connect
is impossible for internal T1 ports 17
to 28 of the T3 module (due to
insufficient signaling bandwidth).
See Examples 3,4
Cross-connecting timeslot x of ds0 {e1 | t1 | e1-i | t1-i | ds1} no ds0 {e1 | t1 | e1-i | t1-i | ds1}
the e1/t1/e1-i/t1-i/ds1 port to <slot>/<port> ts <x> voice <slot>/<port> ts <x> voice
a voice port and setting its <slot>/<port>/[<tributary>} <slot>/<port>/[<tributary>] removes
direction [bi-direction | unidirection-rx | cross-connection
unidirection-tx | bidirection-rx } [<tributary>] is relevant only for
VC-4/OMNI modules.
bidirection-rx mode is available only
for the following modules:
• VC-4/OMNI modules operating in
omni-bus or p2mp-src module
• E&M interfaces of VS-6/E&M and
FXS/E&M modules.
This selection is available only for a
single internal port (tributary) per
each external port.
If the CL model does not have
SDH/SONET ports, this
cross-connect is impossible for
internal T1 ports 17 to 28 of the T3
module (due to insufficient signaling
bandwidth).
see Examples 1, 5, 7
Cross-connecting timeslot x of ds0 {e1 | t1 | e1-i | t1-i | ds1} no ds0 {e1 | t1 | e1-i | t1-i | ds1}
the e1/t1/e1-i/t1-i/ds1/ds1-opt <slot>/<port>/[<tributary>] ts <x> <slot>/<port>/[<tributary>] ts <x>
port to cmd-channel and cmd-channel <slot>/<port> cmd-channel <slot>/<port> removes
setting its direction [bi-direction | unidirection-rx | cross-connection
unidirection-tx] This command is available in TP and
VS-6/BIN modules. See Example in
Megaplex-4 I/O Modules Installation
and Operation Manual,
Teleprotection Module section.
Cross-connecting timeslot x (or ds0 {e1 | t1 | e1-i | t1-i | ds1} no ds0 {e1 | t1 | e1-i | t1-i | ds1}
range of sequential timeslots <slot>/<port> ts <x> serial <slot>/<port> ts <x> serial
x1..x2) of the e1/t1/e1-i/t1- <slot>/<port> [bi-direction | <slot>/<port> removes
i/ds1/ds1-opt port to a serial unidirection-rx | unidirection-tx | cross-connection
port and setting its direction bidirection-rx } bidirection-rx mode is available only
in VS modules operating in 3-bit
transitional mode at the rate of
64 kbps.
see Examples 1, 2, 6, 8
Cross-connecting timeslot x of ds0 {e1 | t1 | e1-i | t1-i | ds1} bi-direction –not used in this version
the e1/t1/e1-i/t1-i/ds1 port to <slot>/<port> ts <x> tdm-bridge unidirection-rx – can be used in
a tdm bridge of VS module and <slot>/<port> [bi-direction | monitoring applications
setting its direction in unidirection-rx | bidirection-rx }
bidirection-rx - use for connections
bidirectional broadcast
to RTUs
applications
see Example 9
Cross-connecting the range of ds0 {e1 | t1 | e1-i | t1-i} no ds0 {e1 | t1 | e1-i | t1-i}
sequential timeslots x1..x2) of <slot>/<port>/[<tributary>] ts <slot>/<port>/[<tributary>] ts
the e1/t1/e1-i/t1-i port to an <x1..x2> hdlc <slot>/<port> <x1..x2> hdlc <slot>/<port> removes
hdlc port (M8E1, M8T1 cross-connection
modules) x2 must be an even number
(Ethernet can be mapped only to an
even number of TS).
Cross-connecting timeslot x (or ds0 {e1 | t1 | e1-i | t1-i | ds1} no ds0 {e1 | t1 | e1-i | t1-i | ds1}
range of sequential timeslots <slot>/<port>/[<tributary>] ts <slot>/<port>/
x1..x2) of the e1/t1/e1-i/t1- {<x> | <[x1..x2]>} e1-i [<tributary>] ts {<x> | <[x1..x2]>}
i/ds1/ds1-opt port to timeslot <slot>/<port>/[<tributary>] {ts e1-i <slot>/<port>/ [<tributary>] {ts
y (or range of sequential <y> | start-ts <y1>} {data | voice} <y> | start-ts <y1>} removes cross-
timeslots starting from y1) on [bi-direction | unidirection-rx | connection
the e1-i port and setting unidirection-tx] See Examples 3,4
its/their type and direction
Cross-connecting timeslot x (or ds0 {e1 | t1 | e1-i | t1-i | ds1} no ds0 {e1 | t1 | e1-i | t1-i | ds1}
range of sequential timeslots <slot>/<port>/[<tributary>] ts <slot>/<port>/
x1..x2) of the e1/t1/e1-i/t1- {<x> | <[x1..x2]>} t1-i [<tributary>] ts {<x> | <[x1..x2]>}
i/ds1/ds1-opt port to timeslot <slot>/<port>/[<tributary>] {ts t1-i <slot>/<port>/ [<tributary>] {ts
y (or range of sequential <y> | start-ts <y1>} {data | voice} <y> | start-ts <y1>} removes cross-
timeslots starting from y1) on [bi-direction | unidirection-rx | connection
the t1-i port and setting unidirection-tx] See Examples 3,4
its/their type and direction
Cross-connecting timeslot x (or ds0 {e1 | t1 | e1-i | t1-i | ds1} no ds0 {e1 | t1 | e1-i | t1-i | ds1}
range of sequential timeslots <slot>/<port>/[<tributary>] ts <slot>/<port>/
x1..x2) of the e1/t1/e1-i/t1- {<x> | <[x1..x2]>} ds1 [<tributary>] ts {<x> | <[x1..x2]>}
i/ds1/ds1-opt port to timeslot <slot>/<port>/[<tributary>] {ts ds1 <slot>/<port>/ [<tributary>]
y (or range of sequential <y> | start-ts <y1>} {data | voice} {ts <y> | start-ts <y1>} removes
timeslots starting from y1) on [bi-direction | unidirection-rx | cross-connection
the ds1 port and setting unidirection-tx]
its/their type and direction
Cross-connecting timeslot x of ds0 {e1 | t1 | e1-i | t1-i | ds1} Using no before ds0 {e1 | t1 | e1-i |
the e1/t1/e1-i/t1-i/ds1 port to <slot>/<port>/[<tributary>] ts <x> t1-i | ds1} <slot>/<port>/
bri port (HS-S, HS-U-6, bri <slot>/<port>/[<tributary>] [<tributary>] ts <x> bri
HS-U-12 modules) <slot>/<port> /[<tributary> removes
cross-connection
Cross-connecting timeslot x of ds0 {e1 | t1 | e1-i | t1-i | ds1} no ds0 {e1 | t1 | e1-i | t1-i | ds1}
the e1/t1/e1-i/t1-i/ds1 port to <slot>/<port>/[<tributary>] ts <x> <slot>/<port>/
serial-bundle port (LS-6N, serial-bundle <slot>/<port> [bi- [<tributary>] ts <x> serial-bundle
LS-12 modules) direction | unidirection-rx | <slot>/<port> removes
unidirection-tx ] cross-connection
Note: The optional <tributary> index relates to different cards and denotes different entities, depending on
the ports if follows:
• When following {e1 | t1 | e1-i | t1-i | ds1} options, the index relates to only of the following:
Megaplex Optimux cards (OP-34C, OP-108C) and denotes their internal E1 ports. Therefore, the
cross-connect side involving these tributary ports is relevant only for e1 port options, not for t1,
e1-i, t1-i, or ds1.
Megaplex T3 modules and denotes their internal T1 ports. Therefore, the cross-connect side involving
these tributary ports is relevant only for t1 port options, not for e1, e1-i, t1-i, or ds1.
config
cr
ds0 e1 1/2 ts 1 e1 1/1 ts 1 data unidirection-rx
ds0 e1 2/1 ts 1 e1 1/1 ts 1 data unidirection-rx
ds0 e1 3/1 ts 1 e1 1/1 ts 1 data unidirection-rx
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Sending from:
VS-12, serial port 3/2
Encapsulation mode: 3bit-transitional
• Sending to/receiving from:
M8E1 installed in slot 1: port 1, timeslot 1 (connected to RTU)
M8E1 installed in slot 5: port 1, timeslot 1 (connected to RTU)
CL-A, port E1-i 1, timeslot 1 (connected to RTU)
• Monitoring:
M8E1 installed in slot 6: port 1, timeslot 1 (connected to National Center)
configure slot 3 card-type versatile vs-12
configure slot 1 card-type e1-t1 m8e1
configure slot 5 card-type e1-t1 m8e1
configure slot cl-a card-type cl cl2-622gbe
#======================================#
# Active OC : BI-BRD-RX to 3 RTUs #
#======================================#
#==============================================#
# Monitoring NOC : UNI-RX from tdm-bridge 3/1 #
#==============================================#
TDM Cross-Connect
Cross-connecting the tdm {e1 | t1 | e1-i | t1-i } <slot>/<port> no tdm {e1 | t1 | e1-i | t1-i }
full payload from this {e1 | t1 | e1-i | t1-i } <slot>/<port> <slot>/<port> command disables
e1/t1/e1-i/t1-i/serial the cross-connection
port with another port Unframed T1 port of M16T1 module
of the same type and cannot be cross-connected with
configuration T1-i port of CL module
If the CL module has no SDH/SONET
ports, this cross-connect is
impossible for unframed E1/T1 port
of VS-16E1T1-PW and VS-6/E1T1
module.
Example 1
• Cross-connecting the full E1 payload
• M16E1 module installed in slot 3
• E1 port 3 with E1 port 2
mp4100>config>xc# tdm e1 3/2 e1 3/3
Example 2
• M16E1 module installed in slot 1
• Port 2, line type G.732S
mp4100>config>port>e1(1/2)# line-type g732s
• Cross-connecting E1 port 2 with internal E1 port 1 on CL-A module
mp4100>config>xc# tdm e1 1/2 e1-i cl-a/1
• Cross-connecting (mapping) internal E1 port 1 to the SDH:
VC-12 = 2
TUG-3 = 1
TUG-2 = 1
AUG 1 = 1
SDH port 1 on the CL-A module.
Configuring a Cross-Connection
Cross-connecting the split-ts {e1 | t1 | e1-i | t1-i | ds1} Used for VC-4A/VC-8A modules working
timeslot bits of the <slot>/<port>/[<tributary>] ts <ts in ADPCM mode
e1/t1/e1-i/t1-i/ds1 port x> bits <bit y> voice voice no ds0 {e1 | t1 | e1-i | t1-i | ds1}
with this voice port <slot/port[/tributary]>} <slot>/<port>/[<tributary>] ts <ts x>
(defining the selected data bits <bit y> voice <slot>/<port>
rate on the voice port) removes cross-connection
The entire number of cross-connected
timeslot bits should match the selected
data rate
Cross-connecting the split-ts {e1 | t1 | e1-i | t1-i | ds1} no ds0 {e1 | t1 | e1-i | t1-i | ds1}
timeslot bits of the <slot>/<port>[<tributary>] ts <ts x> <slot>/<port>/[<tributary>] ts <ts x>
e1/t1/e1-i/t1-i/ds1 port bits <bit y> serial bits <bit y> serial <slot>/<port>
with this serial port <slot/port[/tributary]>} removes cross-connection
(defining the selected data The entire number of cross-connected
rate on the serial port) timeslot bits should match the selected
data rate
Cross-connecting the split-ts {e1 | t1 | e1-i | t1-i | ds1} no ds0 {e1 | t1 | e1-i | t1-i | ds1}
timeslot bits of the <slot>/<port>[<tributary>] ts <ts x> <slot>/<port>/[<tributary>] ts <ts x>
e1/t1/e1-i/t1-i/ds1 port bits <bit y> serial-bundle bits <bit y> serial-bundle <slot>/<port>
with this serial-bundle port <slot>/<port>} removes cross-connection
(defining the selected data The entire number of cross-connected
rate on the serial-bundle timeslot bits should match the selected
port) data rate
Cross-connecting the split-ts {e1 | t1 | e1-i | t1-i | ds1} no ds0 {e1 | t1 | e1-i | t1-i | ds1}
timeslot bits of the <slot>/<port>[<tributary>] ts <ts x> <slot>/<port>/[<tributary>] ts <ts x>
e1/t1/e1-i/t1-i/ds1 port rate-bits <bit y> bri <slot>/<port> rate-bits <bit y> bri <slot>/<port>
with this bri port (defining [<tributary>] [<tributary>] removes cross-connection
the selected data rate on The entire number of cross-connected
the bri port) timeslot bits should match the selected
data rate
Note: The optional <tributary> index relates to different cards and denotes different entities, depending on
the ports if follows:
• When following {e1 | t1 | e1-i | t1-i | ds1} options, the index relates to Megaplex Optimux cards (OP-34C,
OP-108C) only and denotes their internal E1 ports. Therefore, the cross-connect side involving these
tributary ports is relevant only for e1 port options, not for t1, e1-i, t1-i, or ds1.
• When following bri port, the index relates to B1 and B2 channels.
Example
The following section illustrates how to configure the HS-RN module installed in
slot 8 and cross-connect its serial ports with timeslot bits of the M8E1 module
installed in slot 1:
• Data rate 9.6 kbps on ports 1 and 2.
• Data rate 19.2 kbps on ports 3 and 4.
• Administratively enable the ports.
• Leave all other parameters disabled or at their defaults.
• Cross-connect serial port 1 with bits 1 and 2 of timeslot 1 of E1 port 2 of
M8E1 module installed in slot 1 (total data rate 9.6 kbps on serial port 1)
• Cross-connect serial port 2 with bits 1 and 2 of timeslot 1 of E1 port 3 of
the same M8E1 module (total data rate 9.6 kbps on serial port 2)
• Cross-connect serial port 3 with bits 1,2,3,4 of timeslot 1 of E1 port 4 of the
same M8E1 module (total data rate 19.2 kbps on serial port 3)
• Cross-connect serial port 4 with bits 1,2,3,4 of timeslot 1 of E1 port 5 of the
same M8E1 module (total data rate 19.2 kbps on serial port 4)
The total data rate transferred on the HS-RN module is 57.6 kbps.
mp4100>config# #------------hsr-n----------------
mp4100>config# port serial 8/1 no shutdown
mp4100>config# port serial 8/1
mp4100>config>port>serial(8/1)# rate 9.6
mp4100>config>port>serial(8/1)# exit
mp4100>config>port# exit
mp4100>config#
mp4100>config# port serial 8/2 no shutdown
mp4100>config# port serial 8/2
mp4100>config>port>serial(8/2)# rate 9.6
mp4100>config>port>serial(8/2)# exit
mp4100>config>port# exit
mp4100>config#
mp4100>config# port serial 8/3 no shutdown
mp4100>config# port serial 8/3
mp4100>config>port>serial(8/3)# rate 19.2
mp4100>config>port>serial(8/3)# exit
mp4100>config>port# exit
mp4100>config#
mp4100>config# port serial 8/4 no shutdown
mp4100>config# port serial 8/4
mp4100>config>port>serial(8/4)# rate 19.2
mp4100>config>port>serial(8/4)# exit
mp4100>config>port# exit
mp4100>config#
mp4100>config# cr
mp4100>config>xc# split-ts e1 1/2 ts 1 bits 1 serial 8/1
mp4100>config>xc# split-ts e1 1/2 ts 1 bits 2 serial 8/1
mp4100>config>xc#
mp4100>config>xc# split-ts e1 1/3 ts 1 bits 1 serial 8/2
mp4100>config>xc# split-ts e1 1/3 ts 1 bits 2 serial 8/2
mp4100>config>xc#
mp4100>config>xc# split-ts e1 1/4 ts 1 bits 1 serial 8/3
mp4100>config>xc# split-ts e1 1/4 ts 1 bits 2 serial 8/3
mp4100>config>xc# split-ts e1 1/4 ts 1 bits 3 serial 8/3
mp4100>config>xc# split-ts e1 1/4 ts 1 bits 4 serial 8/3
mp4100>config>xc#
mp4100>config>xc# split-ts e1 1/5 ts 1 bits 1 serial 8/4
mp4100>config>xc# split-ts e1 1/5 ts 1 bits 2 serial 8/4
mp4100>config>xc# split-ts e1 1/5 ts 1 bits 3 serial 8/4
mp4100>config>xc# split-ts e1 1/5 ts 1 bits 4 serial 8/4
See more examples in the LS-6N/12 and HSU-6/12 sections of the Megaplex-4 I/O
Modules Installation and Operation Manual.
SDH/SONET Cross-Connect
Cross-connecting the E1 port sdh-sonet vc12-vt2 <slot>/<port>/<au4>/ [/tributary] refers to Megaplex Optimux
of an I/O module with a <tug3>/ <tug2>/<vc12-vt2> cards (OP-34C, OP-108C) only
vc12-vt2 from an SDH port e1<slot>/<port> [/tributary] Adding no before the full command
(“transparent clocking”) disables the cross-connection
This command is available only for
unframed E1 links in ASMi-54C/N,
OP-34C, OP-108C, VS-16E1T1-EoP,
VS-16E1T1-PW, VS-6/E1T1 and M16E1
modules
Cross-connecting the vc12-vt2 sdh-sonet vc12-vt2 Adding no before the full command
from an SDH port with an e1-i <slot>/<port>/<au4>/<tug3>/ disables the cross-connection
port of an I/O module <tug2>/<vc12-vt2> e1-i <slot>/<port> For VS-16E1T1-EoP module, this
command is available only when the line-
type of e1-i port is set as g.732n-crc.
Cross-connecting the vc12-vt2 sdh-sonet vc12-vt2 Adding no before the full command
from an SDH port with a ds1 <slot>/<port>/<au4>/<tug3>/ disables the cross-connection
port of an I/O module <tug2>/<vc12-vt2> ds1 <slot>/<port> This command is available only for
unframed DS1 port in VS-16E1T1-PW and
VS-6/E1T1 modules.
Cross-connecting two vc12-vt2 sdh-sonet vc12-vt2 <slot>/<port>/<au4>/ Adding no before the full command
containers <tug3>/ <tug2>/<vc12-vt2> vc12-vt2 disables the cross-connection
<slot>/<port>/<au4>/ <tug3>/<tug2>/ Number of vc-vt containers per CL
<vc12-vt2> module is limited to 252.
Cross-connecting the T1 port sdh-sonet vc11-vt1.5 Adding no before the full command
of an I/O module with a <slot>/<port>/<au4>/<tug3>/ disables the cross-connection
vc11-vt1.5 from a SONET port <tug2>/<vc11-vt5> t1 <slot>/<port> This command is available only for
(“transparent clocking”) unframed T1 links in M16T1 VS-16E1T1-
EoP, VS-16E1T1-PW and VS-6/E1T1
modules
Cross-connecting two vc3-sts1 sdh-sonet vc3-sts1 Adding no before the full command
<slot>/<port>/<au4>/<tug3> vc3-sts1 disables the cross-connection
<slot>/<port>/<au4>/<tug3>
Cross-connecting two sdh-sonet vc4-sts3c <slot>/<port>/<au4> Adding no before the full command
vc4-sts3c vc4-sts3c <slot>/<port>/<au4> disables the cross-connection
• TUG-2 = 1
• AUG 1 = 1
• SDH port 1 on the CL-A module.
cr sdh-sonet vc12-vt2 cl-a/1/1/1/7/1 e1 1/2
PW-TDM Cross-Connect
Establishing cross- pw-tdm pw <pw number> {ds1 e1 and t1 ports are relevant to
connection <slot>/<port> | e1 <slot>/<port> | t1 VS-6/E1T1 and VS-16E1T1/PW modules
between this <slot>/<port> | e1-i <slot>/<port>} only.
pseudowire and time-slots <ts list> e1-i ports are relevant to the
ds1, e1-i, e1, or SH-16/E1/PW module only.
t1 port
The ds1 port should be populated by
using additional ds0 cross-connect
command between ds1 and other ports
in Megaplex-4 (see example below)
Timeslots in a list can be separated by a
comma or given as a range, for example:
1..3, 5.
Using no before the command removes
the cross-connection
Cross-connect cannot be configured to
PWs defined as protection ports.
A single PW can be connected to a single
DS1 or to a single serial port.
Establishing cross- pw-tdm pw <pw number> serial Using no before the command removes
connection <slot>/<port> the cross-connection
between this Cross-connect cannot be configured to
pseudowire and PWs defined as protection ports.
serial port
A single PW can be connected to a single
serial port. The timeslots on the DS1
port are connected automatically in
accordance with the rate defined on the
serial port.
Example 1
This section provides an example on creating a TDM pseudowire cross-connection
between PW 1 and serial HS-12N port.
PW-TDM cross-connect between:
• Pseudowire (PW) 1.
• MPW-1 module installed in slot 2, DS1 port 1, TS 1.
DS0 cross-connect between:
• HS-12N module installed in slot 10, port 1.
• MPW-1 module installed in slot 2, DS1 port 1, TS 1.
configure cross-connect pw-tdm pw 1 ds1 2/1 time-slots 1
configure cross-connect ds0 ds1 2/1 ts 1 serial 10/1
Example 2
This section provides an example on creating a TDM pseudowire cross-connection
between PW 1 and a serial port located on the same VS module.
Configuration Errors
Table 8-7 lists messages generated by Megaplex-4 when a configuration error is
detected.
190 Error ILLEGAL DEST SLOT/PORT One of the following conditions has been detected:
CONNECTION One or more module channels are connected to a
disabled port (that is, a port configured to shutdown).
One or more module channels are connected to a port
that cannot provide the required connection (for
example, the port is connected to another I/O port).
For a tdm cross-connection: the port definitions are
not symmetrical
191 Error ILLEGAL TIMESLOT The required number of timeslots must be exactly the
ASSIGNMENT same as the number of timeslots assigned on the relevant
module port
192 Error ILLEGAL CROSS CONNECT The number of timeslots routed between two module
ports must be the same for both modules
193 Error TS-16 IS RESERVED FOR CAS To bypass signaling information between E1 ports on
SIGNALING different modules, timeslot 16 of one module must be
bound to timeslot 16 on the other module. Both ports
must use G732S framing, with or without CRC-4 (G732S,
G723S-CRC4).
194 Error ILLEGAL POSITION OF TS BIT When using split timeslot assignment:
ASSIGNMENT 2-bit assignments must start at bit 1, 3, 5 and/or 7.
4-bit assignments must start at bit 1 and/or 5.
Consecutive bits must be assigned to the same channel
195 Error TS ASSIGNMENT/TS REQUEST The timeslot bit assignment does not match the
MISMATCH requirements for such timeslots
196 Error INCORRECT TS TYPE The definition of the timeslot must correspond to the type
of information generated by the module using the
timeslot:
Timeslot cross-connected to serial port: the type must
be data (this also applies to timeslots cross-connected
to HSF modules).
Timeslot cross-connected to voice I/O module: the type
must be voice.
In addition, the types of timeslots cross-connected
between links must be identical.
197 Warning TS DATA TYPE DOESN’T MATCH For T1 links, do not use the B7ZS line code when one or
B7ZS LINE CODE more timeslots are defined as data timeslots
198 Error ILLEGAL BROADCAST The ds0 cross-connect for the specified channel is not
DEFINITION correct.
199 Error NOT COMPLETE BROADCAST The timeslot assignment for the specified port is not
DEFINITION complete.
202 Error UNFRAMED TYPE CROSS-CONNECT TDM cross-connect is not supported between the
MISMATCH following modules:
• OP-108C/34C (E1 ports), M16E1/M16T1 (E1/T1
ports), ASMi-54C/N modules (E1, E1-i ports) on one
side
• M8E1/M8T1 modules (E1/T1 ports), M8SL (E1-i
ports), or MPW-1 (DS1 ports) on the other side
203 Error SPLIT TS BITS X-CONNECTED When configuring split timeslot assignment, shared bits of
TO DIFF SLOTS the same E1/T1 timeslot must be cross-connected with
serial/voice ports belonging to the same slot.
204 Error PORT IS UP BUT NOT X- A port is set to “no shutdown”, but no E1/T1 timeslot is
CONNECTED cross-connected with the port.
205 Error ILLEGAL TS DIRECTION If a timeslot is assigned to a tdm-bridge port, its direction
must be defined as either bidirection-rx or unidirection-rx
(any other option is illegal).
206 Error ASYMMETRIC BI-DIR TS CROSS When using bi-direction cross-connect between two
CONNECT e1/e1-i/t1/t1-i/ds1/ds1-opt ports, the command must be
repeated in both directions. For example:
config cr
ds0 e1 1/2 ts [1..31] e1-i 9/1 start-ts 1 data bi-direction
ds0 e1-i 9/1 ts [1..31] e1 1/2 start-ts 1 data bi-direction
207 Error XC OF VOICE TS WITH SIG IS When CL is CL2-DS0 or CL2-GBEA, some I/O module ports
NOT SUPPORTED cannot be cross-connected to voice ports using cas or
rbmf (robbed bit multiframe) signaling:
• SH-16/E1/PW: DS1 ports 1-16
• VS-6/E1T1: DS1 9-16
• VS-16E1T1/PW: E1/T1 9-16 and DS1 9-16.
Note: For the voice port using “no signaling” or rbf
(robbed bit frame) signaling, this cross-connect is
possible.
319 Error ILLEGAL TDM CROSS CONNECT Unframed T1 port of M16T1 or T3 module cannot be
cross-connected with T1-i port of CL module
750 Error NUM OF BI-DIRECTION-RX TS The total number of timeslots on the VS module serial
EXCEEDS 30 port or tdm-bridge port configured to bidirectional-rx
cross-connect (bidirectional broadcast) cannot exceed 30.
751 Error PORT IS UP BUT NOT BOUND The tdm-bridge port is up but not bound to a serial port.
TO SERIAL
752 Error BOUND SERIAL PORT IS IN The tdm-bridge port is bound to the serial port which is in
SHUTDOWN STATE shutdown state.
753 Error PORT IS BOUND TO MULTIPLE The tdm-bridge port is bound to more than one serial
SERIAL PORTS ports.
754 Error ILLEGAL SERIAL SLOT/PORT The tdm-bridge port is bound to a serial port in another
BOUND slot (the slot of the serial port and tdm-bridge port bound
to it must be the same).
755 Error ILLEGAL ENCAPSULATION The serial port to which the tdm-bridge port is bound
MODE FOR BOUND PORT must be configured to 3-bit-transitional encapsulation
mode.
756 Error PORT IS BOUND TO MULTIPLE The serial port is bound to more than one tdm-bridge
TDM-BRIDGE PORTS ports.
Standards
IEEE 802.1ag-D8, ITU-T Y.1731
Benefits
Ethernet service providers can monitor their services proactively and guarantee
that customers receive the contracted SLA. Fault monitoring and end-to-end
performance measurement provide tools for monitoring frame delay, frame delay
variation, and frame loss and availability.
Factory Defaults
By default, there are no MDs, MAs, or MEPs.
The default OAM CFM multicast address is 01-80-C2-00-00-30.
When a maintenance domain is created, it has the following default
configuration.
md-level 3
classification vlan 0
ais no ais
bind no bind
classification vlan 0
client-md-level 4
direction down
ccm-priority 0
delay-threshold 10
delay-var-threshold 10
classification priority-bit 0
dmm-interval 1s
lmm-interval 1s
delay-measurement-bin no delay-measurement-bin
delay-var-measurement-bin no delay-var-measurement-bin
remote mac-address
00-00-00-00-00-00
Functional Description
OAM (Operation, Administration, and Maintenance) describes the monitoring of
network operation by network operators. OAM is a set of functions used by the
user that enables detection of network faults and measurement of network
performance, as well as distribution of fault-related information. OAM may trigger
control plane or management plane mechanisms, by activating rerouting or by
raising alarms, for example, but such functions are not part of the OAM itself.
OAM functionality ensures that network operators comply with QoS guarantees,
detect anomalies before they escalate, and isolate and bypass network defects.
As a result, the operators can offer binding service-level agreements.
OAM Elements
The Ethernet OAM mechanism monitors connectivity in Maintenance Association
(MA) groups, identified by a Maintenance Association Identifier (MAID). Each
maintenance association consists of two or more maintenance end points (MEP).
Every MA belongs to a maintenance domain (MD), and inherits its level from the
MD to which it belongs. The MD levels are used to specify the scope of the MA
(provider, operator, customer, etc).
• Maintenance Domain (MD) – The network or the part of the network for
which faults in connectivity can be managed. Each maintenance domain has
an MD level attribute which designates the scope of its monitoring.
• Maintenance Association (MA) – A set of MEPs, each configured with the
same MAID and MD level, established to verify the integrity of a single service
instance.
• Maintenance End Point (MEP) – An actively managed CFM entity. A MEP is
both an endpoint of a single MA, and an endpoint of a separate Maintenance
Entity for each of the other MEPs in the same MA. A MEP generates and
receives CFM PDUs and tracks responses.
• Maintenance Intermediate Point (MIP) – MIPs are defined under the MD level
and are transparent to connectivity messages
OAM Functions
RAD’s carrier Ethernet aggregation and demarcation devices feature a
comprehensive hardware-based Ethernet OAM and performance monitoring for
SLA assurance:
• End-to-end Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) per IEEE 802.1ag:
Continuity check (CC)
Non-intrusive loopback
Link trace for fault localization
• End-to-end service and performance monitoring per ITU-T Y.1731
Loss measurement (single-ended)
Delay measurement (two-way).
Note The above limits are subject to the limit of 300 received PPS (packets per
second). This includes AIS, Linktrace, and other management packets. It does not
include continuity check (CC), loopback (LB), delay measurement messages
(DMM), or loss measurement messages (LMM). The LB rate is 200 PPS.
Down MEP
Down MEPs reside at egress ports and are bound to physical ports. These MEPs
receive and send CFM PDU from and to the network. Down MEPs are supported
for either point-to-point or multipoint services. Different MEP locations are
illustrated below.
Figure 8-11 illustrates a point-to-point service between the CL and I/O GbE ports
with the MEP bound to M-ETH port 4. Tx flow in the service points to a queue
block.
Rx Flow
Tx Flow
CL.2 M-ETH
Port 1 DOWN Port 4
MEP
Figure 8-11. Point-to-Point Service with Down MEP Bound to M-ETH Port 4
Figure 8-12 illustrates a point-to-point service between the CL and I/O GbE ports
with the MEP bound to CL.2 port 1. Tx flow in the service points to a queue block.
Rx Flow
Tx Flow
CL.2 M-ETH
Port 1 DOWN Port 4
MEP
Figure 8-12. Point-to-Point Service with Down MEP Bound to CL.2 Port 1
The Down MEP is defined over the physical port, inheriting its MAC address. The
Down MEP location is characterized by:
• Rx flow, whose classification profile can be one of the following:
Untagged
Single VLAN
Single VLAN+P-bit
Single outer + single inner VLAN
Single outer VLAN + P-bit + single inner VLAN
Match all. If configured over an IO port, the flow from the corresponding
SAP must be used. It also needs a classification profile to specify the
packet tag structure (as it cannot be taken from the flow classification
profile).
• Tx flow to a destination queue to forward OAM frames.
Up MEP
Up MEPs are bound to physical ports. These MEPs receive and send CFM PDU from
and to the forwarding block. The Up MEPs inherit their MAC addresses from the
corresponding physical ports (egress ports of Tx flows). Different MEP locations
are illustrated below.
Figure 8-13 illustrates a point-to-point service between I/O card and CL ports
with the Up MEP bound to the I/O port. The Tx flow in this service points to the
CL port.
Rx Flow
Tx Flow
CL.2 UP M-ETH
Port 1 MEP Port 4
Figure 8-14 illustrates a point-to-point service between the CL.2 card and I/O
ports with the Up MEP bound to the CL port. Tx flow in this service points to the
I/O port.
Rx Flow
Tx Flow
CL.2 M-ETH
Port 1 UP Port 4
MEP
Messaging System
The Ethernet service OAM mechanism uses cyclic messages for availability
verification, fault detection and performance data collection. The main message
types are detailed below.
Note OAM cyclic messages (CCMs, LBMs and LTMs) packet priority (P-bit value) is
user-configurable at MEP level.
CC Messages
Continuity Check Messages (CCMs) are sent from the service source to the
destination node at regular periodic intervals. They are used to detect loss of
continuity or incorrect network connections. A CCM is multicast to each MEP in a
MA at each administrative level. CCM status information is available at the MEP
and RMEP levels.
AIS
When a MEP detects a connectivity failure at a physical port, it propagates an
Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) in the direction away from the detected failure to
the next higher level. The AIS is sent over the MEP Rx flow with the level as
configured by the client MD level (default is the MEP level + 1) for the following
trigger events:
• LOC
• LCK
• Rx AIS.
The signal is carried in dedicated AIS frames. The transmit interval is configured
per MEP and can be set to one frame per second (default) or one frame per
minute. The AIS message priority is set per MEP via P-bit (0–7) configuration.
AIS, LCK, LOC
Rx Flow
MEP
Tx Flow
RDI
When a downstream MEP detects a defect condition, such as a receive signal
failure or AIS, it sends a Remote Defect Indication (RDI) upstream in the opposite
direction of its peer MEP or MEPs. This informs the upstream MEPs that there has
been a downstream failure. The Tx RDI is also initiated when a LOC is detected on
at least one of the associated RMEPs.
CCM Interval
CCM interval is user-configurable at the MA level to 3.33 ms, 10 ms, 100 ms, 1s,
1m, 10m.
Loopback Messages
MEPs send loopback messages (LBMs) to verify connectivity with another MEP for
a specific MA. Loopback is a ping-like request/reply function. A MEP sends a
loopback request message to another MEP, which generates a subsequent LBR
(loopback response). LBMs/LBRs are used to verify bidirectional connectivity.
The LBMs are always marked green. LBM priority uses the CCM priority that is
configurable as a P-bit value at the MEP level. LBM CoS is set according to a P-bit-
to-CoS profile, with up to four such profiles per chassis.
LBMs are generated on demand and sent up to 500 times.
LTM Priority
The LTMs are always marked green. LTM priority uses the CCM priority that is
configurable as a P-bit value at the MEP level”.
LTM
MEP
LTR
Main Card Main Card
Port A Port B
Figure 8-16. MEP with LTM Sent from the Card Port in Point-to-Point Service
Performance Monitoring
Megaplex-4 Ethernet service OAM PM functionality complies with the Y.1731
requirements. Megaplex-4 provides per-service loss and delay measurement and
event reporting.
The following performance parameters are measured by appropriate OAM
messages:
• Frame Loss Ratio (FLR) – FLR is defined as a ratio, expressed as a percentage,
of the number of service frames not delivered divided by the total number of
service frames during a time interval, where the number of service frames not
delivered is the difference between the number of service frames sent to an
ingress UNI and the number of service frames received at an egress UNI.
Megaplex-4 supports single-ended loss measurement (LM) with on-demand
LMM transmission and automatic LM response. OAM MEPs measure frame
loss only if statistic counters have been enabled on the incoming and
outgoing flows. LM is not supported over tunnels.
• Frame Delay (FD) – FD is specified as round trip delay for a frame, where FD
is defined as the time elapsed since the start of transmission of the first bit
of the frame by a source node until the reception of the last bit of the loop
backed frame by the same source node, when the loopback is performed at
the frame’s destination node.
Megaplex-4 supports dual-ended delay measurement (DM) with on-demand
DMM transmission and automatic DM response. Measurement is performed
for delay of up to 1 second with full DM over tunnels.
Configuring OAM
To configure the service OAM:
1. Configure general OAM parameters
2. Add and configure maintenance domain(s) (MD).
3. Configure maintenance associations for the added MDs.
4. If Megaplex-4 is acting as a MIP, then configure (manually) the necessary MIPs
and configure the necessary flows from and to the unit(s).
5. If Megaplex-4 is acting as a MEP:
a. Configure MA endpoints, referred as MEPs.
b. Configure MEP services.
c. Configure Destination NEs.
d. Configure the necessary flows from and to the unit(s).
Current
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Bin range Rx DMR
(us)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 0..15000 0
2 15001..49000 0
3 49001..55000 0
4 55001..250000 0
5 250001..5000000 0
Type : rt Delay
mp4100>config>oam>cfm>md(1)>ma(1)>mep(1)>service(1)>dest-ne(3)# show
delay-measurement-bins rt-delay-var all
Type : rt Delay Var
Current
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Bin range Rx DMR
(us)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 0..15000 0
2 15001..55000 0
3 55001..105000 0
4 105001..205000 0
5 205001..5000000 0
Specifying the maintenance md-level <md-level> The allowed range for md-level is 0–7
domain level Note: If pre-standard OAM protocol is
being used, the only value allowed for
the maintenance domain level is 3.
Specifying the name format name string <md-name-string> • Maximum length of md-name-string is
and name of the name dns <md-name-string> 43 characters
maintenance domain • Maximum combined length of
name mac-and-uint <md-name-mac>
<md-name-uint> md-name-string and ma-name-string
(maintenance association name) is
no name
48 characters
• Format mac-and-uint – Specify
md-name-mac as xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx,
and md-name-uint as an unsigned
integer decimal number (0–65535)
• If prestandard OAM protocol is being
used, the maintenance domain must
have no name (use command no
name).
Associating the MA with a classification vlan <vlan-id> Verify that the VLAN is the same as the VLAN
VLAN associated with the MEP
Note: If a classifier profile is associated with
the MEP, the VLAN should be set to 0.
Configuring MEP for the MA mep <mepid> Refer to Configuring Maintenance Endpoints
Enabling sending AIS and defining ais [ interval { 1s | 1min }] To disable AIS sending, enter no ais
the interval [priority <priority>]
Binding the MEP to an Ethernet bind ethernet <slot/port> To remove the MEP from an Ethernet port,
port, Logical Mac or PCS [/tributary]> Logical Mac or PCS, enter no bind
bind logical-mac <slot/port>
bind pcs <slot/port>
Specifying the priority of CCMs, ccm-priority <priority> The allowed range for <priority> is 0–7
LBMs and LTMs transmitted by the
MEP
Associating the MEP with a classification vlan <vlan-id> You can associate more than one MEP to
classifier profile or VLAN classification profile <profile-name> the same VLAN if the MEPs belong to MDs
with different levels
Verify that the VLAN is the same as the
VLAN associated with the MA
Defining client MD level client-md-level <md_level> Client MD level is a level for sending
upstream AIS
Defining the MAC address type dest-addr-type [ccm {unicast | If more than one remote MEP ID has been
sent in OAM continuity check multicast}] [pm {unicast | defined for the MEP and you change the
messages (CCM) and performance multicast}] CCM destination address type from
measurement messages (PM) multicast to unicast, all remote MEP IDs
are deleted except for the lowest remote
MEP ID.
If the MAC address type for PM messages
is unicast, then the MAC address for the
transmission of PM messages is
determined by the configuration of the
destination NE. If a remote MAC address is
configured for the destination NE, that
MAC is used. Otherwise if a remote MEP ID
is configured for the destination NE, the
remote MAC address is learned from CCM
messages. Refer to Configuring
Destination NEs for details.
Defining a unicast MAC address if dest-mac-addr <mac-addr> MAC address is in format xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx
you defined unicast MAC address
type for CCM messages with the
dest-addr-type command
Defining the queue for the MEP queue fixed <queue-id> To delete queue assignment, enter no
[block <level-id>/<queue-id>] queue queue-mapping
queue queue-mapping
<queue_mapping_profile_name>
[block <level_id>/<queue_id>]
Performing OAM link trace linktrace See Performing OAM Link Trace
Defining remote MEP with which remote-mep <remote_mep_id> Allowed range for remote MEP is 1–8191
the MEP communicates no remote-mep <remote_mep_id> The MEP ID and the remote MEP ID must
be different. You can define up to 511
remote MEPs for the local MEP if standard
OAM protocol is being used for the MD
and the destination address type is
multicast; otherwise you can define only
one remote MEP.
To delete remote MEP, enter no
remote-mep <remote_mep_id>
Configuring service for the MEP service <service_id> Refer to Configuring Maintenance
Endpoint Services
To delete a MIP:
• At the config>oam>cfm>md(<mdid>)# prompt enter: no mip <mipid>
The maintenance intermediary point is deleted.
To configure a MIP:
1. Navigate to configure oam cfm maintenance-domain <mdid> mip <mipid> to
select the MIP to configure.
The config>oam>cfm>md(<mdid>)>mip(<mipid>)# prompt is displayed
2. Enter all necessary commands according to the tasks listed below.
Binding the MIP to an bind ethernet <port> To unbind the MIP, enter no bind
Ethernet port, logical MAC bind lag <lag-name>
port, or LAG
bind logical-mac <port-number>
Examples
• MA ID 1
• MEP ID 1:
Remote MEP ID 2
Classification VLAN 100.
#**************************Configure MA
maintenance-association 1
classification vlan 100
#**************************Configure MEP
mep 1
classification vlan 100
bind ethernet cl-a 1
queue fixed 1 block 0/1
remote-mep 2
no shutdown
exit all
MD Name : MD1
MA Name : MA1
Administrative Status : Up
Configuring MIP
This example illustrates manual MIP configuration:
• MIP is bound to the GbE port 1 of CL-A
• Unidirectional Rx flow assigned to the MIP is "v10in"
• Unidirectional Tx flow assigned to the MIP is "v10out"
mp4100# configure oam cfm ma 1
mp4100>config>oam>cfm>md(1)# mip 1
mp4100>config>oam>cfm>md(1)>mip(1)# bind eth cl-a/1
mp4100>config>oam>cfm>md(1)>mip(1)# info detail
bind ethernet cl-a/1
flow uni-direction rx "v10in" tx "v10out"
no shutdown
mp4100>config>oam>cfm>md(1)>mip(1)# exit
mp4100>config>oam>cfm>md(1)# exit
mp4100>config>oam>cfm# info detail
multicast-addr 01-80-C2-00-00-30
ethertype 0x8902
mip-assign manual
maintenance-domain 1
no proprietary-cc
md-level 3
name string "MD1"
echo "MIP Configuration"
# MIP Configuration
mip 1
bind ethernet cl-a/1
flow uni-direction rx "v10in" tx "v10out"
no shutdown
Associating this service with a classification priority-bit <p-bit> The allowed range is 0–7
priority for LMMs and DMMs
Specifying delay threshold in delay-threshold <delay-thresh> The allowed range for delay
microseconds threshold is: 1–5,000,000. If the
threshold is exceeded, the
service is declared as degraded.
Specifying delay variation delay-var-threshold <delay-var-thresh> The allowed range for delay
threshold in microseconds variation threshold is:
1–5,000,000. If the threshold is
exceeded, the service is
declared as degraded.
Activating the MEP service no shutdown You can activate a service only if
the corresponding MEP is active
and you have defined at least
one destination NE
Defining the delay delay-measurement-bin The delay measurement bin profiles are
measurement bin profile to profile <name> defined in the conf>oam>cfm level
use as delay bin policy
Assigning the delay delay-var-measurement-bin The delay measurement bin profiles are
variation measurement bin profile <name> defined in the conf>oam>cfm level
profile
Defining single-ended loss loss single-ended [{ synthetic | • user-data – This method measures
measurement method user-data | lmm-synthetic }] user data and CCM messages.
• synthetic – This method measures
DM frames. It is recommended when
working with devices that do not
count user data frames
• lmm-synthetic – This method
measures synthetic frames as well.
Defining the MAC address remote mac-address <mac> If the MAC address is
of the destination NE 00-00-00-00-00-00, the statistic
counters for the destination NE do not
increment
Displaying the delay show delay-measurement-bins Relevant only if profiles were assigned
measurement bins for show delay-measurement-bins via delay-measurement-bin,
delay measurements via {rt-delay | rt-delay-var} current delay-var-measurement-bin
DMRs
- show delay-measurement-bins
{rt-delay | rt-delay-var} interval
<interval-num>
- show delay-measurement-bins
{rt-delay | rt-delay-var} all
event Specifies the type of event reporting none – The event is not reported
log – The event is reported via the event
log
trap –An SNMP trap is sent to report the
event
logandtrap –The event is reported via the
event log and an SNMP trap
For example:
The delay and delay variation (jitter) threshold for this service are set to 10 and
5 milliseconds respectively. The reporting counters for this service are set as
shown in the table below.
Near End Frame Loss Ratio Log and trap 1e-9 1e-10
In this example, an SNMP trap and an event are generated as notification of the
rising threshold if during an 8-second sample interval, four DMM packets or more
exceed the 10-milliseconds delay threshold of this service. The alarm is cleared
(falling threshold) if Megaplex-4 detects an 8-second sample interval in which
two or fewer packets cross the thresholds.
A rising or falling threshold event is generated if a specific ratio is exceeded. For
example, an SNMP trap is sent if the far end Frame Loss Ratio (from Megaplex-4
to the network) exceed 10^-4, i.e. more than one frame out of 10,000 LMMs sent
for this service are lost.
You can view the following types of statistics for services and destination NEs:
• Running –OAM statistics collected since the corresponding service was
activated
• 12 hours – OAM statistics for the last 12 hours, or the amount of time since
the service was activated, if less than 12 hours.
• Interval – OAM statistics for the current interval or a selected interval. You
can select an interval only if it has already ended since the corresponding
service was activated.
When a service is first activated, you can view statistics for only the current
interval. The statistics data is shown for the time elapsed since the beginning
of the interval. When the current interval ends, it becomes interval 1 and you
can select it for viewing interval statistics. After each interval ends, you can
select it for viewing interval statistics.
Note The service for which you wish to view the statistics must be active. If the service
is not active, the commands to view statistics are not recognized.
Viewing running statistics show statistics running The statistics are displayed; refer to
Table 8-9 and Table 8-10
Viewing statistics for the show statistics current The statistics for the current interval are
current interval displayed; refer to Table 8-9 and
Table 8-10
Viewing the statistics for a show statistics interval • Allowed values for interval-num: 1–
selected interval <interval-num> 48
• The statistics for the selected interval
are displayed; refer to Table 8-9 and
Table 8-10.
• If you specified an interval that has
not yet ended since the service was
activated, a message is displayed that
the interval doesn’t exist.
Viewing statistics for show statistics 12-hours The statistics for the past 12 hours are
12 hours displayed; refer to Table 8-9 and
Table 8-10
Viewing running statistics, show statistics all The statistics are displayed; refer to
statistics for the current Table 8-9 and Table 8-10
interval, statistics for all
intervals, and 12-hour
statistics
Viewing statistics for all show statistics all-intervals The statistics for all intervals are
intervals displayed; refer to Table 8-9 and
Table 8-10
Clearing the statistics for clear-statistics All statistics data for the service or
the service or destination destination NE are cleared, including the
NE stored interval data, except for the
elapsed time since the start of the
current interval
Parameter Description
Far End Tx Frames Total number of frames transmitted from local destination NE to
remote destination NE since the service was activated (the type of
frames counted is either user data or synthetic, according to the
method configured by the loss single-ended command)
Far End Rx Frames Total number of frames received by remote destination NE since the
service was activated (the type of frames counted is either user data
or synthetic, according to the method configured by the loss
single-ended command)
Far End Lost Frames Total number of frames lost from local destination NE to remote
destination NE since the service was activated (Far End Tx Frames -
Far End Rx Frames) (the type of frames counted is either user data or
synthetic, according to the method configured by the loss
single-ended command)
Far End Frame Loss Ratio (%) Far End Lost Frames divided by Far End Tx Frames
Parameter Description
Far End Unavailable Seconds (Sec) Number of seconds the remote destination NE is considered
unavailable. The definition of unavailability differs according to user
data or synthetic measurement mode, as configured by the loss
single-ended command:
• User data – The destination NE is considered unavailable after
10 consecutive seconds with SES (Severely Errored Second)
events; the 10 seconds are part of the unavailable time. An SES is
considered to have occurred if more than one frame out of 1000
is lost. The destination NE is considered available again after
10 consecutive non-SES events; the 10 seconds are part of the
available time.
• Synthetic mode – The destination NE is considered unavailable
after 3.5 consecutive seconds with no reception of synthetic
frames; the 3.5 seconds are part of the unavailable time. The
destination NE is considered available again when a synthetic
frame is received.
Near End Tx Frames Total number of frames transmitted from remote destination NE to
local destination NE since the service was activated (the type of
frames counted is either user data or synthetic, according to the
method configured by the loss single-ended command)
Near End Rx Frames Total number of frames received by local destination NE since the
service was activated (the type of frames counted is either user data
or synthetic, according to the method configured by the loss
single-ended command)
Near End Lost Frames Total number of frames lost from remote destination NE to local
destination NE since the service was activated (Near End Tx Frames -
Near End Rx Frames) (the type of frames counted is either user data
or synthetic, according to the method configured by the loss
single-ended command)
Near End Frame Loss Ratio (%) Near End Lost Frames divided by Near End Tx Frames
Near End Unavailable Seconds (Sec) Number of seconds the local destination NE is considered unavailable.
Refer to the description of Far End Unavailable Seconds for the
definition of unavailability.
Current Delay (uSec) Current delay received in the last Delay Measurement Reply (DMR)
Current Delay Variation (uSec) Difference between the current delay value and the previous current
delay value
Average Two Way Delay (uSec) Average of all frame delay values received in DM frames
Average Two Way Delay Var (uSec) Average difference between the frame delay values received in DM
frames
Frames Above Delay Threshold Number of DM frames whose delay value exceeded the delay
threshold configured for the service
Frames Above Delay Variation Number of DM frames whose delay variation exceeded the delay
Threshold variation threshold configured for the service
Elapsed Time (sec) Time (in seconds) elapsed since the service was activated
Parameter Description
Note The option for remote MEP ID is available only if Megaplex-4 can resolve at least
one remote MEP MAC address.
Specifying remote MEP by lbm address <mac-address> [repeat • MAC address is in the
MAC address <repeat-num>] [data-tlv-length format <xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx>
<length-val>] • Allowed range of
Specifying remote MEP by lbm remote-mep <mep-id> [repeat repeat-num is 1–500
MEP ID <repeat-num>] [data-tlv-length • Allowed range of
<length-val>] data-tlv-length is 0–1900
For example:
mp4100>config>oam>cfm>md(1)>ma(1)>mep(100)# show lbm-results
Remote MEP ID : 1
Destination Address : 00-20-D2-50-0F-D9
Messages Sent : 1
Replies In Order : 1
Replies Out Of Order : 0
Messages Lost/Timed Out : 0
Messages Lost/Timed Out % : 0
Note The option to specify the destination MEP ID is available only if Megaplex-4 can
resolve at least one remote MEP MAC address.
Specifying remote MEP by MAC linktrace address <mac-address> • MAC address is in the
address [ttl <1–64>] format
<xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx>
Specifying remote MEP by ID linktrace remote-mep <mep-id>
[ttl <1–64>] • Allowed range for ttl-value
is 1–64. This parameter
specifies number of hops.
Each unit in the link trace
decrements the TTL until it
reaches 0, which terminates
the link trace.
For example:
mp4100>config>oam>cfm>md(1)>ma(1)>mep(100)# show linktrace-
results
Ingress
---------------------------------------------------------------
Port ID : ETH 1
Egress
--------------------------------------------------------------
Standards
IEEE 802.3-2005
Benefits
Ethernet OAM (EFM) provides remote management and fault indication for the
Ethernet links. Remote link failure can be detected via OAM (EFM).
Functional Description
The OAM (EFM) discovery process allows a local data terminating entity (DTE) to
detect Ethernet OAM capabilities on a remote DTE. Once Ethernet OAM support is
detected, both ends of the link exchange state and configuration information,
such as mode, PDU size, loopback support, etc. If both DTEs are satisfied with the
settings, OAM is enabled on the link. However, the loss of a link or a failure to
receive OAMPDUs for five seconds may cause the discovery process to restart.
DTEs may either be in active or passive mode. DTEs in active mode initiate the
ETH-OAM (EFM) communications and can issue queries and commands to a
remote device. DTEs in passive mode generally wait for the peer device to initiate
OAM communications and respond to commands and queries, but do not initiate
them.
A flag in the OAMPDU allows an OAM entity to convey the failure condition Link
Fault to its peer. Link Fault refers to the loss of signal detected by the receiver; A
Link Fault report is sent once per second with the Information OAMPDU.
Factory Defaults
By default, OAM EFM is not enabled for Ethernet/PCS ports.
Enabling link OAM (EFM) efm descriptor <1–2> The EFM descriptor must exist
before you can assign it to a port
In order for link OAM (EFM) to
function properly, the relevant
Ethernet port must be associated
with an L2CP profile that specifies
peer action for MAC 01-80-C2-00-
00-02.
Displaying link OAM (EFM) show oam-efm Relevant only if link OAM (EFM) is
parameters enabled.
Displaying link OAM (EFM) statistics show oam-efm-statistics Relevant only if link OAM (EFM) is
enabled.
Example
To enable active link OAM (EFM) for Ethernet port CL-A/1:
efm descriptor 1
no shutdown
exit all
#****To display the link OAM (EFM) status for Eth port CL-A/1:
8.5 Flows
Flows are the main traffic-carrying elements in Megaplex-4 architecture. They are
unidirectional entities that interconnect two physical or logical ports. You can use
classifier profiles to specify the criteria for flows. The classification is per port
and is applied to the ingress port of the flow.
Flows defined in Megaplex-4 can be unidirectional (between physical/logical
ports) or bidirectional (between physical/logic ports and brigde ports of CL
modules).
Note Bridge ports in M-ETH modules are bound directly (without using flows).
This section explains how to define the flows according to specific criteria such as
VLAN. You can use classifier profiles to specify the criteria for flows. The
classification is per port and is applied to the ingress port of the flow.
Standards
MEF 6 (E-Line – EPL and EVPL), MEF 10, MEF 9, MEF 14: EPL and EVPL, MEF 20,
IEEE 802.3, 802.3u, 802.1q, 802.1p, 802.3ad, 802.3-2005
Benefits
The user traffic can be classified into different Ethernet flows (EVC.CoS) to
provide services in a flexible manner, using better traffic management and QoS.
Factory Defaults
By default, no flows exist.
Functional Description
Ethernet Entities
Ethernet services are provided by means of the Megaplex-4 I/O modules with
traffic Ethernet ports, which can serve as customer’s edge network interfaces,
and by means of the CL.2 and M-ETH modules, which provide GbE ports that can
serve as service provider’s edge interfaces.
The customer’s edge traffic accepted by Ethernet ports on I/O modules is
directed to other interfaces that can transfer the traffic to the transport
network. These interfaces are as follows:
• GbE ports located on the Megaplex-4 CL.2 modules (ethernet or lag in the CLI
language) and on the M-ETH modules (ethernet in the CLI language).
• Ethernet ports on other I/O modules (M8E1, M8T1, M8SL, OP-34C, OP-108C,
ASMi-54C, MPW-1, VS) (ethernet in the CLI language)
• Logical MAC ports (logical-mac). A Logical MAC port is bound to a gfp, hdlc or
mlppp port, which, in its turn, should be bound to the physical layer. The
meaning of the gfp, hdlc or mlppp ports and their further mapping depends
on the Ethernet traffic media:
GFP ports represent VCGs (Virtual Concatenation Groups) with GFP
encapsulation and exist in two flavors:
GFP ports defined on CL.2 modules and used for efficient transport of
Ethernet traffic over the SDH/SONET networks. GFP ports can be
mapped either directly to the physical layer or to VCG. In the latter case
the binding is done in two stages and this VCG should be further bound
to the physical layer.
GFP ports located on T3 modules and used for efficient transport of
Ethernet traffic over the T1/T3 networks. GFP ports are mapped either
directly to the physical layer or to VCG. In the latter case, the binding is
done in two stages and the VCG is further bound to the physical layer.
The internal Ethernet switch of the module can also handle other types of
frames, such as untagged frames, and priority-tagged frames (frames with IEEE
802.Q tags with 0 as the VLAN ID). M8E1/M8T1 modules also enable the user to
configure flows to handle traffic with or without IEEE 802.Q tags: this traffic is
forwarded only between the bridge ports mapped to a given flow. This
forwarding mode is usually referred to as VLAN-unaware. In order to transmit
unclassified frames, its classification should be set to ‘match-all’.
The following list summarizes the configuration restrictions applying to the types
of flows to which any given bridge port can be mapped:
• A bridge port can terminate only one flow classified as unaware (i.e., which
does not discriminate Ethernet traffic in accordance with VLANs).
• When a bridge port is mapped to more than one flow, the bridge port can
terminate several flows with specific VLAN IDs, but only one flow classified as
unaware.
• A bridge port can terminate flows with different VLAN IDs (aware flow mode).
VLAN tagging, stacking and striping options enable transporting users’ traffic
transparently, thereby keeping all the user’s VLAN settings intact.
Note When a classification profile is assigned to a flow, each match in the profile is
allocated one of the 1000 available internal classification match entries,
according to the flow ingress port.
For example, if a classification profile is defined with matches to two different
VLANS, then if the profile is assigned to two flows that use different ingress
ports, the result is that four internal classification match entries are allocated. If
the profile is assigned to two flows that use the same ingress port, the result is
that two internal classification match entries are used.
Examples:
To create classifier profile with criteria VLAN 20 and inner VLAN 30:
exit all
configure flows classifier-profile v20_inner_30 match-any
match vlan 20 inner-vlan 30
exit all
Configuring Flows
45B
Specifying the egress port egress-port {ethernet | logical-mac All VLANs defined on the same egress
(ethernet, lag, logical-mac, pcs, | pcs} <slot/port> [<tributary>] bridge port must use the same queue-
svi), the egress queue block [queue-map-profile <queue-map- map-profile and block values.
and the queue (or queue map profile-name> block no egress-port removes the flow
profile) within the block <level_id/queue_id>] association with the egress port
egress-port {ethernet | logical-mac [<tributary>] denotes an internal
| pcs} <slot/port> [<tributary>] Ethernet egress port for Optimux
[queue <queue-id> block modules
<level_id/queue_id>]
When working with non-A CL
egress-port lag <port-number> assemblies, a flow between two PCS
[queue-map-profile <queue-map- ports of the same modules cannot be
profile-name> block set. In this case set flows between
<level_id/queue_id>] PCS ports of different modules.
egress-port lag <port-number> Megaplex-4 equipped with CL.2
[queue <queue-id> block modules has the following restriction:
<level_id/queue_id>] if at least one unaware flow is
egress-port bridge-port configured between a PCS port and an
<slot><port> (Note: if ingress-port Ethernet port on the same ASMi-54C
is a port of I/O module, see or ASMi-54C/N module, you can
reverse-direction command below) configure only one more flow on this
egress-port {svi } <port number> module, and it must be of the same
type (PCS – Ethernet, unaware).
egress-port mng-ethernet
Megaplex-4 equipped with CL.2/A
<slot/port>
modules does not have this
restriction.
Local switching (flows between
Ethernet ports on the same module) is
possible in the following cases:
• Within the I/O modules with FE
ports in systems equipped with
CL.2/A modules
• Within the M-ETH module in
systems equipped with any CL.2
modules
Specifying the ingress port ingress-port ethernet no ingress-port removes the flow
(ethernet, lag, logical-mac, pcs, <slot><port>[<tributary>] association with the ingress port
svi) ingress-port {logical-mac | pcs | [<tributary>] denotes an internal
bridge-port} <slot><port> Ethernet ingress port for Optimux
ingress-port {svi | lag } <port modules
number> When working with non-A CL
ingress-port mng-ethernet assemblies, a flow between two PCS
<slot/port> ports of the same modules cannot be
set. In this case set flows between
PCS ports of different modules.
Megaplex-4 equipped with CL.2
modules has the following restriction:
if at least one unaware flow is
configured between a PCS port and an
Ethernet port on the same ASMi-54C
or ASMi-54C/N module, you can
configure only one more flow on this
module, and it must be of the same
type (PCS – Ethernet, unaware).
Megaplex-4 equipped with CL.2/A
modules does not have this
restriction.
Local switching (flows between
Ethernet ports on the same module) is
possible in the following cases:
• Within the I/O modules with FE
ports in systems equipped with
CL.2/A modules
• Within the M-ETH module in
systems equipped with any CL.2
modules
Associating the flow with a policer-profile <policer-profile- no policer removes the flow
policer profile name> association with the policer
Defining marking actions for mark all Refer to the following table for the
the flow such as overwriting marking actions
the VLAN ID or inner VLAN ID
or setting the priority
Adding VLAN ID with p-bit set vlan-tag push vlan <sp-vlan> p-bit In Megaplex devices with CL modules
to specific value, and fixed <fixed-p-bit> [inner-vlan without Carrier Ready capabilities:
optionally adding inner VLAN <inner-sp-vlan> When a flow is established between a
ID with p-bit set to specific p-bit fixed <inner-fixed-p-bit>] PCS port of ASM-54C/ETH module and
value any other port, the VLAN/classifiers
configured at the egress and ingress
ports must be identical.
Adding VLAN ID with p-bit set vlan-tag push vlan <sp-vlan> p-bit
to specific value, and fixed <fixed-p-bit> [inner-vlan
optionally adding inner VLAN <inner-sp-vlan>
ID with p-bit set via marking p-bit profile <inner-marking-profil
profile e-name>]
Adding VLAN ID with p-bit set vlan-tag push vlan <sp-vlan> p-bit
to specific value, and fixed <fixed-p-bit> [inner-vlan
optionally adding inner VLAN <inner-sp-vlan> p-bit copy]
ID with p-bit set by copying
from the incoming frame
The following marking actions can be performed in the mark level, at the
config>flows>flow(<flow-name>)>mark# prompt.
Overwriting p-bit with a new p-bit <p-bit-value> Typing no p-bit removes the overwriting of p-bit
value
Overwriting inner p-bit with a inner-p-bit <inner-p-bit-value > Typing no inner-p-bit removes the overwriting of
new value inner p-bit
Overwriting VLAN ID with a vlan <vlan-value> Typing no vlan removes the overwriting of VLAN
new value ID
Overwriting inner VLAN ID with inner-vlan <inner-vlan-value> Typing no inner-vlan removes the overwriting of
a new value inner VLAN ID
Example
This section provides an example of creating two management flows between
PCS ports of an ASMi-54C module installed in slot 3. The procedure is as follows:
1. Create two flow classifiers: “mng_flow_bridge_side” and
“mng_flow_port_side”.
2. Create an ingress flow 1 between PCS port 1 of the ASMi-54C module and SVI
port 2 using the following parameters:
Flow 1
Classifier named “mng_flow_bridge_side”
Tagging of the management traffic with VLAN 100, priority bit 7
Set SVI 2 as ingress port.
Set PCS 3/1 as egress port.
3. Create an egress flow 2 between PCS port 1 of an ASMi-54C module and SVI
port 2 using the following parameters:
Flow 2.
Classifier named “mng_flow_port_side”
Removing VLAN before entering management bridge
Set SVI 2 as egress port.
Set PCS 3/1 as ingress port.
#Step 1
mp4100>config>flows# classifier-profile mng_flow_port_side match-
any match vlan 100
mp4100>config>flows# classifier-profile mng_flow_bridge_side
match-any match all
#Step 2
mp4100>config>flows# flow 1 classifier mng_flow_bridge_side
mp4100>config>flows# flow 1 vlan-tag push vlan 100 p-bit fixed 7
mp4100>config>flows# flow 1 ingress-port svi 2
mp4100>config>flows# flow 1 egress-port pcs 3/1
#Step 3
mp4100>config>flows# flow 2 classifier mng_flow_port_side
mp4100>config>flows# flow 2 vlan-tag pop vlan
mp4100>config>flows# flow 2 ingress-port pcs 3/1
mp4100>config>flows# flow 2 egress-port svi 2
For more examples see Configuring the Bridge section below: bridge configuration
examples include flow configuration as well.
Megaplex-4
CL
Traffic
Counter
Traffic
Generator
Setting test duration and test [duration <duration in seconds Using no test disables the test
activating the test on this flow 0..86400> ]
Example
mp4100>config>flows>flow(4)# test duration 10
mp4100>config>flows>flow(4)# show test
Test : On Duration (Sec) : 10 No TTL
Rx Statistics
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total
Packets : 0
Bytes : 0
Drop Statistics
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Packets Bytes
Total : 0 0
Green : 0 0
Yellow : 0 0
Red : 0 0
Total(Rate) : 0 0
Green(Rate) : 0 0
Yellow(Rate) : 0 0
Red(Rate) : 0 0
Tx Statistics
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total Green Yellow
Packets : 0 0 0
Rate [pps] : 0 0 0
Bytes : 0 0 0
Rate [bps] : 0 0 0
Peak Measurement
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Min. Max.
Tx Bit Rate [bps] : 0 0
Drop Bit Rate [bps] : 0 0
Configuration Errors
Table 8-11 lists messages generated by Megaplex-4 when a configuration error is
detected.
559 Error INGRESS AND EGRESS PORTS Ingress and egress ports of a flow cannot both be bridge
ARE MEMBERS OF THE SAME ports of the same bridge.
BRIDGE
560 Error UP TO 240 FLOWS FOR DATA The maximum number of unidirectional flows for data for
CL.2 (non-A option) is 240. This does not include
management flows (which contain an SVI Port bound to
BP).
561 Error UP TO 192 FLOWS FOR The maximum number of management flows for CL.2
MANAGENENT (non-A option) is 192.
562 Error FLOW MUST CONSIST OF TWO Flow must connect 2 ports.
PORTS
563 Error SAME INGRESS AND EGRESS Ingress and egress ports must be different.
PORTS
564 Error FLOW MUST HAVE A A classifier profile must be bound to the flow.
CLASSIFIER
565 Error FLOW BETWEEN TWO SVI NOT A flow cannot connect between 2 SVI ports.
ALLOWED
566 Error CL L. MAC CAN’T BE MEMBER A Logical MAC with a VCG bound to it cannot be a member
IN MNG FLOW in a management flow
567 Error ILLEGAL FLOW BETWEEN ETH A flow between external or internal Ethernet ports on the
PORTS same I/O slot is not allowed.
568 Error CLASSIFIER PROFILE MUST BE If an ingress port is SVI bound to BP (management flow),
MATCH ALL the classifier must be “match all”.
569 Error MNG VLAN MUST BE LESS When working with CL.2 module option, management flow
THAN 4000 VLAN ID must be less than 4000 (not relevant for CL.2/A
option).
570 Error ILLEGAL CLASSIFIER FOR PORT The selected classification is not supported by this port.
Correction required according to the following:
• Command match vlan inner-vlan is valid only for flows
between GbE and/or LAG ports defined on CL modules
• Commands match vlan inner-vlan or match vlan are
obligatory for flows between GbE and/or LAG ports
defined on CL modules, no other classifier can be used
on these ports
• I/O port classifier can be only match vlan or match
all.
571 Error VLAN TAG ACTION PUSH NOT VLAN tag push action is not allowed in the following
ALLOWED cases:
• At egress port of flows between GbE and/or LAG ports
defined on CL modules
• On ports of I/O modules participating in non-
management (data) flows.
572 Error VLAN TAG ACTION POP NOT VLAN tag pop action is not allowed in the following cases:
ALLOWED • At egress ports of flows using classifier match all
• At egress port residing on an ASMi-54C/ETH module
when its ingress port classifier is different from match
vlan inner-vlan or match vlan
• When both ends of the flow reside on the same I/O
slot
• When both ends of the flow reside on GbE or LAG
ports defined on CL modules
573 Error VLAN ACTION MUST BE POP Pop action is obligatory in the following cases:
• Egress port is SVI bound to a bridge port
(management flow)
• Ingress port has inner VLAN as classifier (used only in
Logical macs defined on CL), and egress port is GBE or
LAG
• Ingress port has inner VLAN as classifier (match vlan
inner-vlan or match inner-vlan), and egress port is
defined on ASMi-54C/ETH module
If one of these cases is yours, define VLAN pop action.
574 Error VLAN ACTION MUST BE PUSH Push action is obligatory in the following cases:
• Ingress port is SVI bound to a bridge port
(management flow).
• I/O or CL Logical-mac classifier is ‘match all’ (push
VLAN must be added at the egress GBE/LAG port).
If one of these cases is yours, define VLAN push action.
576 Error MANAGEMENT FLOW MUST BE When a management flow is configured and SVI bound to
BI-DIRECTIONAL a bridge port is its egress port, another flow (with SVI
bound to the bridge port as ingress port) must be
configured and vice versa. In addition, this SVI cannot
participate in another flow.
577 Error VLAN CAN'T BE REPEATED BTW Pay attention to the following:
CL ETH/LAG PORTS • For non-management (data) flows the classifier profile
VLAN of each GbE/LAG port defined on CL module
must be unique. (Note: This is not relevant in case
when both flow ends reside on GbE/LAG ports defined
on CL module).
• For the flows with classifier based on outer&inner
VLAN, the inner VLAN can’t be repeated on GbE/LAG
ports defined on CL module
• Push SP-VLAN cannot be repeated on GbE/LAG ports
defined on the same CL module
If your case is different, correct according to the above.
578 Error FLOWS BETWEEN PORTS CAN’T If ingress port of several flows is the same I/O port, the
BE SPLIT egress ports of these flows cannot be different.
579 Error VLAN ID IS UNIQUE PER SLOT VLAN ID (number) must be unique per slot (except for the
management flows)
580 Error ONLY SINGLE FLOW IS If the classifier is 'match all', only a single flow is allowed
ALLOWED FOR MATCH ALL for the port.
581 Error CLASSIFIERS CONFLICT ON For any flow terminated on an ASMi-54C/ETH, the
SLOT classifier should be either ‘match all’ or ‘match vlan’ per
entire module
582 Error CLASSIFIERS CONFLICT ON All flows terminating on a specific port must use the same
PORT classifier criteria.
583 Error VLAN ID CAN’T BE REPEATED An ASMi-54C/ETH port classifier VLAN ID (number) is
PER SYSTEM unique per system (both at ingress and egress ports) and
cannot be repeated in other ASMi-54C/ETH ports.
584 Error NUMBER OF OUTER VLAN’S ON When the classifier on a GBE or LAG port is match vlan
PORT OUT OF RANGE inner-vlan, only up to 4 different VLANs (outer VLANs) can
be configured per port. In addition, the inner VLAN IDs
should be different from (outer) VLAN IDs.
585 Error FLOW CONNECTED TO PORT IN Flow can be connected to ports only in ‘no shutdown’
SHUTDOWN STATE state.
586 Error ILLEGAL FLOW WHEN PORT A local flow (a flow within the same module) cannot be
MEMBER IN MNG FLOW started/terminated on an SVI port bound to the
management router.
587 Warning SUM OF POLICERS RATE The total sum of bandwidths defined in policer profiles for
EXCEED SUPPORTED BW all 8 ports of the M-ETH module must not exceed 1 GbE.
588 Error INCORRECT POLICER The values of cbs/cir/ebr/eir parameters defined for
PARAMETERS bandwidth do not satisfy one of the conditions listed in
the configuration table under Configuring Policer Profiles.
589 Error ILLEGAL FLOW BETWEEN The following flows are iilegal:
GBE/LAG PORTS • Between two GbE ports (on CL module)
• Between two LAGs
• Between a LAG and a GbE port (on CL module)
590 Error VLAN 4000 IS ILLEGAL FOR Data flow VLAN ID cannot take the value of 4000
DATA PORTS
591 Error UP TO 512 FLOWS FOR DATA For CL.2/A the maximum number of unidirectional flows is
512.
592 Error FLOW EDITING NOT The editing is not according to allowed VLAN editing
SUPPORTED options as described in Table 8-2
593 Error ONE LEVEL 0 BLOCK ALLOWED The maximum number of level-0 queue blocks on a VCG
port is 1
594 Error UP TO 8 LEVEL 0 BLOCKS The maximum number of level-0 queue blocks on the GbE
ALLOWED port of CL module is 8
597 Error ERP VLAN AND CLASSIFIER The same VLAN cannot be defined for data and R-APS
CONFLICT messages.
598 Error FLOW CONNECTED TO AN The ingress or egress port of the flow do not exist
UNDEFINED PORT anymore (for example, the corresponding svi port was
deleted).
599 Error CLASSIFIER IS UNIQUE PER You cannot use the same classifier for two different flows
INGRESS SLOT/PORT on the same port.
8.6 Peer
Remote devices that serve as destinations for pseudowire traffic are referred to
as peers.
Factory Defaults
No peers exist by default.
Benefits
Peers serve as destinations for pseudowire connections for transporting a TDM
payload over packet-switched networks.
Functional Description
Peers are remote devices operating opposite router interfaces. These devices
serve as destinations for pseudowire connections for transporting a TDM payload
over packet-switched networks. You can define up to 100 peers, each assigned a
unique index number. The index number is then used to specify the pseudowire
destination, instead of directly providing the necessary destination information.
To configure a UDP/IP peer, it is necessary to provide its IP address, and as an
option – the next hop IP address (if the peer IP address is not within a router
interface subnet).
For MEF-8 peers, you must specify the either an IP address or a MAC address of
the destination device.
When the MEF-8 peer is a MAC address, the central Megaplex device is configured
with a static MAC. In this case when the remote device fails needs to be replaced
with a different device (with different MAC), the peer must be reconfigured with
the new MAC to start working.
When the MEF-8 peer is an IP address, the MPW-1/VS module learns the remote
MAC by ARPs, and the remote device failure does not require reconfiguring the
peer.
Specifying the IP address of the next-hop-ip <valid IP address> You need to specify a next hop
next port to which packets IP address only when the peer
directed to the selected peer will IP address is not within the IP
be sent subnet of the router interface
that will be used to send
packets to this peer.
The default value, 0.0.0.0,
means that no next hop IP
address is defined
Note Setting remote peers as destinations is done under configure pwe context.
Examples
To configure remote peer 1 for UDP/IP PSN:
• IP address: 9.9.9.9
• Next hop IP address: 0.0.0.0
• Name: peer1.
mp4100>configure peer 1 ip 9.9.9.9 name peer1 next-hop-ip 0.0.0.0
mp4100>config# no peer 1
Configuration Errors
See Table 8-18.
8.7 Pseudowires
Pseudowires are an emulation of Layer-2 point-to-point connection-oriented
services over packet-switching networks (PSN). In Megaplex-4, they are available
for MPW-1, VS, SH-16/E1/PW and TP modules.
Packet formats can be selected on a per-pseudowire basis for optimal
transmission over UDP/IP, MPLS- or Ethernet-based networks. Each pseudowire
can be independently routed to any destination.
The following user-configurable protocols are supported, independently for each
pseudowire:
• TDMoIP (TDM over IP) in accordance with RFC5087, and TDMoMPLS in
accordance with RFC5087 and ITU-T Rec. Y.1413 (the term TDMoPSN is used
when information is applicable to both protocols)
• HDLCoPSN (HDLC over PSN) in accordance with RFC5087 and RFC4618
(except Clause 5.3 – PPP)
• CESoPSN (structure-aware TDM circuit emulation over PSN) in accordance
with RFC5086.
• SAToPSN (structure-agnostic TDM over PSN) in accordance with RFC4553.
The maximum number of PW (connection) configurations that may be stored in
the Megaplex-4 is 640, where each pseudowire is assigned a unique index
number in the range of 1 to 640. The actual maximum number, however,
depends on the number and type of modules installed in the chassis.
Standards
The MPW-1 PW ports provide pseudowire emulation services over
packet-switched networks using the following user-configurable protocols:
• TDMoIP (TDM over IP) in accordance with RFC5087, and TDMoMPLS in
accordance with RFC5087 and ITU-T Rec. Y.1413
• HDLCoPSN (HDLC over PSN) in accordance with RFC5087 and RFC4618
(except Clause 5.3 – PPP)
• CESoPSN (structure-aware TDM circuit emulation over PSN) in accordance
with RFC5086
• SAToPSN (structure-agnostic TDM over PSN) in accordance with RFC4553.
For protocols supported by different Megaplex-4 modules, see Table 8-13.
In addition, MPW-1, SH-16 and some of the VS modules meet the requirements
for edge-to-edge simulation of TDM circuits over PSN in accordance with
RFC4197, including high-performance adaptive timing recovery capabilities.
Benefits
Pseudowire circuit emulation technology enables packet-based infrastructure to
provide TDM services with the service quality of an SDH/SONET network.
Functional Description
The pseudowire services convert TDM payload to packets and transfer these
packets through Layer-2 or Layer-3 (router) services.
The pseudowire subsystem is located on the MPW-1, VS and TP modules.
The MPW-1 module has 8 independently-configurable internal DS1 ports, each
capable of handling 32 timeslots, for a total processing capacity of 256 timeslots
(the equivalent of 8 E1, or 2.048 Mbps, streams).
SH-16/E1/PW, VS-16E1T1/PW and VS-6/E1T1 modules have 16 independently-
configurable internal DS1 ports.
Other VS modules have 12 independently-configurable internal DS1 ports.
The TP modules have 4 independently-configurable internal DS1 ports.
Any PW-equipped module can serve as PW server for other modules, not
equipped with PW.
The traffic to the internal DS1 ports is directed by means of a pseudowire
cross-connect matrix (a timeslot cross-connect matrix similar to the TDM
cross-connect matrix), which routes traffic from the internal DS1 ports to the
pseudowire packet processors.
Multiple MPW-1, VS, SH-16 and TP modules can be installed in the Megaplex-4
chassis, in accordance with the required pseudowire transport capacity.
Note For additional information on the Megaplex-4 pseudowire system, see also the
following sections:
• Router (Pseudowire)
• Internal DS1 Ports (in Chapter 6)
• PW-TDM Cross-Connect (in this Chapter)
• Fault Propagation (in Chapter 7)
• MPW-1 Modules, SH-16 Modules, VS Modules and Teleprotection Modules in
Megaplex-4 I/O Modules Installation and Operation Manual).
The maximum number of pseudowires that can be processed for each DS1 port,
provided the port uses the DS0 cross-connect mode, is 16 (only one pseudowire
is supported when the port uses the TDM cross-connect mode).
A pseudowire can process traffic from only one internal DS1 port.
The basic format of a TDM-PW packet is illustrated below:
Ethernet Header
Control Word
Ethernet Header
The Ethernet header contains the DA, SA and Ethernet type information. It may
also contain an optional VLAN tag.
UDP over IP
For UDP/IP-type PSN, the Ethernet header is as follows:
• SA MAC – MAC address of the router interface used for packet forwarding
• DA MAC – MAC address of the resolved next hop, default gateway or host
• VLAN –VLAN assigned to the router interface used for packet forwarding
• P-bit – CoS of PW is set to 1. P-bit is a RIF attribute (CoS > P-bit).
MEF-8
For the MEF-type PSN, the Ethernet header is as follows:
• SA MAC – MAC address of the MPW-1 card
• DA MAC – MAC address of the peer
• VLAN – Flow (E-Line/E-LAN) VLAN
• P-bit – CoS of PW is set to 1. P-bit is a flow attribute (marking profile, CoS >
P-bit)
• Packet color – green.
Notes • Different source and destination labels can be used. In this case, it is
necessary to ensure that the source (inbound) label selected at one
pseudowire endpoint is configured as the destination (outbound) label at the
other pseudowire endpoint, and vice versa.
• The inbound Input PW label must be unique.
UDP over IP
For UDP/IP-type PSN, the TDM-PW packet structure is as follows:
6 6 2 2 2 20 8 4
Type VLAN Type UDP
DA SA IP Header CW TDM Payload
8100 Tag 800 Header
Where:
• DA – MAC address of the next hop (taken from the forwarding table)
• SA – MAC address of the applicable router interface
• VLAN type 0x8100 + VLAN tag, optional
• Type – 0x800 (IP packet)
• IPv4 Header – the protocol field of the IP header is set to 17 (UDP)
• UDP Header – the PW label/s, manually configured (see below)
For UDP/IP-type PSN IP, the TOS byte in the IP header can be configured per PW.
The UDP header is used to multiplex between the different PWs. UDP port values
are as follows:
• For TDMoIP (CE) bundles using packet payload Version V1:
During normal operation, the source UDP port is given by:
UDP Source Port = 1 + Destination PW Number.
This means that during normal operation, the UDP ports numbers are in
the range of 0 to 8191 decimal.
While the pseudowire is in the local fail state, the source UDP port
changes to:
UDP Source Port = 8000 + Destination PW Number.
This means that in the local fail state, the UDP ports numbers are higher
than 8000 hexa (32768 decimal).
• For TDMoIP (CE) bundles using packet payload Version V2:
UDP Source Port = 2000 + Destination PW Number
This means that all the UDP ports numbers are higher than 2000 hexa (8192
decimal).
• For CESoPSN and SAToPSN bundles using packet payload Version V2:
UDP Source Port = C000 + Destination PW Number.
This means that all the UDP ports numbers are higher than C000 hexa (49152
decimal).
MEF-8
For MEF-8-type PSN, the TDM-PW packet structure is as follows:
6 6 2 2 2 4 4
Type VLAN Type
DA SA ECID CW TDM Payload
8100 Tag 88D8
Where:
• DA – MAC address of the peer device
• SA – MAC address of the associated SVI (per E5-cTDM-4 card)
• VLAN type 0x8100 + VLAN tag, optional
• Type – 0x88D8 (CESoETH packet)
• ECID – Emulated Circuit Identifier, a manually configured unique label which
identifies the PW.
Control Word
The control word structure is illustrated below.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 16 31
0 0 0 0 L R M/RSV FRG LEN (6) Sequence Number (16)
0 01 Reserved
1 01 Reserved
1 10 Reserved
1 11 Reserved
TDM Payload
The table below lists the TDM payload encapsulation methods supported by
different I/O modules. It also indicates whether these modules support adaptive
timing. Each payload encapsulation method can be independently selected for
each pseudowire.
TDMoPSN
The main functions performed by the packet processor when using the TDMoPSN
mode are as follows:
• In the transmit-to-network direction:
Processes the data stream received through the internal DS1 port to
generate pseudowires, as specified by the user. When using a framed
mode, the user can specify the timeslots to be transported end-to-end.
To prepare a pseudowire, the packet processor extracts segments from
the continuous data stream for insertion into the pseudowire payload
section.
The size of the pseudowire payload section is specified by the user
(n × 48 bytes, where n is 1 to 30):
HDLCoPSN
HDLCoPSN packet processing is similar to the processing of TDMoPSN packets
described above, except that the HDLCoPSN protocol is intended to provide
port-to-port transport of HDLC-encapsulated traffic, in accordance with RFC4618,
for example, Frame Relay or CCS protocols.
For framed ports, the HDLC traffic is carried in specific timeslots (these timeslots
are specified during the configuration of a HDLCoPSN pseudowire and are always
considered data timeslots).
Note For HDLCoPSN, it is not necessary to configure the same number of timeslots at
the pseudowire end points. The pseudowire bandwidth will be determined by the
endpoint with the smaller number of assigned timeslots.
SAToPSN
SAToPSN is different from the TDMoPSN and HDLCoPSN protocols, in that it is
used to transfer transparently a bit stream at the nominal port rate
(2.048 Mbps). Therefore, SAToPSN can be used only when the port uses the
unframed mode, and thus only one pseudowire can be configured per port.
SAToPSN packet payload consists of a user-specified number of raw TDM bytes
(MPW-1: 4 to 1440 bytes, SH-16/E1/PW, VS-16E1T1-PW and VS-6/E1T1: 32 to
1440 bytes), and is treated as data payload.
Note The SAToPSN packet overhead is large, and therefore, for efficient bandwidth
utilization, the number of raw TDM bytes per packet should be as large as
possible.
The receiving end restores the original bit stream, and therefore a SAToPSN
pseudowire can only be directed to another unframed E1 port, or to an
n×64 kbps protocol (where n must be 32, that is, to a high-speed serial port
operating at a rate of 2048 kbps).
CESoPSN
CESoPSN transports raw TDM data, that is, packets are formed by inserting a
user-specified number of complete TDM frames in the packet payload area.
CESoPSN pseudowires can only be configured on framed ports.
The TDM frames are considered as serial data, even if they carry voice and CAS.
Since a CESoPSN pseudowire transports raw TDM frames, a CESoPSN pseudowire
can only be directed to another E1 framed port.
The PSN parameters, which are reflected in the pseudowire header structure,
enable specifying the requested priority or quality of service for pseudowire
traffic generated by the MPW-1/VS/TP module. The applicable parameters depend
on PSN type:
• When the PSN is based on Layer 2 forwarding, the user can specify the VLAN
priority (per IEEE 802.1p) for the Ethernet frames carrying pseudowire
packets. The priority is always selectable for traffic forwarded through the
Megaplex-4 GbE ports, because for these ports VLAN tagging is always
enabled; when using other bridge ports as pseudowire exit ports, it is
necessary to enable VLAN tagging in order to request a specific priority.
• When the PSN uses IP routing, the user can specify the Type of Service (ToS)
per RFC791; if the PSN supports RFC2474, ToS is interpreted as a DiffServ
codepoint per RFC2474.
• When the PSN uses MPLS, the user can specify the EXP bits. In addition, the
user can also add ingress and egress tunnel labels, which enable network
operators to plan preferential forwarding of pseudowire traffic using the
specified tunnel labels.
Another parameter that may be used, for compatibility with older TDMoIP
implementations, is the packet payload version, V1 or V2.
Pseudowire QoS/CoS
To enable optimal handling of pseudowire traffic within the PSN, the following
parameters can be configured:
• For Ethernet transport networks: outgoing pseudowire packets are assigned
to a dedicated VLAN ID according to 802.1Q and marked for priority using
802.1p bits.
• For IP transport networks: outgoing pseudowire packets are marked for
priority using DSCP or ToS bits. This allows TDMoIP packets to be given the
highest priority in IP networks.
• For MPLS transport networks: outgoing pseudowire packets are assigned to a
specific MPLS tunnel, and marked for priority using the EXP bits.
The proper balance between the PSN throughput and delay is achieved via
configurable packet size. A jitter buffer with selectable size compensates for
packet delay variation (jitter) of up to 200 msec in the network.
ToS
The ToS specifies the Layer 3 priority assigned to the traffic generated by this
pseudowire.
For IP networks, this priority is indicated by the IP type-of-service parameter for
this pseudowire. The specified value is inserted in the IP TOS field of the
pseudowire IP packets.
When supported by an IP network, the type-of-service parameter is interpreted,
in accordance with RFC791 or RFC2474, as a set of qualitative parameters for the
precedence, delay, throughput and delivery reliability to be provided to the IP
traffic generated by this pseudowire.
These qualitative parameters may be used by each network that transfers the
pseudowire IP traffic to select specific values for the actual service parameters of
the network, to achieve the desired quality of service.
You can also specify a Layer 2 priority by means of the vlan priority command.
Jitter Buffer
The packets of each pseudowire are transmitted by PW-equipped modules at
essentially fixed intervals towards the PSN. The packets are transported by the
PSN and arrive to the far end after some delay. Ideally, the PSN transport delay
should be constant: in this case, the packets arrive at regular intervals (these
intervals are equal to the intervals at which they had been transmitted).
However, in reality packets arrive at irregular intervals, because of variations in
the network transmission delay. The term Packet Delay Variation (PDV) is used to
designate the maximum expected deviation from the nominal arrival time of the
packets at the far end device.
Note
The deviations from the nominal transmission delay experienced by packets are
referred to as jitter, and the PDV is equal to the expected peak value of the jitter.
Note however that nothing prevents the actual delay from exceeding the selected
PDV value.
To compensate for deviations from the expected packet arrival time, the module
uses jitter buffers that temporarily store the packets arriving from the PSN (that
is, from the far end equipment) before being transmitted to the local TDM
equipment, to ensure that the TDM traffic is sent to the TDM side at a constant
rate.
For each pseudowire, the jitter buffer must be configured to compensate for the
jitter level expected to be introduced by the PSN, that is, the jitter buffer size
determines the Packet Delay Variation Tolerance (PDVT).
Two conflicting requirements apply:
• Since packets arriving from the PSN are first stored in the jitter buffer before
being transmitted to the TDM side, TDM traffic suffers an additional delay.
The added delay time is equal to the jitter buffer size configured by the user.
• The jitter buffer is filled by the incoming packets and emptied out to fill the
TDM stream. If the PSN jitter exceeds the configured jitter buffer size,
underflow/overflow conditions occur, resulting in errors at the TDM side:
A jitter buffer overrun occurs when it receives a burst of packets that
exceeds the configured jitter buffer size + packetization delay. When an
overrun is detected, the module clears the jitter buffer, causing an
underrun.
A jitter buffer underrun occurs when no packets are received for more
than the configured jitter buffer size, or immediately after an overrun.
When the first packet is received, or immediately after an underrun, the buffer is
automatically filled with a conditioning pattern up to the PDVT level in order to
compensate for the underrun. Then, the module starts processing the packets
and empty out the jitter buffer toward the TDM side.
To minimize the possibility of buffer overflow/underflow events, two conditions
must be fulfilled:
• The buffer must have sufficient capacity. For this purpose, the buffer size can
be selected by the user in accordance with the expected jitter characteristics,
separately for each pseudowire.
• The read-out rate must be equal to the average rate at which frames are
received from the network. For this purpose, the read-out rate must be
continuously adapted to the packet rate, a function performed by the
adaptive clock recovery mechanism of each packet processor.
Adaptive Timing
MPW-1 modules have independent adaptive clock recovery mechanisms for each
pseudowire, which recover the original timing (clock rate) of the far-end source
of each pseudowire. The clock recovery mechanisms can provide recovered clock
signals to serve as timing references for the Megaplex-4 nodal timing subsystem.
The receive path of each pseudowire must use a clock recovery mechanism to
recover a clock signal at the original payload transmit rate used at the far end.
This mechanism is referred to as adaptive clock recovery mechanism.
Each pseudowire has its own adaptive timing recovery mechanism, in accordance
with the options listed in RFC4197. The recovered pseudowire clocks can be used
as timing reference signals for the nodal Megaplex-4 timing subsystem, and
therefore MPW-1 allows flexible timing distribution.
The adaptive clock recovery mechanism estimates the average rate of the
payload data received in the frames arriving from the packet-switched network.
Assuming that the packet-switched network does not lose data, the average rate
at which payload arrives will be equal to the rate at which payload is transmitted
by the source.
Note
Generally, lost packets, as well as packets that did not arrive in the correct order,
are replaced by special dummy packets. However, for CESoPSN and SAToPSN,
packets can be reordered.
the mechanism to fully readjust. To provide the best possible user experience,
the user can specify how to handle such transient conditions (a capability
referred to as delay sensitivity):
By disabling delay sensitivity, performance is optimized for accurate clock
recovery. This selection is optimal for data transmission applications.
By enabling delay sensitivity, performance is optimized for constant delay.
This selection is optimal for voice transmission applications.
You can select a total of 10 pseudowire recovered clocks per Megaplex-4.
For HDLCoPSN pseudowires, it is not necessary to restore the original data rate,
because only useful HDLC payload (extracted from some of the HDLC frames
reaching each endpoint) is transferred through the pseudowire, as explained in
the HDLCoPSN section. Therefore, the payload, which requires only a fraction of
the available bandwidth, can be reinserted in timeslots at the receiving endpoint
rate, without requiring any clock adaptation mechanism.
VS-16E1T1-PW, VS-6/E1T1, SH-16/E1/PW and MPW-1 modules have the full
support of adaptive timing.
Adaptive timing is not supported by other PW-equipped modules.
OAM Protocol
The RAD proprietary implementation of the OAM connectivity protocol enables
detecting loss of communication with the pseudowire destination and taking
steps that prevent the resulting flooding. The protocol also enables checking that
the destination uses a compatible configuration.
The OAM protocol is supported only by packet payload version V2 and not
supported for MEF-8 encapsulation.
The OAM protocol is used to check for a valid pseudowire connection: this
includes checks for compatible configuration parameters at the packet processors
at the two endpoints of a pseudowire, and detection of inactive pseudowire
status.
The information regarding the pseudowire state is collected by the continuous,
periodic handshake between the two endpoints of a pseudowire, which
generates little traffic, but ensures that each endpoint recognizes the
connection, and that it is enabled. In case no response is received to OAM
packets within a predefined interval (a few tens of seconds), the pseudowire is
declared inactive.
When the use of the OAM protocol is enabled, little traffic flows until the
connection between the two pseudowire endpoints is established: only after the
connection is confirmed by the OAM exchange is transmission at the normal (full)
rate started, and the pseudowire starts carrying traffic. In case the connection is
lost, the transmitted traffic is again significantly decreased (several packets per
second per connection).
The OAM connectivity check also prevents network flooding in case the
connection is lost.
OAM packets sent by MPW-1 modules are identified in accordance with the
source port: the OAM packets run over a UDP port number (see the Determining
UDP Port Numbers Used by Pseudowires section) that is assigned only to OAM
traffic, but use the VLAN ID and ToS of the originating connection.
Factory Defaults
By default, no pseudowires are configured: you must define your own in
accordance with your application requirements. Other parameter defaults are
listed in the table below.
psn udp-over-ip
exp-bits 0
tos 0
tdm-payload 4
sensitivity disabled
oam disabled
vlan priority 0
udp-mux-method src-port
oos parameters:
far-end-type e1
signaling force-idle
data 00
voice 00
Configuring Pseudowires
New pseudowire bundles are added by defining their number (1–640), type
(connection mode) and a PSN type.
Note An internal DS1 port becomes active only if at least one enabled pseudowire with
a valid cross-connection is assigned to the port.
Specifying the type of far-end-type {e1 | t1- e1 – E1 stream with G.704 framing. The PCM signals
framing used by the esf | t1-sf | unframed | are processed assuming that they are encoded in
equipment at the fxs-e1 | fxs-t1} accordance with the A-law. You can use this
destination endpoint. The selection when the port line-type is a framed
selected value also version.
determines the encoding t1-esf – T1 stream with ESF framing. The PCM signals
law used on PCM voice are processed assuming that they are encoded in
channels accordance with the µ-law. You can use this
selection when the port line-type is a framed
version.
t1-sf – T1 stream with SF (D4) framing. The PCM
signals are processed assuming that they are
encoded in accordance with the µ-law. You can use
this selection when the port line-type is a framed
version.
fxs-e1 – E1 stream with G.704 framing, used when
Megaplex-4 is working opposite IPmux-1E. The PCM
signals are processed assuming that they are
encoded in accordance with the A-law. You can use
this selection when the port line-type is a framed
version. In addition, the option supports cadence
(for more details, refer to RAD Technical Support
Dept).
fxs-t1 – T1 stream with ESF framing, used when
Megaplex-4 is working opposite IPmux-1E. The PCM
signals are processed assuming that they are
encoded in accordance with the µ-law. You can use
this selection when the port line-type is a framed
version. In addition, the option supports cadence
(for more details, refer to RAD Technical Support
Dept).
unframed – unframed data stream, transparently
transferred. You can use this selection when the
port line-type is unframed.
This is the only selection for SAToPSN pseudowires.
For CESoPSN pseudowires it is not allowed.
For the PWs on the same module, make sure to
select the same value at both end points.
The selected value must also match the line-type
configured for the physical port of the pseudowire
local endpoint
This parameter is not relevant for HDLCoPSN
pseudowires
Optimizing the clock sensitivity Use no sensitivity to optimize the clock mechanism
recovery mechanism of the for accurate clock recovery. This selection is optimal
selected pseudowire for for data transmission applications.
constant delay. This This parameter is relevant only for MPW-1 modules
selection is optimal for voice and not relevant for HDLCoPSN pseudowires.
transmission applications
Transmitting an tdm-oos [voice <00 to tdm-oos voice and data are hexadecimal numbers in
out-of-service signal (OOS) FF (hexa)>] [data <00 the range of 00 to FF (two digits).
on PW failure and selecting to FF (hexa)>] The selected code for data is also sent during
the code transmitted by the [signaling {force-idle | out-of-service periods instead of the external data
port during out-of-service force-busy} ] stream when the unframed mode is used
periods on the timeslots
The voice OOS parameter is not relevant for the
defined as data and voice
following cases:
timeslots.
• HDLCoPSN pseudowires in MPW-1 module
• when the MPW-1 DS1 port uses the unframed
mode.
signaling (MPW-1 only) – Determines the state of
the signaling bits sent to the internal DS1 port
connected to the selected pseudowire during
out-of-service periods (relevant only when the
attached internal DS1 port is configured with
signaling enabled):
• force-idle – The signaling bits are forced to the
idle state (05 hexa) during out-of-service periods.
• force-busy – The signaling bits are forced to the
busy state (0F hexa) during out-of-service
periods.
Defining the jitter buffer jitter-buffer <value in Use the shortest feasible buffer, to minimize
size in msec µsec> connection latency
For MPW-1 module the allowed range depends on
the framing mode:
• framed: 2500 to 200000 µsec, in 1-µsec steps.
• unframed: 500 to 200000 µsec, in 1-µsec steps.
For SH-16/E1/PW, VS-16E1T1/PW and VS-6/E1T1
modules: 250 µsec to 256000 µsec, in 1-µsec steps
(the value entered by the user is rounded upward to
the closest n*125 µsec value).
For other VS and TP modules: 250 µsec to
8000 µsec, in 1-µsec steps (the value entered by the
user is rounded upward to the closest n*125 µsec
value).
This parameter is not relevant for HDLCoPSN
pseudowires
Enabling/disabling the OAM oam The selection must be compatible with the
connectivity protocol for this equipment at the far end of the connection.
PW For pseudowires defined on redundant internal DS1
ports, make sure to select the same OAM mode.
Using no oam disables the OAM protocol.
This feature is supported in MPW-1 only and is not
available for MEF-8 Ethernet encapsulation.
OAM packets sent by MPW-1 modules are identified
in accordance with the source port: the OAM packets
run over a UDP port number (see the Determining
UDP Port Numbers Used by Pseudowires section)
that is assigned only to OAM traffic, but use the
VLAN ID and ToS of the originating connection.
Specifying the number of tdm-payload <1–360> A larger value decreases the bandwidth utilization
TDM payload bytes to be efficiency, but also increases the connection intrinsic
inserted in each packet latency.
For MPW-1 selection consideration, refer to the
Selection Guidelines for TDM Payload Bytes per
Frame section in Megaplex-4 I/O Modules Installation
and Operation Manual.
The number is specified as a multiple of 48 bytes, for
example, 1 means 48 bytes, and 30 means 1440
bytes.
The available selections for TDMoIP are 1 to 30 (48
to 1440 bytes, respectively).
The values for CESoPSN are:
• For MPW-1 module: 4 to 360.
• For VS-16E1T1-PW and VS-6/E1T1 and SH-
16/E1/PW modules: 1 to 61.
• For other VS and TP modules: 1 to 64.
In the case of voice with signaling transferred by the
MPW-1 module with CESoPSN protocol, the following
restrictions apply depending on the far-end-type.
far-end-type=e1: tdm-payload value must be 16.
far-end-type=t1-esf, t1-sf: tdm-payload value must
be 24.
The values for SAToPSN are:
• For MPW-1 module: 4 to 1140
• For VS-16E1T1-PW and VS-6/E1T1 and SH-
16/E1/PW modules: 32 to 1440.
This parameter is not relevant for HDLCoPSN
pseudowires.
Specifying the value for the tos <tos number> This parameter is relevant only when psn is
TOS byte used on outbound udp-over-ip.
traffic Range: from 0 to 255.
In accordance with RFC 2474, it is recommended to
use only values which are multiples of 4.
Eabling and configuring vlan [priority <0..7>] VLAN priority: The allowed range in accordance with
VLAN tagging and priority on IEEE 802.1p is 7 (highest priority) to 0 (lowest
every transmitted packet priority).
Note: If the traffic on the specific PW must be
assigned priority, the priority parameter must be
configured in this context (not as part of flow
configuration) and then mapped via queue-map-
profile configuration (see Queue Mapping Profiles).
Specifying the value of the exp-bits <exp-bit The allowed range is 7 (highest priority) to 0 (lowest
outbound EXP bits that number> priority).
indicate the requested Applies only to MPLS PSN.
quality of service in the
MPLS header of the
pseudowire
Enabling and specifying the tunnel-index [ingress Relevant for MPLS PSN only
ingress and egress MLPS <ingress-label>] If an ingress label is configured, the egress label
tunnel indices [egress <egress- must be configured as well, and vice versa.
label>]
The supported range is 16 to 1048575.
Adding no before the command removes the labels
Assigning egress port for L2 egress-port svi This parameter is relevant only when psn is ethernet
forwarding <svi_number>
Specifying the UDP port udp-mux-method This parameter is relevant only when psn is
multiplexing method {dst-port | src-port } udp-over-ip.
dst-port:
UDP destination port = 0xC000 + <out-PW-label>
UDP source port is 0xC000 + <in-PW-label>
This selection is not supported for MPW-1.
src-port:
UDP destination port = 0xC000 + <out-PW-label>
UDP source port is 0x85E
Examples
To configure a TDMoIP PW with UDP/IP network encapsulation:
• PW number 1
• PW type – TDMoIP (v2)
• PSN type – UDP/IP
• Out (destination) label – 3
• In (source) label – 2
• Far end type – E1
• Jitter buffer – 10 000
• OAM – enabled
• Peer – 1
• TDM payload size – 10 (480 bytes).
mp4100>config>pwe# pw 1 type tdmoip-v2 psn udp-over-ip
mp4100>config>pwe>pw(1) label out 3 in 2
mp4100>config>pwe>pw(1) far-end-type e1
mp4100>config>pwe>pw(1) jitter-buffer 10000
mp4100>config>pwe>pw(1) oam
mp4100>config>pwe>pw(1) peer 1
mp4100>config>pwe>pw(1) tdm-payload 10
Displaying PW Statistics
PW ports of MPW-1, VS and TP modules feature the collection of statistical
diagnostics, thereby allowing the carrier to monitor the transmission performance
of the links.
The pseudowire transmission statistics enable analyzing pseudowire traffic
volume, evaluate the end-to-end transmission quality (as indicated by sequence
errors), and jitter buffer performance. By resetting the status data at the desired
instant, it is possible to ensure that only current, valid data is taken into
consideration.
Displaying show statistics {total | all | all- • current - Displays the current statistics
statistics intervals | current} • all-intervals – Displays statistics for all valid
intervals (without current statistics)
• all –all statistics: first current statistics, then
statistics for all valid intervals, and finally total
statistics
• total – Displays total statistics of last 96 intervals
Note
All the examples are given for VS/TP modules. In the MPW-1 modules, the
counters marked by an asterisk are not displayed.
Missing Packets : 0
Mis-order Dropped Packets : 0
Reordered Packets : 0
Jitter Buffer Underflows Seconds : 0
Jitter Buffer Overflows Seconds : 0
Min Jitter Buffer Level (uSec) : 0
Max Jitter Buffer Level (uSec) : 488
Max Jitter Buffer Deviation (uSec) : 488
Interval Number : 2
Missing Packets : 0
Mis-order Dropped Packets : 0
Reordered Packets : 0
Jitter Buffer Underflows Seconds : 0
Jitter Buffer Overflows Seconds : 0
Min Jitter Buffer Level (uSec) : 0
Max Jitter Buffer Level (uSec) : 0
Max Jitter Buffer Deviation (uSec) : 0
Interval Number : 3
Missing Packets : 0
Mis-order Dropped Packets : 0
Reordered Packets : 0
Jitter Buffer Underflows Seconds : 0
Jitter Buffer Overflows Seconds : 0
Min Jitter Buffer Level (uSec) : 0
Max Jitter Buffer Level (uSec) : 0
Max Jitter Buffer Deviation (uSec) : 0
All Intervals Statistics:
mp4100>config>pwe>pw(1)# show statistics all-intervals
Interval Number : 1
Missing Packets : 0
Mis-order Dropped Packets : 0
Reordered Packets : 0
Jitter Buffer Underflows Seconds : 0
Jitter Buffer Overflows Seconds : 0
Min Jitter Buffer Level (uSec) : 0
Max Jitter Buffer Level (uSec) : 488
Max Jitter Buffer Deviation (uSec) : 488
Interval Number : 2
Missing Packets : 0
Mis-order Dropped Packets : 0
Reordered Packets : 0
Jitter Buffer Underflows Seconds : 0
Interval Number : 3
Missing Packets : 0
Mis-order Dropped Packets : 0
Reordered Packets : 0
Jitter Buffer Underflows Seconds : 0
Jitter Buffer Overflows Seconds : 0
Min Jitter Buffer Level (uSec) : 0
Max Jitter Buffer Level (uSec) : 0
Max Jitter Buffer Deviation (uSec) : 0
Interval Number : 4
Missing Packets : 0
Mis-order Dropped Packets : 0
Reordered Packets : 0
Jitter Buffer Underflows Seconds : 0
Jitter Buffer Overflows Seconds : 0
Min Jitter Buffer Level (uSec) : 0
Max Jitter Buffer Level (uSec) : 0
Interval Number : 5
Missing Packets : 0
Mis-order Dropped Packets : 0
Reordered Packets : 0
Jitter Buffer Underflows Seconds : 0
Jitter Buffer Overflows Seconds : 0
Min Jitter Buffer Level (uSec) : 0
Max Jitter Buffer Level (uSec) : 0
Max Jitter Buffer Deviation (uSec) : 0
more..
Total Statistics:
mp4100>config>pwe>pw(1)# show statistics total
Total
---------------------------------------------------------------
Rx Frames : 1391711
Tx Frames : 4798604
Jitter Buffer Underflows Seconds : 0
Jitter Buffer Overflows Seconds : 0
Sequence Errors Seconds : 0
Parameter Description
Time Elapsed (Sec) The elapsed time (in seconds) since the beginning of the current interval, in seconds.
The range is 1 to 900 seconds
Valid Intervals The number of elapsed finished 15-min intervals for which statistics data can be
displayed, in addition to the current (not finished) interval (up to 96).
Sequence Errors Displays the number of seconds during which sequence errors have been detected.
Seconds In accordance with the applicable standards, the transmitted packets carry a sequence
number that is automatically assigned, such that consecutive packets are
automatically consecutive sequence numbers. At the receive side, these numbers are
checked by the receive mechanism, which expects each new incoming packet to carry
the next number in the sequence, relative to the previous one (i.e., packet 5 must be
received after packet 4). Any deviation from the this rule indicates a problem with
packet flow integrity (and hence with the pseudowire payload (data or voice)
integrity), and in this case the sequence errors count is incremented by 1.
There are two main reasons for a sequence error event:
• One or more packets have been lost somewhere in the network.
• Packets have been reordered within the network. Packet reordering may occur due
to queuing mechanisms, rerouting by the network, or when the router updates
include very large routing tables
In VS, SH and TP modules, this number is the total number of seconds when the
Missing Packets, Mis-order Dropped Packets and Reordered Packets events occurred.
Missing Packets Number of missing packets as detected via Control Word sequence number gaps. This
(VS Modules only) count does not include misordered dropped packets.
Parameter Description
Mis-order Dropped Number of packets detected via Control Word sequence number to be out of
Packets (VS sequence, and could not be re-ordered, or could not fit in the jitter buffer. This count
Modules only) includes duplicated packets.
Reordered Packets Number of packets detected via Control Word sequence number to be out of
(VS Modules only) sequence, but successfully reordered.
Jitter Buffer Displays the number of seconds during which at least one jitter buffer underflow
Underflows event has been detected (not relevant for HDLC pseudowires).
Seconds PW-containing modules are equipped with a Packet Delay Variation Tolerance buffer,
also called a “jitter buffer”, which is used to automatically compensate for packet
network delay variation (jitter). Each pseudowire has its own jitter buffer. Although
packets leave the transmitting PW-module at a constant rate, they will usually reach
the far end at a rate which is not constant, because in practice the network
transmission delay varies (due to factors such as congestion, rerouting, queuing
mechanisms, transport over wireless or half-duplex media, etc.).
TDM equipment at both ends of a pseudowire require a constant flow of data, and
cannot tolerate delay variation. Therefore, the receive side jitter buffer is required to
provide the TDM equipment with a synchronous and constant flow.
For this purpose, when a pseudowire is set up (and at any time after communication
is restored), the jitter buffer is loaded with packets up to its middle point: only after
this point it starts outputting TDM data towards the connected TDM equipment. The
stored packets assure that the TDM equipment will continue receiving data even if the
network delay momentarily increases. Obviously, if packets are delayed too long, the
buffer is gradually emptied out until it underflows (this situation is called buffer
starvation, and it affects the end-to-end voice/data integrity).
Each underflow event increases the jitter buffer underflow counter by 1.
Jitter Buffer Displays the number of seconds during which at least one jitter buffer overflow event
Overflows Seconds has been detected (not relevant for HDLC pseudowires).
As explained above, during steady state, the jitter buffer is filled up to its middle
point, which means that it has space to hold additional packets. An overflow will occur
when the network delay suddently decreases, for example, when a large burst of
packets reaches the PW module. If the burst includes more packets than the jitter
buffer can store at that instant, the buffer will be filled up to its top. In this case, an
unknown number of excess packets are dropped. To correct the situation, Megaplex-4
initiates a forced underflow by flushing (emptying) the buffer. Therefore, an overflow
always results in an immediate underflow. After the buffer is flushed, the process of
filling up the buffer is started again
Min Jitter Buffer Actual minimum size of the jitter buffer recorded for this pseudowire in the selected
Level (usec) interval, in µsec (not relevant for HDLC pseudowires).
Max Jitter Buffer Actual maximum size of the jitter buffer recorded for this pseudowire in the selected
Level (usec) interval, in µsec (not relevant for HDLC pseudowires).
Max Jitter Buffer The maximum jitter buffer deviation (variation of delay, in µsec) reported during the
Deviation (usec) selected interval (not relevant for HDLC pseudowires). This is the maximum jitter level
that had to be compensated for in the selected interval
Parameter Description
Valid Intervals The number of elapsed finished 15-min intervals for which statistics data can be
displayed, not including the current (not finished) interval (up to 96)
Sequence Errors Displays the number of seconds during which sequence errors have been detected.
Seconds In accordance with the applicable standards, the transmitted packets carry a sequence
number that is automatically assigned, such that consecutive packets are
automatically consecutive sequence numbers. At the receive side, these numbers are
checked by the receive mechanism, which expects each new incoming packet to carry
the next number in the sequence, relative to the previous one (i.e., packet 5 must be
received after packet 4). Any deviation from the this rule indicates a problem with
packet flow integrity (and hence with the pseudowire payload (data or voice)
integrity), and in this case the sequence errors count is incremented by 1.
There are two main reasons for a sequence error event:
• One or more packets have been lost somewhere in the network.
• Packets have been reordered within the network. Packet reordering may occur due
to queuing mechanisms, rerouting by the network, or when the router updates
include very large routing tables
Missing Packets Number of missing packets as detected via Control Word sequence number gaps. This
(VS Modules only) count does not include misordered dropped packets.
Mis-order Dropped Number of packets detected via Control Word sequence number to be out of
Packets (VS/SH/TP sequence, and could not be re-ordered, or could not fit in the jitter buffer. This count
Modules only) includes duplicated packets.
Reordered Packets Number of packets detected via Control Word sequence number to be out of
(VS/SH/TP Modules sequence, but successfully reordered.
only)
Min Jitter Buffer Actual minimum size of the jitter buffer recorded for this pseudowire in the selected
Level (usec) interval, in µsec (not relevant for HDLC pseudowires).
Max Jitter Buffer Actual maximum size of the jitter buffer recorded for this pseudowire in the selected
Level (usec) interval, in µsec (not relevant for HDLC pseudowires).
Max Jitter Buffer The maximum jitter buffer deviation (variation of delay, in µsec) reported during the
Deviation (usec) selected interval (not relevant for HDLC pseudowires). This is the maximum jitter level
that had to be compensated for in the selected interval
Parameter Description
Sequence Errors Seconds Total number of seconds during which sequence errors have been detected.
In VS modules, this number is the total number of seconds when the Missing
Packets, Mis-order Dropped Packets and Reordered Packets events
occurred.
Jitter Buffer Underflows Total number of jitter buffer underflow events (not relevant for HDLC
Seconds pseudowires).
Parameter Description
Jitter Buffer Overflows Total number of jitter buffer overflow events (not relevant for HDLC
Seconds pseudowires).
Clearing Statistics
To clear the PW statistics:
• At the prompt config>pwe>pw<PW number>)#, enter clear-statistics.
The statistics for the specified PW are cleared.
Name : pw-1
PW Type : CES PSN Data
PSN Type : UDP Over IP
Connectivity Status : Up
Out Label : 2
In Label : 2
Peer IP Address : 20.20.11.1
Next Hop MAC Address : 00-00-00-00-00-00
The table below explains the connectivity status values of the selected
pseudowire.
Parameter Description
Displayed
Up The pseudowire carries traffic, and both the remote and the local
pseudowire endpoints receive Ethernet frames. However, there
may be problems such as sequence errors, underflows, overflows,
etc., which may be displayed using the Statistics function.
Parameter Description
Displayed
Unavailable The pseudowire reports loss of connectivity (it did not receive
neither OAM, nor data packets for 10 seconds or more (OAM link
then reports loss of synchronization). This is often caused by
network problems, or configuration errors.
Local Fail A failure has been detected at the local pseudowire endpoint.
Configuration Errors
Table 8-18 lists messages generated by Megaplex-4 when a configuration error is
detected.
460 Error SAME IP FOR ROUTER INTERF The same IP address has been defined for both the
& D.GATEWAY default gateway and for one of the router interfaces. This
is not allowed.
Note however that this error may also appear because the
default IP address (0.0.0.0) have not yet been changed.
461 Error NOT SAME SUBNET FOR At least one of the IP addresses assigned to router
ROUTER INTERF & D.GATEWAY interfaces must be in the IP subnet of the Megaplex-4
router default gateway.
463 Error IN PW LABEL IS NOT UNIQUE This message, which is generated only after the specified
pseudowire is switched to the no shutdown state,
indicates that two or more pseudowires have the same
source UDP port number (the check is made irrespective
of the pseudowire PSN type, UDP/IP or Ethernet). This is
not allowed.
464 Error IP & NEXT HOP ARE THE SAME This message is generated after the specified static route
FOR STATIC ROUTE is updated, and indicates that the next hop IP address and
the destination IP address of the route are the same.
This is not allowed – the addresses must be different. If
the next hop IP address is not needed, leave the default
value, 0.0.0.0.
Note however that this error may also appear because the
default IP addresses (0.0.0.0) have not yet been changed.
465 Error STATIC ROUTE IP IS NOT This message, which is generated only after the specified
UNIQUE static route is updated, indicates that the route
destination IP address is already used in another static
route.
This is not allowed – only one static route may be defined
for any specific destination IP address.
Note however that this error may also appear because the
default IP addresses (0.0.0.0) have not yet been changed
466 Error ROUTER INTERF CAN'T BE ON The IP addresses assigned to the router interfaces must
THE SAME SUBNET be in different IP subnets.
467 Error MORE THAN 16 PWS FOR DS1 You are trying to connect too many pseudowires to the
PORT same ds1 port (the maximum is 16 pseudowires per port).
468 Error ILLEGAL FAR END TYPE The pseudowire far-end-type-mp parameter must match
FRAMING the framing mode of the ds1 port supporting the
pseudowire:
• Framed mode: select e1, t1-esf, or t1-sf
• Unframed mode: select unframed.
469 Error DS1 PORT OF PW IS DOWN The ds1 port assigned to a pseudowire is set to
shutdown. Change its setting to no shutdown.
470 Error TOO MANY ROUTER You are trying to configure more than 6 router interfaces
INTERFACES on a MPW-1 module (MPW-1 supports a maximum of 6
router interfaces). Check and remove unused interfaces.
471 Error NUMBER OF BYTES IN FRAME In CESoPSN the number of TDM payload bytes is equal to
EXCEEDS 1440 {tdm-payload value <4–360> * (number of timeslots
cross-connected between the PW and DS1 port).
This number must not exceed 1440 bytes.
472 Warning CHANGE MAY CAUSE DATA As a result of the last configuration actions, during the
INTERFERENCE database update you are initiating, the internal MPW-1
pseudowire processing assignments will be recalculated.
You are warned that this may this cause a short traffic
disruption (errors) for the other pseudowires served by
the same MPW-1 module. If this is not acceptable,
postpone the update and perform it while traffic load is
light
473 Error WRONG TIMESLOT When the redundancy partner of a DS1 port of the MPW-1
ASSIGNMENT is a T1 port, it is not allowed to assign more than 24
timeslots on the DS1 port.
474 Error WRONG SATOP PARAMETERS When using the SAToP protocol, make sure that DS1 port
is cross-connected via ds1 command and not ds0.
far-end-type-mp should be set to unframed.
475 Error PWS FROM DIFF SLOTS Pseudowires configured on different MPW-1 modules
DEMANDS DIFF PEERS must be configured with different peers, even if the
destination address is the same.
Using different peer numbers will result in the creation of
different internal flows, each directed to the relevant
router interface
476 Error PROTECTED PORTS HAVE When TDM protection is configured between two DS1
ASSYMETRIC PARAMETERS ports, all their physical layer parameters must be identical
477 Error PEER DOESN'T EXIST You have specified a peer index during the creation of a
pseudowire, but the peer has not yet been created.
478 Error PEER NEEDS ROUTER It is not possible to configure peers before at least one
INTERFACE router interface has been configured.
479 Error V1/V2 PW LABEL DUPLICATED After assigning a label to a pseudowire using payload
format V1, do not assign the next label in sequence to a
pseudowire using payload format V2 (skip that label).
480 Error PEER NOT ATTACHED TO PW You have created a PEER without attaching it to any
pseudowire.
481 Error SLOT/PORT OF RI IS NOT You must configure a flow between the router interface
CONNECTED and the Ethernet entity
482 Error ASSYMETRIC FAR END TYPE When TDM protection is configured between two DS1
FOR PROTECTED PORTS ports, all their far-end-type parameters must be identical
483 Error PW FAR END TYPE PER SLOT When signaling is enabled on the DS1 port attached to a
MUST BE FRAMED pseudowire, the far-end-type-mp for all the pseudowires
terminated on the corresponding module must be set to
framed mode (either E1 or T1).
484 Error PEER PARAMETERS ARE Different peers must not have the same destination IP
DUPLICATED address and the same Next Hop IP address (at least one
of these parameters must be different). Therefore, if it
necessary for several pseudowires to reach the same IP
address, create separate router interfaces.
486 Warning TS NOT ASSIGNED TO ANY PW The specified MPW-1 DS1 port is connected to local
module ports, but no pseudowire has been assigned
timeslots on the same port.
You must specify timeslots to be connected to the DS1
port
487 Error PW CREATED BUT NOT A PW was created but not cross-connected to DS1 port.
ASSIGNED
488 Error PW CAN’T SERVE AS A pseudowire cannot serve as recovered clock source in
RECOVERED CLK one of this cases:
• It is using the HDLCoPSN protocol
• It is connected to VS module port.
489 Warning TS 16 IS RESERVED FOR CAS It is not allowed to assign timeslot 16 to a pseudowire
SIGNALING configured with signaling enabled and far-end-type=e1
490 Error FAULT PROPAGATION OF PW To use fault propagation for pseudowires, you must
MUST USE OAM enable the use of OAM
491 Error SAME IP CONFIGURED IN More than one router interfaces are configured with the
ANOTHER INTERFACE same IP address
493 Error STATIC ROUTE ADDRESS DOES Next hop address of static route is invalid
NOT MATCH
494 Warning WRONG PAYLOAD SIZE FOR In the case of voice with signaling transferred with
SIGNALING CESoPSN protocol, the following restrictions apply
depending on the far-end-type.
far-end-type=e1: tdm-payload value must be 16.
far-end-type=t1-esf, t1-sf: tdm-payload value must be
24.
495 Warning OAM IS NOT SUPPORTED OAM is not supported for MEF-8 encapsulation.
496 Error TDM-PAYLOAD SIZE NOT Tdm-payload value of less than 4 frames cannot be
SUPPORTED configured in MPW-1 modules operating with CESoPSN
encapsulation.
757 Error PORT CAN BE BOUND TO A DS1/Serial port can be cross-connected with only one
SINGLE PW ONLY PW port.
758 Error NUMBER OF BYTES IN FRAME When working with VS modules (CESoPSN encapsulation),
EXCEEDS 256 the number of bytes must not exceed 256.
The number of bytes is equal to number of frames (tdm-
payload size) multiplied by the number of timeslots cross-
connected with this PW. For example, when woking with
tdm-payload size 64, the maximum number of connected
ds1/serial timeslots is 4.
759 Error PW TYPE NOT SUPPORTED Only CESoPSN PW type is supported in supported in VS
modules.
760 Error SERIAL PORT OF PW IS DOWN The serial port cross-connected with this PW, is in
“shutdown” state.
761 Error TDM-PAYLOAD SIZE EXCEEDS For PW assigned to VS modules, tdm-payload size cannot
64 exceed 64 (Frames in packet).
765 Error ILLEGAL TUNNEL INDEX LABEL If an ingress label is configured for psn=mlps, the egress
label must be configured as well, and vice versa.
Note There are two routers in the Megaplex-4 architerchure: Router 1 is used for
inband management, while Router 2 is used for pseudowire routing. Router 2 is
explained in the Router (Pseudowire) section.
Note Only IP addresses that are not included in the Interface #1 subnet can be
represented by Proxy-ARP. These IP addresses must be learned from the
management ports operating with RIP routing protocol.
Benefits
Router is used for segmenting a LAN, increasing network performance and
making packet forwarding more efficient.
Factory Defaults
The router interface RI#1 (see in Figure 8-1) is created automatically and included
into the default configuration file.
In applications based on Megaplex-4 ver 3.0 and up, only RIP-2 protocol must be
used due to its capability to advertize subnets and single IP addresses, compared
to Proprietary RIP that supports advertizing only single IP addresses. Use
Proprietary RIP only on links attached to older Access+ products such as
Megaplex-2100/2104, DXC, FCD etc.
Assigning a name to the router name <value> Using no name deletes the router name
Configuring the static route and static-route <IP-address/ The next hop must be a subnet of one of
the next gateway (next hop) IP-mask-of-static-route> the router interfaces
using the next hop’s IP address address A particular case of a static route is
<IP-address-of-next-hop> default gateway, which is defined in
priority <1..255> Megaplex-4 by configuring a static route
0.0.0.0/0.
The following marking actions can be performed at the interface level, at the
config>router(1)>interface(interface_number)# prompt.
Assigning a short name to name <string> Using no name removes the name
the router interface
Binding the router bind { sdh-sonet | e1 | t1 | e1-i | t1-i } To remove the binding, you must
interface to an sdh-sonet, <slot/port> delete the router interface (use no
e1, t1, e1-i, or t1-i port interface command)
Binding the router bind {e1 | t1} Megaplex Optimux cards (OP-34C,
interface to an E1/T1 <slot/port/tributary> OP-108C) only
Optimux module port To remove the binding, you must
delete the router interface (use no
interface command)
Binding the router bind svi <port-number> Router interface #1 is bound to SVI
interface #1 to an SVI port #1 by default. It is not
port recommended to change this binding.
Using no before bind removes the
binding
Enabling RIP-2 protocol rip v2 This option is possible only after RI#1
(interface #1 only) is bound to SVI.
Using no rip disables the protocol
Configuration Errors
The table below lists messages generated by Megaplex-4 when a configuration
error is detected.
405 Error MORE THAN ONE TRAP Only one loopback trap source address can be defined in
SOURCE ADDRESS Megaplex-4
406 Error TRAP SOURCE ADDRESS DOES The configured trap source address matches neither of IP
NOT MATCH addresses existing in the Megaplex device
445 Error MORE THAN ONE LOOPBACK Only one loopback interface can be defined in Megaplex-4
INTERFACE
446 Error LOOPBACK INTERFACE MUST The loopback interface mask must be /32
BE HOST
447 Error MORE THAN ONE SVI PORT Only one SVI port can be bound to the router 1 interface
BOUND
448 Error RI NOT BOUND TO PORT OR This router interface is either not bound to any port or
PORT SHUTDOWN bound to a port which is in shutdown state
449 Error ILLEGAL IP ADDRESS The IP address is illegal (for example, it is a subnet ID or
subnet broadcast ID)
Example
Figure 8-1 shows an application with four Megaplex-4 nodes (MP1, MP2, MP3,
MP4) connected by an SDH ring. The central node (MP1) is connected via its
control port to the Management router which manages the entire network. The
nodes are connected via small subnets, and four different colors designate IP
addresses from the same subnet (for example, the yellow line from MP1 CL.A link
1 to MP2 CL.B link 1 connects two addresses from the same subnet:
172.17.197.5/30 and 172.17.197.6/30).
In each Megaplex the configuration procedure is as follows:
1. Configure 2 SDH ports with DCC management
2. Configure 2 router interfaces with subnets and bind them to SDH ports
Note Router interface 1 and SVI port 1 are present in the Megaplex-4 configuration as
part of the factory default file and need not be created. By default, SVI port 1 is
bound to Router interface 1.
In addition, for the central Megaplex-4 MP1 (IP address 172.17.173.1) you must
configure the default gateway (static-route 0.0.0.0/0) and the next hop (static
route).
1 2 1 2
CL.A
CL.B
MP 2
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
CL.A
CL.B
CL.A
CL.B
MP 3
PC
172.17.174.54 MP 1 1 2 1 2
172.17.173.1
CL.A
CL.B
MP 4
172.17.174.1
CL A 172.17.173.2/24
0.0.0.0/0
SVI Control 172.17.173.2/24 172.17.173.1
CL A L1 172.17.197.5/30
CL B L1 172.17.197.9/30
MP 2
SVI 172.17.197.25/30
CL A L1 172.17.197.13/30
CL B L1 172.17.197.6/30
MP 3
SVI 172.17.197.29/30
CL A L1 172.17.197.17/30
CL B L1 172.17.197.14/30
MP 4
SVI 172.17.197.33/30
CL A L1 172.17.197.10/30
CL B L1 172.17.197.18/30
exit all
configure slot cl-b card-type cl cl2-622gbe
configure router 1 interface 1 address 172.17.173.2/24
configure router 1 static-route 0.0.0.0/0 address 172.17.173.1
#MP 2
exit all
configure slot cl-b card-type cl cl2-622gbe
configure router 1 interface 1 address 172.18.197.25/30
commit
save
#MP 3
exit all
configure slot cl-b card-type cl cl2-622gbe
configure router 1 interface 1 address 172.18.197.29/30
commit
save
#MP 4
exit all
configure slot cl-b card-type cl cl2-622gbe
configure router 1 interface 1 address 172.18.197.33/30
commit
save
Functional Description
The terms and parameters needed by the Megaplex-4 router function to support
pseudowire routing are explained below:
• Router interfaces: the Megaplex-4 Router 2 function supports up to 100
router interfaces, each assigned a unique index number. Each router interface
has its own IP address; you must also specify an IP subnet mask, and the
module and port on which interface is located.
For each router interface, you can also enable the use of VLAN tagging and
specify a VLAN ID, to enable differentiating the traffic carried by this router.
Note that when the router interface is connected (via SVI) to a GbE port or a
VCG, VLAN tagging is always enabled.
Each MPW-1, VS or TP module supports up to 6, 12 or 4 different router
interfaces, respectively; additional interfaces can be configured on any bridge
port in the Megaplex-4. The IP address of the appropriate interface is
automatically inserted as the pseudowire source IP address.
• Pseudowire peers: the pseudowire destination is referred to as the
pseudowire peer. Megaplex-4 supports up to 100 peers, each assigned a
unique index number. The index number is then used to specify the
pseudowire destination, instead of directly providing the necessary
destination information. To configure a peer, it is necessary to provide its IP
address, and as an option – the next hop IP address. The peers (the
pseudowire destinations) and the associated routing information are defined
under configure peer context.
• Static routes: to control the paths used to reach the pseudowire
destinations, the Megaplex-4 router function supports the definition of up to
100 static routes, in addition to a default gateway.
Within the Megaplex-4, pseudowires are forwarded to the appropriate exit port
(always a router interface) by internal E-line Ethernet flows (an E-line flow is a
type of Ethernet logical connection that interconnects two bridge ports).
Each router interface serves as a bridge port for the pseudowires using it (in
addition, each Megaplex-4 Ethernet port also serves as a bridge port).
To help you design the routing information, Figure 8-19 summarizes the process
used to select the router interface for each pseudowire peer. The priority of the
various router interfaces, as determined by the routing process, is as follows:
1. If the peer IP address is in the subnet of a router interface, that interface will
always be used.
2. If the peer IP address is not within a router interface subnet, then the router
checks if the specified peer next hop address is within the subnet of a router
interface. If such a router interface is found, it is selected to serve as the
pseudowire exit port.
3. If neither of the previous conditions is fulfilled, the router checks if the
specified peer next hop address is specified in a static route that is within the
subnet of a router interface.
4. The last priority is to use the router interface that is within the default
gateway subnet.
DB Update
Peer IP address
No in the subnet Yes
of one of the
router interfaces
Figure 8-19. Selecting the Active Router Interface for an Ethernet Flow Serving a Pseudowire
For example:
Assigning a short name to name <string> Using no name removes the name
the router interface
Assigning IP address and address <valid IP address with mask For creating subnets, RAD
subnet mask to the router in the address/mask format> recommends using an IP subnet
interface calculator, for example
http://www.wildpackets.com/. Use the
following guidelines:
• Router interfaces must be on
different subnets
• When designing a ring, assign to
each interface a small subnet which
contains a minimum of IP
addresses (2 -3)
• Subnets inside the ring should not
overlap, that is no two addresses
inside the ring should be identical.
Binding the PW router bind svi <port> This SVI port will be further bound to
interface to an SVI port an ethernet or logical mac port.
Using no before svi removes the
binding.
For example:
configure flows
classifier-profile c1 match-all
match all
exit
flow 1
no shutdown
classifier c1
ingress-port eth 2/1
egress-port svi 1
exit
flow 2
no shutdown
classifier c1
ingress-port svi 1
egress-port eth 2/1
exit all
Now the traffic from HS-12N serial port is forwarded to Ethernet port, which
serves as a pseudowire exit port toward the PSN.
configure flows
flow 1
no shutdown
classifier vlan-10
egress-port svi 1
ingress-port logical-mac cl-a/1
exit
flow 2
no shutdown
classifier vlan-1
egress-port logical-mac cl-a/1
ingress-port svi 1
exit all
Now the traffic from HS-12N serial port is forwarded to a VCG, which serves as a
pseudowire exit port toward the PSN.
Factory Defaults
Refer to the following sections for the specific default for each type of QoS.
Bandwidth Profiles
Megaplex-4 supports the following bandwidth profiles:
• Shaper profile – Applied to queue group blocks
• Policer profile – Applied to flows to limit flow traffic, or to Ethernet ports to
limit broadcast/multicast traffic
Note You can control the egress bandwidth utilization by defining the committed
information rate and committed burst size in shaper and policer profiles. You can
also define the excessive information rate and the excessive burst size in policer
profiles.
CIR: Defines the Committed Information Rate (CIR) for the current profile. The CIR
specifies a bandwidth with committed service guarantee (“green bucket” rate).
CBS: Defines the Committed Burst Size (CBS) for the current profile. The CBS
specifies the maximum guaranteed burst size (“green bucket” size).
EIR: Defines the Excess Information Rate (EIR). The EIR specifies an extra
bandwidth with no service guarantee (“yellow bucket” rate).
EBS: Defines the Excess Burst Size (EBS). The EBS specifies the extra burst with
no service guarantee (“yellow bucket” size).
Compensation: You can specify the amount of bytes that the shaper or policer
can compensate for the layer 1 overhead (preamble and IFG) and the overhead
for the added VLAN header in case of stacking.
Factory Defaults
Megaplex-4 provides default bandwidth profiles, as specified in the following
table. The default policer profile Policer1 is the same for all kinds of ports, while
the default shaper profile depends on the type of port:
• GbeShaper for GbE ports of CL modules
• MeShaper for GbE ports of M-ETH modules
eir – – – – – 0
ebs – – – – – 0
compensation 0 0 0 0 0 0
traffic-type – – – – – all
Specifying the CIR (Kbps) and CBS bandwidth [cir <cir-kbit-sec>] [cbs <cbs-bytes>] Typing no bandwidth removes the
(bytes) bandwidth limits bandwidth limits.
CIR allowed values: 0–1000000.
CBS allowed values:
• M-ETH: 4096–258048
(4-252 Kbytes)
• Other modules: 0, or 64–1048575.
Example
Specifying the CIR (Kbps), bandwidth [cir <cir-kbit-sec>] Typing no bandwidth removes the bandwidth
CBS (bytes), EIR (Kbps), and [cbs <cbs-bytes>] [eir <eir-kbit-sec>] limits.
EBS (bytes) bandwidth limits [ebs <ebs-bytes>] CIR & EIR allowed values: 0–1000000.
EBS allowed values: 0, or 64–1048575.
CBS allowed values:
• M-ETH: 4096–258048 (4-252 Kbytes)
• Other modules: 0, or 64–1048575.
CIR can be set to zero only if CBS is set to zero.
EIR can be set to zero only if EBS is set to zero.
CIR + EIR must not exceed the maximum available
bandwidth.
CBS should be greater than the maximum frame
size.
For policer profiles that will be attached to
Ethernet ports to limit broadcast/multicast
traffic, only the CIR and CBS parameters are
relevant (EIR and EBS should be set to 0).
The CIR and EIR granularity depend on the
configured values, as described in Table 8-21.
The CBS must be greater than or equal to the CIR
divided by policer granularity.
Specifying the traffic type traffic-type {all | broadcast | multicast | Note: Traffic types other than all are relevant
unknown-unicast } only for policer profiles attached to ports.
Policer Type CBS/EBS <= 64,000 Bytes < 128,000 Bytes < 256,000 Bytes < 512,000 Bytes <
64,000 Bytes CBS/EBS <= CBS/EBS <= CBS/EBS <= CBS/EBS <=
128,000 Bytes 256,000 Bytes 512,000 Bytes 1,048,575 Bytes
Port policer, or 64 Kbps 128 Kbps 256 Kbps 512 Kbps 1 Mbps
flow policer with
CIR and EIR <
100,000 Kbps
Example 1
Note CIR and EIR are rounded down to 64K granularity, as this is a low-speed policer
with burst size < 64,000 bytes.
Example 2
The procedure is as follows:
1. Create and configure a policer profile named policer4, setting a rate limitation
of 12 Mbps
2. Assign the created policer profile to:
ASMi-54C/ETH module installed in slot 2
Ethernet port 1
#Creating the policer profile (Step 1)
mp4100>config>qos# policer-profile policer4 bandwidth cir 12000
Example 3
One of the use of policer profiles in Megaplex-4 is for Optimux modules to
control the rate of the ingress frames from the remote device. This is done by
defining the committed information rate (CIR) in policer profiles. The CIR specifies
the highest bandwidth (rate) of the ingress frames from the remote device.
Possible values are 0 to 100 000 kbps (100 Mbps). Frames that are over the
ingress rate limit are dropped. The procedure is as follows:
1. Create and configure a policer profile named 108c, setting a rate limitation of
10 Mbps (frames that are over this ingress rate limit are dropped)
Factory Defaults
Examples
Marking Profiles
Marking profiles map the P-bit, IP precedence, DSCP, or CoS classifications to the
egress priority tags. The marking can also be done per color (green and/or
yellow), to support color re-marking, optionally specifying the Drop Eligible
Indicator (DEI) bit in the frame header. Megaplex-4 supports up to 12 marking
profiles.
Factory Defaults
Megaplex-4 provides a default non color-aware marking profile named
MarkingProfile1, which can be used when the ingress traffic is prioritized
Note If one of the internal queues is configured to WFQ, queues with a higher queue
ID cannot be configured to Strict.
Factory Defaults
Megaplex-4 provides a default queue block profile (for level 0) named
DefaultQueue1, which defines queues 0–7 as follows:
• Congestion avoidance: WRED profile corresponding to queue
• Scheduling method: WFQ, with weight set to 100
• Depth: 49152 bytes.
Default queue block profiles for level 1 are defined as "Scheduling1" to
"Scheduling8", with no congestion avoidance and Scheduling method WFQ, with
weight set to 100.
0–1024 64
1025–16383 1024
16384–262143 16384
262144–1048576 262144
Example
Factory Defaults
Megaplex-4 provides default five queue group profiles. The profiles depend on
the type of port and are as follows:
• "GbeDefaultQueueGroup" for GbE ports of CL modules:
# queue-group-profile "GbeDefaultQueueGroup"
queue-block 1/1
name "Level1QueueBlock"
profile "Scheduling1"
exit
queue-block 0/1
name "Put your string here"
profile "DefaultQueue1"
bind queue 0 queue-block 1/1
shaper profile "GbeShaper"
exit
• "MeDefaultQueueGroup" for GbE ports of M-ETH modules
# queue-group-profile "MeDefaultQueueGroup"
queue-block 1/1
name "Level1QueueBlock"
profile "Scheduling5"
exit
queue-block 0/1
name "Put your string here"
profile "DefaultQueue1"
bind queue 0 queue-block 1/1
shaper profile "MeShaper"
exit
• "FeDefaultQueueGroup" for Fast Ethenet ports of I/O modules
# queue-group-profile "FeDefaultQueueGroup"
queue-block 1/1
name "Level1QueueBlock"
profile "Scheduling2"
exit
queue-block 0/1
name "Put your string here"
profile "DefaultQueue1"
bind queue 0 queue-block 1/1
shaper profile "FeShaper"
exit
• “LMDefaultQueueGroup” for Logical Mac ports
# queue-group-profile "LMDefaultQueueGroup"
queue-block 1/1
name "Level1QueueBlock"
profile "Scheduling4"
exit
queue-block 0/1
name "Put your string here"
profile "DefaultQueue1"
bind queue 0 queue-block 1/1
shaper profile "LMShaper"
exit
• "PcsDefaultQueueGroup" for PCS ports of ASMi-54C modules.
# queue-group-profile "PcsDefaultQueueGroup"
queue-block 1/1
name "Level1QueueBlock"
profile "Scheduling3"
exit
queue-block 0/1
name "Put your string here"
profile "DefaultQueue1"
bind queue 0 queue-block 1/1
shaper profile "PcsShaper"
exit
For the default profiles mentioned in the above screens see the following
sections:
• Shaper profiles – Table 8-20 in Bandwidth Profiles
• DefaultQueue1, Scheduling{1-5} – Queue Block Profiles
Note Level 1 Queue Block profile must be unique per Queue Group
Note
Normally there is no need for you to enter the bind command. When you add a
queue block in level 0 to the profile, bind is done automatically.
You cannot use the bind command if the queue group contains a single
queue block in level 0.
Example
Note This example uses the shaper profile and queue block profile created in the
examples in the preceding sections.
WRED Profiles
87B
Note The WRED mechanism is activated only when you use a policer profile with EIR set
to a nonzero value.
Factory Defaults
17B
Note You can configure the parameters for the color yellow only.
Example
Standards
The CSM module complies with the ITU-T G.781 standard.
Functional Description
Megaplex-4 supports one clock domain with up to 10 clock sources. The timing
subsystem automatically selects the best timing source to use for
synchronization.
The user can define the following clock sources:
• Recovered from the STM-1/STM-4/OC-3/OC-12 interface, including automatic
selection based on SSM (Synchronization Status Messaging)
• Recovered from the GbE interface (CL modules only), including automatic
selection based on ESMC (Ethernet Synchronization Messaging Channel)
• Internal crystal free-running oscillator-based clock
• Clock derived from the receive clock of a specified module user port
• Adaptive clock recovered from a pseudowire circuit (ACR)
• External station clock.
Multiple clock sources can be set and assigned a corresponding clock source
quality and priority.
If SDH/SONET, GbE or station clock sources are configured as SSM-based, their
quality can be determined by monitoring the synchronization status messages.
Clock Synchronization
20B
DNU Do Not Use – This signal should not be used for synchronization Lowest
DUS Don't Use for Sync – This signal should not be used for synchronization Lowest
Note Although GbE ports of M-ETH modules cannot serve as a reference source (Rx
clock), they can distribute the clock transparently throughout the system. This
feature requires a special ordering option (refer to M-ETH data sheet).
Table 9-3 lists the reference clock sources that can be configured, together with
the types of Megaplex-4 modules that can provide a timing reference signal.
For each module, the table also lists the type of ports and, when applicable, the
operating mode that must be selected for a port to provide a timing reference
signal.
Sync-E clock from GbE ports CL.2 (HW Ver 1.0 and GbE port Not applicable
on CL modules higher)
A timing source is defined by specifying the slot and the port to be used. The
source slot can be any I/O slot with a module having ports capable of recovering
a clock signal, or a CL slot.
Rx Timing Mode
In the Rx timing mode, the reference signal is derived from the receive (RX) clock
of a specified user port, or a clock recovered from a user-specified pseudowire:
• Megaplex-4 always permits locking the system (nodal) timing to a local user
(that is, a user directly connected to a port of an I/O module installed in the
chassis) from which a stable clock signal can be obtained. See Table 9-3.
• For Megaplex-4 equipped with MPW-1, SH-16/E1/PW, VS-6/E1T1 or
VS-16/E1T1/PW modules, it is also possible to configure certain pseudowires
to provide recovered clock signals to serve as timing references. Any type of
pseudowires, except HDLC, can provide recovered clock signals.
The algorithm that selects the Megaplex-4 timing reference source is based on
the user-defined priorities, and works to automatically select the operational port
as the nodal timing reference: first according to the highest quality, and then
according to the highest priority. If the quality level is not selected, Megaplex-4
selects the operational port with the highest available priority from the source
list.
If no operational port can be found in the source list, the Megaplex-4 switches to
the holdover mode. In this mode, the timing subsystem selects the frequency
used 26 msec before the fault condition that caused the switching to the next
clock source mode (this is assumed to be a safe selection, at which the
subsystem operated normally at the correct frequency). This frequency is
maintained until one of the user-specified sources can again be selected as a
reference. If time limit expires without any of the user-specified clock sources
returning to normal, Megaplex-4 switches to the internal oscillator.
Station Timing
When the station timing mode is used as one of the 10 clock sources, the
Megaplex-4 system (nodal) timing is synchronized to an external clock signal
delivered to the dedicated station clock interface located on each CL module. This
signal is usually provided by a highly-accurate clock source, configured with the
highest priority, which is often available in communication facilities (for example,
a signal provided by a GPS-based timing source, an independent primary clock
source, clock signals provided by an SDH/SONET ADM, or other suitable clock
source). The clock signal frequency is user-selectable: 2.048 MHz, 2048 Mbps, or
1.544 Mbps.
The station clock quality can be set by the user.
Each CL module can be connected to a separate station clock source, so that
both station ports can serve as a clock source.
The station clock has software-selectable interfaces:
• ITU-T Rec. G.703 interface. The clock interface (balanced/unbalanced) and
sensitivity (long or short range) are also user-selectable
• RS-422 interface for squarewave signals, which is the recommended interface
when timing quality is critical. Note that this interface is suitable for short
cable runs, interconnecting equipment units located in close proximity.
The station clock interface also provides an output clock signal, for chaining
applications. The source of the output clock is selectable:
• The external clock signal applied to the station clock interface.
• The external clock signal, after regeneration and filtering by a jitter
attenuator
When using the internal clock as the system timing reference, the transmitted SSM
message is SEC (SDH) or SMC (SONET).
Clock Domain
Clock Mode
The domain clock mode can be one of the following:
Note By default, the Megaplex-4 system clock is in free-run state, until a valid clock
source is selected.
Factory Defaults
The table below lists the parameter defaults for the Clock Domain, Clock Source
and Station Clock configuration.
domain
sync-network-type 1
mode auto
clock-source
priority 10
station
tx-clock-source system
rx-sensitivity short-haul
line-code hdb3
recovered
network-type type-b
Setting clock mode mode {auto | free-run} auto –Clock selection mechanism functions
normally, e.g. the best available clock source is
selected for synchronization
free-run – Internal oscillator is used for
synchronization
Adding clock source source <src-id> rx-port {e1| t1 Refer to Configuring the Clock Sources
| e1-i | ds1-opt | sdh-sonet |
ethernet } <slot><port>
source <src-id> station
<slot>/1
source <src-id> recovered
<recovered-id >
Configuring clock source <src-id> Typing no source <src-id> deletes the source
source Refer to Configuring the Clock Sources
Parameter Description
Displayed
Free Run Indicates that the nodal timing system is locked to the internal oscillator
Note: When using the internal clock as the system timing reference, the transmitted
SSM message is SEC (SDH) or SMC (SONET).
Parameter Description
Displayed
Holdover Indicates whether the nodal timing system is in the holdover state (yes) or not (no).
The nodal timing system enters the holdover state when all the configured sources
fail. In the holdover mode, the clock maintains the incoming reference frequency at
the last value acquired before the failure. This situation persists until at least one of
the configured sources returns to normal operation, and thus is selected again as
reference.
Note 1: This field is not relevant for “DS0 only” CL option. In this case after clock
source failure, the next available clock source is selected. If no valid clock source is
available, the Megaplex internal clock is used as a clock source.
Note 2: The transmitted quality level is SEC (SDH) or SMC (SONET).
Locked Indicates that the nodal timeing is locked on one of the clock references.
Note You can choose an invalid clock source. However, this input will be rejected by
the domain during the clock selection process.
2. Verify that the card whose port will be used as a source clock is provisioned.
3. Verify that the port to be used as a source clock is enabled (no shutdown).
4. Navigate to configure system clock domain 1.
The config>system>clock>domain(1)# prompt is displayed.
5. Type one of the following, according to the required clock source:
source <src-id> rx-port ethernet <slot>/<port>
source <src-id> rx-port e1 <slot>/<port>
source <src-id> rx-port t1 <slot>/<port>
source <src-id> rx-port sdh-sonet <slot>/<port>
source <src-id> rx-port <slot>/<port>
source <src-id> rx-port ds1-opt <slot>/<port>
source <src-id> rx-port e1-i <slot>/<port>
source <src-id> station <slot>/1
source <src-id> recovered <recovered-id>
no source
Note 2 For Ethernet clock source, to ensure correct distribution of ESMC traffic, you must
configure a flow with an L2CP profile with peer action on the 01-80-c2-00-00-02
address. The flow must have the following attributes:
• Untagged classification
• Ingress port – Ethernet port/LAG, serving as the ESMC source (Sync-E port)
• Egress port – according to application requirements.
If you use the flow only to peer the SSM frames and do not need to forward the
untagged traffic, discard it, using the drop command on the flow.
To configure a clock source for which the port has been defined:
1. Navigate to configure system clock domain 1.
The config>system>clock>domain(1)# prompt is displayed.
2. Type source <1–10> to select the source to configure.
The config>system>clock>domain(1)>source(<1–10>)# prompt is
displayed.
3. Enter all necessary commands according to the tasks listed below.
Setting quality level For Type 1: quality-level If no quality is defined for the domain, this
{prc | ssu-a | ssu-b | sec | command is not available
dnu | ssm-based} The quality level ssm-based indicates that the
For Type 2: quality-level { quality level is based on SSM messages and is
prs | stu | st2 | tnc | st3e | not available on DS0 only CL.2 modules
st3 | smc | st4 | dus | Using no quality cancels the quality hierarchy
ssm-based | prov } and the clock becomes priority-based only
Defining the time that a wait-to-restore <0–720> The time is defined in seconds.
previously failed
synchronization source must
be fault-free in order to be
considered available
Defining the time that hold-off <300–1800> The time is defined in milliseconds.
signal failure must be active
before it is transmitted
Selecting the source of the tx-clock-source {system | station- system – The output (transmit) clock is
clock output signal provided rclk-plus-ja} derived from the Megaplex-4 nodal
in the station clock timing
connector, for connection to station rclk after ja – The external clock
other equipment signal applied to the station clock
receive input is regenerated and filtered
by a jitter attenuator, before being
returned through the transmit output
Selecting the rate and type interface-type {e1 | 2mhz | t1} e1 – 2.048 Mbps signal per ITU-T Rec.
of signal accepted and G.703 Para. 9
transmitted via the station 2mhz – 2.048 MHz signal per ITU-T Rec.
clock port G.703 Para. 13
t1 –1.544 Mbps signal per ITU-T Rec.
G.703 Para. 5.
Selecting the impedance of impedance {balanced | unbalanced} For e1 and 2mhz options only. If you
signal accepted and specify e1 or 2mhz and do not specify
transmitted via the station balanced or unbalanced, by default the
clock port interface is set as balanced
Setting line code line-code {b8zs | ami | hdb3} hdb3 –High Density Bipolar coding of
order 3, used for e1 and 2mhz options
ami –Alternate Mark Inversion coding,
used for t1 and 1.5mhz options
b8zs – Binary-8 zero suppression
coding, used for t1 and 1.5mhz options
Specifying E1 framing mode line-type { g732n | g732n-crc | This command is not available when
unframed} CL.2 type is DS0 (ignore an AIS alarm
that appears in the remote equipment).
Specifying T1 framing mode line-type { sf | esf| unframed} This command is not available when
CL.2 type is DS0 (ignore an AIS alarm
that appears in the remote equipment).
Specifying bits in TS0 for ssm-channel { sa4 | sa5 | sa6 | sa7 This command is not available when
transfering clock quality via | sa8 } CL.2 type is DS0
SSM (E1 only)
Associating the PW number pw <PW number> The possible PW number range is 1 to 640.
to recovered clock
To view the recovered clock status and pseudowire adaptive clock recovery
mechanism state:
• At the system>clock>recovered (<PW number)# prompt, enter show status.
Parameter Description
Displayed
Holdover Indicates whether the nodal timing subsystem is in the holdover state (yes) or not
(no).
The nodal timing system enters the holdover state when all the configured sources
fail or during clock switching. In the holdover mode, the clock maintains the
incoming reference frequency at the last value acquired before the failure. This
situation persists until at least one of the configured sources returns to normal
operation, and thus is selected again as reference.
Note 1: This field is not relevant for “DS0 only” CL option.
Note 2: The transmitted quality level is SEC (SDH) or SMC (SONET).
Frequency Indicates that the clock recovery mechanism is learning the frequency of the
Acquisition selected reference.
Rapid Phase Lock Indicates that the clock recovery mechanism is in the training process
Fine Phase Lock Indicates that the clock recovery mechanism successfully completed the training
process, and is now locked. At this stage, the clock recovery mechanism provides a
stable clock of good quality.
You can also display the number of the PW the recovered clock is locked to, and
the network type by means of the following command.
Configuration Errors
Table 9-4 lists messages generated by Megaplex-4 when a configuration error is
detected.
110 Error ILLEGAL CLOCK SOURCE The selected clock source is invalid for one of the
following reasons:
• The configured module port cannot supply a
reference clock
• The T1 ports of T3 modules can serve as a clock
source only when working with CL modules that do
not have SDH/SONET ports.
112 Error CLOCK SOURCE IS IN When configuring the clock source to be locked to the
SHUTDOWN STATE receive clock of a module/channel, the source
module/channel must be connected
114 Error CLOCK SOURCE CAN'T BE Unframed (transparent) E1/T1 ports from M16E1/16T1,
UNFRAMED ASMi-54C/N, or OP modules cannot serve as clock source
(only M8E1/M8T1 ports can)
115 Error RECOVERED CLOCK - PW DOES You are trying to configure a recovered clock source but
NOT EXIST the PW associated to it does not exist.
116 Error DOMAIN NET TYPE DOES NOT Domain network type 1 and 2 must match sdh and sonet
MATCH SDH/SONET frame-type, respectively.
Note The internal real-time clock is used to time-stamp various messages, alarms, etc.
The previously attached time stamps are not changed when the time-of-day is
changed as a result of updates.
Selecting the date format date-format {yyyy-mm-dd | dd-mm- yyyy-mm-dd – ISO format
yyyy | mm-dd-yyyy | yyyy-dd-mm} dd-mm-yyyy – European
format
mm-dd-yyyy – US format
yyyy-dd-mm – Japanese format
dd stands for day, mm for
month and yyyy for year
Example
To define dd-mm-yyyy as a date format:
mp4100>config>system>date-and-time# date-format dd-mm-yyyy
Factory Defaults
The default configuration of the SNTP parameters is:
• No SNTP servers defined
• Polling interval set to 15 minutes.
When an SNTP server is defined, its default configuration is:
• IP address set to 0.0.0.0
• Not preferred
• Administratively disabled (shutdown).
Setting polling interval (in poll-interval interval <minutes> Allowed range is 1–1440
minutes) for SNTP requests
Setting UDP port for NTP udp port <udp-port> Allowed range is 1–65535
requests, to a specific UDP port udp default
or to default UDP port (123)
Example
Assigning device name name <device-name> The length of the device name is unlimited, but if
you enter a name containing more than
20 characters, the prompt displays only the first
20 characters followed by 0.
For example, this command that defines a
25-character device name:
mp4100# config sys name
Megaplex_NYC_Building_1 results in this prompt
that shows the first 20 characters, followed by 0:
Megaplex_NYC_Build0#
no name removes user-assigned device name
Note
For configuring the system clock and date&time, refer to Chapter 9.
M-ETH module:
CL module:
mp4100#
mp4100# show configure system license
Feature Status Slot File Name
---------------------------------------------------------------
STM-4/OC-12 Disable CL-A N/A
STM-4/OC-12 Disable CL-B N/A
mp4100#
Ordering the license is described in the following section.
mp4100>config>chassis#
mp4100>config>chassis# show manufacture-info slot cl-b
First MAC Address : 00-20-D2-50-05-B0
Number of MACs : 1
You can also use the following syntax:
mp4100# show configure chassis manufacture-info slot cl-a
First MAC Address : 00-20-D2-50-0C-48
Number of MACs : 1
mp4100#
mp4100# show configure chassis manufacture-info slot cl-b
First MAC Address : 00-20-D2-50-05-B0
Number of MACs : 1
The “Number of MACs” field value in the case of Megaplex-4 is always “1”.
The software upgrade utility includes four partitions called license-1, license -2,
license -3, license -4 for downloading and storing the licenses.
You can download the license file to Megaplex-4 via CLI in either of two ways:
• TFTP when downloading over a network
• XMODEM when downloading over a dumb terminal connected to the
Megaplex-4 control port.
mp4100#
mp4100# file copy tftp://172.17.170.38/LIC_0020D25005B0.txt license-2
Are you sure? [yes/no] _ y
mp4100#
File copy command was completed.
tftp://172.17.170.38/LIC_0020D25005B0.txt copied to license-2 successfully
139 bytes copied in 1 secs (139 bytes/sec)
4. Type “commit”.
Now the license file is downloaded to the device.
*****
File copy command was completed.*****
10.4 Inventory
The Megaplex-4 inventory table displays the unit’s components, hardware,
software and firmware revisions. You can display an inventory table that shows
all installed components, and you can display more detailed information for each
component.
Benefits
You can monitor the installed components and hardware/software revisions.
FRU Indicates whether this component is a field replaceable unit that can be
replaced on site (True/False)
If necessary, you can configure the alias, asset ID, and serial number for
inventory components of I/O modules. To configure the information, you need to
enter the inventory level with the corresponding inventory component index as
Assigning user-specific asset identifier asset-id <id> no asset-id removes the asset
to the component (usually for ID
removable physical components)
Example
23B
mp4104>config>chassis#
mp4104>config>chassis# inventory 5001
mp4104>config>chassis>inventory(5001)# show status
Description : MP-4100.T1 IO-1/1
Contained In : 105
Physical Class : Port
Relative Position : 1
Name : T1 IO-1/1
HW Ver :
SW Ver :
FW Ver :
Serial Number :
MFG Name : RAD
Module Name : T1 IO-1/1
Alias : IO-1 t1 01
Asset ID :
FRU : False
mp4104>config>chassis>inventory(5001)#
• startup-config – Contains saved user configuration. You must save the file
startup-config; it is not automatically created. Refer to Saving the
Configuration for details on how to save the user configuration.
• user-default-config – Contains default user configuration. Refer to Saving the
Configuration for details on how to save the default user configuration.
• candidate – Stores any configuration before it is copied to running-config via
commit command.
• sw-pack-1, sw-pack-2, sw-pack-3, sw-pack-4 – Contains up to four software
images
• log –Contains alarm and event log (5000 alarms/events)
• mac-table – Contains the MAC address table (see Displaying MAC Address
Table in Chapter 8 for description)
You can copy files via the copy command, or via the commands shown in
Table 10-2.
Admin user-default
Sanity
check
Copy
Commit Copy
Configuration
User-Default -
Session Running-config Startup-Config Factory-Default
Config
(Candidate DB)
TFTP
TFTP
Save
Copy
Admin factory-default
Note
Due to a large file volume, copying starts after 30 sec of processing .
sw-pack-1 S 13439930
20-5-2014 valid
11:45:49
sw-pack-2 S 14052947 5-6-2014 valid
14:30:30
sw-pack-3 S 14025662 2-4-2014 valid
14:3:34
sw-pack-4 S 14056358 16-6-2014 File In Use
11:47:29
startup-config C 37268 21-5-2014 valid
11:37:1
user-default-config C 11983 2-3-2014 valid
10:18:24
factory-default-config C 680 1-1-1970 Read Only
0:0:9
running-config C -- 18-6-2014 Read Only
15:44:25
log LO -- 18-6-2014 Read Only
15:44:25
Total Bytes : 101367808 Free Bytes : 31295488
Deleting Files
You can delete files. Before deleting the file, make sure the file is not in use. For
additional information on configuration files and the consequences of deleting,
refer to Configuration Files and Loading Sequence in Chapter 3.
To delete a file:
1. At the file# prompt, enter: delete <file-name>.
You are prompted to confirm the deletion.
For example:
mp4100# file
mp4100>file# delete sw-pack-1
File will be erased. Are you sure?? [yes/no] _yes
2. Confirm the deletion.
The unit reverts to the factory default.
Resetting Megaplex-4
Megaplex-4 supports the following types of reset:
• Reset to factory defaults
• Reset to user defaults
• Overall reset (restart, reboot) of the device.
Note If at this moment the CL modules are in synchronization state, the reboot
request is denied and the following message is displayed: "Unprotected data,
main cards in sync process, please wait... " In this case try rebooting the chassis
later.
Note Resetting a module will temporarily disrupt services supported by that module.
To reboot a module:
1. Navigate to configure slot <slot>.
Note When trying to reboot CL modules in synchronization state, the reboot request is
denied and the following message is displayed: "Unprotected data, main cards in
sync process, please wait... " In this case try rebooting the CL module later.
Downloading/Uploading Files
You can download or upload files to the Megaplex-4 unit via SFTP. The following
types of files can be uploaded or downloaded:
• startup-config
• user-default-config
• factory-default-config (upload only)
• log (upload only)
• sw-pack-1, -2, -3, -4
The maximum allowed values for SFTP parameters are:
• Username – 1 – 60 characters
• Password –1– 60 characters
• File name – 1–100 characters
• Port – 1–65535.
Caution Always wait until all main cards installed in the chassis are up and running before
executing any file operation commands.
The SFTP protocol is used to provide secure file transfers via the device’s
Ethernet interface. SFTP is a version of FTP that encrypts commands and data
transfers, keeping your data secure and your session private. For SFTP file
transfers, an SFTP server application must be installed on the local or remote
computer. SFTP file transfers use Port 22. You must check that the firewall you
are using on the server computer allows communication through this port.
A variety of third-party applications offer SFTP server software. For more
information, refer to the documentation of these applications.
Application file is
transferred to MP
Ethernet
PC with an Active
SFTP Server and MP-4100/4104
Application File
Note
Destination file name can be only sw-pack-1, sw-pack-2, sw-pack-3 or sw-pack-4.
Note
The source file name can be one of the following: startup-config or user-default-
config.
Indicators
Megaplex-4 modules and the Megaplex-4 chassis itself have various status
indicators that can be used to identify problems.
Refer to Chapter 2 of this manual for details regarding the functions and
indications of each system indicator and to Chapter 3 of this manual for normal
indications after power-up. Also refer to Megaplex-4 I/O Modules Installation and
Operation Manual for details regarding the functions and indications of each
module indicator.
Statistic Counters
Megaplex-4 collects statistics per physical and logical ports (see the list below)
for 15-minute intervals. This enables the network operator to monitor the
transmission performance, and thus the quality of service provided to users, as
well as identify transmission problems. Performance parameters for all the active
entities are continuously collected during equipment operation.
Statistics for the last 24 hours are stored in the device and can be retrieved at
the network management station.
Statistic counters provide information on possible abnormal behavior and failures.
You can display statistics of the following:
• RADIUS server
• Ethernet, SDH/SONET, E1/T1, SHDSL, VCG, PCS, GFP, HDLC and PW ports.
For further information, refer to the relevant sections in Chapter 4 and the
relevant sections in the troubleshooting chart.
Masking
Alarms and events can be masked per source type, source ID, or minimum
severity. When masking by source type (such as Ethernet) or source ID (such as
Ethernet port 1 on card in slot 1), choose a specific alarm or event, or apply the
change to all the alarms and events of the selected source type or ID.
When masking an alarm/event, you can:
• Prevent the alarm/event from being written to the history log, sent to Syslog
servers, and displayed in the default view of the active alarms table
• Prevent any corresponding traps from being sent to management stations,
regardless of masking in the SNMP manager configuration
• Deactivate alarm reporting via LED and alarm relay.
When an alarm/event is not masked, any corresponding traps are sent only to
management station for which the traps are not masked in the SNMP manager
configuration. In addition, you can:
• Change alarm severity
• Mask a specific reporting method
• Mask alarms per their severity.
You can also acknowledge alarm logs. The last acknowledgement time is recorded
by Megaplex-4. When displaying the log, only entries entered after the last
acknowledgment time are displayed. This action does not delete any data from
the log, and you can also display acknowledged data by using a designated
keyword.
Alarm Buffer
Megaplex-4 continuously monitors critical signals and signal processing functions.
In addition, it can also monitor an external alarm line, connected to the ALARM
connector.
If a problem is detected, Megaplex-4 generates time-stamped alarm messages.
The time stamp is provided by an internal real-time clock.
The alarm messages generated by the Megaplex-4 are explained below.
Internally, the Megaplex-4 stores alarms in an alarm buffer. This alarm buffer can
store up to 200 alarm messages, together with their time stamps. The alarm
history buffer is organized as a FIFO queue; after 200 alarms are written into the
buffer, new alarms overwrite the oldest alarms.
Alarm messages can also be sent automatically as traps to the user-specified
network management stations.
The alarms can be read on-line by the network administrator using the network
management station, a Telnet host or a supervision terminal. The network
administrator can then use the various diagnostic tests to determine the causes of
the alarm messages and to return the system to normal operation.
When Megaplex-4 is powered down, the alarm messages are erased; old alarms
will not reappear after the Megaplex-4 is powered up again. When using the
terminal or a Telnet host, the user also can clear (delete) the alarms stored in
this buffer, after reading them.
Alarm Relays
In addition to the alarm reporting facility, Megaplex-4 has two alarm relays with
floating change-over contacts: one relay for indicating the presence of major
alarms and the other for minor alarms. Each relay changes state whenever the
first alarm is detected, and returns to its normal state when all the alarms of the
corresponding severity disappear.
The relay contacts can be used to report internal system alarms to outside
indicators (e.g., lights, buzzers, bells), located on a bay alarm or remote
monitoring panel.
See also ACM Module, TP Module and VS Modules sections in the Megaplex-4 I/O
Modules Installation and Operation Manual for description of alarm relays
available on these modules.
Factory Defaults
Configuration defaults are listed in the table below. This table is relevant only
when the ACM module is installed in the chassis.
Setting the active state of alarm-input <slot>/<port> [active {high high – Active alarm input is indicated by
the port input line and alarm | low | off}] [description < alarm-input-high voltage
description (ACM module description-string>] low – Active alarm input is indicated by
only) low voltage
off – Alarm input is disabled
Description-string – a free-text alarm
name
Binding an alarm of specific bind-alarm-to-relay <source-type> For the list of source types and
source type to an alarm <alarm-name> alarm-output corresponding alarm names, refer to
output port <slot/port/tributary> Alarm list in this chapter.
Using no before the command cancels
the alarm binding
Applicable for ACM, VS-6/BIN and TP
modules installed in the system. In the TP
module, relevant for ports 5..8 only.
<tributary> relates only to VS-6/BIN
modules.
A cmd-out port cannot be simultaneously
bound as Alarm Relay (the current
command) and bound as secondary cmd-
out port to a primary cmd-out port (see
Chapter 6).
Binding an alarm of specific bind-alarm-source-to-relay <source- For the list of source types and
source type on a specific type> <alarm-name> <slot/port> corresponding alarm names, refer to
user port to an alarm output alarm-output <slot/port/tributary> Alarm list in this chapter.
port Using no before the command cancels
the alarm binding.
Applicable for ACM, VS-6/BIN and TP
modules installed in the system. In the TP
module, relevant for ports 5..8 only.
<tributary> relates only to VS-6/BIN
modules.
Masking alarm per severity mask-minimum-severity [log {critical | Masking a minimum severity means that
major | minor}] [snmp-trap {critical | lower severities are also masked
major | minor}] [led-relay {critical |
major | minor}]
no mask-minimum-severity [log]
[snmp-trap [led-relay]
Displaying alarm logs show {active-alarms | active-alarms- See Working with the Alarm and Event
details | alarm-information | alarm-log | Logs
alarm-list | event-information |
event-list | log ]
Displaying the state of input show alarm-input {slot <slot>| all} Current status:
alarms and configured • Active – an active external alarm is
voltage for each port of the present on the port
slot/chassis
• Inactive – external alarm is not active
or port in shutdown state
Voltage: as defined by alarm-input
<slot>/<port> [active {high | low | off}]
command
Description: port name
Displaying the state of show alarm-outputs {slot <slot>| all} • Active – active alarms from the list
output alarms for each port configured by the user are present on
of the slot/chassis the port
• Inactive –no active alarms from the list
configured by the user are present on
the port
Examples
active-alarms-details Same as above but with time stamp added to active alarms 2
alarm-list List of all Megaplex-4 alarms for a specific source IDs and 5
[<source ID> [severity severity value or of all the alarms available in the system
{critical|major|minor}]]
To clear a log:
• At the config>reporting# context, enter clear-alarm-log {log | activity-log | all-
logs}.
The corresponding log is cleared.
Source
Name ID Severity Logged
System
hardware_failure_fe 20012 Yes (Default)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
System
configuration_mismatch_fe 20013 Yes (Default)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
System
INTERFACE_MISMATCH_FE 20014 Major Yes (Default)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
System
NO_INTERFACE_FE 20015 Yes (Default)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Power Supply
POWER_DELIVERY_FAILURE 20201 Major Yes (Default)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Alarm Input
Alarm_Relay_Input 20401 Major Yes (Default)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Card
HARDWARE_FAILURE 40001 Major Yes (Default)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Card
CARD_MISMATCH 40002 Major Yes (Default)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
To scroll up and down in the list, use the arrow keys.
730 Error LOG MUST BE MASKED If an alarm is masked for log reporting
TOGETHER WITH SNMP-TRAP (alarm-source-attribute command), it must be masked for
trap reporting as well.
11.3 Troubleshooting
Preliminary Checks
If a problem occurs, perform the following preliminary checks:
• If the problem is detected when Megaplex-4 is put into operation (for the
first time), perform the following checks:
Check for proper chassis and module installation, and correct cable
connections, in accordance with the system installation plan.
Check that system and module configuration parameters are in
accordance with the specific application requirements, as provided by the
system administrator.
If the Megaplex-4 nodal clock is to be locked to the clock recovered from
one of the ports of a module installed in the chassis, make sure a suitable
additional clock source is configured and provides a good clock signal.
• When two CL modules are installed, check the ON LINE indicators: the ON
LINE indicator of the active module must light steadily, and that of the
standby must flash. If not, check the configuration.
• Check the displayed alarm messages and refer to Alarm, Event and Trap Lists
section for their meaning and corrective actions.
Troubleshooting Procedure
If the problem cannot be corrected by performing the actions listed above, refer
to Table 11-2. Identify the best-fitting trouble symptoms and perform the actions
listed under “Corrective Measures” in the order given, until the problem is
corrected.
1 Megaplex-4 does 1. No power Check that power is available at the power outlets or power
not turn on distribution panel serving the Megaplex-4.
Check that both ends of all the Megaplex-4 power cables are
properly connected.
3. External problem Check the external equipment (for example, the default
gateway and other routers/switches) that process the traffic
coming from the local Megaplex-4 CONTROL ETH port
5 The status 1. Cable connection Check for proper connections of the cables to the module
indicator of a problems connector.
local I/O module Repeat the check at the user equipment connected to the
port lights in red port.
2. External problem Activate the local physical loopback on the corresponding
port. If the indicator of the corresponding local port lights in
green while the loop is connected, the problem is external.
Check cable connections, and the transmission equipment
providing the link to the remote unit.
6 The LOS indicator 1. Cable connection Check for proper connections of the cables to the connector.
of the CLOCK problems Repeat the check at the equipment providing the station
port lights in red clock signal to the Megaplex-4.
2. Defective CL Replace the CL module
module
Note Some of the ASMi-54 models support RLB loopback on PCS ports in addition to
RLB loopback on SHDSL ports. If this (PCS) loopback is activated from the CPE,
the IP management remains available during diagnostics.
Standards
RFC-2544, Benchmarking Methodology for Carrier Ethernet Networks
Benefits
The test can be performed with different frame sizes and data patterns including
PRBS to verify data integrity. It can be performed before service is commissioned
to ensure service parameters or during service for fault verification and isolation.
Functional Description
The Ethernet BERT test measures the packet loss, detecting the point at which
frame loss does not occur.
Factory Defaults
By default, no profiles or tests are defined.
When you create a test profile, it is configured by default as shown below.
mp4100# config test rfc2544
mp4100>config>test>rfc2544# profile-name Testprf
mp4100>config>test>rfc2544>profile-name(Testprf)$ inf d
frame-size 64
pattern all-ones
mp4100>config>test>rfc2544>profile-name(Testprf)$
When you create a test, it is configured by default as shown below.
mp4100# config test rfc2544
mp4100>config>test>rfc2544# test 1
mp4100>config>test>rfc2544>test(1)$ info detail
max-rate 0 convention data-rate compensation 0
type frame-loss
max-test-duration 2
no associated-flow
mp4100>config>test>rfc2544>test(1)$
Configuring frame sizes frame-size [64] [128] [256] [512] [1024] [1280] You can specify one standard
for the test [1518] [1700] [1900] [2000] frame size per profile.
Associating test with flow associated-flow <name> The flow has the port to be tested as
the egress port.
Defining the type of type [frame-loss] In the current version, type is always
benchmark test to frame-loss.
perform on this run
656 Error PROFILE TEST MUST BE BOUND You must associate a test profile to the test using test-
profile command.
658 Error MAX RATE MUST BE You must specify the maximum rate using max-rate
CONFIGURED command.
659 Error ASSOCIATED FLOW ISN'T You must associate a flow to the test using
DEFINED associated-flow command.
660 Error FLOW ISN'T ACTIVE You must set the associated flow to “no shutdown”.
664 Error NO PARAMETER CHANGE, TEST You cannot modify test parameters while the test is still
IS IN PROGRESS running.
665 Error CLEAR REPORT BEFORE Test parameters can be modified only after the test report
PARAMETER SETTING is cleared.
666 Error ILLEGAL FRAME SIZE AND RATE The ratio max-rate/frame-size must must not be less than
COMBINATION 8 (relevant for CL.2/A only).
Example
To run the Ethernet BER test:
• Frame size – 64
• Test type – frame loss
• Associated to flow “520-slot3-pcs1-gbe2-in”
• Maximum test duration – 2 min
• Maximum rate – 10 Mbps
mp4100>config>test>rfc2544>profile-name (1-64)#
frame-size 64
pattern all-ones
----------------------------------------------
mp4100>config>test>rfc2544>test(1)#
test-profile "1-64"
max-rate 10000000 convention data-rate compensation 0
type frame-loss
max-test-duration 2
associated-flow "520-slot3-pcs1-gbe2-in"
mp4100>config>test>rfc2544>test(1)# commit
mp4100>save
-----------------------------------------------
mp4100>config>test>rfc2544>test(1)# activate
--------------------------------------------------------
Test ID : 1
Iteration Number : 1
Date & Time : 31-12-2012 09:49:49
Profile Name : 1-64
Number of Trials : 1
Duration <dd:hh:mm:ss> : <00:00:04:04>
Test Parameters
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Flow Parameters
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Flow Name : 520-slot3-pcs1-gbe2-in
Loss Report
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Frame Size : 64
Theoretical Max (FPS) : 22258
mp4100#
Megaplex-4100
SDH/SONET Interface
E1-i/T1-i
CL Framers
1
2
Diagnostic
DS1 . SDH/
Function I/O Port Cross-Connect .. E1/T1 VC/VT
SONET
Mapper Matrix
Matrix . Framer
..
.
.
Local loopback on
I/O voice, serial,
serial-bundle, mux- DS1
I/O Port Cross-Connect
eth-tdm, shdsl Interface
Matrix
ports
Remote loopback
on I/O voice, serial,
DS1
serial-bundle, mux- Port Cross-Connect
Interface
eth-tdm, shdsl Matrix
ports
Local loopback on
E1 or T1 port
DS1
(M8E1/M8T1, Port Cross-Connect
Interface
M16E1/M16T1, Matrix
ASMi-54C/N, T3, all
"1 "
OP modules)
Remote loopback
on E1 or T1 port
DS1
(M8E1/M8T1, Port Cross-Connect
Interface
M16E1/M16T1, Matrix
ASMi-54C/N, T3, all
OP modules)
Megaplex-4100
SDH/SONET Interface
E1-i/T1-i
CL Framers
1
2
Diagnostic
DS1 . SDH/
Function I/O Port Cross-Connect .. E1/T1 VC/VT
SONET
Mapper Matrix
Matrix . Framer
.
..
.
Local loopback on
I/O Interface
E1/E1-i/T1/T1-i
timeslots 1
DS1
(M8E1/M8T1, 2
.. Cross-Connect
M16E1/M16T1, .. Matrix
.
ASMi-54C/N, T3,
Megaplex OP
modules)
Remote loopback
I/O Interface
on E1/E1-i/T1/T1-i
timeslots 1
2 DS1
(M8E1/M8T1, .. Cross-Connect
M16E1/M16T1, .. Matrix
.
ASMi-54C/N, T3,
Megaplex OP
modules)
Megaplex-4100
SDH/SONET Interface
E1-i/T1-i
CL Framers
1
2
Diagnostic
DS1 . SDH/
Function I/O Port Cross-Connect .. E1/T1 VC/VT
SONET
Mapper Matrix
Matrix . Framer
.
..
.
E1-i/T1-i Framers
Local loopback on
E1-i/T1-i port 1
2
..
.
..
.
E1-i/T1-i Framers
Remote loopback
on E1-i/T1-i port 1
2
..
..
..
Megaplex-4100
CL
CPU
Diagnostic
Traffic
Function Counter
CPE I/O Port ETH Engine L2
Switch
Traffic
Generator
Remote
loopback on PCS CPE
ports (initiated
PCS I/O Port
in Megaplex)
Ethernet BERT
CPE Traffic
Counter
PCS I/O Port
Traffic
Generator
The Megaplex loopbacks are activated from the following context and are
described in the corresponding sections in Chapters 6, 8 and 11.
Benefits
The PM data is useful for analyzing Megaplex-4 service quality. The flexible
statistics collection allows only the necessary data to be collected.
Functional Description
PM statistics collection is configured for the device, entity type, and specific
entities. PM statistics are collected for the Ethernet ports.
Notes • PM statistics collection is performed only if it is enabled for the entire device,
regardless of whether it is enabled for any entity
• PM statistics are not collected for entities that are administratively disabled.
When PM statistics collection is enabled for all entities of the same type, then
when a new entity of that type is added the device automatically starts collecting
PM statistics for it.
Note If you are using the RADview PM Portal, it is recommended to enable PM statistics
collection for all relevant entities. See Examples for a script that you can use for
this purpose.
Factory Defaults
Note
PM statistics are collected for entities for which PM statistics collection is
specifically enabled (at the entity(port) level) via pm-collection, even if PM
statistics collection for the entity type (under reporting context) is disabled.
Examples
To enable PM for all relevant entities in Megaplex-4:
• PM statistics collection enabled for device
• PM statistics collection enabled for all relevant entities, every five minutes.
exit all
configure reporting
#**** Enable PM in device****#
pm
#**** Enable PM for Eth ports, collection interval=5 min****#
pm-collection eth interval 300
exit all
save
Configuration Errors
Table 11-1 lists the messages displayed by Megaplex-4 when a configuration
error is detected.
Note If your system has two CL modules, you must upgrade both modules to the same
software version to ensure seamless redundancy after the upgrade.
12.2 Impact
Megaplex-4 is upgraded once the unit has been reset.
12.4 Prerequisites
This section details the software file names and outlines system requirements
needed for the upgrade procedure.
Software Files
New version releases are distributed as software files named *.bin, for example
sw-pack.bin. The files can be obtained from the local RAD business partner from
whom the device was purchased.
The software upgrade utility includes four partitions called sw-pack-1, sw-pack-2,
sw-pack-3, sw-pack-4 for downloading and storing the software versions. To
activate the specified software version, one of these partitions is set to active.
Each software pack consists of a set of image files for each (CL or I/O) module
with appropriate headers. The software pack can be ordered either for the entire
chassis, or for specific modules only.
System Requirements
Before starting the upgrade, verify that you have the following:
• For upgrade via TFTP:
Megaplex-4 unit with a router interface bound to the management
interface used, and a static route defined to a PC with the TFTP server
application (such as 3Cdaemon or PumpKIN), and a valid IP address.
Software file stored on the PC.
Note Megaplex-4 communicates with TFTP servers via Ethernet ports only.
Ethernet
Megaplex-4100
PC with an Active
TFTP Server and
Application File
Pinging the PC
Check the integrity of the communication link between Megaplex-4 and the PC by
pinging the Megaplex-4 from the PC.
Installing the New Software Release File from the Flash Disk
Once a file is saved on the Megaplex-4 flash disk, it must be copied to the CL.2 or
I/O modules to replace the current software. The sw-pack file includes the new
software version for all the CL.2 and I/O modules, according to your purchase
order.
You can choose to download the new SW release file to all the CL.2 and I/O
modules installed in the chassis simultaneously. In this case, if the chassis
includes several modules of the same kind, the new software release will be
installed in all of them. If you do not want this to happen, you can issue a
command to install the software in one specific slot.
To download the new software release file from the flash disk to all the CL.2 and
I/O modules installed in the chassis:
• At the admin>software # prompt, enter the install command. For example:
mp4100# admin
mp4100>admin# software
mp4100>admin>software# install sw-pack-3
The previous software pack is deleted from the active partition:
deleting file /tffs0/Sw-Pack/Active/main.bin
deleting file /tffs0/Sw-Pack/Active/mainHdr.bin
deleting file /tffs0/Sw-Pack/Active/op-108c.bin
deleting file /tffs0/Sw-Pack/Active/op-108cHdr.bin
deleting file /tffs0/Sw-Pack/Active/m8e1.bin
deleting file /tffs0/Sw-Pack/Active/m8e1Hdr.bin
installation completed
The software pack stored in sw-pack-3 partition is transferred to the
active partition and sent to all the relevant modules that are found in the
chassis. The I/O modules perform reboot automatically and are now ready
for operation with new software version.
7. To activate the new software release for the CL modules, you must perform
reboot. Disconnect the power, wait a few seconds and then reconnect the
power.
Megaplex-4 is upgraded and starts with the new software version.
mp4100# admin software install sw-pack-1
deleting file /tffs0:2/Sw-Pack/Active/main.bin
deleting file /tffs0:2/Sw-Pack/Active/mainHdr.bin
To download the new software release file from the flash disk to a specified CL.2
or I/O module:
• At the admin>software # prompt, enter the install command and add the
specified slot number. For example:
mp4100# admin software install sw-pack-1 slot 10
deleting file /tffs0/Sw-Pack/Active/op-108c.bin
deleting file /tffs0/Sw-Pack/Active/op-108cHdr.bin
installation completed
The OP-108C module installed in slot 10 is upgraded and starts with the
new software version.
Ethernet
PC with an Active
SFTP Server and Megaplex-4100/4104
Application File
Pinging the PC
Check the integrity of the communication link between Megaplex-4 and the PC by
pinging the Megaplex-4 from the PC.
Note Issuing the dir command (file# prompt) while installing a new software release
causes the CLI to stop responding during the installation process. The CLI
connection is restored after the SW installation is complete.
mp4100>file# dir
Codes C - Configuration S - Software LO – Log
Name Type Size(Bytes) Creation Date Status
sw-pack-1 S 6306207 21-12-2010 valid
13:44:58
sw-pack-2 S 6305847 21-2-2011 valid
7:48:0
sw-pack-3 S 6278526 21-2-2011 valid
9:57:47
sw-pack-4 S 6289552 6-1-2011 valid
10:23:13
startup-config C 95872 13-3-2011 valid
14:7:35
user-default-config C 95872 13-3-2011 valid
14:6:51
factory-default-conf C 796 1-1-1970 Read Only
0:0:9
running-config C 0 1-1-1970 Read Only
0:0:9
Total Bytes : 101367808 Free Bytes : 63442944
Installing the New Software Release File from the Flash Disk
Once a file is saved on the Megaplex-4100 flash disk, it must be copied to the
CL.2 or I/O modules to replace the current software. The sw-pack file includes the
new software version for all the CL.2 and I/O modules, according to your
purchase order.
You can choose to download the new SW release file to all the CL.2 and I/O
modules installed in the chassis simultaneously. In this case, if the chassis
includes several modules of the same kind, the new software release will be
installed in all of them. If you do not want this to happen, you can issue a
command to install the software in one specific slot.
To download the new software release file from the flash disk to all the CL.2 and
I/O modules installed in the chassis:
1. At the admin>software # prompt, enter the install command. For example:
mp4100# admin
mp4100>admin# software
mp4100>admin>software# install sw-pack-3
The previous software pack is deleted from the active partition:
deleting file /tffs0/Sw-Pack/Active/main.bin
deleting file /tffs0/Sw-Pack/Active/mainHdr.bin
deleting file /tffs0/Sw-Pack/Active/op-108c.bin
deleting file /tffs0/Sw-Pack/Active/op-108cHdr.bin
deleting file /tffs0/Sw-Pack/Active/m8e1.bin
deleting file /tffs0/Sw-Pack/Active/m8e1Hdr.bin
installation completed
The software pack stored in sw-pack-3 partition is transferred to the
active partition and sent to all the relevant modules that are found in the
chassis. The I/O modules perform reboot automatically and are now ready
for operation with new software version.
2. To activate the new software release for the CL modules, you must perform
reboot. Disconnect the power, wait a few seconds and then reconnect the
power.
Megaplex-4 is upgraded and starts with the new software version.
mp4100# admin software install sw-pack-1
deleting file /tffs0:2/Sw-Pack/Active/main.bin
deleting file /tffs0:2/Sw-Pack/Active/mainHdr.bin
To download the new software release file from the flash disk to a specified CL.2
or I/O module:
• At the admin>software # prompt, enter the install command and add the
specified slot number. For example:
mp4100# admin software install sw-pack-1 slot 10
deleting file /tffs0/Sw-Pack/Active/op-108c.bin
deleting file /tffs0/Sw-Pack/Active/op-108cHdr.bin
installation completed
The OP-108C module installed in slot 10 is upgraded and starts with the
new software version.
Caution The Boot menu procedures are recommended for use only by authorized
personnel, because this menu provides many additional options that are intended
for use only by technical support personnel.
You can upgrade via the Boot menu using either the TFTP or the XMODEM
protocol. Two software downloading options are available from the Boot
Manager:
• Downloading using the XMODEM protocol. This is usually performed by
downloading from a PC directly connected to the CONTROL port of the unit.
Note All the screens shown in this section are for illustration purposes only. Your
Megaplex-4 may display different software versions and port profiles.
The preparations needed for using the TFTP/FTP protocol via the Boot menu are
similar to the preparations needed to download software using the TFTP protocol
via the CLI. The main difference is that you need to define the IP communication
parameters associated with the corresponding Ethernet port (IP addresses and
the associated subnet mask and a default gateway IP address).
• Commands:
?/help - print this list
p - print boot parameters
c [param] - change boot parameter(s)
v - print boot logo with
versions information
run - load active sw pack and
execute
delete <FileName> - delete a file
dir - show list of files
show <index> - show sw pack info
download <index> [,<FileName|x>] - download a sw pack to
specific index (x - by Xmodem)
set-active <index> - Set a sw pack index to be
the active application
control-x/reset - reboot/reset
Figure 12-3. VXWORKS Boot Manager Help List
baud rate b Transmission bit rate (in kbps): 9600, 19200, 115200
9. Press <C> to change the boot parameters and type valid values in each field.
Type 'c' to modify all parameters
Type 'c [parameter]' to modify the specific parameter (for example, to
change the filename to sw-pack.bin, type: c fn vxworks sw-pack.bin).
'.' = clear field; '-' = go to previous field; ^D = quit
To download software file(s) from the Boot menu to Megaplex-4 via TFTP/FTP:
1. Verify that the *.bin file is stored on the PC with the TFTP server application.
2. Activate the TFTP server application/FTP server.
Note When working with FTP server, the user name and password in Boot parameters
must be the same as defined in FTP server.
3. Turn on Megaplex-4 and enter the Boot menu. Set TFTP or FTP protocol.
4. From the Boot menu, type download <index 1..4> [<FileName>] command to
start downloading the software pack file from the PC to the corresponding
partition of the Megaplex-4 flash disk.
Note [<FileName>] is used if you did not specify the filename in the Boot menu
earlier.
Please wait, old file is being erased and written with new one.
File writing to flash: - 7580KB
File downloaded successfully to :2
[boot]:
5. Using dir command, check which partition is currently active. In our example it
is sw-pack-1.
[boot]: dir
SIZE FILE-NAME
796 factory-default-config
6296759 sw-pack-1
6305902 sw-pack-2
6278526 sw-pack-3
6289552 sw-pack-4
Active SW-pack is: 2
Total Bytes : 101367808 Free Bytes : 69701632
6. Use set-active command to activate the partition to which the file has been
downloaded (in our example: sw-pack-2).
[boot]: set-active 2
set-active may take few minutes...
deleting file /tffs0/Sw-Pack/Active/main.bin
deleting file /tffs0/Sw-Pack/Active/mainHdr.bin
SW set active 2 completed successfully.
The new software release is now stored in partition 2 and will be
activated after reset.
7. Perform one of the following:
Type “@” or “run”.
The following message is displayed and the new software release is
activated:
[boot]: run
External file header passed validation!
Loading/un-compressing main.bin...
Starting the APPLICATION off address 0x10000...
Press <Ctrl + X> to perform a cold (hard) reboot with turning power off
and then on.
Type “reset” to perform a warm (soft) reboot without turning off power.
Note The new parameters take effect only after the reset is completed.
RS-232
Megaplex-4100
PC with a Terminal
Emulation and
Application File
Note [<FileName>] is used if you did not specify the filename in the Boot menu
earlier.
7. Use set-active command to activate the partition to which the file has been
downloaded (in our example: sw-pack-2).
[boot]: set-active 2
set-active may take few minutes...
deleting file /tffs0/Sw-Pack/Active/main.bin
deleting file /tffs0/Sw-Pack/Active/mainHdr.bin
SW set active 2 completed successfully.
The new software release is now stored in partition 2 and will be
activated after reset.
8. When the downloading process is successfully completed, press <@> to exit
the Boot Manager.
9. When the Megaplex-4 initialization ends, the unit loads the new software.
Note The command times out and the send file request is considered failed if you do
not initiate sending the file within approximately 3 minutes.
Note
If downloading failed, repeat the entire procedure.
Megaplex-4100 Connector
The Megaplex-4100 CONTROL DCE connector is a 9-pin D-type female connector
with RS-232 asynchronous DCE interface, intended for direct connection to a
supervision terminal. The connector is wired in accordance with Table A-1.
Megaplex-4104 Connector
The Megaplex-4104 CONTROL DCE port has a mini USB connector with RS-232
asynchronous DCE interface, intended for direct connection to a supervision
terminal. The connector is wired in accordance with Table A-1.
1 – CAP to GND –
2 TX Transmit Output
3 RX Receive Input
5 GND Ground –
Control Cables
9-Pin 9-Pin
Connector TD 3 3 Connector
RD 2 2
RTS 7 7
CTS 8 8
To
CONTROL DCE DSR 6 6 To Terminal
Connector DCD 1 1
RI 9 9
DTR 4 4
GND 5 5
Figure A-1. 9-Pin Straight Cable Wiring - Connection to CONTROL DCE Connector
Mini-USB 9-Pin
Connector Connector
To RD 2 2 RD
CONTROL DCE To Terminal
TD 3 3 TD
Connector
GND 5 4 DSR
5 GND
Figure A-2. 9-Pin Straight Cable Wiring - Connection to CONTROL DCE Connector
9 Pin 25 Pin
Connector Connector
TD 3 2
RD 2 3
RTS 7 4
CTS 8 5
To
CONTROL DCE DSR 6 6 To Terminal
Connector DCD 1 8
RI 9 22
DTR 4 20
GND 5 7
9-Pin 9-Pin
Connector TD 3 2 Connector
RD 2 3
RTS 7 8
CTS 8 7
To
CONTROL DCE DSR 6 4 To Modem
Connector DCD 1 1
RI 9 9
DTR 4 6
GND 5 5
Figure A-4. 9-Pin Crossed Cable Wiring - Connection to CONTROL DCE Connector
Connector Data
Each Megaplex-4 CONTROL ETH port has a 10/100BASE-TX Ethernet station
interface terminated in an RJ-45 connector. The port supports the MDI/MDIX
crossover function, and therefore it can be connected by any type of cable
(straight or crossed) to any type of 10/100BASE-TX Ethernet port. The port also
corrects for polarity reversal in the 10BASE-T mode.
Connector pin functions for the MDI state are listed in Table A-3. In the MDIX
state, the receive and transmit pairs are interchanged.
4, 5 – Not connected
7, 8 – Not connected
Connection Data
Use a standard station cable to connect the CONTROL ETH connector to any type
of 10/100BASE-TX Ethernet port.
Connector Data
The ALARM connector provides connections to the following functions:
• Major and minor alarm relay contacts
• +5V auxiliary voltage output (through 330 Ω series resistor)
• External alarm sense input, accepts RS-232 levels. Can be connected to the
+5V auxiliary output by external dry contacts.
ALARM connectors are different for different chassis (CL modules):
Pin Function
1 Major alarm relay – normally-open (NO) contact
3 Ground
Pin Function
1 Major alarm relay – normally-closed (NC) contact
9 Ground
CBL-MP-4104/AR/OPEN/2M
The CBL-MP-4104/AR/OPEN/2M alarm relay cable serves for connecting the 9-pin
Molex connector to the user alarm equipment. It includes one female Molex 9-pin
connector and one open-ended connector. The cable is 2m (6.5 ft) long. The
figure below shows the cable, the connector pinout and the diagram of dry
contacts.
J1, 9 PIN
(1 x 9)
Brown
9 Major Relay - Normally closed (NC)
Black
8 Major Relay - Central Contact
Gray
7 Major Relay - Normally open (NO)
Purple
6 Minor Relay - Normally closed (NC)
Blue
5 Minor Relay - Central Contact
Green
4 Minor Relay - Normally open (NO)
Yellow
3 +5V auxiliary output
Orange
2 External alarm input
Red
1
Molex
Connector Pin
Connector Data
The CLOCK interface located on CL modules has one RJ-45 eight-pin connector.
Table A-6 lists the connector pin functions.
7 – Not connected
8 – Not connected
For this purpose, RAD offers a 15-cm long adapter cable, CBL-RJ45/2BNC/E1/X,
which has one RJ-45 plug for connection to CL CLOCK connector and two BNC
female connectors at the other end. Cable wiring is given in Figure A-6.
Clock Input
(Green)
RJ-45
BNC
Female
Clock Output
CLOCK IN Ring 1 (Red)
GND 8
Figure A-6. Unbalanced CLOCK Interface Adapter Cable, CBL-RJ45/2BNC/E1/X, Wiring Diagram
AC PS Module Connections
The AC-powered PS modules have one standard IEC three-pin socket for the
connection of the AC power.
In addition, the AC-powered PS modules include a three-pin connector,
designated VDC-IN, for the connection of external phantom feed and ring
voltages. Connector wiring is listed in Table A-7.
Pin Function
DC PS Module Connections
The DC-powered PS modules have a single three-pin VDC-IN connector, for the
connection of the supply voltage (24 or 48 VDC), as well as a +72 VDC input for
ring and phantom feed purposes.
Connector wiring is listed in Table A-8, together with a view of the connector
itself. The nominal supply voltage appears in the table under the connector.
Note
RAD supplies mating connectors for the DC power connectors. For information on
preparing cables using the supplied connectors, refer to the DC Power Supply
Connection Supplement.
Ground Connection
All PS modules are equipped with a grounding screw on the module panel for
connecting the protective ground.
Chapter 1. Alarm Relay ACM Alarm and diagnostics module with four outbound relays
Modules
T3 T3 multiplexer module
Chapter 6. Ringers and Ringer-2100R DC power supply module for DC feed and up to 32 voice
Power Supplies channel ring voltages
VS-6/C37 6-port serial module with 2 fiber optic C37.94 ports and 1
Ethernet port
VS Voice Modules
VS-6/FXS 6-port serial module with 8 FXS voice ports and 1 Ethernet
port
Chapter 9. Voice Modules VC-4/4A/8/8A/16 4/8/16-port FXS/FXO/E&M PCM and ADPCM analog voice
modules
Introduction
This appendix describes basic verification tests for Megaplex-4 ver 4.5. The aim is
to perform a series of short tests that check the following:
• Basic functionality:
Backward Compatibility
Quick Stress
• Protection
APS
LAG
ERP G.8032
Ethernet Group
VC Path
TDM Group
I/O Group
• Services
Ethernet forwarding and traffic management
Ethernet BERT
TDM (E1) service
High-speed serial service
Low-speed serial service
Voice service
802.1ag OAM CFM + Y.1731 PM
PW-over-ERP service
• Management and system
ACL
RADview
SNMPv3
Clock Source.
Note All tests should pass if the following procedures are performed precisely.
Backward
4h 6h 8h 4h 8h 4h
Compatibility
Quick Stress 4h 4h 4h 4h
APS 2h
LAG 2h
ERP G.8032 2h
Ethernet group
2h
protection
VC path protection 2h
TDM group
2h 2h
protection
I/O group protection 2h
Ethernet forwarding
and traffic 8h
management
Ethernet Bert 2h
TDM 2h 2h
High speed serial 2h 2h
Low speed serial 2h
Voice 2h
802.1ag & Y.1731 4h
Teleprotection 3h
ACL 2h, any setup
SNMPv3 2h
PW 2h
Clock Selection 2h 2h
RADview EMS 2h total, all setups
Ethernet over 4h
SDH/SONET
Required Equipment
Table C-2 lists devices required for conducting the tests.
Table C-2. Required Equipment
Device Setup A Setup B Setup C Setup D Setup E Setup F Setup H Total
Megaplex-4100 1 3 5 1 6 2 1 19
CL.2 modules 2 6 11 4 23
CL.2/A modules 10 2 2 13
I/O modules
ASMi-54C E1+ETH 1 4 5
ASMi-54C E1 1 10 11
ASMi-54C 1 2 3
M16T1 3 12 15
M8T1 3 2 5
M8E1 5 5
MPW-1 5 5
M-ETH 3 3
OP-108C 2 2
VC-6/E&M 1 1
VC-6/FXS 3 3
VC-8/FXS 2 2
VC-4/FXO 1 1
HS-12N 2 2
HS-6N 2 2 4
HS-RN 4 2 1 7
HSF-2 5 5
Megaplex-2100 1 1
I/O modules
HSF-1 1 1
HS-2 1 1
ML-2T1 2 2
VC-6/E&M 1 1
VC-6/FXO 1 1
HS-RN 1 1
Other equipment
ASMi-52 Mux 4 4
ASMi-52 4 4
ASMi-54L 4 12 16
ASMi-54 6 6
ASMi-52L 14 36 50
OP-108 2 2
OP-108L 2 2
FCD-E1L 3 3
DXC-4 1 1
SecFlow-4 1 1
ETX-205A 1 1
ETX-204A 1 1
ETX-202 1 1
FlexDSL Repeater 12 12
HBT 12 6 2 12 30
LBT 4 4
Ixia Ports 6 5 8 2 21
PC 1 1 1 1 1 1 6
Telephone set 7 2 9
Cisco switch 1 1
Egate generator 1 1
FireBerd tester 4 4
Ethernet switch 1 1
VSC 1 1
RADview 1 station for all setups
management
station
Test Setups
The Test plan includes 8 setups (A to H) for testing various Megaplex-4 features
and services. Each setup description also includes the list of features/services
designed to be tested on it. Only those features/services that have detailed
descriptions in this document are listed in these lists.
ACL functionality (see Testing ACL Functionality) can be tested on any setup and
is not included in these lists.
RADview test should be performed on each setup.
Note In its turn, the description of each feature/service includes the list of setups
designed for its testing. However, some services of the same type are present in
other setups not appearing in this list. These services take part in backward
compatibility and quick stress tests which are performed on all the setups. For
example, while high speed serial services are tested on Setups A and F, some of
them are also configured in Setup B where they are tested during the overall
backward compatibility and quick stress tests.
Test 12 V.35
Telefonica Setup
RPT - 8
Test 12 E1
Test 10
RPT - 6
HBT-9
ASMi-52 HBT-12 HBT-3
RPT - 5 V.35
MUX 1 V.35 V.35
E1 V.35
Test 12 V.35
Test 12 E1 + Test 12 V.35
Test 9
Test 12 E1
HBT-4
Test 10
HBT-1
V.35 V.35
Test 9
Test 12 V.35
Test 4
Test 3 V.35
HBT-11
Test 1
ASMi-52 ASMi-52 V.35
Mux 2 MUX 3 Test 11 V.35
Test 11
1 2 3 4
E1 V.35 V.35 E1
RPT - 7 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4
SHDSL 5 6
Test 11 E1
7 8
Test 12
9 10 11 12
HBT E1-i
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
Slot 10 HS-12/N
HBT Test 10
V.35
1 2 3 4
Slot 9
ASMi-52 #2
5 6
1 2 3 4 7 8
FCD-E1L-1 5 6 7 8 E1
9E110 11 12
Test 11 E1
E1
ASMi-52 Slot 7
Mux 4
E1 V.35
Test 12 E1 Slot 10
ASMi-52 #3
ASMi-52 #4
ASMi-52 #1
E1
V.35
V.35
172.17.151.121 CL-B
V.35
E1
E1
GBE
CL-A 1 2
Test 3 V.35 + Test 3 E1
RPT - 9 Ixia
Slot 2 Test 14
Test 2
Test 1 SHDSL
Test 2
RPT - 10 RPT-2
4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 SHDSL
Test 4 Test 4
RPT - 12 8 7 6 5
RPT - 3
Test 7 + Test 13
4 3 2 1
Test 14 + Test 8
8 7 6 5 E1 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 E1
Slot 4
Test 6
Non-Managed
E1
HBT 530 FCD-E1L-2 Test 3 E1 Test 7
ASMi-54L-3
44 3 2 1
Test 8
Test 13
FCD-E1L-3
Data Flow RPT - 1
E1
ASMi-54L-4
Test 6
Test 14
Test 13
Clock Setting
FCD-E1L-1 Internal
MP Receives from E1 7/5
Test 1 V.35 only; 31TS transparent; data-rate 2048 kbps. HBT à HS-12N 10/1 à ASMi-54C/N E1-i 4/1 à SHDSL slot 4 line 1,2 à Repeater 9 à ASMi-52 1 Loop.
Test 2 E1 unframed; data-rate 2048 kbps. Test 12 à ASMi-54C/N E1 4/3 à ASMi-54C/N E1-i 4/3 à SHDSL slot 4 line 3,4 à Repeater 10 à ASMi-52 2 Loop.
V.35 17-31 transparent data rate 2048 kbps. HBT HS-12N 10/3 à ASMi-54C/N E1-i 4/5 à SHDSL slot 4 line 5,6 à Repeater 11 à ASMi-52 3 Loop.
Test 3
E1 framed G.732S 1-15; data rate 2048 kbps. HBT (530) à FCD-E1 à ASMi-54C/N E1 4/5 à ASMI54C/N E1-i 4/5 à SHDSL slot 4 line 5,6 à Repeater 11 à ASMi-52 3 Loop.
Test 4 V35 30TS loop to E1. HBT à HS-12n 9/3 à ASMI54C/N E1-I 4/7 à SHDSL slot 4 line 7,8 à Repeater 12 à ASMI52 4 Loop.
Test 5 ETH only; classifier match all; data-rate 11392 kbps; single IP (EoC). Ixia A à ASMi-54L 1 ETH Port 2 à Repeater 1 à SHDSL slot 2 line 1,2 à PCS 2/1 à ASMi-54C/N ETH 2/1 à Ixia.
Test 6 E1 unframed; data-rate 2176 kbps. HBT à ASMi-54C/N E1 2/3 à ASMi-54C/N E1-i 2/3 à SHDSL slot 2 line 3,4 à Repeater 2 à ASMi-54L 2 à Loop.
Test 7 E1 framed g732s transparent 1-10 21-30. HBT (530) à FCD-E1 3 à ASMI54C/N E1 2/5 à ASMI54C/N E1-I 2/5 à SHDSL slot 2 line 5,6 à Repeater 3 à ASMI54L 3 Loop.
Test 8 E1 unframed. HBT-8 à ASMI54C/N E1 2/7 à ASMI54C/N E1-I 2/7 à SHDSL slot 2 line 7,8 à Repeater 4 à ASMI54L 4 Loop.
Test 9 V35 only 31TS data-rate 2048. HBT à HS-12n 9/1 à ASMI54C/N E1-i 7/2 à SHDSL slot 7 line 1,2 à Repeater 5 à ASMI52 MUX 1 Loop.
Test 10 E1 unframed data-rate 2176. HBT à ASMI54C/N E1 7/3 à ASMI54C/N E1-I 7/3 à SHDSL slot 7 line 3,4 à Repeater 6 à ASMI52 MUX 2 à Test 12.
E1 framed g732s transparent 1-10 21-30. HBT (530) à FCD-E1 1 à ASMI54C/N E1 7/5 à ASMI54C/N E1-I 7/5 à SHDSL slot 7 line 5,6 à Repeater 7 à ASMI52 MUX 3 Loop.
Test 11
V35 31TS (Clock from E1 port) data-rate 3456. HBT à HS-12n 9/10 à ASMI54C/N E1-i 7/6 à SHDSL slot 7 line 5,6 à Repeater 7 à ASMI52 MUX 3 Loop.
E1 unframed. Test 10 à ASMI54C/N E1 7/7 à ASMI54C/N E1-I 7/7 à SHDSL slot 7 line 7,8 à Repeater 8 à ASMI52 MUX 4 à Test 2.
Test 12
V35 31TS data-rate 4096. HBT à HS-12n 9/12 à ASMI54C/N E1-i 7/8 à SHDSL slot 7 line 7,8 à Repeater 8 à ASMI52 MUX 4 Loop.
Test 13 ETH classifier match all data-rate 11392 single IP (EoC). Ixia à ASMI54C/N ETH Port 2/2 à PCS 2/5 à SHDSL slot 2 line 5,6 à Repeater 3 à ASMI54L 3 ETH 4 à Ixia.
Test 14 Match Vlan20 data-rate 11392 single IP (EoC). Ixia Port B à CL-a/1 GBE à PCS 2/7 à SHDSL slot 2 line 7,8 à Repeater 4 à ASMI54L 4 ETH Port 1 à Test 7.
Figure C-1. Testing TDM (E1) over SHDSL and High Speed Serial Services
Figure C-2. Testing Ethernet Group Protection, Low Speed Serial Services and FXS
Voice Services
• Pseudowire service over ERP (see Testing Pseudowire Services over ERP)
• Clock Selection (see Testing Clock Selection)
• RADview (see Testing RADview).
MP E
-41 100
00 -4
D MP
SE1 SE4
M8-E1 M8-E1
CL-A
CL-A
SP6
SP5
A1 A1
MPW A1 G.8032 Ring A1 MPW
SP7 over
TP FXS SP4
CL-B
CL-B
B1 B1
B1 SDH VCG B1
SE1 SE4
SP7
M-ETH TP
S-Clock A
S-Clock B
MP-4100 A
ERP Tests
SE1 SE3
M-ETH Traffic Duplication Test SE1
CL-A1
M8-E1 M8-E1
CL-A1
GbE
GbE
CL-A1
CL-A1
SDH
SDH
PW over ERP
Duplication
Duplication
SP1
HBT-1 HS-6N 2 HS-RN SP2
1
1
CL-A2
2
SDH
CL-A2
SDH
MPW-1 MPW-1
CL-A2
CL-A2
GbE
GbE
SP3 FXS
S-Clock A S-Clock A
S-Clock B S-Clock B
MP-4100 C MP-4100 B
SDH Ring
Legend:
Clock Selection Test
PW over ERP SE1
Traffic Duplication Test
SE# - ETH Service
SE1 SE3
ERP Tests SP# - PW Service
SE2
Figure C-3. Testing Traffic Duplication, ERP G.8032, SNMPv3 and Clock Selection
Cisco Switch
MNG
LAG
1
802.1ag + Y.1731 Test
Ixia 6
ETX-204A Ixia
2
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
GBE 2 GBE 1 GBE 1 GBE 2
MP-
MNG MNG
0B
CLX A CLX B
S S S S S
H H H H H
E E E E
D D D D D
1 1 LINK LINK LINK LINK 1 1
S S S 2 2
S S
1 1
L L L L L
OP-108L/BM/U/ETH/FC/13L #1
ASMI-54L #12 - 4ETH/4W/E1
ASMI-54L #11- 4ETH/4W/E1
OP-108L/BM/U/ETH/FC/13L #4
OP-108L/U/ETH/FC/13L #2
OP-108/U/ETH/FC/13L #3
ASMI-54L #10 - 4ETH/4W
ASMI-54L #9 – 4ETH/4W
ASMI-54L #1 – 4ETH/2W
ASMI-54L #2 - 4ETH/2W
ASMI-54L #3 - 4ETH/2W
ASMI-54L #4 - 4ETH/2W
ASMI-52L #4
ASMI-52L #3
ASMI-52L #2
ASMI-52L #1
Ethernet Forwarding and Traffic
Management
Legend:
802.1ag + Y.1731 Test
LAG
5 4 3
Ethernet BERT Test
Ethernet Forwarding and Traffic Management Ixia
Figure C-4. Testing E-TREE, E-LAN and E-Line Ethernet Forwarding, 802.1ag and
Y.1731 Implementation, LAG Protection, Ethernet BERT, Cisco Switch
Interoperability
9-16
1-8
Clock Source
M16
CL-A
T1 M8
CL-1
T1
Clock Selection
Egate Gen.
MP-4100 A
TDM Group
VC4 FXO
S-Clock A
VC8 FXS
M16-T1
M16-T1
M16-T1
M16-T1
M16-T1
M16-T1
M8-T1
FB B ST
Protection CLK 1 FB E
VC Path ST
Protection 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 10 CLK 2
HBT 1 1
M1
8 6- 6-T
M1 T1 M1
6-T A2 B2
1
MP-4100 B MP-4100 E
A1 B1
B2 A2
B1 A1
S- kA
S-CClock loc B
loc A
kB
A2 A1 B1 B2 S-CClock
S-
OC-12
Ring
MP-4100 C MP-4100 D
B1 A1
B2 A2
A1 B1
oc k B
kA
Cl loc
1
-T
S -C
B2
16
A2
S
M
-
1
VC
8
FB C
FX
S- -Clo T1
oc k A
S
8-
M
B
Cl c
M
16
k
Legend:
-T
1
S
VC Path Protection
TDM Group Protection
Clock Selection FB D
Figure C-5. Testing TDM Group Protection, VC Path Protection and Clock Selection
Service 1 HBT-1 128 V35-HS ASMi-52L 1-1 384 TS0 looped G732N 384 TS0 looped G732N ASMi-52L 3-1 E1
Service 2 HBT-2 256 V35-HS ASMi-52L 1-2 384 TS0 looped G732N 384 TS0 looped G732N ASMi-52L 3-2 E1
Service 3 HBT-3 384 V35-HS ASMi-52L 1-3 384 TS0 looped G732N 384 TS0 looped G732N ASMi-52L 3-3 E1
Service 4 V35-HS ASMi-52L 1-4 Lines 1-2 E1-i1 TS 1-2 E1-i1(1:1:1) TS 1-2 TS 1-2 E1-i6(1:1:1) E1-i1 TS 1-2 Lines 1-2 E1
HBT-4 640 640 TS0 looped G732N 640 TS0 looped G732N ASMi-52L 3-4
Lines 3-4
Lines 5-6 1IO-1E1-i3 TS 1-4
E1-i5 TS 1-6 E1-i1(1:1:1) TS 7-12 TS 7-12 E1-i6(1:1:1)
E1-i3 TS 5-8
E1-i5 TS 1-6IO-3
3 Lines 3-4
Lines 5-6
Lines 7-8 E1-i7 TS 1-10 E1-i1(1:1:1) TS 13-22 TS 13-22 E1-i6(1:1:1) E1-i7 1-10 Lines 7-8
Service 5 HBT-5 1024 V35-HS ASMi-52L 2-1 1024 TS0 looped G732N 1024 TS0 looped G732N ASMi-52L 4-1 E1
Service 6 HBT-6 1536 V35-HS ASMi-52L 2-2 1536 TS0 looped G732N
1536 TS0 looped G732N ASMi-52L 4-2 E1
Lines 1-2 E1-i1 TS 1-16 E1-i2(1:1:2) TS 1-16
Service 7 HBT-7 1920 V35-HS ASMi-52L 2-3 1920 TS0 looped G732N Lines 3-4 E1-i3 TS 1-24 E1-i3(1:1:3) TS 1-24
TS 1-16 E1-i7(1:1:2) E1-i1 TS 1-16 Lines 1-2 1920 TS0 looped G732N ASMi-52L 4-3 E1
Lines 5-6 2IO-2 E1-i5 1-30 E1-i4(2:1:1) TS 1-30
TS 1-24 E1-i8(1:1:3) E1-i3 TS 1-24
IO-44 Lines 3-4
E1-i7 Unfram. E1-i5(2:1:2) Unframed
TS 1-30 E1-i9(2:1:1) E1-i5 TS 1-30 Lines 5-6 ASMi-52L 4-4 E1
Service 8 HBT-8 Unframed E1 ASMi-52L 2-4 TS0 Transparent G732N Lines 7-8 Unframed E1-i10(1:1:2) E1-i7 Unfra. Lines 7-8
TS0 Transparent G732N
Service 9 HBT-9 Unframed E1 ASMi-52L 5-1 TS0 Transparent G732N CL-A/1 CL-A/2 TS0 Transparent G732N ASMi-52L 6-1 E1
Lines 1-2 E1-i1 E1-i11(1:2:3) Unframed
ASMi-52L 6-2 E1
E1 ASMi-52L 5-2 Lines 3-4 E1-i3 E1-i12(1:3:1) Unframed Unframed E1-i15(1:2:3) E1-i1 Lines 1-2
Lines 5-6 5IO-5 E1-i5 E1-i13(1:3:2) Unframed Unframed E1-i16(1:3:1) E1-i3
IO-66 Lines 3-4
E1 ASMi-52L 5-3 Lines 7-8 E1-i7 E1-i14(1:3:3) Unframed Unframed E1-i17(1:3:2) E1-i5 Lines 5-6 ASMi-52L 6-3 E1
Unframed E1-i18(1:3:3) E1-i7 Lines 7-8
E1 ASMi-52L 5-4 ASMi-52L 6-4 E1
Figure C-6. End-to-End Serial, Ethernet and TDM Services over SHDSL and
Extended STM-1/OC-3 Link
• Setups A, D, F – 4 hours
• Setup B – 6 hours
• Setups C, E – 8 hours
Test Procedures
Table C-3 details the procedure of the backward compatibility test for startup.
Table C-4 details the backward compatibility test for upgrade procedures.
Note The procedures below describe the upgrade for a GA version. When upgrading a
Beta or an Alpha version, it should be done on a 'clean' setup as follows:
• Delete startup-config and user-config files.
• Perform admin reboot command.
• Perform upgrade.
• Download the previous database.
3 One by one, reset the active CL While rebooting the active CL, the standby CL
modules in all the DUTs to load the becomes active.
new SW version. Minimum disruption of data services and
management.
When the active CL is up again, it is updated
with the new SW version.
4 One by one, reset the standby CL While rebooting the standby CL, the active CL is
modules in all the DUTs to load the already operative with the new SW version.
new SW version. Minimum disruption of data services and
management.
When the standby CL is up again, it is updated
with the new SW version.
Test Procedure
Table C-5 details the procedure of the Quick Stress test.
8 Send the attached Ixia script while The device is up with no exceptions or
the device is initializing at 50 Mbps. interruptions.
Testing APS
The objective of the test is to verify the correct functionality of traffic switchover
between two SDH/SONET ports working in APS mode.
Test Procedure
Table C-6 details the APS test procedure.
5 Revert to the initial configuration. APS is up and functional, TDM traffic is running
error-free.
Test Procedure
Table C-7 details the LAG test procedure.
Test Procedure
Table C-8 details the ERP test procedure.
2 Disconnect and reconnect the East “Ring State” status changes to “Protected”.
and West port on all the ERP nodes Ethernet and pseudowire traffic is running
one by one to initialize traffic through all relevant ports error-free and
switchover. lossless.
CLK Domain in all the DUTs is locked.
4 Reset one of the nodes on the idle “Ring State” status changes to “Protected”.
path of Megaplex A. Ethernet and pseudowire traffic is running
through all relevant ports error-free and
lossless.
Test Procedure
Table C-9 details the Ethernet group protection test procedure (Test #1 in
Setup B). The detailed diagram of the service is shown in the figure below:
1 Verify that the following Ethernet group The service is up, with no errors or
protection is configured correctly: losses.
Site A
# Eth Group Protection
ethernet-group 1
bind logical-mac working cl-a/1
bind logical-mac protection cl-
b/1
wait-to-restore 10
no shutdown
exit
3 Reconnect the CL-A/1 link on Site B. The service reverts to the CL-A/1 link.
No errors are observed.
The status display reports switching
back to the CL-A/1 link.
5 Verify that CL-A module is back to action. The service reverts to the CL-A/1 link.
No errors are observed.
The status display reports switching
back to the CL-A/1 link.
6 On Site B, bind 3 more VT-1.5 to VCG 2 and Rx Trail Failure alarm indication is
perform “commit” observed on the GFP ports on both
Site A and Site B.
The service is switched to the
protection link with maximum loss of
50 msec.
Stable functionality is observed for
5 minutes
7 Add the same 3 x VT-1.5 on Site A and Rx Trail Failure alarm indication
perform “commit”. disappears.
Once wait-to-restore time elapses, the
service returns to the working link with
maximum loss of 50 msec.
Test Procedure
Table C-10 details the VC path protection test procedure. The protection is
configured as follows:
Site B
# VC Path Protection
vc-path 1
name "Group 1"
bind vc-vt protection cl-a/1/1/1/7/4
bind vc-vt working cl-b/1/1/1/7/4
no revertive
wait-to-restore 4
no shutdown
exit
2 On Site B, disconnect the CL-B/1 The service is restored on the protection link.
link. No errors are observed.
Perform “show status” command The status display indicates switching to the
for VC Path protection. protection link.
AIS alarms on the VC/VTs participating in VC
path protection groups are observed on sites C,
D and E.
4 Verify that CL-B/1 is up and The service switches back to the working link
synchronized. on CL-B/1.
Disconnect the SONET segment No errors are observed.
between C-D or D-E. AIS alarm is observed on the VC/VT protection
path.
5 On Site B, reset the CL-B module. The service is restored on the protection link.
Perform “show status” command No errors are observed.
for VC Path protection. The status display indicates switching to the
protection link.
AIS alarms on the VC/VTs participating in VC
path protection groups are observed on sites C,
D and E.
Test Procedure
Two tables below detail two cases of TDM group protection test procedures:
• Table C-11 – regular TDM group protection test (Setup E, black line)
• Table C-12 – traffic duplication test (Setup C, DUT B and DUT C).
2 On Site B, disconnect the CL-B/1 link. The service is restored on the protection
Perform “show status” command for link. No errors are observed.
TDM group protection. The status display indicates switching to
the protection link.
AIS alarms on the VC/VTs participating in
VC path protection groups are observed
on sites C, D and E.
3 On Site B, reconnect the CL-B/1 link. The service switches back to the working
link on CL-B/1.
No errors are observed.
AIS alarms are cleared.
4 On Site B, reset the CL-B module. The service is restored on the protection
Perform “show status” command for link. No errors are observed.
TDM group protection. The status display indicates switching to
the protection link.
AIS alarms on the VC/VTs participating in
VC path protection groups are observed
on sites C, D and E.
5 On Site B, verify that CL-B is back into The service switches back to the working
action. link on CL-B/1.
No errors are observed.
AIS alarms are cleared.
Table C-12. TDM Group Protection (Traffic Duplication) Test Procedure – Setup C
2 Disconnect SDH CL-A/2 (protection Data is transferred via DS1 link (protection
SDH link). PW link)/G.8032 ring.
5 Reconnect SDH CL-A/2 (protection SDH Data is transferred via SDH CL-A/2
link). (protection SDH link).
6 Reconnect CL-A/1 (working SDH link). Data is transferred via SDH CL-A/2
(protection SDH link) since revertive mode is
not supported.
7 Disconnect CL-A/2 (protection SDH Data is transferred via CL-A/1 (working SDH
link). link).
Test Procedure
Table C-13 details the I/O group protection test procedure. All the action in the
table are performed using CLI.
The protection is configured as follows:
configure slot 2 card-type e1-t1 m16t1
configure slot 1 card-type e1-t1 m16t1
exit all
config protection
io-group 1
bind working 2
bind protection 1
no shutdown
4 Reset the protection I/O module. The traffic reverts to the working I/O module.
Data transfer and status are ok.
6 Reset the working I/O module. No data is transferred till the working module is
up again (switch-to-protection action is not
available since the last ‘force-switch-to-
working’ command locked the switchover).
9 Reset the protection I/O module. No data is transferred till the working module is
up again (switch-to-protection action is not
available since the last ‘force-switch-to-
protection’ command locked the switchover).
11 Remove and reinsert the protection Data and status are switched to the working
module. module.
12 Remove and reinsert the working Data and status are switched to the protection
module. module.
Test Procedure
Setup C
Table C-14 details the clock selection test procedure on Setup C. The clock
selection module includes eight SSM-based clock sources configured on Site A
with Sync-E functionality:
source 1 rx-port sdh-sonet cl-a/1
priority 1
quality-level ssm-based
wait-to-restore 10
exit
source 2 rx-port sdh-sonet cl-a/2
priority 1
quality-level ssm-based
wait-to-restore 10
exit
source 3 rx-port sdh-sonet cl-b/1
priority 1
quality-level ssm-based
wait-to-restore 10
exit
source 4 rx-port sdh-sonet cl-b/2
priority 1
quality-level ssm-based
wait-to-restore 10
exit
source 5 rx-port ethernet cl-a/1
priority 1
quality-level ssm-based
wait-to-restore 10
exit
source 6 rx-port ethernet cl-a/2
priority 1
quality-level ssm-based
wait-to-restore 10
exit
source 7 rx-port ethernet cl-b/1
priority 1
quality-level ssm-based
wait-to-restore 10
exit
source 8 rx-port ethernet cl-b/2
priority 1
quality-level ssm-based
wait-to-restore 10
exit
All clock sources of Site B and Site E have the same priority. Site A selects the
source clock (1..8) according to the highest quality among all clock sources
received on Site B and Site E.
Site A: Reset the CL-B module via The domain of Site A is locked on source#6.
RADview. Services on Site A function error-free and
lossless.
Verify that the CL-B module is up. The domain of Site A is locked on source#5
once wait-to-restore time elapses.
Using RADview, reset the active CL The domain of Site A is locked on source#5.
on Site A. Services on Site A function error-free and
lossless.
The CL-A module is up. The domain of Site A is still locked on source#5
(no change).
Site A: Reboot the Megaplex device The domain of site A is locked on source#5.
(both CL-A and CL-B cards)and wait Services on Site A function error-free and
till it is up. lossless.
Setup E
Table C-15 details the clock selection test procedure on Setup E. The test is
shown in detail in the figure below. The clock is provided by the piggy on the
MP-4100 ver 2.x.
Piggy Station
T1 1 Source#1
cl-a/1
Station
T1 2 Source#2
oscillator cl-b/1
T1 3 M16T1 Source#3
T1 4 M8T1 Source#4
Test Purpose
Trigger-initiated clock switching • Verify error-free transition between multiple clock sources
• Verify the restore time according to the configured WTR
• Verify error-free transition from hold-over state to different
clock sources
Forcing clock source selection Force selection of a particular clock source when the sources have
different quality levels
Deleting active clock source Check switching to other clock sources according to their priority
and quality
1 Verify that clock mode is set to All the services are up and working error-free.
“auto” and Clock Source #1 with
the highest priority is the active
one.
9 Using CLI or RADview, switch from Megaplex switches from hold-over state to the
hold-over state to all the clock connected source (T1 ports in the “Up” state).
sources from 1 to 4, one by one: No errors are observed.
Hold-over to 1
Hold-over to 2
Hold-over to 3
Hold-over to 4.
5 Using RADview, change the priority SRC #2 has now the highest priority.
of SRC #1 to 2 and of SRC #2 to 1. No errors are observed.
2 Using RADview, delete the active Megaplex switches to CLK SRC #2.
source, SRC #1. No errors are observed.
4 Using RADview, delete the active Megaplex switches to CLK SRC #4 (which has
source, SRC #2. the same priority as SRC #3 and better quality)
No errors are observed.
Test Duration
Setup D, 4 hours
Test Procedure
The table below details the test procedure.
1 Verify that all MEPs in the All Up and Down MEPs in the application are up.
application are up.
2 Send traffic from Ixia generator #6 There is correlation between frame counts for
on all the VLANs and on P-bits of all the far- and near-end counters on the
the MEPs. The traffic must be sent Megaplex and ETX devices.
on each of the VLANs 1-8 with
P-bits 0-7 for each VLAN.
Check the PM services (delay
measurements, delay variation
measurements, availablity etc.)
3 Run the OAM link trace test The link trace test passes successfully.
between the MEPs.
4 Run the OAM loopback between the The loopback test passes successfully.
MEPs
7 Run the OAM link trace test The link trace test passes successfully.
between the MEPs.
8 Run the OAM loopback between the The loopback test passes successfully.
MEPs
1/1 1/2 1/3 1/4 2/1 2/3 2/5 2/7 3/1/1 3/3/1 4/1/1 4/3/1 10/1 10/2 10/3 10/4
VLAN 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315
Shaper values
5M 4M 3M 2M 1M 1.5M 1M 500K 8M 20M 50M 5M 2M 1.5M 1M 500K
Shaper Bi-directional
Test Policer values
Bi-directional 60M 60M 60M 60M 60M 60M 60M 60M 60M 60M 60M 60M 60M 60M 60M 60M
1/1 1/2 1/3 1/4 2/1 2/3 2/5 2/7 3/1/1 3/3/1 4/1/1 4/3/1 10/1 10/2 10/3 10/4
9 10 11
8 12
7 13
6 14
Strict Priority
5 15
queue-map-profile P_bit classification p-bit
map 0 to-queue 7 4 Bridge 16
map 1 to-queue 6
map 2 to-queue 5 3
17
map 3 to-queue 4 VLAN 200
map 4 to-queue 3 2
map 5 to-queue 2
map 6 to-queue 1
map 7 to-queue 0
LAG
1/1 1/2 1/3 1/4 2/1 2/3 2/5 2/7 3/1/1 3/3/1 4/1/1 4/3/1 10/1 10/2 10/3 10/4
9 10 11
8 12
7 13
6 14
Strict Priority
5 15
queue-map-profile P_bit classification p-bit
map 0 to-queue 7 4 Bridge 16
map 1 to-queue 6
map 2 to-queue 5 3
17
map 3 to-queue 4 VLAN 100
map 4 to-queue 3 2
map 5 to-queue 2
map 6 to-queue 1
map 7 to-queue 0 ROOT
1
LAG
Ethernet Forwarding
Ethernet Forwarding is tested using Unicast, Multicast, Broadcast and Unknown
Unicast packets. Table C-17 lists the configuration files used for IXIA ports and
the Ixia port on which they are loaded.
1 SA 00-00-00-00-00-01
3 SA 00-00-00-00-00-03
4 SA 00-00-00-00-00-04
5 SA 00-00-00-00-00-05
For each mode (E-Line, E-Tree, E-LAN) and each type of packets, one of 7
streams is used. Each stream consists of a combination of R, L1, L2 and L3 IXIA
configuration files (see above) as shown in Table C-18.
E-TREE (100) 1st stream: R, L1, L2, 2nd stream: R, L1, L2, 2nd stream: R, L1, L2, 2nd stream: R, L1,
L3 L3 L3 L2, L3
E-LAN (200) 3rd stream: R, L1, L2, 4th stream: R, L1, L2, 4th stream: R, L1, L2, 4th stream: R, L1,
L3 L3 L3 L2, L3
Table C-19. Ixia Configuration Files for Testing Policing and Shaping
1 SA 00-00-00-00-00-01
3 SA 00-00-00-00-00-03
4 SA 00-00-00-00-00-04
5 SA 00-00-00-00-00-05
For each mode (E-Line, E-Tree, E-LAN) and each of 4 Ixia configuration files,
select streams indicated in Table C-20.
Table C-20. Ixia Ports Configuration for Testing of Policing and Shaping
Scheduling
Scheduling is tested on Unicast packets only. Table C-21 lists the configuration
files used for IXIA ports and the Ixia port on which they are loaded.
Note For E-line, the Scheduling test is performed only on one flow: VLAN 300 – LAG1 –
ASMi-54L PCS 1/1 (see Figure C-9).
1 SA 00-00-00-00-00-01
3 SA 00-00-00-00-00-03
1 SA 00-00-00-00-00-01
1 SA 00-00-00-00-00-01
3 SA 00-00-00-00-00-03
4 SA 00-00-00-00-00-04
5 SA 00-00-00-00-00-05
For each mode (E-Line, E-Tree, E-LAN) and each of Ixia configuration files select
streams as indicated in Table C-22.
Test Procedure
Table C-10 details the test procedure.
1 Generate traffic according to E-Line, E-Tree and E-LAN services are up.
Table C-17 and Table C-18 to test No loss is detected.
E-LINE, E-LAN and E-TREE services
The bridge in E-Tree and E-LAN services is
with Unicast, Broadcast, Multicast
functioning properly:
and Unknown Unicast packets.
E-Tree:
Rx R = Tx L1 + Tx L2 + Tx L3;
Rx L1=Tx R,
Rx L2=Tx R,
Rx L3=Tx R,
E-LAN:
Rx R = Tx L1 + Tx L2 + Tx L3;
Rx L1=Tx R + Tx L2 + Tx L3;
Rx L2=Tx R + Tx L1 + Tx L3;
Rx L3=Tx R + Tx L1 + TxL2.
Current statistics are functional in both CLI and
RADview.
E-Line Configuration
1 On any flow of E-line configuration The service is up with the new ingress/egress
(101A to 132A), change its ingress port.
or egress port. No loss is observed.
3 Using RADview, recreate the flow The service is up, with no losses.
deleted in the previous step.
4 Using CLI, perform admin reboot The service is up, with no losses.
command.
Policing
1 Paste the following script into CLI, No sanity errors are displayed.
followed by “commit” and “save”.
2 Generate traffic with the rate above Ixia Rx rate is equal to the rate of the
the configured policer values in configured policer.
both directions according to The configuration is shown in Figure C-9.
Table C-19 and Table C-20, E-LINE
definitions.
3 Using RADview, configure some of Ixia Rx rate is equal to the rate of the
the policer values to 80% of the configured policer.
previous values.
Perform Update.
Generate traffic with the rate above
the newly configured policer values
in both directions
4 Using CLI, perform admin reboot Ixia Rx rate is equal to the rate of the
command. configured policer.
Shaping
1 Paste the following script into CLI, No sanity errors are displayed.
followed by “commit” and “save”.
2 Generate traffic with the rate above Ixia Rx rate is equal to the rate of the
the configured shaper values in configured shaper, as defined in Figure C-9.
both directions according to
Table C-19 and Table C-20, E-Line
definitions.
3 Using RADview, configure some of Ixia Rx rate is equal to the rate of the
the shaper values to 80% of the configured shaper.
previous values.
Perform Update.
Generate traffic with the rate above
the newly configured shaper values
in both directions
4 Using CLI, perform admin reboot Ixia Rx rate is equal to the rate of the
command. configured shaper.
Scheduling
2 Gradually increase the stream bit The high priority bit is forwarded lossless with
rate until you notice data loss. egress rate equal to the configured shaper CIR.
Continue to increase the bit rate
until only the first priority bit is
forwarded and only the first
internal queue performs
forwarding.
3 Stop transmitting the high priority The next high priority bit passes lossless.
bit and continue to transmit lower
priority bit.
4 Using RADview, change the queue The new high priority bit passes lossless.
map profile that is used by the
flow.
Perform Update.
5 Using CLI, perform admin reboot The new high priority bit passes lossless.
command.
E-Tree
Policing
Paste the following script into CLI, No sanity errors are displayed.
followed by “commit” and “save”.
Generate traffic with the rate above Ixia Rx rate is equal to the rate of the
the configured policer values in configured policer, as defined is shown in
both directions according to Figure C-11.
Table C-19 and Table C-20, E-TREE
definitions.
Using RADview, configure some of Ixia Rx rate is equal to the rate of the
the policer values to 80% of the configured policer.
previous values.
Perform Update.
Generate traffic with the rate above
the newly configured policer values
in both directions
Using CLI, perform admin reboot Ixia Rx rate is equal to the rate of the
command. configured policer.
Shaping
Paste the following script into CLI, No sanity errors are displayed.
followed by “commit” and “save”.
Generate traffic with the rate above Ixia Rx rate is equal to the rate of the
the configured shaper values in configured shaper, as defined in Figure C-10.
both directions according to
Table C-19 and Table C-20, E-TREE
definitions.
Using RADview, configure some of Ixia Rx rate is equal to the rate of the
the shaper values to 80% of the configured shaper.
previous values.
Perform Update.
Generate traffic with the rate above
the newly configured shaper values
in both directions
Using CLI, perform admin reboot Ixia Rx rate is equal to the rate of the
command. configured shaper.
Scheduling
Stop transmitting high priority bits The next high priority bit passes lossless.
and continue to transmit lower
priority bits.
Using RADview, change the queue The new high priority bit passes lossless.
map profile that is used by the
flow.
Perform Update.
Using CLI, perform admin reboot The new high priority bit passes lossless.
command.
E-LAN
Add the same Bridge Port and Data is restored. No loss is observed.
associated flow from RADview
Policing
Paste the following script into CLI, No sanity errors are displayed.
followed by “commit” and “save”.
Generate traffic with the rate above Ixia Rx rate is equal to the rate of the
the configured policer values in configured policer, as defined in Figure C-10.
both directions according to
Table C-19 and Table C-20, E-LAN
definitions.
Using RADview, configure some of Ixia Rx rate is equal to the rate of the
the policer values to 80% of the configured policer.
previous values.
Perform Update.
Generate traffic with the rate above
the newly configured policer values
in both directions
Using CLI, perform admin reboot Ixia Rx rate is equal to the rate of the
command. configured policer.
Shaping
Paste the following script into CLI, No sanity errors are displayed.
followed by “commit” and “save”.
Generate traffic with the rate above Ixia Rx rate is equal to the rate of the
the configured shaper values in configured shaper, as defined in Figure C-10.
both directions according to
Table C-19 and Table C-20, E-LAN
definitions.
Using RADview, configure some of Ixia Rx rate is equal to the rate of the
the shaper values to 80% of the configured shaper.
previous values.
Perform Update.
Generate traffic with the rate above
the newly configured shaper values
in both directions
Using CLI, perform admin reboot Ixia Rx rate is equal to the rate of the
command. configured shaper.
Scheduling
Stop transmitting high priority bits The next high priority bit passes lossless.
and continue to transmit lower
priority bits.
Using RADview, change the queue The new high priority bit passes lossless.
map profile that is used by the
flow.
Perform Update.
Using CLI, perform admin reboot The new high priority bit passes lossless.
command.
The objective of the test is to verify the correct functionality of the Ethernet
BERT.
Setup D, 2 hours
Test Procedure
65B
1 Send user packets from Ethernet Management to the CPE is not affected.
generator ports to the CL Bridge User traffic on other services is not affected.
ports participating in other services.
User traffic on the BERT path stops (since
Activate a loop on a selected PCS Ethernet Bert is intrusive).
port of one of ASMi-54L devices.
BERT status is Success.
One by one, activate four Ethernet
The report gives indication on the rate in which
BERT tests using parameter
the test was 100% success.
combinations from the table below.
For example, a script for the first Note: Verify that the throughput results make sense.
test may be as follows:
exit all
config test rfc2544
profile-name 1
frame-size 64
exit
test 1
test-profile 1
max-rate 3000000
type frame-loss
associated-flow 101a
Operation Platform Flow Management SHDSL rate Bert Frame Size Bert Rate
Mode
E-line CLI 101A Managed Min. Value Min. Value Equal to SHDSL
Rate
E-LAN RADview 22A Non-Managed Min. Value Min. Value Higher than
SHDSL Rate
Test Procedure
Two tables below detail the TDM (E1) services test procedure.
3 Perform the loopbacks shown in the All the loopbacks are functional.
figure below (using either RADview
or CLI).
Megaplex-4
ASMi-54C/N Repeater
Local-on-Remote Remote-on-Remote
SHDSL v35
e1 e1-i
Local-on-Remote Remote-on-Remote
4 Perform the loopbacks shown in the All the loopbacks are functional.
figure above from the CL-B module
(using either RADview or CLI).
Test Procedure
Two tables below detail the high speed serial services test procedure.
3 Activate the local loopback on the The error test signal is returned to the local
selected V.35 port for the duration HBT.
of 5 min. Data continues to be transferred.
Disconnect the HBT on the remote The test expires after 5 min and bidirectional
unit. data transfer is restored.
Fronm the corresponding HBT,
inject an error to the local (central)
unit.
4 Activate the remote loopback on The error test signal is returned to the remote
the selected V.35 port for the HBT.
duration of 5 min. Data continues to be transferred.
Disconnect the HBT on the The test expires after 5 min and bidirectional
local/central unit. data transfer is restored.
From the corresponding HBT, inject
an error to the remote (standalone)
unit.
4 Activate the local loopback on the The error test signal is returned to the local
selected V.35 port for the duration HBT.
of 5 min. Data continues to be transferred.
Disconnect the HBT on the remote The test expires after 5 min and bidirectional
unit. data transfer is restored.
From the corresponding HBT, inject
an error to the local (central) unit.
5 Activate the remote loopback on The error test signal is returned to the remote
the selected V.35 port for the HBT.
duration of 5 min. Data continues to be transferred.
Disconnect the HBT on the The test expires after 5 min and bidirectional
local/central unit. data transfer is restored.
From the corresponding HBT, inject
an error to the remote (standalone)
unit.
Test Procedure
The table below details the low speed serial services test procedure.
The following test is performed on Low speed service that starts with LBT-5 in
MP-4100 A and ends with a loop on HS-RN CH 10/1 in MP-2100 D.
3 Replace the loop on MP-2100 D The error test signal is returned to the local
HS-RN CH 10/1 with an LBT only for LBT.
the purpose of this test. Data continues to be transferred.
Activate the local loopback on HS- The test expires after 5 min and bidirectional
RN CH 1/1 for the duration of data transfer is restored.
5 min.
Disconnect the LBT on MP-2100 D
HS-RN CH 10/1.
From the LBT, inject an error to the
local (central) unit.
4 Activate the remote loopback on The error test signal is returned to the remote
the selected HS-RN port for the LBT (MP-2100 D HS-RN CH 10/1 LBT).
duration of 5 min. Data continues to be transferred.
Disconnect the LBT from The test expires after 5 min. and bidirectional
MP-4100 A HS-RN CH 1/1. data transfer is restored.
From the LBT, inject an error on
MP-2100 D HS-RN CH 10/1.
LBT #2 4/3 3/1 3/2 TDM Group #1 Bypass TDM Group #1 5/1 3/1 3/2
4.8k, 1/1/2, 1/1/3, 1/1/4
async.
T1- I CL-B/1 Link B /1 Link B /1 Link B/2 Link B /1 T1-I CL-A/42
Test #2 1/1/2, 1/1/3, 1/1/4 3/1/1
Test Procedure
The table below detail the voice service test procedure. The test is performed on
the VC-6A/FXS module.
1 Perform Read from RADview. Voice and signaling are not transferred.
Using CLI, delete Test 4 service and
send the “commit” command.
2 Perform Update from RADview. Voice and signaling are transferred in bi-
directional mode, error-free.
No active alarms are displayed.
3 Site A: Activate the local loopback The local voice channel (Site A) receives its own
on the VC-6A/FXS voice channel as signal, e.g., a strong side tone is heard in the
shown in the Figure below (using earpiece if the channel is connected to a
either RADview or CLI). telephone set.
Site A: Activate the remote The remote voice channel (Site C) receives its
loopback on the VC-6A/FXS voice own signal, e.g., a strong side tone is heard in
channel as shown in the Figure the earpiece if the channel is connected to a
below (using either RADview or CLI). telephone set.
4 Site A: Perform ‘local tone-inject’ The analog signal 1 kHz) is supplied to Local
loopback on the VC-6A/FXS voice Site A.
channel as shown in the Figure
below (using either RADview or CLI).
6 Site A: Perform ‘remote tone-inject’ The analog signal (1 kHz) is supplied to remote
loopback on the VC-6A/FXS voice Site C.
channel as shown in the Figure
below (using either RADview or CLI).
Test Procedure
In this test PWs are configured to all possible PW types (TDMoIP, CES, SATOP) and
with different flow classifications: unclassified, tagged with VLAN and tagged with
double VLAN (vlan + inner-vlan).
The PW Traffic is getting priority over Ethernet Traffic. Order of priority: Voice,
Serial, E1, Ethernet. The table below details the test procedure.
Table C-32. PW over ERP Test Procedure
# Action Expected Result Result
Configuration
2 Set a low (50M) shaper value on Order of traffic priority is as follows: voice,
the ERP working link to create serial, E1, Ethernet.
congestion.
Diagnostics
Test Procedure
The table below details the ACL test procedure.
1 Verify the Telnet, SSH and SNMP Telnet, SSH, SNMP connectivity is ok.
connectivity.
2 Add the following script: Telnet, SSH and SNMP connectivity is lost.
4 Reset the working CL module. Telnet, SSH and SNMP resume functioning
when the standby CL becomes active.
5 Perform Read from RADview. Telnet and SSH connectivities are lost, SNMP
In the Telnet and SSH sequences, connectivity is ok.
change the IP addresses with IP
addresses of any other station(s).
Perform Update from RADview.
Testing RADview
The objective of the test is to verify the correct functionality of RADview Jobs
application.
Test Procedure
The table below details the RADview Jobs application testing procedure.
2 Verify that the following jobs are All RADview Jobs lists are working properly.
working properly:
• Download configuration
• Download software
• Execute script
• Collect statistics.
Test Procedure
Table C-10 details the SNMPv3 test procedure.
1 Verify the Telnet, SSH and SNMP Telnet, SSH, SNMP connectivity is ok.
connectivity.
Test Procedure
Table C-10 details the Teleprotection test procedure.
2 Generate 300 commands from the tester, All the 300 commands are transmitted
each with the following signal via TP-OUT interface.
characteristics: The delay does not exceed 4msec.
Setup the test as in Figure C-16. All the 300 commands are transmitted
Generate 300 commands from the tester via TP-OUT interface.
for each path, each with the following The delay does not exceed 4msec.
signal characteristics.
Protection
False Commands
On MP-4100 #1, pull out and re-insert the No false command is observed on TP-
TP module. OUT ports.
On MP-4100 #1, power down and up one No false command is observed on TP-
of the power supply units. OUT ports.
Test Procedure
SDH A/1
Flow
LCAS
IXIA GbE A/1 VCG A/1
& VCG A/2
SDH A/2
Fibers
SDH B/1
LCAS
Flow
IXIA GbE B/1 VCG B/1
& VCG B/2
SDH B/2
Using CLI, perform admin reboot The system recovers after reboot.
command.
Change the IXIA port rate to The data traffic runs at the rate of 290 Mbps.
1000 Mbps.
Perform a combination of
disconnections and HW/SW The system recovers after each
resets. disconnection/reset.
RADview tests
Make a few disconnections Verify that the system recovers after each
disconnection
Run data traffic for 5 minutes Verify that the traffic is error-free
SDH A/1
Flow
LCAS
IXIA GbE A/1 VCG A/1 Fiber
& VCG A/2
SDH A/2
1 Configure a flow with one VC-12 The data traffic is running at 2 Mbps.
between GbE port A/1 and SDH port
A/1 via VCG A/1 according to the
attached script
2 Add another VC-12 to the existing The 2 Mbps data traffic keeps running.
VCG as follows:
conf port vcg cl-a/1 bind
vc-vt cl-a/1/1/1/1/2
commit
3 Increase the generator rate to The data traffic is running at 4 Mbps.
4 Mbps
4 Add three more VC-12 to the The 4 Mbps data traffic keeps running.
existing VCG as follows:
conf port vcg cl-a/1 bind
vc-vt cl-a/1/1/1/1/3
conf port vcg cl-a/1 bind
vc-vt cl-a/1/1/2/1/1
conf port vcg cl-a/1 bind
vc-vt cl-a/1/1/2/1/2
commit
6 Remove the 4 previously added The data traffic rate decreases to 2 Mbps.
VC-12 ports:
conf port vcg cl-a/1 no
bind vc-vt cl-a/1/1/1/1/2
conf port vcg cl-a/1 no
bind vc-vt cl-a/1/1/1/1/3
conf port vcg cl-a/1 no
bind vc-vt cl-a/1/1/2/1/1
conf port vcg cl-a/1 no
bind vc-vt cl-a/1/1/2/1/2
commit
7 Change the binding from vc-vt to The data traffic rate increases to 49 Mbps
vc3 as follows: (1 x VC3).
conf port vcg cl-a/1 no
bind vc-vt cl-a/1/1/1/1/1
conf port vcg cl-a/1 bind
vc3-sts1 cl-a/1/1/1
commit
8 Change the binding from vc3 to vc4 The data traffic rate increases to 150.3 Mbps
as follows: (1 x VC4).
conf port vcg cl-a/1 no
bind vc3-sts1 cl-a/1/1/1
conf port vcg cl-a/1 bind
vc4-sts3c cl-a/1/1
commit
9 Add another vc4 to vcg: The data traffic rate increases to 300.6 Mbps
conf port vcg cl-a/1 bind (2 x VC4).
vc4-sts3c cl-a/1/2
commit
10 Add two more vc4 ports to vcg: The data traffic rate increases to 601.2 Mbps
conf port vcg cl-a/1 bind (4 x VC4)
vc4-sts3c cl-a/1/3
conf port vcg cl-a/1 bind
vc4-sts3c cl-a/1/4
commit
Note: define the shaper profile as
in the attached script.
11 Remove 3 of the 4 previously added The data traffic rate decreases to 150.3 Mbps
VC-12 ports: (1 x VC4)
conf port vcg cl-a/1 no
bind vc4-sts3c cl-a/1/1
conf port vcg cl-a/1 no
bind vc4-sts3c cl-a/1/2
conf port vcg cl-a/1 no
bind vc4-sts3c cl-a/1/4
commit
12 Change the binding from vc4 to vc3 The data traffic rate decreases to 49 Mbps
as follows: (1 x VC3)
conf port vcg cl-a/1 no
bind vc4-sts3c cl-a/1/3
conf port vcg cl-a/1 bind
vc3-sts1 cl-a/1/4/3
commit
15 Reconfigure 2 Mbps rate, using the The data traffic is running at 2 Mbps
attached script
18 Save the configuration and reboot Once the CL module is on, the data traffic is
the device. running at 2 Mbps.
20 Configure 32 vcg ports, each with a The data traffic is running at 2 Mbps for each
single vc12 bound to it. of the 32 vcg port.
Configure flows for each vcg port
with different vlans.
23 While data traffic is running, Once CL-A is up, the data traffic recovers.
perform “configure slot cl-a reset”
command.
24 While CL-B is active, perform The data traffic recovers after switching
“configure slot cl-b reset” between CL-A and CL-B
command.
26 Perform admin reboot command. Once CL-A is up, the data traffic recovers.
29 Using RADview, perform Read and The date traffic continues error-free.
Update
International Headquarters
24 Raoul Wallenberg Street
Tel Aviv 69719, Israel
Tel. 972-3-6458181
Fax 972-3-6498250, 6474436
E-mail market@rad.com
www.rad.com